en_tn/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv

1	Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNote
2	ACT	front	intro	mw28			0		Introduction to Acts Part 1: General Introduction Outline of the book of Acts The apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem (1:1–6:7) The church expands into Judea and Samaria (6:8–9:31) The church expands to include Gentiles (9:32–12:24) Paul goes to Asia Minor as an apostle to the Gentiles (12:25–16:5) The church expands into the middle Mediterranean area (16:6–19:20) Paul reaches Rome, but as a prisoner and after several trials (19:21–28:31) Luke makes transitional statements at 6:7, 9:31, 12:24, 16:5, and 19:20 to mark the movement from each major part of the book to the next part. What is the book of Acts about? The book of Acts tells the story of the early church. It relates how more and more people, from different backgrounds and in different parts of the Roman Empire, became believers in Jesus. It shows the power of the Holy Spirit helping the early Christians. The events in this book begin with the return of Jesus to heaven and they end about 30 years later. How should the title of this book be translated? Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Acts of the Apostles.” Or translators may choose a different title, for example, “The Acts of the Holy Spirit through the Apostles.” Who wrote the book of Acts? The author of this book does not give his own name. However, the book is dedicated to Theophilus, the same person to whom Luke dedicated his story of the life of Jesus, the Gospel of Luke. Also, in parts of this book, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person who traveled with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that Luke was the author of the book of Acts as well as the Gospel of Luke. Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. He personally witnessed many of the events that he describes in the book of Acts. Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts What is the church? The church is the community of people who believe in Jesus as their Lord and Savior. The church includes both Jewish and Gentile believers. The book of Acts shows God helping the church. It shows God doing signs and wonders to confirm the church’s testimony to Jesus, leading many people to have faith in Jesus, guiding the church about where and how to share the good news, and enabling believers to resolve conflicts and endure persecution. The kingdom of God The “kingdom of God” is a major concept in the book of Acts, as it is in the Gospel of Luke. This concept is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) Part 3: Important Translation Issues Possible translation difficulties in the book of Acts “to the same” The phrase “to the same” occurs five times in this book (1:15, 2:1, 2:44, 2:47, 4:26). It is not entirely clear what this phrase means. In the first three instances it could mean “in the same place,” but it could also mean “in one accord,” that is, “in full agreement.” In 2:47 it seems to mean “to their group.” Paul uses the same phrase in 1 Corinthians 11:20 and 14:23, where it could mean “in the same place” or it could have the sense of full agreement and mean something like “in Christian fellowship.” That sense would fit Acts 2:47, where the phrase could be translated “to their Christian fellowship.” In 4:26 it could mean “to the same place,” but it could also mean “by agreement.” Notes will discuss the different possibilities in each case where the phrase could mean more than one thing. “in/to/into the temple” Luke uses this phrase many times in this book, but it does not refer to the temple building itself. Only priests were allowed to enter that building, so the phrase refers to the courtyard or area around the temple. The phrase “in the porch that is called Solomon’s” in 3:11 makes it clear that Peter and John and the crowd that gathered on the occasion that chapter describes were not inside the temple building. Notes will address this phrase to explain its meaning each time it occurs in the book. What are the major issues in the text of the book of Acts? The following are the most significant textual issues in Acts. Notes will address them where they occur in the book. First, there are some verses that are found in traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. Some modern versions put these verses in square brackets [ ]. The ULT and UST also put them in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including these verses if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that these verses may not be original. You could put them in brackets, for example, or in footnotes. These verses are: Acts 8:37, “Philip said, ‘If you believe with all your heart, you may be baptized.’ The Ethiopian answered, ‘I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God.’” Acts 15:34, “But it seemed good to Silas to remain there.” Acts 24:6-8, “And we wanted to judge him according to our law. But Lysias, the officer, came and forcibly took him out of our hands, sending him to you.” Acts 28:29, “When he had said these things, the Jews departed, having a great dispute among themselves.” Second, in some verses, it is uncertain what the original text said. The ULT uses the first readings listed below, but it includes the second readings in footnotes. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider following the same reading that it does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the same reading that ULT does. These verses are: Acts 3:22, “the Lord our God.” Some versions read “the Lord your God,” and other versions read “the Lord God.” Acts 7:46, “a dwelling for the house of Jacob.” Some versions read “for the God of Jacob.” Acts 10:19, “three men. Some versions read “two men” or “some men.” Acts 10:30, ““Four days ago, at this hour, I was praying at the ninth {hour} in my house.” Some versions read, “From the fourth day until this hour, I was fasting, and at the ninth hour I was praying in my house.” Acts 12:25, “They returned from Jerusalem.” Some versions read, “They returned to Jerusalem” (or “to there”). Acts 13:18, “he put up with them.” Some versions read, “he cared for them.” Acts 15:17-18, “This is what the Lord says, who has done these things that have been known from ancient times.” Some older versions read, “This is what the Lord says, to whom are known all his deeds from ancient times.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
3	ACT	1	intro	vyg9			0		Acts 1 General Notes Structure and formatting The UST has set the words “Dear Theophilus” apart from the other words. This is because English speakers often start letters this way. You may want to start this book in the way that people start letters in your culture. Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the two quotations from the book of Psalms in 1:20. Special concepts in this chapter The Ascension This chapter records an event that is commonly known as the “Ascension.” That word describes how Jesus returned to heaven after he became alive again. In the future he will come back to earth again, and his return to earth is known as his “Second Coming.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]]) Baptism Luke uses the word “baptize” with two different meanings in 1:5. In the first instance, it refers literally to the water baptism of John. In the second instance, it refers figuratively to people being filled with the Holy Spirit. Luke uses the term “filled” to mean this same thing in 2:4. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]]) “He spoke things concerning the kingdom of God” Some scholars believe that when Jesus spoke “things concerning the kingdom of God,” as Luke describes in 1:3, he explained to the disciples why the kingdom of God had not come while he was on earth the first time. Other scholars believe that the kingdom of God did begin while Jesus was on earth and that Jesus explained that it had come in a form different from the one the disciples had expected. Since Christians hold different views about the kingdom of God coming, translators should be careful to avoid letting how they understand that issue affect how they translate this verse. Possible translation difficulties in this chapter Long sentence As was common in compositions of this time, for stylistic purposes Luke begins this book with a very long sentence. It goes from the beginning of 1:1 to the end of 1:3. ULT represents all of this as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does. The details of the death of Judas There are some differences in detail between the way Luke describes the death of Judas in the book of Acts and the way Matthew describes it in his gospel. Luke says that Judas used the money he got for betraying Jesus to buy a field; Matthew says that Judas returned the money to the Jewish leaders and that they bought the field with it. Luke says that Judas killed himself by falling onto the field from a height; Matthew says that Judas hanged himself. Luke says that the field was named the “Field of Blood” because Judas died a bloody death there; Matthew says the field was given that name because it was purchased with “blood money,” that is, money paid to ensure someone’s death. It is possible to reconcile many of these details. For example, the body of Judas may have fallen and split open on the field if he fell when he tried to hang himself. Luke may say that Judas bought the field because the Jewish leaders would not take back the money that they had paid him, and so in a sense it was still his money when the field was purchased with it. But it would probably be best to avoid trying to reconcile these details within your translation. For example, when Luke says in 1:18 that Judas fell onto the field, instead of saying that he fell when he was trying to hang himself, you can let Luke and Matthew each tell the story the way they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible. The 12 disciples There is one small difference between the list of the 12 disciples that Matthew and Mark provide in their gospels and the list that Luke provides in his gospel and in the book of Acts. All three writers list Simon Peter and his brother Andrew; James and John, the two sons of Zebedee; Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot. But Matthew and Mark say that the twelfth disciple was Thaddeus, while Luke says he was Judas the son of James. However, it is quite likely that Thaddeus was another name by which this other Judas was known. Once again it is not necessary to try to reconcile these details within your translation. Specifically, in 1:13 instead of saying, “Judas the son of James, who was also known as Thaddeus,” you can let each of the biblical writers tell the story in the way that they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible.
4	ACT	1	1	q9ep	figs-explicit	τὸν μὲν πρῶτον λόγον ἐποιησάμην	1	I made the first account	Luke assumes that Theophilus will know that by the first account he means the book that has become known as the Gospel of Luke. Since that book was not known by that title at this time, it would not be accurate to put the title in your translation as a name that Luke would have used to describe the book to Theophilus. However, you could explain this in a footnote and use another expression here. Alternate translation: “I wrote in my first volume” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5	ACT	1	1	a000		ὦ Θεόφιλε	1	O Theophilus	Here Luke is identifying and addressing the man for whom he complied this account of the early church. Since this is like the salutation of a letter, in your translation you may wish to follow your culture’s way of identifying and greeting the addressee of a letter. UST models this by saying “Dear Theophilus” and putting the phrase at the beginning of the sentence.
6	ACT	1	1	ryj5	translate-names	Θεόφιλε	1	Theophilus	Theophilus is the name of a man. It means “friend of God.” It may be his actual name, or it may describe what this man was like. Most translations treat it as his name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
7	ACT	1	1	a001	figs-idiom	περὶ πάντων…ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν	1	all that Jesus began both to do and to teach	Luke is using the word began in an idiomatic way to indicate that Jesus had been doing something else (he had been working as a carpenter), but he then began to do something new when he started his ministry. In many languages it would not be necessary to translate the word began. Alternate translation: “about all that Jesus did and taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8	ACT	1	1	a002	figs-hyperbole	περὶ πάντων…ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν	1	all that Jesus began both to do and to teach	This is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “about some of the most important things that Jesus did and taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
9	ACT	1	2	a003	figs-idiom	ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας	1	until that day when	While this did happen on a specific day, Luke is likely using the word day idiomatically to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “up to the time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10	ACT	1	2	n435	figs-activepassive	ἀνελήμφθη	1	he was taken up	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11	ACT	1	2	a424	figs-explicit	ἀνελήμφθη	1	he was taken up	Luke is referring to Jesus being taken up into heaven. See the discussion of “Ascension” in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “he was taken up into heaven” or “God took him up into heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
12	ACT	1	3	a004		οἷς καὶ παρέστησεν ἑαυτὸν ζῶντα, μετὰ τὸ παθεῖν αὐτὸν, ἐν πολλοῖς τεκμηρίοις	1	to whom also, after he had suffered, he presented himself living with many proofs	As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Jesus also presented himself alive with many proofs to his apostles after he had suffered”
13	ACT	1	3	dup3	figs-explicit	μετὰ τὸ παθεῖν αὐτὸν	1	after he had suffered	This refers to how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. Alternate translation: “after he had suffered and died on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
14	ACT	1	3	a005	figs-explicit	ἐν πολλοῖς τεκμηρίοις	1	with many proofs	The word translated proofs describes items of evidence that are decisive and convincing. Alternate translation: “with many definitive proofs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15	ACT	1	3	yc16	figs-explicit	δι’ ἡμερῶν τεσσεράκοντα, ὀπτανόμενος αὐτοῖς, καὶ λέγων	1	appearing to them for 40 days and speaking	While the antecedent of whom is “the apostles whom he had chosen” in the previous verse, Jesus actually appeared to many other disciples besides his apostles. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “For 40 days he appeared to his apostles and many of his other disciples, and he spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
16	ACT	1	3	a006	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	things concerning the kingdom of God	See the discussion of the concept of the kingdom of God in Part 2 of the General Introduction to Acts. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word kingdom, you could express this with a verb such as “rule,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
17	ACT	1	4	a007	figs-doublenegatives	ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, μὴ χωρίζεσθαι, ἀλλὰ	1	not to depart from Jerusalem, but	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb depart. Alternate translation: “to remain in Jerusalem and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
18	ACT	1	4	vb7g	figs-quotemarks	ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, μὴ χωρίζεσθαι	1	not to depart from Jerusalem	The content of Jesus’ instructions to the apostles on this occasion begins here. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate and punctuate the material from here to the end of the verse as a direct quotation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
19	ACT	1	4	a008	translate-names	Ἱεροσολύμων	1	Jerusalem	Jerusalem is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
20	ACT	1	4	sg4h	figs-metonymy	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πατρὸς	1	the promise of the Father	Jesus is referring figuratively to the Holy Spirit by association with the way God made a promise to send the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit, whom the Father promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21	ACT	1	4	a009	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρὸς	1	of the Father	Father is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “of God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
22	ACT	1	4	tj6r	figs-quotations	ἣν ἠκούσατέ μου	1	which you heard from me	In keeping with his engaging storytelling style, Luke begins a quotation from Jesus here without introducing it with a formula such as “he said.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could include an introductory formula in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He said, ‘You heard about this from me’” or “He said, ‘I told you about this’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
23	ACT	1	4	d3kr	figs-you	ἠκούσατέ	1	you heard	Here, you is plural because Jesus is speaking to the apostles, so use the plural form of “you” in your translation if your language marks that distinction. In 1:6, “you” is singular because Jesus alone is being addressed, so the singular form would be accurate there. In general these notes will not discuss whether you is singular or plural when this should be clear from the context, but they will address ambiguous cases where this may not be clear. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
24	ACT	1	5	uu4k	translate-names	Ἰωάννης	1	John	John is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
25	ACT	1	5	fnq5	figs-explicit	Ἰωάννης	1	John	Jesus is referring to the man who was known as John the Baptist because he baptized people. It may help to identify him if you use that title after his name in your translation. However, because the word “Baptist” is associated with a group of churches in many parts of the world, it may be helpful to your readers to use a different form of the word as a title, as UST does by saying “Baptizer.” Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Baptizer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
26	ACT	1	5	a075	figs-metaphor	ὑμεῖς…ἐν Πνεύματι βαπτισθήσεσθε Ἁγίῳ	1	you will be baptized in the Holy Spirit	After describing earlier in the verse how John baptized people literally, Jesus is using baptism in this second instance as a metaphor. See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will come and empower you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
27	ACT	1	5	dzj1	figs-activepassive	ὑμεῖς…βαπτισθήσεσθε	1	you will be baptized	You may wish to retain the metaphor of baptism in your translation. If you do, and if your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will baptize” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
28	ACT	1	5	a010	figs-litotes	οὐ μετὰ πολλὰς ταύτας ἡμέρας	1	after these not many days	Jesus is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “just a few days from now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
29	ACT	1	6	n9wt	writing-pronouns	οἱ μὲν οὖν συνελθόντες, ἠρώτων αὐτὸν	1	They therefore having assembled, they were asking him	In the first instance, they describes Jesus and the apostles, while in the second instance, they refers to the apostles. (Other disciples could have been present on this occasion, but the instructions that Jesus gives about being “witnesses” in 1:8 apply specifically to the apostles, so it would be good to name them directly.) Alternate translation: “When the apostles were together with Jesus, the apostles were asking him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
30	ACT	1	6	a011	figs-idiom	εἰ ἐν τῷ χρόνῳ τούτῳ, ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ	1	if you are restoring the kingdom to Israel at this time	This is an idiomatic way of asking a question. Alternate translation: “are you restoring the kingdom to Israel at this time” or “will you now restore the kingdom to Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
31	ACT	1	6	f7uj	figs-abstractnouns	εἰ…ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ	1	if you are restoring the kingdom to Israel	f your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word kingdom, you could express the same idea with a noun such as “king.” Alternate translation: “are you going to give Israel its own king again” or “are you going to become the restored king of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
32	ACT	1	6	a252	translate-names	τῷ Ἰσραήλ	1	to Israel	Israel is the name of a nation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
33	ACT	1	7	a012	figs-explicit	οὐχ ὑμῶν ἐστιν γνῶναι	1	It is not for you to know	Jesus is saying implicitly by this response that he is not going to tell the apostles when the thing they are asking about will happen. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “I am not going to tell you when that will happen, because it is not for you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
34	ACT	1	7	y1fu	figs-doublet	χρόνους ἢ καιροὺς	1	the times or the seasons	The words times and seasons could: (1) refer to different kinds of time. Alternate translation: “the general period of time or the specific date” (2) have similar meanings, being used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the exact time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
35	ACT	1	7	a013	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ	1	the Father	Father is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
36	ACT	1	7	a014	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ	1	by his own authority	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word authority, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “control.” Alternate translation: “as the one who controls all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
37	ACT	1	8	ld4k	grammar-connect-logic-result	λήμψεσθε δύναμιν, ἐπελθόντος τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς, καὶ ἔσεσθέ μου μάρτυρες	1	you will receive power when the Holy Spirit has come upon you, and you will be my witnesses	Jesus is using the word translated and to describe a result. Alternate translation: “when the Holy Spirit comes upon you, then you will receive power to be my witnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
38	ACT	1	8	a015	figs-abstractnouns	δύναμιν	1	power	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word power, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “powerful.” Alternate translation: “powerful ability” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
39	ACT	1	8	a016	translate-names	Ἰερουσαλὴμ…Ἰουδαίᾳ…Σαμαρείᾳ	1	Jerusalem … Judea … Samaria	Jerusalem is the name of a city, and Judea and Samaria are the names of regions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
40	ACT	1	8	vb4m	figs-idiom	ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς	1	to the end of the earth	This is a reference to place, not to time. Jesus does not mean “until the world ends.” Alternate translation: “all over the world” or “to the places on the earth that are farthest away from here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
41	ACT	1	9	e1q1	figs-explicit	βλεπόντων αὐτῶν	1	as they were looking	Your language may require you to specify the object of looking. Alternate translation: “as they were looking at him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
42	ACT	1	9	l1cq	figs-activepassive	ἐπήρθη	1	he was raised up	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. (See the discussion of “Ascension” in the General Notes to this chapter.) Alternate translation: “he rose up” or “God raised him up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
43	ACT	1	9	ug58	figs-metonymy	ἀπὸ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν	1	from their eyes	Luke is using the eyes of the apostles figuratively to mean their capacity to see. Alternate translation: “from their sight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
44	ACT	1	10	enu1	figs-explicit	ἀτενίζοντες ἦσαν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν	1	they were looking intently into heaven	Since a cloud was able to block the apostles’ view, it is clear that Luke is using the word translated heaven here in one of its specific senses to mean “sky.” It would be good to make clear that the apostles were not seeing into heaven itself. Alternate translation: “gazing at the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
45	ACT	1	10	a017	figs-metaphor	καὶ ἰδοὺ ἄνδρες δύο	1	and behold, two men	Luke is using the term behold to focus readers’ attention on how suddenly these two men appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then two men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
46	ACT	1	10	a018	grammar-connect-time-sequential	καὶ	1	and	Luke uses the word translated And to indicate that the event of the men appearing happened after the event of Jesus going up. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
47	ACT	1	10	a019	figs-explicit	ἄνδρες δύο	1	two men	These were actually angels. Luke calls them men because they appeared in human form. Alternate translation: “two angels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
48	ACT	1	10	a020		ἐσθήσεσι λευκαῖς	1	white clothes	In this context, the word white likely has the specific sense of “bright” or “shining.” Alternate translation: “bright clothes” or “shining clothes”
49	ACT	1	11	a021	figs-explicit	οἳ…εἶπαν	1	they said	This could mean: (1) one of the angels had spoken on behalf of both of them. Alternate translation: “one of them said” (2) the two angels had each said different parts of the quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
50	ACT	1	11	a022	figs-verbs	οἳ…εἶπαν	1	they said	If you retain the word they in your translation and if your language uses dual forms for verbs, it would be accurate to use the dual form here, since two men are speaking. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
51	ACT	1	11	gpg3	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Γαλιλαῖοι	1	Men, Galileans	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You Galileans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
52	ACT	1	11	a023	translate-names	ἄνδρες, Γαλιλαῖοι	1	Men, Galileans	Galileans are people who are from the region of Galilee. Alternate translation: “You men from Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
53	ACT	1	11	a024	figs-rquestion	τί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν?	1	why do you stand looking into heaven?	The angels are not looking for information. They are using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate their words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “there is no reason for you to stand looking into heaven!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
54	ACT	1	11	a025	figs-idiom	τί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες	1	why do you stand looking	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “why do you keep looking” or “there is no reason for you to keep looking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
55	ACT	1	11	a026		ὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς ἀφ’ ὑμῶν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν…ἐθεάσασθε αὐτὸν πορευόμενον εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν	1	who has been taken up from you into heaven … you saw him going into heaven	In its second occurrence in this sentence, the term translated heaven likely means “the sky,” as in the previous sentence and in the previous verse. However, in its first occurrence in this sentence, the term likely means “heaven” itself. It would not be accurate to say that Jesus was just “taken up from you into the sky.” Alternate translation: “who has been taken up from you into heaven … you saw him going into the sky”
56	ACT	1	11	a027	figs-activepassive	ὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς	1	who has been taken up	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who has done the action. Alternate translation: “whom God has taken up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
57	ACT	1	11	cue7		ὃν τρόπον	1	in which manner	Alternate translation: “in the same way in which”
58	ACT	1	12	x2nk	writing-pronouns	ὑπέστρεψαν	1	they returned	The word they refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “the apostles returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
59	ACT	1	12	a028	figs-activepassive	ὄρους τοῦ καλουμένου Ἐλαιῶνος	1	the hill that is called Olivet	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the hill that people call Olivet” or “the hill whose name is Olivet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
60	ACT	1	12	a029	translate-names	ὄρους τοῦ καλουμένου Ἐλαιῶνος	1	the hill that is called Olivet	Olivet is the name of a hill. If your readers might recognize it better if you called it the Mount of Olives, you could use that name in your translation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
61	ACT	1	12	a030	figs-idiom	Σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν	1	having a journey of a Sabbath	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “a Sabbath-day’s journey away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
62	ACT	1	12	p19g	figs-explicit	Σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν	1	having a journey of a Sabbath	The journey of a Sabbath was the distance that interpreters of the law of Moses had determined people could walk on the Sabbath without that being “work.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the distance in the measurement that your culture uses. Alternate translation: “about a kilometer away” or “about half a mile away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
63	ACT	1	13	vis2	figs-explicit	ὅτε εἰσῆλθον	1	when they arrived	The previous verse explains that the apostles returned to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that again explicitly here. Alternate translation: “when they arrived back in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
64	ACT	1	13	zt12	translate-unknown	εἰς τὸ ὑπερῷον, ἀνέβησαν οὗ ἦσαν καταμένοντες	1	they went up into the upper chamber where they were staying	In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built on top of other rooms. The expression upper chamber describes such a room, which was reached by stairs. If your culture does not have houses like that, it may be helpful to explain the meaning of the expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “they climbed the stairs to the room where they were staying, which had been built on top of other rooms in the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
65	ACT	1	13	a031	translate-names	Πέτρος…Ἰωάννης…Ἰάκωβος…Ἀνδρέας…Φίλιππος…Θωμᾶς…Βαρθολομαῖος…Μαθθαῖος	1	Peter … John … James … Andrew … Philip … Thomas … Bartholomew … Matthew	These are the names of eight men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
66	ACT	1	13	a032	figs-idiom	Ἰάκωβος Ἁλφαίου…Ἰούδας Ἰακώβου	1	James of Alphaeus … Judas of James	These are two occurrences of an idiom. Alternate translation: “James the son of Alphaeus … Judas the son of James” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
67	ACT	1	13	a033	translate-names	Ἰάκωβος…Ἁλφαίου…Ἰούδας…Ἰακώβου	1	James … Alphaeus … Judas … James	These are the names of four men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
68	ACT	1	13	a034	translate-names	Σίμων ὁ Ζηλωτὴς	1	Simon the Zealot	Simon is the name of a man, and Zealot is another name by which he was known. (1) Zealot could be a title that indicates that this man was part of the group of people who wanted to free the Jewish people from Roman rule. Alternate translation: “Simon the Patriot” (2) Zealot could also be a description that indicates that this man was zealous for God to be honored. Alternate translation: “Simon the Passionate One” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
69	ACT	1	14	z6cf		ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	unanimously	The word unanimously indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. Alternate translation: “with one accord” or “harmoniously”
70	ACT	1	14	a035	figs-explicit	γυναιξὶν	1	the women	Luke assumes that his readers will know he is referring to the women who accompanied Jesus and his disciples during his ministry. These women provided for them out of their own means, and they had traveled with them to Jerusalem. These women are described in Luke 8:2–3 and 23:49. Alternate translation: “the women who had helped Jesus and his disciples during his ministry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
71	ACT	1	14	a036	translate-names	Μαρία	1	Mary	Mary is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
72	ACT	1	14	a037	translate-kinship	τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς αὐτοῦ	1	his brothers	These were Jesus’ younger brothers. They were the sons of Mary and Joseph. Since the Father of Jesus was God, and their father was Joseph, they were actually his half-brothers. That detail is not normally translated, but if your language has a specific word for “younger brother,” you may wish to use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
73	ACT	1	15	il8w	writing-newevent	καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις	1	And in those days	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. The phrase refers to the period of time after Jesus ascended, when the disciples were meeting in the upper chamber. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
74	ACT	1	15	cup2	figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις	1	in those days	Luke is using the term days idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “during that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
75	ACT	1	15	a038	translate-symaction	ἀναστὰς	1	having stood up	Peter stood up to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “having stood up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
76	ACT	1	15	liz1	figs-metaphor	τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	the brothers	Luke is using the term brothers figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “his fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
77	ACT	1	15	a039	figs-gendernotations	τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	the brothers	Although the term brothers is masculine, Luke is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
78	ACT	1	15	tl5m	writing-background	ἦν τε ὄχλος ὀνομάτων ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ὡς ἑκατὸν εἴκοσι	1	and the multitude of names to the same was about 120	Luke provides this background information to help readers appreciate what happens shortly afterwards in the story, when the church grows in one day to many times this size. It may be helpful to put this background information first in the verse as a separate sentence, in which case it would not have to be in parentheses. Alternate translation: “Now the number of people in that one place was about 120.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
79	ACT	1	15	a040	figs-metonymy	ὄχλος ὀνομάτων	1	the multitude of names	Luke is using the term names figuratively to mean “people,” by association with the way that people have names. Alternate translation: “the number of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
80	ACT	1	15	a041		ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ	1	to the same	See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in that one place” or “in their Christian fellowship”
81	ACT	1	16	a042	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	Men, brothers	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
82	ACT	1	16	a043	figs-metaphor	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	Men, brothers	See how you translated the term brothers in 1:15. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
83	ACT	1	16	a044	figs-gendernotations	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	Men, brothers	If you decide to retain the metaphor of brothers, you could show that Peter is using the term in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “My brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
84	ACT	1	16	a045	figs-infostructure	ἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν, ἣν προεῖπε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον διὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ περὶ Ἰούδα, τοῦ γενομένου ὁδηγοῦ τοῖς συλλαβοῦσιν Ἰησοῦν	1	it was necessary for the scripture to be fulfilled that the Holy Spirit spoke before by the mouth of David concerning Judas, who became a guide to the ones who arrested Jesus	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could put the information that Peter provides to identify this scripture before his statement that it had to be fulfilled. It may be helpful to make that statement a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit spoke before by the mouth of David concerning Judas, who became a guide to the ones who arrested Jesus. It was necessary for that scripture to be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
85	ACT	1	16	i8tl	figs-activepassive	ἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν	1	it was necessary for the scripture to be fulfilled	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the things needed to take place that the scripture described” or, if you put the background information first as a separate sentence, “What that scripture described needed to take place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
86	ACT	1	16	a046		προεῖπε	1	spoke before	Alternate translation: “spoke beforehand” or “spoke in advance”
87	ACT	1	16	f3um	figs-metonymy	διὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ	1	by the mouth of David	Peter is using the word mouth figuratively to refer to words that David spoke or sang using his mouth and that he recorded in the book of Psalms, as Peter indicates in 1:20. Alternate translation: “through the words of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
88	ACT	1	16	a047	translate-names	Δαυεὶδ…Ἰούδα	1	David … Judas	David and Judas are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
89	ACT	1	16	a048	figs-synecdoche	τοῦ γενομένου ὁδηγοῦ τοῖς συλλαβοῦσιν Ἰησοῦν	1	who became a guide to the ones who arrested Jesus	Peter is using the act of guiding the ones who arrested Jesus to represent all of the things that Judas did to betray Jesus. This also included meeting beforehand with his enemies, receiving payment for the betrayal, and looking for the best opportunity to catch Jesus away from the crowds. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in more general terms. Alternate translation: “who betrayed Jesus to his enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
90	ACT	1	17	q73y	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	For	Peter uses the word For to introduce the reason for a result that is described in 1:21–22, after Luke provides further background information and Peter quotes the scripture he referred to in 1:16. The overall meaning is, “Since Judas was one of us apostles, we need to replace him with another witness of the ministry of Jesus.” But since so much material comes between the reason and the result, it may be helpful to give an indication here that Peter has a response in mind. Alternate translation: “There is something important we need to do in response to this scripture being fulfilled, since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
91	ACT	1	17	a049	figs-parallelism	κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν, καὶ ἔλαχεν τὸν κλῆρον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης	1	he was numbered with us and received a share of this ministry	These two phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “Jesus chose him to be an apostle along with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
92	ACT	1	17	a050		κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν	1	he was numbered with us	Peter is using the term numbered in one of its specific senses. Alternate translation: “he was considered to be one of us apostles”
93	ACT	1	17	a051	figs-activepassive	κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν	1	he was numbered with us	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he belonged to our group of apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
94	ACT	1	17	tmv2	figs-exclusive	ἐν ἡμῖν	1	with us	Although Peter is addressing a larger group of people, he is using the word us to refer only to himself and the other apostles. So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive “us,” it would be accurate to use the exclusive form here. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that us is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “with us apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
95	ACT	1	17	a052	figs-quotemarks	τὸν κλῆρον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης	1	a share of this ministry	Luke temporarily ends his quotation from Peter after this phrase so that he can provide further background information about Judas in 1:18–19. The quotation resumes in 1:20. If you are identifying quotations in your translation by putting them within quotation marks or by using some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, there should be an ending quotation mark or the equivalent after this phrase. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
96	ACT	1	18	tmv1	writing-background	μὲν οὖν	1	Now indeed	Luke is using this expression to introduce further background information that he provides in this verse and the next one about how Judas died and about what people called the field where he died. This is not part of Peter’s speech. You may want to indicate that by putting these verses in parentheses or by using the equivalent convention in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
97	ACT	1	18	dd58	figs-nominaladj	οὗτος	1	this one	Luke is using the demonstrative adjective this as a noun to refer to a specific person, Judas. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could say “he” or use the name “Judas.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
98	ACT	1	18	a053	figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας	1	from the wage of unrighteousness	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word unrighteousness, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “unrighteous.” Alternate translation: “with the money that he received for doing an unrighteous deed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
99	ACT	1	18	w83j	figs-metonymy	ἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας	1	from the wage of unrighteousness	Luke is using the term unrighteousness figuratively to describe Judas betraying Jesus, by association with the way that was an unrighteous thing to do. Alternate translation: “with the money that he received for betraying Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
100	ACT	1	18	kg3q	figs-explicit	πρηνὴς γενόμενος	1	having fallen headfirst	Be sure that it is clear in your translation that Judas did not fall down accidentally. Rather, he threw himself onto the field intentionally in order to kill himself. The implications are that he must have done this from a height. Alternate translation: “because he then threw himself down from a height onto that field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
101	ACT	1	18	a054		πρηνὴς γενόμενος	1	having fallen headfirst	The word headfirst describes someone falling forward, as opposed to falling backwards. Alternate translation: “having fallen forward”
102	ACT	1	18	a055	figs-activepassive	ἐξεχύθη πάντα τὰ σπλάγχνα αὐτοῦ	1	all his entrails were poured out	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “all his inward parts poured out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
103	ACT	1	19	a056		γνωστὸν ἐγένετο πᾶσι τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	it became known to all those living in Jerusalem	The verb form is not passive here, since known is an adjective rather than a participle. Even so, it may be helpful to your readers to make it the object rather than the subject. Alternate translation: “all those living in Jerusalem heard about it”
104	ACT	1	19	a057	figs-hyperbole	γνωστὸν ἐγένετο πᾶσι τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	it became known to all those living in Jerusalem	Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “it became well known to those living in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
105	ACT	1	19	a058	figs-activepassive	ὥστε κληθῆναι τὸ χωρίον ἐκεῖνο	1	Therefore that field was called	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “So they called that field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
106	ACT	1	19	mxf3	translate-transliterate	Ἁκελδαμάχ	1	Akeldama	Akeldama is an Aramaic word. Luke spells it out using Greek letters so his readers will know how it sounds, and then he says what it means, Field of Blood. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
107	ACT	1	20	mz13	figs-quotemarks	γέγραπται γὰρ	1	For it is written	Luke now resumes his quotation of what Peter said on this occasion. If you are identifying quotations in your translation by putting them within quotation marks or by using some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, there should be an opening quotation mark or the equivalent before this phrase. It may also be helpful to indicate explicitly that the quotation resumes here. Alternate translation: “Peter went on to say, ‘For it is written’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
108	ACT	1	20	d7pk	figs-quotesinquotes	γέγραπται…ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν, γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ; καί, τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος	1	it is written in the book of Psalms, ‘Let his habitation be made desolate, and let not one dwelling be in it,’ and ‘Let another take his overseership.’	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “it is written in the book of Psalms that his habitation should be made desolate, with no one dwelling in it, and that another should take his overseership” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
109	ACT	1	20	ip5w	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται…ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν	1	it is written in the book of Psalms	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “David wrote in the book of Psalms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
110	ACT	1	20	mc45	figs-parallelism	γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ	1	Let his habitation be made desolate, and let not one dwelling be in it	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Or you could combine the phrases if you think that would be the clearest thing to do. Alternate translation: “Let his habitation be made desolate, yes, let no one dwell in it” or “Let his habitation be made completely desolate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
111	ACT	1	20	chq4	figs-metaphor	γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ	1	Let his habitation be made desolate, and let not one dwelling be in it	The word habitation likely refers to Judas’ home and is a metaphor for his family line. Alternate translation: “May he leave no descendants, none to continue his family line” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
112	ACT	1	20	lsm2	figs-activepassive	γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος	1	Let his habitation be made desolate	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Let his habitation become desolate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
113	ACT	1	20	a059		τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος	1	Let another take his overseership	The word overseership refers to a position of leadership and supervision. It is the same term that Paul uses for a spiritual leader in 1 Timothy 3:1. Alternate translation: “Let someone else take his leadership position”
114	ACT	1	21	t916	translate-versebridge		0		To help your readers understand Peter’s main point in this verse and the next one, you could combine both verses into a verse bridge. You could put his main point in a first sentence and his further explanation in a second sentence. Alternate translation: “Therefore it is necessary for someone else to become a witness with us of Jesus’ resurrection. It should be one of the men who accompanied us during all the time that the Lord Jesus came in and went out among us, beginning from the baptism of John until the day that he was taken up from us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
115	ACT	1	21	xz69	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν…ἡμᾶς	1	us … us	In the first instance of us, Peter means himself and his fellow apostles, not everyone to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of the word if your language marks that distinction. However, in the second instance of us, Peter could well mean himself and his entire audience, so use the inclusive form in that instance. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
116	ACT	1	21	zuf7	figs-idiom	εἰσῆλθεν καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ὁ Κύριος Ἰησοῦς	1	the Lord Jesus came in and went out among us	Peter is speaking in an idiomatic way. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus lived among us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
117	ACT	1	22	qb8j	figs-abstractnouns	ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ τοῦ βαπτίσματος Ἰωάννου	1	beginning from the baptism of John	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word baptism, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “baptize.” Alternate translation: “beginning from when John started baptizing people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
118	ACT	1	22	a060	translate-names	Ἰωάννου	1	John	John is the name of a man. Peter means the man who was known as John the Baptist. See how you translated his name in 1:5. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
119	ACT	1	22	a061	figs-idiom	τῆς ἡμέρας ἧς	1	the day on which	While Jesus was taken up to heaven on a specific day, Peter may be using the word day idiomatically to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “the time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
120	ACT	1	22	a062	writing-pronouns	ἀνελήμφθη…τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ	1	he was taken up … his resurrection	The pronoun he refers to Jesus, not to John the Baptist. The pronoun his also refers to Jesus. For clarity, you may want to use the name Jesus instead of one or both of these pronouns. Alternate translation: “Jesus was taken up … the resurrection of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
121	ACT	1	22	yi3a	figs-activepassive	ἀνελήμφθη ἀφ’ ἡμῶν	1	he was taken up from us	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up from us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
122	ACT	1	22	a063	figs-exclusive	ἀφ’ ἡμῶν…σὺν ἡμῖν	1	from us … with us	When Peter says from us, he is referring to God taking Jesus from everyone to whom he is speaking. But when Peter says with us, he means only himself and the other apostles. So the word “us” would be inclusive in the first instance and exclusive in the second instance, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
123	ACT	1	22	mrx7	figs-nominaladj	ἕνα τούτων	1	one of these is	Peter is using the demonstrative adjective these as a noun to refer to specific people, the men whose qualifications he has just described. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “one of these men is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
124	ACT	1	22	g3n9	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ	1	of his resurrection	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “that God made him alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
125	ACT	1	23	lz7y	writing-pronouns	ἔστησαν δύο	1	they stood up two	The pronoun they refers to all of the believers who were present on this occasion. This is the group that Luke describes as “the brothers” in 1:15. Alternate translation: “the believers stood up two” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
126	ACT	1	23	a064	figs-nominaladj	ἔστησαν δύο	1	they stood up two	Luke is using the adjective two as a noun to refer to specific people, two men who met the qualifications Peter described. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning, and you could also describe these men more specifically. Alternate translation: “the believers stood up two men” or “the believers stood up two men who met the qualifications that Peter described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
127	ACT	1	23	a065	translate-symaction	ἔστησαν δύο	1	they stood up two	When the believers stood up these two men, that is, when they had them stand up within the group, this was a symbolic way of proposing them as candidates to replace Judas. Alternate translation: “the believers proposed two men who met the qualifications that Peter described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
128	ACT	1	23	a066	translate-names	Ἰωσὴφ…Βαρσαββᾶν…Ἰοῦστος	1	Joseph … Barsabbas … Justus	Joseph is the name of a man, and Barsabbas and Justus are two other names by which he was known. Barsabbas is probably a patronymic, that is, an indication of who his father was. If your language and culture identify people by patronymics, it may be helpful to translate this name as “the son of Sabbas,” as UST does. Justus is a Roman name, and it may be a name that this man used for official purposes and in interactions with people who spoke Latin. (It would be like the name Paul, by which Saul of Tarsus was also known in the Roman Empire.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
129	ACT	1	23	s1ff	figs-activepassive	τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν, ὃς ἐπεκλήθη Ἰοῦστος	1	the one called Barsabbas, who was named Justus	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say both of these things with active forms. Alternate translation: “whom people called Barsabbas and whose other name was Justus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
130	ACT	1	23	a067	translate-names	Μαθθίαν	1	Matthias	Matthias is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
131	ACT	1	24	a068	translate-versebridge		0		Judas betrayed Jesus and abandoned his position as an apostle. The person who is praying says that in the next verse. As a result, the believers are asking God to show them whom he has chosen to replace Judas, as the person praying says in this verse. You could put the reason before the result by creating a verse bridge. UST provides a model for doing that. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
132	ACT	1	24	a069	figs-hendiadys	προσευξάμενοι, εἶπαν	1	praying they said	Together the words praying and said indicate that the believers said what they did while praying. Alternate translation: “they said in prayer” or “they prayed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
133	ACT	1	24	zd1f	figs-synecdoche	προσευξάμενοι, εἶπαν	1	praying they said	The pronoun they refers to all of the believers, but one of the apostles alone probably spoke these words on behalf of everyone. Alternate translation: “as the believers were all praying together, one of the apostles said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
134	ACT	1	24	a070		σὺ Κύριε, καρδιογνῶστα πάντων	1	You, Lord, heart-knower of all	Alternate translation: “You, Lord, who know the hearts of all people”
135	ACT	1	24	se6m	figs-metaphor	σὺ Κύριε, καρδιογνῶστα πάντων	1	You, Lord, heart-knower of all	Here, the heart figuratively represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “You, Lord, who know the thoughts and motives of all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
136	ACT	1	24	a071	figs-youformal	σὺ Κύριε	1	you, Lord	The word you is singular because the person who is praying is addressing God. If your language has a formal form of “you” that it uses to address a superior respectfully, you may wish to use that form in your translation. However, it might be more natural in your language for someone who has a good, close relationship with God to address God using the informal form of “you.” Use your best judgment about what form to use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
137	ACT	1	24	a072	figs-nominaladj	ὃν ἐξελέξω ἐκ τούτων τῶν δύο ἕνα	1	which one from these two	The person who is praying is using the adjective two as a noun to refer to specific people, the two men whom the believers have proposed. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “which one of these two men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
138	ACT	1	25	mg47	figs-hendiadys	λαβεῖν τὸν τόπον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης καὶ ἀποστολῆς	1	to take this place of ministry and apostleship	The person who is praying is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word apostleship identifies what kind of ministry this is. Alternate translation: “to take this place of apostolic ministry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
139	ACT	1	25	ryv6	figs-metaphor	ἀφ’ ἧς παρέβη Ἰούδας	1	from which Judas turned aside	The expression turned aside figuratively means that Judas stopped performing this ministry. Alternate translation: “which Judas stopped fulfilling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
140	ACT	1	25	tx6n	figs-euphemism	πορευθῆναι εἰς τὸν τόπον τὸν ἴδιον	1	to go to his own place	This phrase uses a mild expression to describe Judas’ death and likely also his judgment after death. Alternate translation: “and died under God’s judgment as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
141	ACT	1	26	a073	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	And	Luke uses the word translated And to introduce what the believers did as a result of Peter’s speech. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
142	ACT	1	26	r84c	writing-pronouns	ἔδωκαν κλήρους αὐτοῖς	1	they cast lots for them	The pronoun they refers to the believers and the pronoun them refers to Joseph and Matthias. You may want to specify that for clarity. (But if you decide to retain the pronoun them and if your language marks the dual form, them would be dual because it refers to those two men.) Alternate translation: “the believers cast lots to decide between Joseph and Matthias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
143	ACT	1	26	a074	translate-unknown	ἔδωκαν κλήρους αὐτοῖς	1	they cast lots for them	The term lots describes objects with various markings on different sides that were used, most likely by dropping them on the ground, to select between possibilities. The belief was that God would control which way these objects fell and so guide the selection process. Alternate translation: “they threw marked objects on the ground, trusting that God would use these to guide them whether to choose Joseph or Matthias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
144	ACT	1	26	w4ph	figs-idiom	ἔπεσεν ὁ κλῆρος ἐπὶ Μαθθίαν	1	the lot fell to Matthias	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “the lot selected Matthias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
145	ACT	1	26	fk4x	figs-activepassive	συνκατεψηφίσθη	1	he was chosen	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the believers chose him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
146	ACT	2	intro	x8fr			0		Acts 2 General Notes Structure and formatting Some translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35. Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the material that is quoted in 2:31. Special concepts in this chapter Pentecost The events described in this chapter took place on the day of Pentecost. That was a festival that the Jews observed each year 50 days after Passover. It was a harvest festival that celebrated the first produce from the fields. That produce was known as “firstfruits.” Many people believe that the church began to exist when the Holy Spirit came to live inside believers on this particular day of Pentecost. Those believers were the “firstfruits” of all those who would become part of the church down through the years. Tongues The word “tongues” has two meanings in this chapter. In 2:3, Luke describes what came down from heaven as “tongues as if of fire.” A “tongue of fire” means a “flame of fire” (as in Isaiah 5:24, for example), so this means “something like flames of fire.” In 2:4, Luke uses the word “tongues” in the different sense of “languages” to describe the languages that the people spoke after the Holy Spirit filled them. Last days In 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy from Joel that describes something that will happen in the “last days.” Some scholars understand the “last days” to mean a time in the future just before Jesus returns. Other scholars understand the “last days” to mean the entire time from when Jesus first came to when he will return. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this expression where it occurs in 2:17. It may be best not to say more about this than ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]]) The prophecy of Joel In 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy of Joel about what would happen in the “last days.” Some of the things that prophecy describes did happen on the day of Pentecost, for example, the pouring out of the Spirit (2:17–18). Some other things did not happen, at least not literally, for example, the sun turning to darkness (2:20). Depending on how scholars understand the “last days,” they may say either that these other things await a literal future fulfillment or that they were fulfilled in some spiritual sense on the day of Pentecost. Once again it may be best not to say any more than ULT does and to allow preachers and teachers of the Bible to interpret and explain the meaning of Peter’s statement in 2:16, “this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]]) Baptize In this chapter, the word “baptize” refers to water baptism as an expression of faith in Jesus for the forgiveness of sins. That is how Luke uses the term in 2:38 and 2:41. Jesus did promise the disciples in 1:5 that they would be baptized in the Holy Spirit, and the events that Luke describes in 2:1-11 are the fulfillment of that promise. But Luke does not use the word “baptize” to describe those events in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]]) Wonders and signs These words refer to things that only God could do that showed that Jesus was who the disciples said he was. See the notes to this expression in 2:43. Possible translation difficulties in this chapter “You killed” (2:23) The Romans were the ones who killed Jesus, but they killed him because the Jews captured him, brought him to the Romans, and urged the Romans to kill him. For this reason Peter tells the people in the crowd on the day of Pentecost that they were guilty of killing Jesus. See the note to this phrase in 2:23 for suggestions about how to make clear in your translation what Peter means when he says this. Long sentences There is a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:9 to the end of 2:11. ULT represents all of it as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does. There is also a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:44 to the end of 2:47. Once again it may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does. Poetry The quotations from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35 are poetry. For advice about how to represent this literary form in your translation, see: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]].
147	ACT	2	1	i4sa	writing-newevent	καὶ ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς	1	And when the day of Pentecost was completely filled	Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
148	ACT	2	1	a076	figs-idiom	ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς	1	when the day of Pentecost was completely filled	This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “when the day of Pentecost had come” or, if your language does not speak of days “coming,” “on the day of Pentecost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
149	ACT	2	1	a425	figs-activepassive	ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς	1	when the day of Pentecost was completely filled	Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to use an active form of the verb “fill” in place of the passive form of that verb here. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
150	ACT	2	1	x075	translate-names	τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς	1	the day of Pentecost	Pentecost is the name of a festival. It occurs 50 days after Passover. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
151	ACT	2	1	i4sb	writing-pronouns	ἦσαν πάντες ὁμοῦ	1	they were all together	Here the word they refers to the apostles and the other 120 believers whom Luke mentions in 1:15. Alternate translation: “the apostles and all the other believers were together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
152	ACT	2	1	a077		ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό	1	to the same	See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in the same place” or “in united Christian fellowship”
153	ACT	2	2	qjc3		ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	from heaven	The word translated heaven could mean: (1) “the sky.” Alternate translation: “from the sky” (2) the sound came from heaven itself.
154	ACT	2	2	a078	figs-simile	ὥσπερ φερομένης πνοῆς βιαίας	1	as of a strong wind being borne along	Luke is using a simile to describe what this wind was like. You could use the same simile in your translation, or you could use a different comparison, to a similar loud sound that your readers would recognize. It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It sounded like a strong wind being borne along” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
155	ACT	2	2	jec5	figs-metaphor	φερομένης πνοῆς βιαίας	1	a strong wind being borne along	Luke speaks figuratively of the wind as if it were being carried through the air. Alternate translation: “a mighty, rushing wind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
156	ACT	2	2	a079	figs-metaphor	ἐπλήρωσεν ὅλον τὸν οἶκον	1	it filled the whole house	Luke speaks figuratively of this sound as if it filled the house. Alternate translation: “it could be heard throughout the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
157	ACT	2	2	t4y4		ὅλον τὸν οἶκον	1	the whole house	Luke may be using the word translated house in one of its specific senses to mean a building. So this could have been either a private home or a larger building. Alternate translation: “the entire building”
158	ACT	2	2	a080	figs-idiom	οὗ ἦσαν καθήμενοι	1	where they were sitting	Luke may be using the term sitting idiomatically to mean “meeting.” Alternate translation: “in which they were meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
159	ACT	2	3	re3t		γλῶσσαι ὡσεὶ πυρός	1	tongues as if of fire	This phrase means “something like tongues of fire,” and a “tongue of fire” means a “flame of fire.” (The expression is used with that meaning in Isaiah 5:24, for example.) This is not a simile. Luke is describing what these objects looked like. Alternate translation: “objects that looked like flames of fire”
160	ACT	2	3	xtk4		διαμεριζόμεναι	1	distributing themselves	This means that the objects that looked like flames of fire spread out so that there was one on each person. Alternate translation: “spreading around”
161	ACT	2	3	a081	writing-pronouns	ἐκάθισεν ἐφ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον αὐτῶν	1	they sat upon each one of them	The pronoun they refers to the objects, and the pronoun them refers to the disciples. Alternate translation: “one of the objects sat upon each one of the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
162	ACT	2	3	a082	figs-metaphor	ἐκάθισεν ἐφ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον αὐτῶν	1	they sat upon each one of them	Luke is using the word sat figuratively to indicate that the objects remained in one place once they had spread around. Alternate translation: “one of the objects remained on each one of the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
163	ACT	2	4	v7hi	figs-activepassive	ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	they were all filled with the Holy Spirit	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
164	ACT	2	4	a251	figs-metaphor	ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	they were all filled with the Holy Spirit	Luke is speaking figuratively as if the believers were containers that the Holy Spirit filled. Alternate translation: “they were all inspired by the Holy Spirit” or “the Holy Spirit inspired them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
165	ACT	2	4	a083		ἤρξαντο λαλεῖν ἑτέραις γλώσσαις	1	they began to speak in other tongues	Luke is using the word tongues in one of its specific senses to mean “languages.” Alternate translation: “they began to speak in other languages”
166	ACT	2	4	nr9f	figs-explicit	ἤρξαντο λαλεῖν ἑτέραις γλώσσαις	1	they began to speak in other tongues	The implication, as 2:6–11 makes clear, is that the disciples were speaking languages that they did not know. Alternate translation: “they began to speak in languages that they did not know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
167	ACT	2	4	a084		καθὼς τὸ Πνεῦμα ἐδίδου ἀποφθέγγεσθαι αὐτοῖς	1	as the Spirit was giving them to speak out	Here, giving has the sense of enabling. Alternate translation: “as the Spirit was enabling them to speak out”
168	ACT	2	4	a085		καθὼς τὸ Πνεῦμα ἐδίδου ἀποφθέγγεσθαι αὐτοῖς	1	as the Spirit was giving them to speak out	The word translated to speak out means to speak clearly and articulately. To express this meaning, it may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “The Spirit was enabling them to speak these languages clearly and articulately”
169	ACT	2	5	dz1l	grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	Now	Luke uses the word Now to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. You can translate it with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
170	ACT	2	5	yft2	figs-gendernotations	ἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς	1	godly men	Luke is using the term men in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “godly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
171	ACT	2	5	stq9	figs-hyperbole	παντὸς ἔθνους	1	every nation	The word every is a generalization that emphasizes that the people came from many different nations. Alternate translation: “many different nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
172	ACT	2	5	a086	figs-idiom	ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανόν	1	under heaven	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
173	ACT	2	6	bpj7	figs-activepassive	συνεχύθη	1	was confused	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say what did the action. Alternate translation: “what they heard confused them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
174	ACT	2	6	u9hc	writing-pronouns	ἤκουον εἷς ἕκαστος τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ λαλούντων αὐτῶν	1	each one was hearing them speaking in his own language	The pronoun them refers to the believers and the pronoun his refers to each person in the multitude. Alternate translation: “each person in the multitude could hear one of the disciples speaking in that person’s own language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
175	ACT	2	7	m8kd	figs-doublet	ἐξίσταντο…καὶ ἐθαύμαζον	1	they were … amazed and were marveling	The terms amazed and marveling mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were … greatly amazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
176	ACT	2	7	a087	figs-activepassive	ἐξίσταντο…πάντες καὶ ἐθαύμαζον	1	they were all amazed and were marveling	The expression were … amazed is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed all of them and they were marveling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
177	ACT	2	7	a088	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	Behold	Behold is an expression that speakers use to focus the attention of their listeners on what they are about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” the term can be used figuratively to get people to pay attention. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
178	ACT	2	7	wnk2	figs-rquestion	οὐχ…ἅπαντες οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ λαλοῦντες Γαλιλαῖοι	1	are not all these who are speaking Galileans?	The speakers are not looking for information. They are using the question form to express their amazement. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate their words as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “all of these people who are speaking are Galileans!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
179	ACT	2	7	a089	translate-names	Γαλιλαῖοι	1	Galileans	See how you translated the name Galileans in 1:11. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
180	ACT	2	8	hzm8	figs-rquestion	καὶ πῶς ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ ἡμῶν, ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν?	1	And how are we hearing, each in our own language in which we were born?	The speakers do not expect someone to be able to answer this question for them. Rather, they are using the question form to express their amazement. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate their words as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “So we should not each be hearing them speak in our own languages in which we were born!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
181	ACT	2	8	a090	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	And	The speakers are using the word translated And to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
182	ACT	2	8	a091	figs-explicit	πῶς ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος	1	how are we hearing, each	Your language may require you to specify the object of hearing. Alternate translation: “how are we each hearing them speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
183	ACT	2	8	a092	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς…ἡμῶν	1	we … our	The speakers are using the words we and our to refer to themselves and to their listeners, so use the inclusive forms of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
184	ACT	2	8	wb5t	figs-metaphor	ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν	1	in which we were born	The speakers say figuratively that they were born in these languages to mean that they learned them from birth. Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
185	ACT	2	8	a093	figs-activepassive	ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν	1	in which we were born	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. However, since this is a metaphor, it would be preferable to use another expression to explain its meaning, rather than to say something like “in which our mothers gave birth to us.” Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
186	ACT	2	9	f1ve	translate-names	Πάρθοι…Μῆδοι…Ἐλαμεῖται	1	Parthians … Medes … Elamites	These are names of three people groups. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
187	ACT	2	9	dm23	translate-names	τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν, Ἰουδαίαν;…Καππαδοκίαν, Πόντον…Ἀσίαν	1	Mesopotamia, Judea … Cappadocia, Pontus … Asia	These are names of five areas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
188	ACT	2	10	tmb4	translate-names	Φρυγίαν…Παμφυλίαν, Αἴγυπτον…Λιβύης	1	Phrygia … Pamphylia, Egypt … Libya	These are names of four areas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
189	ACT	2	10	a094	translate-names	Κυρήνην	1	Cyrene	Cyrene is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
190	ACT	2	10	a095	translate-names	οἱ ἐπιδημοῦντες Ῥωμαῖοι	1	Romans visiting	Here, Romans is a name for people who are from the city of Rome. Alternate translation: “visitors from Rome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
191	ACT	2	11	w8jy		Ἰουδαῖοί τε καὶ προσήλυτοι	1	both Jews and proselytes	The term proselytes describes converts to the Jewish religion. The phrase both Jews and proselytes could apply specifically to the visitors from Rome mentioned at the end of the previous verse, or it could apply to the whole list of people in 2:9–11. Alternate translation: “both Jews and converts to the Jewish religion”
192	ACT	2	11	jnp7	translate-names	Κρῆτες…Ἄραβες	1	Cretans and Arabians	These are names of two people groups. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
193	ACT	2	11	a096		γλώσσαις	1	tongues	As in 2:4, here the word tongues has the specific sense of “languages.” Alternate translation: “languages”
194	ACT	2	11	a097	figs-nominaladj	τὰ μεγαλεῖα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the great things of God	The speakers are using the adjective great as a noun. (The term is plural; ULT adds things to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the great things that God has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
195	ACT	2	12	el2f	figs-doublet	ἐξίσταντο…πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο	1	they were all amazed and were perplexed	The words amazed and perplexed mean similar things. Luke is using them together to emphasize that the people could not understand what was happening. Alternate translation: “they were very perplexed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
196	ACT	2	12	a098	figs-activepassive	ἐξίσταντο…πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο…λέγοντες	1	they were all amazed and were perplexed, saying	These are not passive verbal forms. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed and perplexed all of them, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
197	ACT	2	12	a099	figs-idiom	τί θέλει τοῦτο εἶναι	1	What does this want to be	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “What is the explanation for this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
198	ACT	2	13	a100	figs-activepassive	γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν	1	They are filled with sweet wine	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. However, it would be preferable to use an equivalent expression that conveys the meaning rather than to say something like “sweet wine has filled them.” Alternate translation: “They have drunk their fill of sweet wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
199	ACT	2	13	fg59	figs-explicit	γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν	1	They are filled with sweet wine	The implications of this statement are that the disciples have gotten drunk and are babbling and that this is the explanation for the languages the people think they are hearing. Alternate translation: “They have gotten drunk on sweet wine, and so what we are hearing is just drunken babbling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
200	ACT	2	13	jj1n	translate-unknown	γλεύκους	1	with sweet wine	This refers to wine that is thicker and more intoxicating than ordinary wine. If your readers would not be familiar with this drink, you could use the name of another strong drink that they would recognize, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “with strong liquor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
201	ACT	2	14	k5hr	translate-symaction	σταθεὶς δὲ ὁ Πέτρος σὺν τοῖς ἕνδεκα, ἐπῆρεν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτοῦ	1	But Peter, having stood with the Eleven, raised up his voice	Peter stood to show that he had something important to say, and the other apostles stood with him to show their support for him as he spoke. You could indicate that in your translation, perhaps as a separate sentence, if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “But Peter stood up to show that he had something important to say, and the other apostles stood with him to show their support for him as he spoke. Peter raised up his voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
202	ACT	2	14	c919	figs-nominaladj	τοῖς ἕνδεκα	1	the eleven	Luke is using the adjective eleven as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the other 11 apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
203	ACT	2	14	d9tb	figs-idiom	ἐπῆρεν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀπεφθέγξατο αὐτοῖς	1	raised up his voice and spoke out to them	The idiom raised up his voice means that Peter spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “spoke out to them in a loud voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
204	ACT	2	14	a102	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Men, Jews	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
205	ACT	2	14	a103	figs-gendernotations	ἄνδρες, Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Men, Jews	Peter is using the term men in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the idiomatic form of address in your translation, follow the convention in your language that indicates a mixed group of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
206	ACT	2	14	a104	figs-explicit	οἱ κατοικοῦντες Ἰερουσαλὴμ πάντες	1	all who are inhabiting Jerusalem	This seems to mean implicitly people who are not Jews but who live in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all of you non-Jews who are residents of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
207	ACT	2	14	ei5j		τοῦτο ὑμῖν γνωστὸν ἔστω	1	let this be known to you	This expression means that Peter wants to explain the meaning of what the people are seeing and hearing. Alternate translation: “let me explain this to you” or “I am going to explain this to you”
208	ACT	2	14	a105	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	and	Peter uses the word translated and to indicate what his listeners should do as a result of what he has just told them. Alternate translation: “so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
209	ACT	2	14	qp16	figs-metonymy	ἐνωτίσασθε τὰ ῥήματά μου	1	take my words into your ears	Peter is using the term words figuratively to mean what he is about to say by using words, and he is using the term ears figuratively to mean the capacity for listening. Alternate translation: “listen carefully to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
210	ACT	2	15	a106	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	Peter says for in this first instance to introduce the reason why the crowd should listen to him. Alternate translation: “You should listen to me because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
211	ACT	2	15	a107	writing-pronouns	οὗτοι	1	these	The demonstrative pronoun these refers to the disciples who are speaking different languages. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could add more information to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “these people who are speaking different languages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
212	ACT	2	15	a108	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2	For	Peter says for in this second instance to introduce the reason why the people speaking different languages are not drunk. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They are not drunk, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
213	ACT	2	15	a109		ἔστιν…ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας	1	it is the third hour of the day	In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “it is nine o’clock in the morning”
214	ACT	2	15	h28q	figs-explicit	ἔστιν…ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας	1	it is the third hour of the day	Peter assumes that his listeners will know that people do not get drunk that early in the day. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is only nine o’clock in the morning, and people do not get drunk that early” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
215	ACT	2	15	a110	translate-ordinal	ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας	1	the third hour of the day	If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour three of the day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
216	ACT	2	16	f9hz	figs-activepassive	τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Ἰωήλ	1	this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “this is what God said through the prophet Joel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
217	ACT	2	16	ktw9	figs-explicit	τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Ἰωήλ	1	this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel	The implication is that God is now making happen what he said through Joel. Alternate translation: “you are seeing God make happen what he announced earlier through the prophet Joel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
218	ACT	2	17	a111	figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ ἔσται ἐν ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις, λέγει ὁ Θεός, ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα	1	‘“And it will be in the last days,” God says, “I will pour out from my Spirit on all flesh”	The material in 2:17–21 contains a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Luke is quoting Peter, Peter is quoting Joel, and Joel is quoting God. You could avoid having a third-level quotation by moving the phrase God says to before the quotation from Joel. (The phrase itself does not occur in the passage from Joel that Peter quotes. It appears to be something that Peter supplies within the quotation to show that God is the speaker. Since that is the case, putting it before the quotation would not change the actual biblical text.) Alternate translation: “God said, ‘And it will be in the last days, I will pour out from my Spirit on all flesh’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
219	ACT	2	17	a112	figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ ἔσται ἐν ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις, λέγει ὁ Θεός, ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα	1	‘“And it will be in the last days,” God says, “I will pour out from my Spirit on all flesh”	You could also avoid having a second-level quotation by turning the direct quotation into an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that in the last days he would pour out his Spirit on all flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
220	ACT	2	17	ijl8		καὶ ἔσται	1	And it will be	Alternate translation: “This is what will happen” or “This is what I will do”
221	ACT	2	17	a113		ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις	1	the last days	See the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to this chapter, which recommend not interpreting or explaining it, but representing it simply as ULT does.
222	ACT	2	17	u2d1	figs-metaphor	ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου	1	I will pour out from my Spirit	God says figuratively that he will pour out his Spirit, as if the Spirit were a liquid, to mean that he will give the Spirit generously and abundantly. Alternate translation: “I will lavish my Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
223	ACT	2	17	a114	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα	1	on all flesh	God refers figuratively to flesh to mean people, by association with the way that people are made of flesh. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
224	ACT	2	17	a115	figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ προφητεύσουσιν οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν, καὶ αἱ θυγατέρες ὑμῶν; καὶ οἱ νεανίσκοι ὑμῶν ὁράσεις ὄψονται, καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι ὑμῶν ἐνυπνίοις ἐνυπνιασθήσονται	1	and your sons and your daughters will prophesy, and your young men will see visions, and your old men will dream dreams	If you have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation, also do that here in the rest of the verse. It may be helpful to make this a new sentence. Alternate translation: “God said that our sons and our daughters would prophesy and our young men would see visions and our old men would dream dreams” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
225	ACT	2	17	a116	figs-exclusive	ὑμῶν	-1	your	If you turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation and translate these instances of your as “our,” use the inclusive form of the word “our” in each instance if your language marks that distinction, since Joel would be referring to himself and his listeners. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
226	ACT	2	17	a117	figs-gendernotations	οἱ νεανίσκοι…οἱ πρεσβύτεροι	1	young men … old men	God speaks separately of sons and daughters in this verse and of “male servants” and “female servants” in the next verse. But here the contrast is between young and old. So the word men could have a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “young people … old people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
227	ACT	2	18	uwd7	figs-quotations	καί γε ἐπὶ τοὺς δούλους μου, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς δούλας μου, ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου, καὶ προφητεύσουσιν	1	And even on my male servants and on my female servants in those days I will pour out from my Spirit, and they will prophesy	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that even on his male servants and on his female servants in those days he would pour out from his Spirit, and they would prophesy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
228	ACT	2	18	nd34		ἐπὶ τοὺς δούλους μου, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς δούλας μου	1	on my male servants and on my female servants	If your language has masculine and feminine forms of the word “servant,” it would be accurate to use those forms here. Other languages can indicate this distinction in other ways, as ULT does with the adjectives “male” and “female.”
229	ACT	2	18	a118	figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις	1	in those days	Here, days idiomatically means a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
230	ACT	2	18	wz2i	figs-metaphor	ἐπὶ…ἐπὶ…ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου	1	on … on … I will pour out from my Spirit	See how you translated this in 2:17. Alternate translation: “to … to … I will give my Spirit abundantly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
231	ACT	2	19	a119	figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ δώσω	1	And I will give	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that he would give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
232	ACT	2	19	a120		δώσω τέρατα…καὶ σημεῖα	1	I will give wonders … and signs	Alternate translation: “I will show wonders … and signs”
233	ACT	2	19	a121		ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ ἄνω	1	in the heaven above	Since God specifies in the next verse that these wonders will affect the sun and the moon, the word translated heaven likely has the specific sense of “sky.” Alternate translation: “in the sky above”
234	ACT	2	19	p5zi	figs-possession	ἀτμίδα καπνοῦ	1	vapor of smoke	Here the possessive form describes vapor that looks smoky or that has smoke in it. Alternate translation: “smoky vapor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
235	ACT	2	20	ylv7	figs-quotesinquotes	ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα, πρὶν ἢ ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ	1	The sun will be turned to darkness, and the moon to blood before the great and remarkable day of the Lord comes	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that sun would be turned to darkness, and the moon to blood before the great and remarkable day of the Lord came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
236	ACT	2	20	a6yh	figs-activepassive	ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος	1	The sun will be turned to darkness	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will turn the sun to darkness” or, if you are making this an indirect quotation, “God said that he would turn the sun to darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
237	ACT	2	20	a122	figs-metaphor	ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος	1	The sun will be turned to darkness	God is speaking figuratively as if he would change the sun into something else. Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” or “The sun will no longer shine brightly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
238	ACT	2	20	a123	figs-abstractnouns	ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος	1	The sun will be turned to darkness	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word darkness, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “dark.” Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
239	ACT	2	20	a124	figs-ellipsis	καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα	1	and the moon to blood	Here some words have been left out that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and the moon will be turned to blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
240	ACT	2	20	a125	figs-activepassive	καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα	1	and the moon to blood	If you decide to supply words as the previous note suggests, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form. Alternate translation: “and I will turn the moon to blood” or, if you are making this an indirect quotation, “and that he would turn the moon to blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
241	ACT	2	20	f34k	figs-metaphor	καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα	1	and the moon to blood	God is speaking figuratively as if he would change the moon into something else. Alternate translation: “and the moon will look like blood” or “and the moon will appear to be red” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
242	ACT	2	20	swb2	figs-doublet	ἡμέραν…τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ	1	the great and remarkable day	The words great and remarkable mean similar things. They are being used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the very great day” or “the truly remarkable day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
243	ACT	2	20	lc4g	figs-idiom	ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου	1	the day of the Lord comes	This is an expression that many of the prophets use. It refers to the time when God will judge and punish people for their sins. Alternate translation: “the time when the Lord judges and punishes people for their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
244	ACT	2	20	a126	figs-123person	ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου	1	the day of the Lord comes	In this expression, God is speaking of himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “time arrives when I judge and punish people for their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
245	ACT	2	21	a127	figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ ἔσται, πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται	1	And it will be, everyone who may call on the name of the Lord will be saved	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “And God said it would happen that everyone who called on the name of the Lord would be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
246	ACT	2	21	a128		καὶ ἔσται, πᾶς	1	And it will be, everyone	Alternate translation: “And this is what will happen: Everyone”
247	ACT	2	21	vql5	figs-activepassive	πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται	1	everyone who may call on the name of the Lord will be saved	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Lord will save everyone who calls on his name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
248	ACT	2	21	a129	figs-idiom	πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται	1	everyone who may call on	Here, call on is an idiom. Alternate translation: “everyone who may appeal to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
249	ACT	2	21	a130	figs-123person	τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου	1	the name of the Lord	God is speaking of himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “my name” or “me by name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
250	ACT	2	21	a131	figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου	1	the name of the Lord	Here, name figuratively represents a person, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
251	ACT	2	21	a132	figs-explicit	τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου	1	the name of the Lord	The implication is that people would appeal to God to show them mercy and save them. Alternate translation: “the Lord for mercy and salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
252	ACT	2	21	a133	figs-quotemarks	σωθήσεται	1	will be saved	This is the end of Joel’s quotation of the Lord. If you chose to mark the Lord’s words as a third-level quotation, indicate that ending here with a closing third-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. It is also the end of Peter’s quotation of Joel. If you chose to mark Joel’s words as a second-level quotation, similarly indicate the ending of that quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
253	ACT	2	22	sa78	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται	1	Men, Israelites	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
254	ACT	2	22	g6vj	figs-metonymy	ἀκούσατε τοὺς λόγους τούτους	1	hear these words	Peter is using the term words figuratively to mean what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “listen to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
255	ACT	2	22	a134	translate-names	Ἰησοῦν τὸν Ναζωραῖον	1	Jesus the Nazarene	The word Nazarene describes someone who comes from the city of Nazareth. Alternate translation: “Jesus of Nazareth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
256	ACT	2	22	f2t1	figs-activepassive	ἀποδεδειγμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	attested to you by God	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom God proved he had sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
257	ACT	2	22	a135	figs-doublet	δυνάμεσι, καὶ τέρασι, καὶ σημείοις	1	with mighty deeds and wonders and signs	The terms mighty works, wonders, and signs mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “by means of many great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
258	ACT	2	23	a136	figs-nominaladj	τοῦτον	1	This one	Peter is using the demonstrative adjective this as a noun to refer to a specific person, Jesus. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “This Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
259	ACT	2	23	i6un	figs-activepassive	τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἔκδοτον	1	given up by the determined counsel and foreknowledge of God	The term translated given up is an adjective, not a passive verbal form, but even so you may wish to translate it with an active verbal form. Alternate translation: “whom God gave up by his determined counsel and foreknowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
260	ACT	2	23	s38b	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	by the determined counsel and foreknowledge of God	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words counsel and foreknowledge, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “as God had planned in a determined way for things he knew about ahead of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
261	ACT	2	23	a137	figs-activepassive	τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	by the determined counsel and foreknowledge of God	The word determined is a passive verbal form that you could express with an active form. Alternate translation: “in a way that God had determined as he planned for things he knew about ahead of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
262	ACT	2	23	f5kn	figs-synecdoche	ἀνείλατε	1	you killed	It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says figuratively that the Jewish people in the crowd killed him because their demands led to his death. Alternate translation: “you demanded to be killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
263	ACT	2	23	e38a	figs-metonymy	διὰ χειρὸς ἀνόμων	1	of the lawless	Here, hand refers figuratively to actions. Alternate translation: “through the actions of the lawless” or “by what the lawless did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
264	ACT	2	23	a138	figs-nominaladj	ἀνόμων	1	the lawless	Peter is using the adjective lawless as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can supply the word “people” to show this. Alternate translation: “lawless people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
265	ACT	2	23	f6kd	figs-metonymy	ἀνόμων	1	of the lawless	By lawless, Peter does not mean people who disregard the law and break the law. He is figuratively describing Gentiles (that is, people who are not Jews) by association with the fact that they do not have the Jewish law. Alternate translation: “of the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
266	ACT	2	23	a197		προσπήξαντες	1	having fastened	This is a reference to the crucifixion of Jesus. Alternate translation: “having nailed him to a cross” or “by crucifying him”
267	ACT	2	24	a140		ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἀνέστησεν	1	whom God raised up	It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “But God raised him up”
268	ACT	2	24	ei37	figs-idiom	ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἀνέστησεν	1	whom God raised up	The idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “whom God brought back to life” or, as a new sentence, “But God brought him back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
269	ACT	2	24	s8j3	figs-metaphor	λύσας τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ θανάτου	1	having loosed the agonies of death	Peter speaks figuratively of the agonies of death as if they were ropes with which Jesus had been tied, and of God bringing Jesus back to life as if God had untied those ropes and set him free. Alternate translation: “delivering him from the agonies of death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
270	ACT	2	24	a141	figs-possession	τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ θανάτου	1	the agonies of death	Peter uses the possessive form to describe death as something that is characterized by agonies. Alternate translation: “agonizing death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
271	ACT	2	24	a142	figs-explicit	καθότι οὐκ ἦν δυνατὸν κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	because it was not possible for him to be held by it	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly why this was not possible. Alternate translation: “because God is so much stronger than death that it was not possible for him to be held by it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
272	ACT	2	24	ykq4	figs-activepassive	κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	for him to be held by it	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for death to hold him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
273	ACT	2	24	vuf4	figs-personification	κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	for him to be held by it	Peter speaks of death figuratively as if it were a living thing that held Jesus captive. Alternate translation: “for him to remain dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
274	ACT	2	25	dd5a	figs-quotesinquotes	Δαυεὶδ γὰρ λέγει εἰς αὐτόν, προορώμην τὸν Κύριον ἐνώπιόν μου διὰ παντός, ὅτι ἐκ δεξιῶν μού ἐστιν, ἵνα μὴ σαλευθῶ	1	For David says about him, ‘I saw the Lord always before me, for he is at my right so that I should not be moved	In order to avoid having a second-level quotation, you could turn Peter’s quotation from David into an indirect quotation. (Peter is quoting from Psalm 16:8–11.) Alternate translation: “For David said about him that he saw the Lord before him through all, for he was at his right so that he should not be moved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
275	ACT	2	25	a143	writing-pronouns	Δαυεὶδ γὰρ λέγει εἰς αὐτόν, προορώμην τὸν Κύριον ἐνώπιόν μου διὰ παντός, ὅτι ἐκ δεξιῶν μού ἐστιν, ἵνα μὴ σαλευθῶ	1	For David says about him, ‘I saw the Lord always before me, for he is at my right so that I should not be moved	The pronoun him refers to the Messiah, about whom David is prophesying. This means that within the quotation, the pronouns I and my are spoken by the Messiah. If you turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation and change these pronouns to “he,” “him,” and “his,” it may be helpful to indicate the references in some cases so that your readers will recognize this. Alternate translation: “For David said about the Messiah that he saw the Lord before him through all, for the Lord was at the Messiah’s right so that he should not be moved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
276	ACT	2	25	a144	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	Peter uses the word For to introduce a reason why the crowd should believe him when he says that God brought Jesus back to life. The reason is that the Scriptures predicted this. As a result, the crowd should be confident that it did happen. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You can be confident that God did bring Jesus back to life, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
277	ACT	2	25	a145	figs-explicit	Δαυεὶδ…λέγει εἰς αὐτόν	1	David says about him	Peter assumes that the crowd will know that he is referring to what David says in one of the psalms that he wrote, and that David is prophesying what the Messiah would say. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “David says in one of his psalms that the Messiah will say” or “David wrote in one of his psalms that the Messiah would say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
278	ACT	2	25	n2ls	figs-metaphor	ἐνώπιόν μου	1	before me	The phrase before me, which means “in front of me,” is a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “present with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
279	ACT	2	25	tqak	figs-ellipsis	διὰ παντός	1		The phrase through all is an ellipsis for “through all times.” It means “always.” Alternate translation: “at all times” or “always” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
280	ACT	2	25	a146	figs-nominaladj	ἐκ δεξιῶν μού	1	at my right	Here the adjective right is being used as a noun to indicate the right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could say that specifically. Alternate translation: “at my right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
281	ACT	2	25	l6xp	figs-metaphor	ἐκ δεξιῶν μού	1	at my right	In this context, to be at someone’s right side figuratively means to be in a position to help and sustain that person. Alternate translation: “there to help me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
282	ACT	2	25	a147	figs-metaphor	μὴ σαλευθῶ	1	I should not be moved	Here, moved means to be taken out of a safe and secure position, and so figuratively it means to be harmed. Alternate translation: “I will not be harmed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
283	ACT	2	25	s4yp	figs-activepassive	μὴ σαλευθῶ	1	I should not be moved	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “no one will harm me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
284	ACT	2	26	a148	figs-quotesinquotes	διὰ τοῦτο ηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδία μου, καὶ ἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά μου; ἔτι δὲ καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι	1	Because of this, my heart was glad and my tongue exulted. And indeed, my flesh will also dwell in hope	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation of David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “Because of this, his heart was glad and his tongue exulted, and indeed his flesh would also dwell in hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
285	ACT	2	26	z8vw	figs-metaphor	ηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδία μου	1	my heart was glad	Here, the heart figuratively represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “I felt glad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
286	ACT	2	26	a149	figs-metonymy	ἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά μου	1	my tongue exulted	Here, the tongue figuratively represents the capacity for speech. Alternate translation: “I said joyful things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
287	ACT	2	26	zz6k	figs-metonymy	καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι	1	my flesh will also dwell in hope	Here, flesh figuratively means the human body by association with the way that is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “my body will also dwell in hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
288	ACT	2	26	a150	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι	1	my flesh will also dwell in hope	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word hope, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “hopefully.” Alternate translation: “my body will also live hopefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
289	ACT	2	26	a151	figs-personification	καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι	1	my flesh will also dwell in hope	The Messiah is speaking figuratively as if his body itself would live hopefully. Alternate translation: “I will also have hope for my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
290	ACT	2	26	a152	figs-explicit	καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι	1	my flesh will also dwell in hope	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly what hope the Messiah had for his body. Alternate translation: “I will also have hope that God will bring my body back to life after I die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
291	ACT	2	27	m3ij	figs-quotesinquotes	ὅτι οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	For you will not abandon my soul to Hades, nor will you allow your Holy One to see decay	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. If so, it may be necessary to add some introductory material here. Alternate translation: “The Messiah knew that God would not abandon his soul to Hades and that God would not allow his Holy One to see decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
292	ACT	2	27	a153	figs-parallelism	οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	you will not abandon my soul to Hades, nor will you allow your Holy One to see decay	These two statements mean similar things. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it may be helpful to show that to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than nor in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon my soul to Hades, no, you will not allow your Holy One to see decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
293	ACT	2	27	whi3	figs-youformal	οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις…οὐδὲ δώσεις…σου	1	you will not abandon … nor will you allow your	The words you and your are singular, and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in your translation in 1:24 in a similar case where God is addressed as “you.” You may have decided in such cases to use a formal form of “you” that your language may have, or you may have decided to use an informal form of “you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
294	ACT	2	27	a154	figs-synecdoche	οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην	1	you will not abandon my soul to Hades	The Messiah says my soul figuratively to mean himself, using one part of his being to represent his whole being. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon me to Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
295	ACT	2	27	a155	translate-names	οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην	1	you will not abandon my soul to Hades	Hades is the name for the realm of the dead. If your readers would not be familiar with that name, you could express its meaning in your translation. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon me to the realm of the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
296	ACT	2	27	a156	figs-explicit	τὸν Ὅσιόν σου	1	your Holy One	The expression Holy One is a title for the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your Messiah” or “your holy Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
297	ACT	2	27	rld3	figs-123person	τὸν Ὅσιόν σου	1	your Holy One	The Messiah is referring to himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “me, your Holy One” or “me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
298	ACT	2	27	a157	figs-idiom	ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	to see decay	Here the word see is being used idiomatically to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “to experience decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
299	ACT	2	27	l5cd	figs-explicit	ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	to see decay	The term decay refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to experience the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
300	ACT	2	28	a158	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐγνώρισάς μοι ὁδοὺς ζωῆς; πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου	1	You made known to me the paths of life; you will fill me with gladness with your face	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation of David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. If so, it may be helpful to add some introductory material here. Alternate translation: “The Messiah said that God had made known to him the paths of life and that God would fill him with gladness with his face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
301	ACT	2	28	a159	figs-youformal	ἐγνώρισάς…πληρώσεις…σου	1	You made known … you will fill … your	The words you and your are singular and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in the similar case in 1:24. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
302	ACT	2	28	xhi3	figs-metaphor	ἐγνώρισάς μοι ὁδοὺς ζωῆς	1	You made known to me the paths of life	The Messiah speaks figuratively of life as if it consisted of paths that a person walked along. Those represent the various pursuits and adventures that people have in life. The word known refers to experiential knowledge. Alternate translation: “You enabled me to experience the adventures of life once again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
303	ACT	2	28	ej5m	figs-metaphor	πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης	1	you will fill me with gladness	The Messiah speaks figuratively as if he were a container that God could fill with gladness. Alternate translation: “you will give me great gladness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
304	ACT	2	28	y7gf	figs-metaphor	μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου	1	with your face	Here, the word face figuratively represents the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “by your presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
305	ACT	2	28	a161	figs-quotemarks	μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου	1	with your face	This is the end of Peter’s quotation of David. If you chose to mark David’s words as a second-level quotation, in your translation you can indicate this ending with a closing second-level quotation mark or whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
306	ACT	2	29	pv1x	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	Men, brothers	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
307	ACT	2	29	ps7c	figs-metaphor	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	Men, brothers	See how you translated the term brothers in 1:15. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” or “My brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
308	ACT	2	29	wh97	figs-metaphor	τοῦ πατριάρχου Δαυεὶδ	1	the patriarch David	A patriarch is literally the ancestor of a group of people. David was not the ancestor of all the Jews to whom Peter is speaking. So he is likely using the term figuratively to identify David as the king who established the Israelite kingdom as a lasting dynasty. Alternate translation: “David, the founder of our kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
309	ACT	2	29	vtc6	figs-activepassive	ἐτάφη	1	he was buried	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “people buried him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
310	ACT	2	29	a162	figs-idiom	ἄχρι τῆς ἡμέρας ταύτης	1	to this day	Peter is using the word day idiomatically to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
311	ACT	2	30	a163	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Therefore	Peter uses the word Therefore to introduce the logical result of what he has just said. Alternate translation: “We can therefore conclude that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
312	ACT	2	30	a164	figs-explicit	προφήτης…ὑπάρχων, καὶ εἰδὼς	1	being a prophet and having known	Peter is still speaking about David. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because David was a prophet and he knew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
313	ACT	2	30	x11q	figs-metonymy	ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ	1	to set from the fruit of his loins upon his throne	Peter is using the word loins figuratively to represent David himself by association with the way the reproductive organs are in the loins. He is using the word fruit in a broad sense to mean what someone or something produces, in this case a descendant. Alternate translation: “to set one of his descendants upon his throne” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
314	ACT	2	30	hq71	figs-synecdoche	ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ	1	to set from the fruit of his loins upon his throne	When Peter says that God promised to set one of David’s descendants upon his throne, he is using that one action figuratively to represent God’s promise to David that this descendant would succeed him as king. Alternate translation: “to make one of his descendants succeed him as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
315	ACT	2	31	a165	writing-pronouns	ἐλάλησεν…ἐνκατελείφθη…αὐτοῦ	1	he spoke … was he abandoned … his	The first instance of he refers to David, and the second instance of he and the pronoun his refer to Christ. Alternate translation: “David spoke … was Christ abandoned … Christ’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
316	ACT	2	31	a166	figs-abstractnouns	ἐλάλησεν περὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	he spoke about the resurrection of the Christ	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “he described how God would make Christ alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
317	ACT	2	31	tn4b	figs-activepassive	οὔτε ἐνκατελείφθη εἰς ᾍδην	1	neither was he abandoned to Hades	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “neither did God abandon him to Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
318	ACT	2	31	a167	figs-explicit	τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	the Christ	Christ is the Greek word for “Messiah.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use the term “Messiah” in your translation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
319	ACT	2	31	a168	translate-names	ᾍδην	1	Hades	See how you translated the term Hades in 2:27. Alternate translation: “the realm of the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
320	ACT	2	31	a169	figs-idiom	οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν	1	nor did his flesh see decay	Here the word see is being used idiomatically to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “nor did his flesh experience decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
321	ACT	2	31	a170	figs-metonymy	οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν	1	nor did his flesh see decay	Peter is using the word flesh figuratively to mean the body of Jesus by association with the way the body is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “nor did his body experience decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
322	ACT	2	31	up5x	figs-explicit	οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν	1	nor did his flesh see decay	The term decay refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “nor did his body experience decomposition” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
323	ACT	2	32	udn1	figs-idiom	ἀνέστησεν ὁ Θεός	1	God has raised up	As in 2:24, the idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “God has brought back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
324	ACT	2	32	kw6a	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	we	By we, Peter means himself and the other apostles, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
325	ACT	2	33	a171	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Therefore	Peter is using the word Therefore to introduce a result. But it is not the immediate result of what he has just said. He is not saying that Jesus has done what the people see and hear because God raised him from the dead. Instead, this is an overall conclusion. Peter is saying that Jesus sending the Holy Spirit is the reason why the disciples are able to speak in other languages. The crowd should not conclude that they are babbling drunkenly, as some of them have suggested. UST models a way of expressing this sense of the word Therefore. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
326	ACT	2	33	kij2	figs-activepassive	τῇ δεξιᾷ οὖν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὑψωθεὶς	1	having been exalted to the right of God	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “now that God has exalted Jesus to his right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
327	ACT	2	33	c9mr	figs-nominaladj	τῇ δεξιᾷ…τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	to the right of God	Peter is using the adjective right as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:25. Alternate translation: “to the right side of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
328	ACT	2	33	a172	figs-explicit	τῇ δεξιᾷ…τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	to the right of God	In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
329	ACT	2	33	a173	figs-possession	τήν τε ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πνεύματος τοῦ Ἁγίου	1	the promise of the Holy Spirit from the Father	Peter is using the possessive form to describe the Holy Spirit as someone whom God the Father promised to send. Alternate translation: “the promised Holy Spirit from the Father” or “the Holy Spirit whom the Father promised to send” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
330	ACT	2	33	a174	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρὸς	1	the Father	Father is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
331	ACT	2	33	c1dr	writing-pronouns	ἐξέχεεν	1	he has poured out	The pronoun he refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus has poured out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
332	ACT	2	33	wsg9	figs-metaphor	ἐξέχεεν	1	he has poured out	Peter says figuratively that Jesus has poured out the things that the people are seeing and hearing as if those things were a liquid. Peter means that Jesus has given these things generously and abundantly. See how you translated the similar statement in 2:17, to which Peter is likely alluding here. Alternate translation: “he has generously given” or “he has abundantly given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
333	ACT	2	34	m7fy	figs-quotesinquotes	λέγει…αὐτός, εἶπεν Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	he himself says, ‘The Lord said to my Lord, “Sit at my right	The material in 2:34–35 contains a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Luke is quoting Peter, Peter is quoting another psalm by David (Psalm 110:1), and David is quoting God. You could avoid having second-level and third-level quotations by translating this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “he himself says that the Lord told his Lord to sit at his right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
334	ACT	2	34	i8wu	figs-explicit	εἶπεν Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου	1	The Lord said to my Lord	The Lord means God here, and my Lord means the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God said to the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
335	ACT	2	34	a175	figs-nominaladj	ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	at my right	Here the adjective right is used as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:25. Alternate translation: “at my right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
336	ACT	2	34	kvn8	figs-explicit	ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	at my right	In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in a place of honor next to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
337	ACT	2	35	nf1x	figs-metaphor	ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου	1	until I make your enemies a stool for your feet	The psalm says figuratively that God would make the Messiah’s enemies a stool for his feet to mean that God would conquer those enemies and make them submit to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “until I conquer your enemies for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
338	ACT	2	35	a176	figs-quotemarks	τῶν ποδῶν σου	1	for your feet	This is the end of David’s quotation of the Lord and of Peter’s quotation of David. If you chose to mark these in your translation as a third-level and a second-level quotation, indicate that ending here with the appropriate closing quotation marks or the comparable punctuation or convention in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
339	ACT	2	36	a177	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Therefore	Peter is using the word Therefore to introduce the result of what he has just said. Alternate translation: “Since David was not talking about himself, but about the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
340	ACT	2	36	pnp5	figs-metaphor	πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ	1	all the house of Israel	Here, house means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So the house of Israel figuratively means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the entire nation of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
341	ACT	2	37	s85q	figs-activepassive	ἀκούσαντες…κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν	1	hearing this, they were pierced in the heart	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what they heard Peter say pierced their heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
342	ACT	2	37	xan1	writing-pronouns	κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν	1	they were pierced in the heart	Here the word they refers to the people in the crowd to whom Peter spoke. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd were pierced in the heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
343	ACT	2	37	w1ma		κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν	1	they were pierced in the heart	Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of heart. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd were pierced in their hearts”
344	ACT	2	37	l15x	figs-metaphor	κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν	1	they were pierced in the heart	Luke is speaking figuratively. The people were not literally pierced in the heart by anything. He means that the people felt guilty and became very sad. Alternate translation: “they felt guilty and became very sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
345	ACT	2	37	zls6	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	Men, brothers	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “Our brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
346	ACT	2	37	a178	figs-metaphor	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	Men, brothers	See how you translated the term brothers in 1:15. Alternate translation: “Our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
347	ACT	2	37	a179	figs-exclusive	τί ποιήσωμεν	1	what should we do	The people in the crowd are asking about themselves but not the apostles, so use the exclusive form of we in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
348	ACT	2	38	a180	figs-you	μετανοήσατε…βαπτισθήτω ἕκαστος ὑμῶν…τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν…λήμψεσθε	1	Repent … each of you be baptized … of your sins … you will receive	The words you and your are plural, you will receive is a plural verb form, and the implied “you” in the imperative Repent is also plural. But the implied “you” in the imperative be baptized is singular, since the subject is each. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
349	ACT	2	38	cmb7	figs-activepassive	βαπτισθήτω	1	be baptized	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “allow us to baptize you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
350	ACT	2	38	geb2	figs-idiom	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	in the name of Jesus Christ	Peter has just finished demonstrating that God sent Jesus as the Christ or Messiah 2:36. He is saying here that people should acknowledge that as the basis of their baptism for the forgiveness of their sins. So in the name here is an idiomatic way of saying “on the basis of naming.” Alternate translation: “on the basis of naming Jesus as the Christ” or “upon acknowledging that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
351	ACT	2	38	a181	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ἄφεσιν τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν	1	for the forgiveness of your sins	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word forgiveness, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “forgive.” Alternate translation: “to show that you want God to forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
352	ACT	2	39	a182	figs-metonymy	ἐστιν ἡ ἐπαγγελία	1	the promise is	Peter is speaking figuratively of the Holy Spirit by association with the way God promised to send the Holy Spirit, as Peter says specifically in 2:33. Alternate translation: “God has promised the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
353	ACT	2	39	a183	figs-explicit	ὑμῖν…καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν	1	to you and to your children	Peter showed the people in 2:17 that God’s promise through Joel to pour out his Spirit included their “sons” and “daughters.” So the implication could be that the people in the crowd should not think that any of them have to reach a certain age before professing faith in Jesus and being baptized. Alternate translation: “to all of you, no matter what your age,” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
354	ACT	2	39	a184	figs-metaphor	ὑμῖν…καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν	1	to you and to your children	Peter could also be using the word children in a figurative sense to mean “descendants.” In that case, he would be saying that faith in Jesus as the Messiah was not something just for the people living at this time, but also for people living at all times in the future. That would parallel what he says next about faith in Jesus not being just for those who are present in this place, but for people living in all places. Alternate translation: “to you and your descendants” or “to you and everyone who will live after you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
355	ACT	2	39	v8vi	figs-explicit	πᾶσι τοῖς εἰς μακρὰν	1	to all who are at a distance	Since Peter is speaking to Jews as a fellow Jew, this is likely an implicit reference to the Jews who were living in other parts of the Roman Empire. However, this statement took on greater meaning when the church realized that “God has also given repentance unto life to the Gentiles,” as its leaders say in 11:18. So you could either express the likely initial meaning here in your translation, or you could leave the statement more general. Alternate translation: “to the Jews living in faraway parts of the empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
356	ACT	2	39	a185	figs-exclusive	Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν	1	the Lord our God	By the Lord our God, Peter means the God of the Jews. He is speaking of himself and his fellow apostles and of the people in the crowd, so use the inclusive form of the word our in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
357	ACT	2	39	a186	figs-idiom	ἂν προσκαλέσηται	1	may call	Peter is using the word call in an idiomatic sense here. Alternate translation: “may bring to salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
358	ACT	2	40	a187	figs-metonymy	ἑτέροις…λόγοις πλείοσιν	1	with many other words	Luke is using the term words figuratively to mean things that Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “by saying many other things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
359	ACT	2	40	v6ip	figs-hendiadys	διεμαρτύρατο, καὶ παρεκάλει αὐτοὺς	1	he testified and urged them	Here Luke is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word urged tells in what way Peter testified further about faith in Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this same idea with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “he testified urgently to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
360	ACT	2	40	a188	figs-activepassive	σώθητε	1	Be saved	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “Let God save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
361	ACT	2	40	wtd5	figs-explicit	ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης	1	from this perverse generation	The implication is that God is going to punish this perverse generation. Alternate translation: “from the punishment that this perverse generation will suffer if it does not repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
362	ACT	2	40	a189	figs-explicit	τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης	1	this perverse generation	The word perverse describes things or actions that do not conform to what is right and expected. Peter may be referring implicitly to how the people of this generation rejected and killed Jesus. Alternate translation: “this wicked generation that rejected and killed Jesus” or “the wicked people of this time who rejected and killed Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
363	ACT	2	41	k1kj	writing-endofstory	οὖν	1	Therefore	Luke uses the word Therefore to introduce information about what happened after the story of Pentecost as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
364	ACT	2	41	r9qz	figs-idiom	ἀποδεξάμενοι τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ	1	having received his word	Here, received means that the people in the crowd accepted that what Peter said was true. Alternate translation: “because they believed his word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
365	ACT	2	41	a190	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ	1	his word	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean what Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “what Peter said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
366	ACT	2	41	kz64	figs-activepassive	οἱ…ἐβαπτίσθησαν	1	they were baptized	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. The apostles themselves may have baptized all these people, but because so many people repented and wanted to be baptized, it is possible that some of the other believers may have baptized some of them. Alternate translation: “the apostles baptized them” or “the believers baptized them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
367	ACT	2	41	sv5j	figs-synecdoche	ψυχαὶ	1	souls	Luke is using one part of these people, their souls, to mean the people themselves. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
368	ACT	2	41	a47f	figs-activepassive	προσετέθησαν	1	were added	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “became part of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
369	ACT	2	42	a191	figs-abstractnouns	ἦσαν…προσκαρτεροῦντες τῇ διδαχῇ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῇ κοινωνίᾳ, τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου, καὶ ταῖς προσευχαῖς	1	they were continuing in the teaching of the apostles and in fellowship, in the breaking of bread and in prayers	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words teaching and fellowship, you could express the same ideas with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “they continued to learn from what the apostles taught and to share life with one another, and to break bread together and to pray together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
370	ACT	2	42	gc59	figs-synecdoche	τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου	1	in the breaking of bread	Luke could be using the word breaking to mean “eating,” and he could be using the word bread to mean “food.” In each case he would be figuratively using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking bread is one thing people do when they eat it, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing meals together. Alternate translation: “in sharing meals” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
371	ACT	2	42	a192	figs-explicit	τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου	1	in the breaking of bread	By the breaking of bread, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it and also sharing a cup of wine. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in observing the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
372	ACT	2	43	a193	figs-personification	ἐγίνετο…πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος	1	fear was coming on every soul	Here the word fear describes a deep respect for God. Luke describes this fear figuratively as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Alternate translation: “every soul began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
373	ACT	2	43	gi9v	figs-synecdoche	ἐγίνετο…πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος	1	fear was coming on every soul	Luke is using one part of a person, the soul, to mean the entire person. Alternate translation: “every person began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
374	ACT	2	43	a194	figs-hyperbole	ἐγίνετο…πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος	1	fear was coming on every soul	Luke says every as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “very many people began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
375	ACT	2	43	ys3y	figs-explicit	πολλά…τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα διὰ τῶν ἀποστόλων ἐγίνετο	1	many wonders and signs were happening through the apostles	Since Luke says that these things happened through the apostles, the implication is that God was doing them. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could make God the subject of this sentence and wonders and signs the object. Alternate translation: “God performed many wonders and signs through the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
376	ACT	2	43	q6dm	figs-doublet	πολλά…τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα	1	many wonders and signs	The terms wonders and signs mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:22. Alternate translation: “many great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
377	ACT	2	44	u8qk		ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ	1	to the same	See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in the same place” or “united in Christian fellowship”
378	ACT	2	44	jy2w	figs-hyperbole	εἶχον ἅπαντα κοινά	1	had all things in common	Luke may be saying all as a generalization to emphasize the powerful spirit of generosity among the believers. The next verse explains more specifically how the believers showed this generosity, and you could give some indication of that here. Alternate translation: “shared their belongings with one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
379	ACT	2	45	h8tn	figs-doublet	τὰ κτήματα καὶ τὰς ὑπάρξεις ἐπίπρασκον	1	they were selling their properties and their possessions	The words properties and possessions mean similar things. Luke may be using these words together for emphasis. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They were selling many valuable things that they owned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
380	ACT	2	45	f74s	writing-pronouns	καὶ διεμέριζον αὐτὰ	1	they were distributing them	Here the pronoun they refers to believers who sold things they owned, and the pronoun them refers to the money they received from these sales. Alternate translation: “the believers who sold these things were distributing the money that they received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
381	ACT	2	45	n9hi		πᾶσιν, καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν	1	to all, as anyone might have need	Alternate translation: “to everyone who needed help”
382	ACT	2	46	in43		καθ’ ἡμέραν τε προσκαρτεροῦντες ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	and, continuing unanimously	The word unanimously indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in 1:14. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Continuing to meet with one accord” or “Continuing to meet harmoniously”
383	ACT	2	46	a427	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	in the temple	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so here the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
384	ACT	2	46	q1ge	figs-synecdoche	κλῶντές…κατ’ οἶκον ἄρτον	1	breaking bread in each house	See how you translated the similar expression in 2:42. There were two possible meanings there, but here breaking bread seems to mean specifically sharing meals. Alternate translation: “having meals together in their homes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
385	ACT	2	46	i2yk	figs-metaphor	ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας	1	with exultation and sincerity of heart	Here, the heart figuratively represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “with feelings of exultation and sincerity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
386	ACT	2	46	a195	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας	1	with exultation and sincerity of heart	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words exultation and sincerity, you could express the same ideas with adverbs that would indicate feelings. Alternate translation: “joyfully and sincerely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
387	ACT	2	47	z6ig	figs-hyperbole	αἰνοῦντες τὸν Θεὸν καὶ ἔχοντες χάριν πρὸς ὅλον τὸν λαόν	1	praising God and having favor with the whole people	Luke says the whole people as a generalization to emphasize how widely the people favored the believers. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They praised God and enjoyed wide favor with the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
388	ACT	2	47	kc42	figs-activepassive	τοὺς σῳζομένους	1	those who were being saved	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom he was saving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
389	ACT	2	47	a196		ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό	1	to the same	See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “to their Christian fellowship”
390	ACT	3	intro	hpd9			0		Acts 3 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter The covenant God made with Abraham This chapter explains that Jesus came to the Jews in fulfillment of the covenant that God made with Abraham. Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter “Servant” Twice in this chapter Peter uses the word “Servant” as a title to mean “Messiah” (3:13, 3:26). He and other believers use the word in the same sense twice in chapter 4 as well (4:27, 4:30). The word takes on this meaning by allusion to the book of Isaiah, where Isaiah uses it to mean the person whom God has chosen for the special purpose of bringing salvation. In your translation, indicate in some way that “Servant” is a Messianic title. Jesus was not a servant of God in the more ordinary sense, in which the believers apply it to themselves in 4:29, for example. Jesus was fully the Son of God, sent to earth on a special mission. If you would not be able to make this clear by using the word “Servant,” you may wish to use the word “Messiah” instead. “You killed” (3:15) For the same reasons as when he was speaking on the day of Pentecost (2:23), Peter tells people in this chapter that they were guilty of killing Jesus. But he also tells them that they are the first ones to whom God has sent Jesus’ followers to invite them to repent (3:26). For further information and suggestions for how to make clear in your translation what Peter means, see the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to chapter 2 and the notes to this phrase in 2:23 and 3:15. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]]) Important textual issues in this chapter “the Lord our God” (3:22) In 3:22, some ancient manuscripts read “the Lord our God.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the Lord your God,” and still other ancient manuscripts read simply “the Lord God.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
391	ACT	3	1	b5rm	grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	Now	Luke uses the word Now to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. You can translate it with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
392	ACT	3	1	br7i	figs-explicit	εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν	1	to the temple	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “to the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
393	ACT	3	1	a198		τὴν ἐνάτην	1	the ninth hour	In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this time in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “three o’clock in the afternoon”
394	ACT	3	1	a199	translate-ordinal	τὴν ἐνάτην	1	the ninth hour	If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour nine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
395	ACT	3	2	f227	figs-activepassive	καί τις ἀνὴρ, χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ ὑπάρχων, ἐβαστάζετο, ὃν ἐτίθουν καθ’ ἡμέραν πρὸς τὴν θύραν τοῦ ἱεροῦ	1	And a certain man, being lame from the womb of his mother, was being carried, whom each day they placed at the gate of the temple	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form was being carried. Alternate translation: “And there was a certain man who had been lame since birth whom people would carry to the temple every day and place at the gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
396	ACT	3	2	u6nu	writing-background	καί τις ἀνὴρ	1	And a certain man	In this verse, Luke provides background information about this man to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
397	ACT	3	2	j68t	figs-metonymy	ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ	1	from the womb of his mother	Luke is figuratively describing the time of the lame man’s birth by association with the way he came from the womb of his mother when he was born. Alternate translation: “since birth” or “since he was born” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
398	ACT	3	2	a200	figs-activepassive	τὴν λεγομένην	1	that is called	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” or “whose name is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
399	ACT	3	2	a201	translate-names	Ὡραίαν	1	Beautiful	Beautiful is the name of one of the gates of the Jerusalem temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
400	ACT	3	2	a202	figs-explicit	εἰς τὸ ἱερόν	1	into the temple	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
401	ACT	3	3	a203	figs-explicit	ἠρώτα ἐλεημοσύνην λαβεῖν	1	asked to receive alms	The man specifically asked Peter and John to give him alms (that is, a charitable gift). Alternate translation: “asked to receive alms from them” or “asked them to give him alms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
402	ACT	3	4	xq4u		ἀτενίσας…Πέτρος εἰς αὐτὸν σὺν τῷ Ἰωάννῃ εἶπεν	1	Peter, looking intently at him with John, said	This means that both Peter and John looked at the man. It does not mean that Peter looked at the man and at John, and it does not mean that both Peter and John spoke to the man. Alternate translation: “Peter and John looked intently at him, and Peter said”
403	ACT	3	4	e3c6	figs-exclusive	βλέψον εἰς ἡμᾶς	1	Look at us	Peter is asking the man to look at him and John, not to look at himself as well, so use the exclusive form of us in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
404	ACT	3	6	x6bm	figs-metonymy	ἀργύριον καὶ χρυσίον	1	silver and gold	Peter is referring figuratively to money by association with the way that silver and gold were used for money at this time. Alternate translation: “money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
405	ACT	3	6	zi9t	figs-explicit	ὃ δὲ ἔχω, τοῦτό σοι δίδωμι	1	but what I have, this I give to you	What happens next in the story shows that by what I have, Peter implicitly means the authority that Jesus has given him to heal. Alternate translation: “but Jesus has given me the authority to heal, and I will use it on your behalf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
406	ACT	3	6	t2vf	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου	1	In the name of Jesus Christ the Nazarene	Here the name of Jesus figuratively represents his authority. Alternate translation: “By the authority of Jesus Christ the Nazarene, I command you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
407	ACT	3	6	a204	translate-names	Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου	1	of Jesus Christ the Nazarene	The word Nazarene describes someone who comes from the city of Nazareth. See how you translated it in 2:23. Alternate translation: “of Jesus Christ of Nazareth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
408	ACT	3	6	a205	figs-imperative	περιπάτει	1	walk	This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, it was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Alternate translation: “I give you the ability to walk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
409	ACT	3	7	ec6j	writing-pronouns	πιάσας αὐτὸν τῆς δεξιᾶς χειρὸς, ἤγειρεν αὐτόν; παραχρῆμα δὲ ἐστερεώθησαν αἱ βάσεις αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ σφυδρά	1	seizing him by the right hand, he raised him up, and immediately his feet and ankles were made strong	In this verse, the pronoun he refers to Peter, while the pronouns him and his refer to the lame man. You could indicate that specifically in at least some of the cases if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “seizing the man by the right hand, Peter raised him up, and immediately the man’s feet and ankles were made strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
410	ACT	3	7	a206	figs-activepassive	ἐστερεώθησαν αἱ βάσεις αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ σφυδρά	1	his feet and ankles were made strong	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “his feet and ankles became strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
411	ACT	3	8	a207	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	And	Luke is using the word translated And to indicate that the events in this verse happened as a result of the events in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
412	ACT	3	8	abc1	writing-pronouns	ἔστη καὶ περιεπάτει, καὶ εἰσῆλθεν σὺν αὐτοῖς	1	he stood and began to walk, and he entered with them	The pronoun he refers to the man who had been lame, and the pronoun them refers to Peter and John. You could indicate that specifically if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the man stood and began to walk, and the man entered with Peter and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
413	ACT	3	8	zp7x	figs-explicit	εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν	1	into the temple	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
414	ACT	3	9	a208	figs-hyperbole	πᾶς ὁ λαὸς	1	all the people	The word all is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the crowd that was in the courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
415	ACT	3	10	zy7h		ἐπεγίνωσκον…αὐτὸν, ὅτι αὐτὸς ἦν ὁ…καθήμενος	1	they recognized him, that he was the one sitting	Alternate translation: “they realized that he was the man who had been sitting”
416	ACT	3	10	p2zh	translate-names	τῇ Ὡραίᾳ Πύλῃ	1	the Beautiful Gate	This was the name of one of the entrances to the temple area. See how you translated the similar expression in 3:2. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
417	ACT	3	10	a209	figs-activepassive	ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ	1	they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with wonder and amazement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
418	ACT	3	10	j6zf	figs-doublet	ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ	1	they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him	The words wonder and amazement mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. You can combine the words in your translation if that might be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with complete amazement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
419	ACT	3	10	a210	figs-metaphor	ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ	1	they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him	Luke is speaking figuratively as if the people were containers that these responses could fill. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him made them completely amazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
420	ACT	3	10	a211	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ	1	they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word wonder and amazement, you could express the same idea with verbs. Alternate translation: “they wondered and marveled greatly at what had happened to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
421	ACT	3	11	a212	figs-hyperbole	πᾶς ὁ λαὸς	1	all the people	The word all is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the crowd that was there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
422	ACT	3	11	rk1m	translate-names	τῇ στοᾷ τῇ καλουμένῃ Σολομῶντος	1	the porch that is called Solomon’s	This is the name of a covered walkway in the Jerusalem temple courtyard. It consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof. People had named this porch after King Solomon. Alternate translation: “Solomon’s Porch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
423	ACT	3	11	rj43	figs-activepassive	τῇ καλουμένῃ	1	that is called	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” or “whose name is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
424	ACT	3	12	ndi3	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται	1	Men, Israelites	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
425	ACT	3	12	uyg1	figs-rquestion	τί θαυμάζετε ἐπὶ τούτῳ	1	why do you marvel at this?	Peter does not expect the crowd to tell him why they are marveling. He is using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you should not marvel at this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
426	ACT	3	12	j6ld	figs-rquestion	ἢ ἡμῖν τί ἀτενίζετε, ὡς ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ εὐσεβείᾳ πεποιηκόσιν τοῦ περιπατεῖν αὐτόν?	1	Or why do you look intently at us, as if we have made him to walk by our own power or godliness?	Peter is using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Do not stare at us. We did not make him walk by our own power or godliness!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
427	ACT	3	12	g4y1	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν…ἰδίᾳ	1	at us … our own	By us and our own, Peter means himself and John but not also the people in the crowd. So use the exclusive forms of us and our in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
428	ACT	3	12	mwd9	figs-hendiadys	ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ εὐσεβείᾳ	1	by our own power or godliness	Peter may be expressing a single idea by using two words connected with or. The term godliness describes what the crowd may consider the source or nature of the power that he and John have. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “by our own godly power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
429	ACT	3	13	q8q2	translate-names	Ἀβραὰμ…Ἰσαὰκ…Ἰακώβ	1	Abraham … Isaac … Jacob	These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
430	ACT	3	13	a213	figs-metaphor	τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν	1	our fathers	Peter is using the term fathers figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
431	ACT	3	13	kmqw	figs-gendernotations	τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν	1		The term fathers could mean: (1) in a generic sense that includes both men and women, the ancestors of the Israelites. If you decide to retain this metaphor in your translation, you could say “fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (2) Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. In that case, Peter would be repeating the meaning of the previous phrase, and the term would have a masculine meaning. Alternate translation: “of the patriarchs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
432	ACT	3	13	a214		τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, Ἰησοῦν	1	his Servant Jesus	See the discussion of the term Servant in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “Jesus his Messiah”
433	ACT	3	13	a215		παρεδώκατε	1	delivered up	Alternate translation: “handed over for trial”
434	ACT	3	13	cp1j	figs-idiom	κατὰ πρόσωπον Πειλάτου	1	before the face of Pilate	Here the phrase before the face of means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “in the presence of Pilate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
435	ACT	3	13	a216	translate-names	Πειλάτου	1	Pilate	Pilate is the name of a man. His full name was Pontius Pilate. He was the governor of Judea during the time of Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
436	ACT	3	13	yy96	figs-nominaladj	κρίναντος ἐκείνου ἀπολύειν	1	when that one had decided to release him	Peter is using the demonstrative adjective that as a noun to refer to a certain person, Pilate. (ULT adds one to indicate that.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could indicate specifically whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “when Pilate had decided to release him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
437	ACT	3	14	a217	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	But	Peter uses this word to introduce a contrast between what Pilate wanted to do and what these people demanded he do instead. Alternate translation: “Even though Pilate wanted to release Jesus,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
438	ACT	3	14	a218	figs-nominaladj	τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον	1	the Holy and Righteous One	Peter is using both the adjective Holy and the adjective Righteous to indicate a certain person, Jesus. (ULT adds One to indicate that.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could indicate specifically whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who was holy and righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
439	ACT	3	14	a219	figs-doublet	τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον	1	the Holy and Righteous One	The terms Holy and Righteous mean similar things. Peter is using the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Supremely Holy One” or “Jesus, who was supremely holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
440	ACT	3	14	a220	figs-explicit	τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον	1	the Holy and Righteous One	This description of Jesus is an implicit assertion that he is the Messiah. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
441	ACT	3	14	s6qj	figs-activepassive	ᾐτήσασθε ἄνδρα, φονέα χαρισθῆναι ὑμῖν	1	for a man, a murderer, to be granted to you	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “asked Pilate to release to you a man who was a murderer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
442	ACT	3	15	a221	figs-synecdoche	ἀπεκτείνατε	1	you killed	It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says figuratively that the Jewish people in the crowd killed him because their demands led to his death. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:23. Alternate translation: “you demanded the death of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
443	ACT	3	15	ljn8	figs-explicit	τὸν…Ἀρχηγὸν τῆς ζωῆς	1	the Originator of Life	Peter is using the expression the Originator of Life as another title for Jesus. This expression could be a reference to the way Jesus, as the Son of God, took part in the original creation of all life. It could also be a reference to the way Jesus gives spiritual life to all who believe in him. Or it could mean both things. In any event, Peter is drawing a contrast between the life-giving Jesus whom the people rejected and the life-taking murderer whom they asked Pilate to release. It may be best in your translation to bring out this contrast while leaving the specific meaning open. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who gives life rather than taking it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
444	ACT	3	15	a222	figs-nominaladj	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	from the dead	Peter is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
445	ACT	3	15	jwb1	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	we	Peter is speaking at least of himself and John, and perhaps also of the other apostles, but not of the people he is addressing. So use the exclusive form of we in your translation if your language marks that distinction. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that we is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “we and the other apostles whom Jesus chose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
446	ACT	3	15	a223	writing-pronouns	ἡμεῖς	1	we	If you conclude that Peter is referring only to himself and John, and if your language uses dual forms, use the dual form of the pronoun we here, since it would apply to two people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
447	ACT	3	16	abc2	figs-infostructure	ἐπὶ τῇ πίστει τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ, τοῦτον ὃν θεωρεῖτε καὶ οἴδατε, ἐστερέωσεν τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	by faith in his name, this one whom you see and know, his name has made strong	Your language might naturally present the phrases in this sentence in a different order. Alternate translation: “this man whom you see and know had faith in his name, and his name has made him strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
448	ACT	3	16	qt8w	writing-pronouns	τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ…τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	in his name … his name	The pronoun his refers to Jesus in both of these instances. Alternate translation: “in the name of Jesus … that name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
449	ACT	3	16	a224	figs-metonymy	τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ…τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	in his name … his name	Peter is using the name of Jesus figuratively to mean his authority or power. Alternate translation: “in the authority of Jesus … the authority of Jesus” or “in the power of Jesus … the power of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
450	ACT	3	16	abc3	writing-pronouns	ἡ πίστις ἡ δι’ αὐτοῦ, ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ	1	the faith that is through him has given to him	The first instance of the pronoun him refers to Jesus, and the second instance refers to the man who had been lame. Alternate translation: “the faith that is through Jesus has given to this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
451	ACT	3	16	a225	figs-personification	ἡ πίστις ἡ δι’ αὐτοῦ, ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ τὴν ὁλοκληρίαν ταύτην	1	the faith that is through him has given to him this complete health	Peter is speaking of faith figuratively as if it were a living thing that could have given complete health to the man. Alternate translation: “because this man had faith in Jesus, Jesus has given him this complete health” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
452	ACT	3	17	v45t		καὶ νῦν	1	And now	Peter uses the expression And now to shift the people’s attention away from the lame man so that he can speak to them directly. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this same purpose.
453	ACT	3	17	a226	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Peter addresses the people figuratively as his brothers because they are related to him as fellow descendants of the founders of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “my kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
454	ACT	3	17	a227	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Although the term brothers is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
455	ACT	3	17	x62k	figs-explicit	κατὰ ἄγνοιαν ἐπράξατε	1	you acted in ignorance	Peter likely means that the people acted in ignorance of the fact that Jesus was the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you acted in ignorance of the fact that Jesus was the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
456	ACT	3	17	a228	figs-ellipsis	ὥσπερ καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες ὑμῶν	1	as also your rulers	Peter is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and that your rulers also acted in ignorance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
457	ACT	3	18	gcc1	figs-infostructure	ὁ δὲ Θεὸς ἃ προκατήγγειλεν διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, παθεῖν τὸν Χριστὸν αὐτοῦ, ἐπλήρωσεν οὕτως	1	But what God foretold through the mouth of all the prophets, that his Christ would suffer, he has fulfilled thus	Your language might naturally put first in this sentence the information that God fulfilled prophecies when Christ suffered. Alternate translation: “But in this way God has fulfilled what he foretold through the mouth of all the prophets, that his Christ would suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
458	ACT	3	18	ms6d		διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν	1	through the mouth of all the prophets	Since Peter is speaking of a group of people, the prophets, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of mouth. Alternate translation: “through the mouths of all the prophets”
459	ACT	3	18	z3l7	figs-metonymy	διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν	1	through the mouth of all the prophets	Peter is figuratively using the mouth of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what all the prophets said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
460	ACT	3	18	a229	figs-hyperbole	πάντων τῶν προφητῶν	1	of all the prophets	Peter is using the word all as a generalization. It is true that the overall witness of Old Testament prophecy is that the Messiah would come first in humility and suffering, but not every prophet spoke specifically of the sufferings of Christ. Alternate translation: “of many prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
461	ACT	3	19	cw18	figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέψατε	1	turn back	Peter is speaking of his listeners figuratively as if they were traveling somewhere and had taken the wrong way and needed to turn back onto the right way. Alternate translation: “start obeying the Lord again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
462	ACT	3	19	zm6y	figs-activepassive	πρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας	1	for your sins to be wiped away	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “so that God will wipe away your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
463	ACT	3	19	a230	figs-metaphor	πρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας	1	for your sins to be wiped away	Peter is speaking of sins as if they would be physically wiped away when God forgave them. Alternate translation: “so that God will forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
464	ACT	3	20	a231	figs-personification	ὅπως ἂν ἔλθωσιν καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου	1	so that times of refreshment may come from the face of the Lord	Peter is speaking of these times figuratively as if they could actively come to his listeners on their own. Alternate translation: “so that the Lord may send you times of refreshing from his face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
465	ACT	3	20	x3ca	figs-abstractnouns	καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως	1	times of refreshment	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word refreshment, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “refreshing” or “restful.” Alternate translation: “refreshing times” or “restful times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
466	ACT	3	20	f2wm	figs-metaphor	ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου	1	from the face of the Lord	Peter is using the term face figuratively to represent the presence of the Lord. Alternate translation: “from the presence of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
467	ACT	3	20	h3nk	figs-explicit	ἀποστείλῃ	1	he may send	Peter is referring implicitly to Christ’s coming again. Alternate translation: “he may again send” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
468	ACT	3	20	yzr6	figs-activepassive	τὸν προκεχειρισμένον ὑμῖν	1	the one appointed for you	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the one whom he has appointed for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
469	ACT	3	21	vgn8	figs-personification	ὃν δεῖ οὐρανὸν μὲν δέξασθαι	1	whom it is necessary for heaven to receive	Peter is speaking figuratively of heaven as if it were a person who has welcomed Jesus into his home. Alternate translation: “who must remain in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
470	ACT	3	21	x2f3	figs-abstractnouns	ἄχρι χρόνων ἀποκαταστάσεως πάντων	1	the times of the restoration of all things	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word restoration, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “restore.” Alternate translation: “until the times when God will restore all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
471	ACT	3	21	a2m8	figs-idiom	ἀπ’ αἰῶνος	1	from the age	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
472	ACT	3	21	a12i	figs-metonymy	διὰ στόματος τῶν ἁγίων…αὐτοῦ προφητῶν	1	through the mouth of his holy prophets	Peter is figuratively using the mouth of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what his holy prophets said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
473	ACT	3	22	a232	figs-quotesinquotes	Μωϋσῆς μὲν εἶπεν, ὅτι προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα, ὅσα ἂν λαλήσῃ πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	Moses indeed said, ‘The Lord our God will raise up for you a prophet like me from your brothers. You will listen to him according to everything—whatever he may speak to you	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses indeed said that the Lord our God would raise up a prophet like himself for us Israelites from among our brothers. Moses said that we were to listen to him according to everything—whatever he might speak to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
474	ACT	3	22	a233	translate-names	Μωϋσῆς	1	Moses	Moses is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
475	ACT	3	22	a249	translate-textvariants	Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν	1	The Lord our God	See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to use this reading or one of two other possible readings, “The Lord your God” or “The Lord God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
476	ACT	3	22	a250	figs-exclusive	Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν	1	The Lord our God	Moses is speaking of himself and his fellow Israelites, whom he is addressing, so use the inclusive form of the word our in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
477	ACT	3	22	v5nf	figs-idiom	ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει	1	will raise up for you	Here the expression raise up does not mean “bring back to life,” as it did in 2:24 and 2:32. In this context, it refers instead to God giving someone the mission to go as a prophet to certain people with a message for them. Alternate translation: “will send to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
478	ACT	3	22	t8di	figs-metaphor	τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν	1	your brothers	Moses is using the term brothers to mean people who are fellow descendants with his listeners of the founders of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “your kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
479	ACT	3	22	a234	figs-declarative	αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα	1	You will listen to him according to everything	Moses is using a future statement to give a command. Alternate translation: “You must listen to everything he tells you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
480	ACT	3	22	a235	figs-idiom	αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα	1	You will listen to him according to everything	Here, listen is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “You must obey every command that he gives you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
481	ACT	3	23	a236	figs-quotesinquotes	ἔσται δὲ πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ	1	But it will be that every soul that does not listen to that prophet will be destroyed from the people	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses also said that every soul that did not listen to that prophet would be destroyed from the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
482	ACT	3	23	t8a5	figs-activepassive	πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ	1	every soul that does not listen to that prophet will be destroyed from the people	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will destroy from the people every soul that does not listen to that prophet” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
483	ACT	3	23	a237	figs-declarative	πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ	1	every soul that does not listen to that prophet will be destroyed from the people	Moses could be using a future statement to give a command, in which case he would be telling the people to take this action. Alternate translation: “you must destroy from the people every soul that does not listen to that prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
484	ACT	3	23	a238	figs-synecdoche	πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις	1	every soul that	Moses is using one part of a person, the soul, to mean the entire person. Alternate translation: “every person who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
485	ACT	3	23	a239	figs-idiom	ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου	1	does not listen to that prophet	Here, listen is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “does not obey that prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
486	ACT	3	24	u6x3	figs-hyperbole	πάντες…οἱ προφῆται	1	all the prophets	Here the phrase all the prophets is probably not the same kind of generalization that it seems to be in 3:18. It is true in a more literal sense that all the prophets announced these days. There was something in the messages of each one of them that pointed to the culmination of God’s work in the coming of Jesus. So even if your language does not use generalizations for emphasis, you can translate these words just as Peter says them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
487	ACT	3	24	xp9h		ἀπὸ Σαμουὴλ καὶ τῶν καθεξῆς	1	from Samuel and those after him	Alternate translation: “beginning with Samuel and continuing with those who lived after he did”
488	ACT	3	24	a240	translate-names	Σαμουὴλ	1	Samuel	Samuel is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
489	ACT	3	24	m9pr	figs-idiom	τὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας	1	these days	Peter is using the word days idiomatically to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “this time” or “these times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
490	ACT	3	24	a241	figs-explicit	τὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας	1	these days	Peter is referring to a specific time to mean implicitly what is happening at that time. Alternate translation: “the things that are happening now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
491	ACT	3	25	rh2n	figs-metonymy	ὑμεῖς ἐστε οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν προφητῶν	1	You are the sons of the prophets	Peter is using the word sons figuratively in the sense of “heirs,” by association with the way that children inherit from their parents. He means that the Israelites living at this time are going to receive something as a legacy from those who lived before them. Alternate translation: “You are the ones who are going to receive what the prophets promised” or “You are the ones who are going to experience what the prophets foretold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
492	ACT	3	25	a242	figs-gendernotations	οἱ υἱοὶ	1	the sons	Although the term sons is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “the sons and daughters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
493	ACT	3	25	a243	figs-metonymy	καὶ τῆς διαθήκης ἧς διέθετο ὁ Θεὸς πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν	1	and of the covenant that God made with your fathers	The figurative sense of sons as “heirs” continues in this phrase. Alternate translation: “and who are going to receive what God promised to your fathers when he made a covenant with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
494	ACT	3	25	a244	figs-quotesinquotes	πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν, λέγων πρὸς Ἀβραάμ, καὶ ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου ἐνευλογηθήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς	1	with your fathers, saying to Abraham, ‘And in your seed will all the families of the earth be blessed’	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “with your fathers when he said to Abraham that in his seed all the families of the earth would be blessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
495	ACT	3	25	a245	figs-metaphor	τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν	1	your fathers	Here, fathers figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “your ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
496	ACT	3	25	wid4	figs-gendernotations	τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν	1		Although the term fathers is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “your fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
497	ACT	3	25	mad5	figs-metaphor	ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου	1	in your seed	The term seed figuratively means “offspring.” It is a word picture. Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. Alternate translation: “through your descendants” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
498	ACT	3	25	a246	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου	1	in your seed	As the apostle Paul notes in Galatians 3:16, God used the singular form of the word seed when he said this to Abraham, and so the ultimate fulfillment of this promise came when God sent Jesus as the Savior for everyone in the world who would believe in him. That may also be what Peter has in view here, since he refers in the next verse to God’s “Servant,” meaning the Messiah. Alternate translation: “through the Messiah, who will be your descendant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
499	ACT	3	25	a247	figs-activepassive	ἐνευλογηθήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς	1	will all the families of the earth be blessed	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will bless all the families of the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
500	ACT	3	25	g31m	figs-metonymy	πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς	1	all the families of the earth	Here, families refers figuratively to people groups or nations by association with the way that many of them consist of people who have a common ancestry. Alternate translation: “all the nations of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
501	ACT	3	26	b7tz	figs-idiom	ἀναστήσας ὁ Θεὸς τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, ἀπέστειλεν αὐτὸν	1	God, having raised up his Servant, sent him	The expression raised up has the same meaning here as in 3:22. See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “When God appointed Jesus as the Messiah, he sent him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
502	ACT	3	26	z5q6		τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ	1	his Servant	See the discussion of the term Servant in the General Notes to this chapter, and see how you translated that term in 3:13. Alternate translation: “his Messiah”
503	ACT	3	26	x8ss	figs-metaphor	τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν	1	by turning each of you from your wickedness	Here, turning someone from something figuratively means leading that person to stop doing that thing. See how you translated the similar expression in 3:19. Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to repent of your wickedness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
504	ACT	3	26	a248	figs-abstractnouns	τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν	1	by turning each of you from your wickedness	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word wickedness, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “wicked.” Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to stop doing wicked things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
505	ACT	4	intro	pv3a			0		Acts 4 General Notes Structure and formatting Some translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:25–26. Special concepts in this chapter Unity The first Christians wanted very much to be united. They wanted to believe the same things and share everything they owned and help those who needed help. “Signs and wonders” This phrase refers to things that only God can do. The Christians wanted God to do what only he could do so that people would believe that what they said about Jesus was true. Important figures of speech in this chapter The “head of the corner” or cornerstone (4:11) The cornerstone was the first piece of stone that people put down when they were building a building out of stone. Peter refers to it as the “head of the corner” in 4:11. This is a metaphor for the most important part of something, the part on which everything else depends. To say that Jesus is the cornerstone of the church is to say that nothing in the church is more important than Jesus and that everything in the church depends on Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]]) Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter “no other name” (4:12) “There is no other name under heaven given among men by which we must be saved” (Acts 4:12). As a note to this verse explains, in this expression the term “name” figuratively represents a person. So with these words, Peter was saying that no other person who has ever been on the earth or who will ever be on earth can save people. This statement might cause some controversy in some places today, but it is an essential part of the Christian message, and it should be translated so that its meaning is clear.
506	ACT	4	1	abc4	writing-pronouns	λαλούντων…αὐτῶν	1	as they were speaking	The pronoun they refers to Peter and John. Alternate translation: “as Peter and John were speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
507	ACT	4	1	ew3l	figs-explicit	ὁ στρατηγὸς τοῦ ἱεροῦ	1	the captain of the temple	The temple had its own guards, and this man was their commanding officer. Alternate translation: “the commander of the temple guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
508	ACT	4	1	a253	translate-names	οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι	1	the Sadducees	Sadducees is the name of a group of Jewish priests. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
509	ACT	4	1	m74s	figs-explicit	οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι	1	the Sadducees	The Sadducees would have been particularly upset that Peter and John were saying that God raised Jesus from the dead, because they did not believe in the resurrection. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain that explicitly here. Alternate translation: “the Sadducees, who do not believe in the resurrection,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
510	ACT	4	1	d3tv	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι	1	the Sadducees	Luke is using the name of the whole group to mean some of its members. Alternate translation: “some of the Sadducees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
511	ACT	4	2	abc5	writing-pronouns	διαπονούμενοι διὰ τὸ διδάσκειν αὐτοὺς	1	greatly troubled because they were teaching	The pronoun they refers to Peter and John. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “These men were greatly troubled because Peter and John were teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
512	ACT	4	2	mg5l	figs-abstractnouns	καταγγέλλειν ἐν τῷ Ἰησοῦ τὴν ἀνάστασιν, τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	proclaiming in Jesus the resurrection that is from the dead	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you could express the same idea with an equivalent phrase. Peter and John were saying that God would raise people from the dead in the same way that he had raised Jesus. Translate this in a way that allows the resurrection to refer to both Jesus’ resurrection and the general resurrection of other people. Alternate translation: “proclaiming that God makes people alive again who have died, just as God had done for Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
513	ACT	4	2	np5g	figs-nominaladj	τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	from the dead	Peter is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
514	ACT	4	3	a254	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	And	Luke is using the word translated And to introduce what the men who came up to Peter and John did because they were so troubled by their teaching. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
515	ACT	4	3	a255	writing-pronouns	ἐπέβαλον αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας	1	they laid hands on them	The pronoun they refers to the priests, the captain of the temple, and the Sadducees. The pronoun them refers to Peter and John. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the priests, the captain of the temple, and the Sadducees laid hands on Peter and John” or “the men who had come up to Peter and John laid hands on them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
516	ACT	4	3	zla7	figs-metonymy	ἐπέβαλον αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας	1	they laid hands on them	The expression laid hands on figuratively means to arrest someone, by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their hands. Alternate translation: “they arrested them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
517	ACT	4	3	a256	figs-abstractnouns	ἔθεντο εἰς τήρησιν	1	put them in custody	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word custody, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “imprison.” Alternate translation: “they imprisoned them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
518	ACT	4	3	h5f9	figs-explicit	ἦν γὰρ ἑσπέρα ἤδη	1	since it was already evening	The implication is that the ruling council, which Luke describes in 4:5–6, would not meet to question anyone at night. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “since it was already evening and the council would not meet to question them at night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
519	ACT	4	4	a257	writing-endofstory	δὲ	1	But	Luke uses the word But to introduce information about what happened after this much of the story as a result of the events within the story itself. This is not the end of the whole story, but it is the end of a significant part of it. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a significant part of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
520	ACT	4	4	a258	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	the word	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that Peter and John shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
521	ACT	4	4	bm1f	figs-gendernotations	ἀριθμὸς τῶν ἀνδρῶν	1	the number of the men	Luke is not using the word men in a generic sense here. The figure of 5,000 is the number of the men alone. It does not include women and children. So it would not be accurate to translate men as “people.” Instead, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this distinction explicitly. Alternate translation: “the number of the men alone, not counting the women and children,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
522	ACT	4	4	qd8g	figs-explicit	ἐγενήθη…ὡς χιλιάδες πέντε	1	became about 5,000	The word translated became could mean: (1) the community of believers in Jesus grew to a total of 5,000 as a result of the professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “in the community of believers grew to about 5,000” (2) “was,” and that would indicate that 5,000 men made professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “who put their faith in Jesus that day was about 5,000” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
523	ACT	4	5	lw2d	writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ	1	And it happened that	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
524	ACT	4	5	cdj1	figs-explicit	συναχθῆναι αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς	1	their rulers and elders and scribes were gathered together	Luke is implicitly describing the Sanhedrin, the Jewish ruling council, which consisted of these three groups of people. Luke describes this council explicitly as “the Sanhedrin” in 4:15. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could identify it by name here. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, consisting of their rulers and elders and scribes, was gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
525	ACT	4	5	j6p8	writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς	1	their rulers and elders and scribes	The pronoun their refers to the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “the rulers and elders and scribes of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
526	ACT	4	5	i9tj	figs-activepassive	συναχθῆναι	1	were gathered together	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
527	ACT	4	6	a259	figs-explicit	Ἅννας ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς, καὶ Καϊάφας	1	Annas the high priest, and Caiaphas	Luke describes Annas as the high priest, but the actual situation was complicated. At this time the Romans were appointing the high priests for Judea. One Roman official had appointed Annas some years earlier, but ten years after that, another official deposed him and named his son-in-law Caiaphas high priest instead. However, the Jews still recognized Annas’ claim to the position. If you decide to clarify this for your readers, it would probably be best to state the matter as simply as possible. Alternate translation: “Annas, whom the Jews recognized as the high priest, and Caiaphas, whom a Roman official had appointed as the high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
528	ACT	4	6	l44n	translate-names	Ἅννας…Καϊάφας…Ἰωάννης…Ἀλέξανδρος	1	Annas … Caiaphas … John … Alexander	These are the names of four men. The John mentioned here was a member of the high priest’s family. This is not the same John as the apostle. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
529	ACT	4	6	a260		ὅσοι ἦσαν ἐκ γένους ἀρχιερατικοῦ	1	as many as were from the high priestly family	Alternate translation: “all the other members of the high priestly family who were members of the council”
530	ACT	4	7	abc6	writing-pronouns	στήσαντες αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ μέσῳ, ἐπυνθάνοντο	1	having set them in their midst, they asked them	The pronoun them refers to Peter and John, and the pronouns their and they refer to the council members. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the council members had set Peter and John in their midst, the members asked them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
531	ACT	4	7	t1eq	figs-doublet	ἐν ποίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόματι ἐποιήσατε τοῦτο ὑμεῖς?	1	By what power or in what name have you done this?	The words power and name (meaning authority; see next note) mean similar things. The council members may be using them together to ask a comprehensive or emphatic question. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “By whatever means were you able to do this?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
532	ACT	4	7	jc21	figs-metonymy	ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόματι	1	in what name	Here, name refers figuratively to authority. Alternate translation: “by what authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
533	ACT	4	7	a261	figs-youdual	ὑμεῖς	1	you	Since the council members are speaking to two men, you would be dual if your language uses that form. (All other pronouns in this account that refer to Peter and John would also be dual, such as them in its two instances in this verse.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
534	ACT	4	8	su5x	figs-activepassive	Πέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, εἶπεν	1	Peter, filled with the Holy Spirit, said	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. See how you translated the comparable expression in 2:4. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled Peter and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
535	ACT	4	8	a262	figs-metaphor	Πέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, εἶπεν	1	Peter, filled with the Holy Spirit, said	Luke is speaking figuratively of Peter as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit filled. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired Peter and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
536	ACT	4	8	a263	figs-merism	ἄρχοντες τοῦ λαοῦ καὶ πρεσβύτεροι	1	Rulers of the people and elders	Peter is addressing the entire council by referring to its two components. Some of the members had ruling responsibilities. Others, the elders, were added to the council to bring its total membership up to 70, since according to Exodus 24:1, that was the number of elders who accompanied Moses when God confirmed the covenant with Israel at Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “You members of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
537	ACT	4	8	a264	figs-explicit	τοῦ λαοῦ	1	of the people	Here, the people means specifically the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
538	ACT	4	9	pq85	figs-irony	εἰ ἡμεῖς σήμερον ἀνακρινόμεθα ἐπὶ εὐεργεσίᾳ ἀνθρώπου ἀσθενοῦς, ἐν τίνι οὗτος σέσωσται	1	if we are being questioned today concerning a good deed to a sick man, by what means he was made well	Peter is not suggesting seriously that the subject of the questioning is uncertain. He knows the subject, but he is suggesting ironically that it is uncertain so that he can describe it from his own perspective. The council asked by what power or authority he and John did “this,” implying that “this” was something bad, a public disturbance that troubled the authorities. In response, Peter asserts that “this” was instead something good, a good deed to a sick man. If it would be helpful to your readers, in your translation you could indicate the meaning that Peter is communicating through this irony. Alternate translation: “what we actually did was a good deed for a sick man, and if you want to know by what means he was made well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
539	ACT	4	9	je6d	figs-activepassive	ἡμεῖς…ἀνακρινόμεθα	1	we are being questioned	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you are questioning us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
540	ACT	4	9	b92n	figs-activepassive	οὗτος σέσωσται	1	he was made well	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he became healthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
541	ACT	4	10	snd5	figs-activepassive	γνωστὸν ἔστω πᾶσιν ὑμῖν καὶ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραὴλ	1	let it be known to you all and to all the people of Israel	The word translated known is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “then we want you and all the people of Israel to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
542	ACT	4	10	j3px	writing-pronouns	πᾶσιν ὑμῖν	1	to you all	The pronoun you refers to the council members. Alternate translation: “to all of you council members” or “to all of you who are questioning us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
543	ACT	4	10	khn7	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι	1	in the name	Here, name refers figuratively to power and authority. Alternate translation: “through the power” or “by the authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
544	ACT	4	10	a265	translate-names	Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου	1	of Jesus Christ the Nazarene	See how you translated this in 2:22 and 3:6. Alternate translation: “of Jesus Christ of Nazareth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
545	ACT	4	10	a266	figs-synecdoche	ὃν ὑμεῖς ἐσταυρώσατε	1	whom you crucified	It was the Romans who literally crucified Jesus, but Peter says figuratively that these Jewish leaders crucified him because their demands led to his death. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:23. Alternate translation: “whom you demanded to be crucified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
546	ACT	4	10	jyj6	figs-idiom	ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	whom God raised from the dead	As in 2:24, the idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “whom God made alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
547	ACT	4	10	a267	figs-nominaladj	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	from the dead	Peter is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
548	ACT	4	11	nwg6	writing-pronouns	οὗτός	1	He	The pronoun He refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
549	ACT	4	11	w195	figs-metaphor	ὁ λίθος ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων, ὁ γενόμενος εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας	1	the stone that was rejected by you, the builders, which has been made into the head of the corner	Peter is quoting from Psalm 118:22, and the quotation contains a metaphor. This psalm is figuratively describing the Messiah as if he were a stone that builders chose not to use. This means that people will reject him. When the psalm says that this stone became the cornerstone, this means figuratively that God will nevertheless make the Messiah the ruler of these people. However, since this is a quotation from Scripture, we recommend that you translate the words directly rather than providing a non-figurative explanation of them, even if your language does not customarily use such figures of speech. If you want to explain the meaning of the metaphor, we recommend that you do that in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
550	ACT	4	11	c1bh	figs-activepassive	ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων	1	that was rejected by you, the builders	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that you, the builders, rejected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
551	ACT	4	11	f1nx	figs-idiom	κεφαλὴν γωνίας	1	the head of the corner	The phrase the head of the corner is an idiom that refers to a large stone with straight edges that builders would place down first and use as a reference to make sure that the walls of a stone building were straight and that the building was oriented in the right direction. Your language may have its own term for such a stone. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the cornerstone” or “the reference stone for the whole building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
552	ACT	4	12	a268	figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία	1	there is no salvation in anyone else	In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “there is no salvation in no one else.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he is the only one in whom there is salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
553	ACT	4	12	tq3z	figs-abstractnouns	οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία	1	there is no salvation in anyone else	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word salvation, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “he is the only one who is able to save” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
554	ACT	4	12	l66w	figs-activepassive	οὐδὲ…ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν τὸ δεδομένον	1	there is no other name under heaven given	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God has not given any other name under heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
555	ACT	4	12	iz7k	figs-metonymy	οὐδὲ…ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον…ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς	1	there is no other name … by which we must be saved	Here, name figuratively represents a person, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “there is no other person … by whom we must be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
556	ACT	4	12	jm25	figs-idiom	ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν	1	under heaven	This is an idiom. See how you translated it in 2:5. Alternate translation: “on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
557	ACT	4	12	a269	figs-gendernotations	ἐν ἀνθρώποις	1	among men	Peter is using the term men in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “among people” or “to people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
558	ACT	4	12	gg8h	figs-activepassive	ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς	1	by which we must be saved	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that can save us” or, if you translate “name” as “person,” “who can save us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
559	ACT	4	12	tdw8	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	we	Peter is using the word we to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
560	ACT	4	13	r6d6	figs-idiom	θεωροῦντες	1	seeing	Luke is using the word seeing idiomatically to mean that the council members noticed this and found it significant. Alternate translation: “taking note of” or “impressed with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
561	ACT	4	13	t6kc	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν τοῦ Πέτρου παρρησίαν καὶ Ἰωάννου	1	the boldness of Peter and John	Here the abstract noun boldness refers to the way in which Peter and John responded to the Jewish leaders. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the same idea with an adverb or an adjective. Alternate translation: “how boldly Peter and John had spoken” or “how bold Peter and John were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
562	ACT	4	13	qaa5	figs-explicit	καταλαβόμενοι	1	realizing	The implication is that the Jewish leaders realized this because of the way Peter and John spoke. Alternate translation: “realizing from the way they spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
563	ACT	4	13	xn39	writing-pronouns	ἐθαύμαζον; ἐπεγίνωσκόν τε αὐτοὺς, ὅτι σὺν τῷ Ἰησοῦ ἦσαν	1	they marveled, and they recognized them, that they had been with Jesus	Here the pronoun they refers in its first two instances to the council members, and in its third instance it refers to Peter and John, as does the pronoun them. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this and to state the meaning here more concisely. Alternate translation: “the council members marveled, and they recognized that Peter and John had been with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
564	ACT	4	13	erv7	figs-doublet	ἄνθρωποι ἀγράμματοί εἰσιν καὶ ἰδιῶται	1	they were uneducated and ordinary men	The words uneducated and ordinary mean similar things. Both words indicate that Peter and John had no formal education. Luke uses them together for emphasis, to express from the council members’ perspective how amazed they were. Alternate translation: “they had no formal education at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
565	ACT	4	14	h3cy	figs-activepassive	τόν…ἄνθρωπον…τὸν τεθεραπευμένον	1	the man who had been healed	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
566	ACT	4	14	a270	writing-pronouns	σὺν αὐτοῖς ἑστῶτα, τὸν τεθεραπευμένον, οὐδὲν εἶχον	1	standing with them, they had nothing	The pronoun them refers to Peter and John, and the pronoun they refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “standing with Peter and John, the council members had nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
567	ACT	4	14	fq4w	figs-explicit	οὐδὲν εἶχον ἀντειπεῖν	1	they had nothing to say in opposition	The implication is that anything the council members said in opposition would have been in an attempt to discredit the claim that the man had been healed in the name of Jesus. But there was nothing they could say, since the evidence that the claim was true was right in front of them in the person of the formerly lame man standing on his own. Alternate translation: “they had nothing to say to discredit the account” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
568	ACT	4	15	ql31	writing-pronouns	κελεύσαντες…αὐτοὺς ἔξω τοῦ Συνεδρίου ἀπελθεῖν, συνέβαλλον πρὸς ἀλλήλους	1	having commanded them to go outside the Sanhedrin, they conferred among themselves	The pronoun them refers at least to Peter and John, and probably also to the man who was healed, while the pronoun they refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “having commanded Peter and John and the man who was healed to go outside the Sanhedrin, the council members conferred among themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
569	ACT	4	15	a271	translate-names	τοῦ Συνεδρίου	1	the Sanhedrin	Sanhedrin is the name of the Jewish ruling council. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
570	ACT	4	15	a272	figs-metonymy	τοῦ Συνεδρίου	1	the Sanhedrin	Luke is figuratively using the name of the Jewish ruling council to mean the meeting place of that council. Alternate translation: “the place where the Sanhedrin met” or “the council chamber” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
571	ACT	4	16	p4g6	figs-rquestion	τί ποιήσωμεν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις?	1	What should we do to these men?	This could mean: (1) the Jewish leaders were using the question form to express their frustration because they realize that they cannot punish Peter and John. As 4:21 indicates explicitly, and as the leaders suggest here, they are afraid of how the people might respond if they do. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is very difficult to know what we should do to these men!” (2) the leaders were asking one another a genuine question, because ultimately they do decide to do something to Peter and John. They warn them not to speak or teach in the name of Jesus, with an implied threat of punishment if they do. In that case it would be accurate to translate this as a question. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
572	ACT	4	16	jn12	figs-hyperbole	πᾶσιν τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	everyone who lives in Jerusalem	This is a generalization that the leaders are making to emphasize how widely the news of the healing has spread. Alternate translation: “people who live throughout Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
573	ACT	4	16	nh5s		γνωστὸν σημεῖον	1	a notable sign	Here the word sign has the same sense that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in 2:22 and 2:43. It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “a remarkable miracle”
574	ACT	4	17	a273	figs-activepassive	ἵνα μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον διανεμηθῇ	1	so that it may not be spread	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “so that it does not spread” or “so that they will not spread it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
575	ACT	4	17	f71l	figs-explicit	ἵνα μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον διανεμηθῇ	1	so that it may not be spread	By it, the council members do not mean the news of the man’s healing, since they have already said that everyone in Jerusalem knows about it. They mean the teaching that Jesus is Messiah, since they then try to prevent this from spreading by not allowing the apostles to speak to anyone about Jesus. Alternate translation: “so that this teaching about Jesus does not spread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
576	ACT	4	17	a274		ἐπὶ πλεῖον	1	unto more	Alternate translation: “any further”
577	ACT	4	17	w52j	figs-metonymy	λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ	1	to speak in this name	Here, name figuratively represents a person, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “to speak about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
578	ACT	4	17	a275	figs-doublenegatives	μηκέτι λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ μηδενὶ ἀνθρώπων	1	no longer to speak in this name to any of men	In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “no longer to speak in this name to none of men.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “to stop speaking in this name to any of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
579	ACT	4	17	a276	figs-gendernotations	μηδενὶ ἀνθρώπων	1	to any of men	Here, men has a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “to any person” or “to anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
580	ACT	4	18	a277	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	So	Luke uses the word translated And to introduce what the council members did as a result of their discussion. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
581	ACT	4	18	a278	writing-pronouns	καλέσαντες αὐτοὺς, παρήγγειλαν	1	summoning them, they commanded them	The pronoun them refers in both instances to Peter and John, and the pronoun they refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “summoning Peter and John, the council members commanded them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
582	ACT	4	18	a279	figs-doublet	μὴ φθέγγεσθαι μηδὲ διδάσκειν	1	neither to speak nor to teach	The words speak and teach mean similar things. The council members may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “not to say anything publicly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
583	ACT	4	18	a280	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	in the name of Jesus	Here, name figuratively represents a person, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
584	ACT	4	19	a281	figs-hendiadys	ὁ…Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον	1	answering, Peter and John said	Together the words answering and said mean that Peter and John responded to the council. Alternate translation: “Peter and John responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
585	ACT	4	19	a282	figs-explicit	ὁ…Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον	1	answering, Peter and John said	This could mean: (1) Peter and John each said different parts of the quotation in 4:19–20. (2) Peter spoke these words on behalf of both of them, since the Holy Spirit had inspired him to speak to the council in 4:8–12. Alternate translation: “Peter responded on their behalf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
586	ACT	4	19	jf1d	figs-metonymy	εἰ δίκαιόν ἐστιν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Whether it is right before God	Here the phrase before God refers to God’s opinion, by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “Whether God thinks it is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
587	ACT	4	19	a283	figs-idiom	ὑμῶν ἀκούειν μᾶλλον ἢ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	to listen to you rather than to God	Here, listen is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “to obey you rather than God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
588	ACT	4	20	a284	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	Peter and John are using the word For to introduce the reason why the council needs to judge whether it would be right for them to obey the council rather than God. Alternate translation: “The reason why you must judge whom we should obey is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
589	ACT	4	20	hf3u	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς…εἴδαμεν καὶ ἠκούσαμεν	1	we … we have seen and heard	Peter and John are using the word we to refer to themselves but not to their listeners, so use the exclusive form of the word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
590	ACT	4	20	a285	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ δυνάμεθα…ἡμεῖς…μὴ λαλεῖν	1	we are not able not to speak	You could state the meaning of this double negative positively. Alternate translation: “we must speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
591	ACT	4	21	y5y1	writing-pronouns	οἱ δὲ προσαπειλησάμενοι ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς	1	having warned them further, they released them	The pronoun them refers in both instances to Peter and John, and the pronoun they refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “having warned Peter and John further, the council members released them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
592	ACT	4	21	z2bx	figs-explicit	διὰ τὸν λαόν	1	on account of the people	The implication is that the Jewish leaders were afraid that the people would riot if they punished Peter and John. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They were afraid that if they did punish Peter and John, the people would riot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
593	ACT	4	21	jbl6	figs-hyperbole	πάντες ἐδόξαζον τὸν Θεὸν	1	they were all glorifying God	Here, all is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “large numbers of them were glorifying God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
594	ACT	4	22	gy8d	writing-background	ἐτῶν γὰρ ἦν πλειόνων τεσσεράκοντα ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐφ’ ὃν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως	1	For the man to whom this sign of healing had happened was more than 40 years old	In this verse, Luke provides background information about the age of the man who was healed to help readers understand why the people considered his healing such a remarkable miracle. In your translation, present this background information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
595	ACT	4	22	a286	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	Luke is using the word For to introduce the reason why the people were glorifying God. Alternate translation: “The people were glorifying God because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
596	ACT	4	22	ju4w	figs-personification	ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐφ’ ὃν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως	1	the man to whom this sign of healing had happened	Luke is speaking figuratively as if the healing had happened on its own. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had miraculously healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
597	ACT	4	22	a287	figs-possession	τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως	1	this sign of healing	Luke is using the possessive form to describe a sign that consisted of a healing. The word sign has the same sense here that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in 2:22 and 2:43. It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “this miraculous healing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
598	ACT	4	23	a288	figs-activepassive	ἀπολυθέντες	1	having been released	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “after the council members had released Peter and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
599	ACT	4	23	a289	figs-go	ἦλθον πρὸς τοὺς ἰδίους	1	they came to their own people	In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “they went to their own people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
600	ACT	4	23	j2cx	figs-explicit	τοὺς ἰδίους	1	their own people	The phrase their own people refers to the community of believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
601	ACT	4	23	a290	figs-merism	οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι	1	the chief priests and the elders	As Peter does in 4:8, here Luke is referring to the entire council by naming its two components. Alternate translation: “the members of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
602	ACT	4	24	j3ap	writing-pronouns	οἱ…ἀκούσαντες…ἦραν	1	having heard, they raised	The phrase having heard refers to the other believers, but the pronoun they seems to include Peter and John as well, since those who pray ask for boldness to keep speaking the message about Jesus (4:29). It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the other believers heard this report, together with Peter and John they raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
603	ACT	4	24	a291		ἦραν φωνὴν	1	they raised their voice	Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of voice. Alternate translation: “they raised their voices”
604	ACT	4	24	zu28	figs-idiom	ἦραν φωνὴν	1	they raised their voice	The expression they raised their voice is an idiom that means they spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “they prayed loudly” or “they prayed out loud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
605	ACT	4	24	a292		ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	unanimously	The word unanimously indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in 1:14. Alternate translation: “with one accord” or “harmoniously”
606	ACT	4	24	a293	figs-youformal	σὺ	1	you	The word you is singular, and it refers to God. The same is true of the words “you” and “your” in 4:25–30. You may have decided to use a formal form of “you” in your translation in such cases. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
607	ACT	4	24	a160	figs-merism	ποιήσας τὸν οὐρανὸν, καὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐν αὐτοῖς	1	who made the heaven and the earth and the sea and all that is in them	The believers are referring to all of creation by naming its components. Alternate translation: “who created everything that exists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
608	ACT	4	24	a294		τὸν οὐρανὸν	1	the heaven	The believers are using the word translated heaven in one of its specific senses to mean the sky. Alternate translation: “the sky”
609	ACT	4	25	ka83	figs-metonymy	ὁ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου εἰπών	1	the one who said by the Holy Spirit from the mouth of our father David, your servant	The word mouth refers figuratively to what David said by using his mouth. Alternate translation: “the one whose Holy Spirit inspired our father David, your servant, to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
610	ACT	4	25	vc5z	figs-quotesinquotes	τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου εἰπών, ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά?	1	who said by the Holy Spirit from the mouth of our father David, your servant, ‘Why did the Gentiles rage, and the peoples imagine useless things?’	As the believers pray together, they quote from one of the psalms that David composed, Psalm 2:1–2. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “whose Holy Spirit inspired our father David, your servant, to ask why the nations raged and why the peoples imagined useless things.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
611	ACT	4	25	a295	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	our	The believers are using the word our to refer to themselves but not to God, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
612	ACT	4	25	kat6	figs-metaphor	τοῦ πατρὸς	1	father	Here, father figuratively means “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
613	ACT	4	25	a296		παιδός	1	servant	The believers are using the word servant here in its ordinary sense, not as a title for the Messiah, so it would not be appropriate to translate it as “Messiah,” as you may have done when it was a title in 3:13 and 3:26.
614	ACT	4	25	a297	figs-ellipsis	ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά	1	Why did the Gentiles rage, and the peoples imagine useless things	Here some words have been left out that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “Why did the nations rage, and why did the peoples imagine useless things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
615	ACT	4	25	a298	figs-parallelism	ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά	1	Why did the Gentiles rage, and the peoples imagine useless things	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “Why did the nations rage, indeed, why did the peoples imagine useless things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
616	ACT	4	25	f1x6	figs-rquestion	ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά?	1	Why did the Gentiles rage, and the peoples imagine useless things?	In this psalm, David uses the question form to emphasize the futility of opposing God. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “The nations should not have raged, and the peoples should not have imagined useless things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
617	ACT	4	25	h6rc	translate-names	ἔθνη	1	the Gentiles	The term nations refers to people groups that are not Jewish. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
618	ACT	4	25	w622	figs-explicit	κενά	1	useless things	The phrase useless things implicitly describes plans to oppose God, which can never succeed. Alternate translation: “ways to oppose God, which always prove useless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
619	ACT	4	26	fb5a	figs-quotesinquotes	παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ κατὰ τοῦ Κυρίου, καὶ κατὰ τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	The kings of the earth took their stand and the rulers were gathered to the same against the Lord and against his Christ	This is the rest of the quotation from Psalm 2 that the believers started in 4:25. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “David said that the kings of the earth had taken their stand and the rulers had gathered to the same against the Lord and against his Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
620	ACT	4	26	w2by	figs-parallelism	παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ	1	The kings of the earth took their stand and the rulers were gathered to the same	In keeping with the conventions of Hebrew poetry, these two phrases mean basically the same thing. If the repetition might be confusing for your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “The kings of the earth took their stand, yes, the rulers were gathered to the same” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
621	ACT	4	26	w64b	figs-idiom	παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς	1	The kings of the earth took their stand	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “The kings of the earth lined up their troops for battle” or “The kings of the earth formed their battle lines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
622	ACT	4	26	a299	figs-activepassive	οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν	1	the rulers were gathered	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the rulers gathered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
623	ACT	4	26	a300		ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ	1	to the same	See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Here it could mean “by agreement” or “in the same place.” You could use either phrase as an alternate translation.
624	ACT	4	26	yv19	figs-explicit	τοῦ Κυρίου…τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	the Lord … his Christ	Here the word Lord refers to God and the word Christ refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “God the Lord … his Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
625	ACT	4	27	a301	translate-names	Ἡρῴδης	1	Herod	Herod is the name of a man. He was the official whom the Romans appointed to rule Galilee during the time of Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
626	ACT	4	27	a302	translate-names	Πόντιος Πειλᾶτος	1	Pontius Pilate	This is the full name of the man who was the governor of Judea during the time of Jesus. See how you translated the name Pilate in 3:13. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
627	ACT	4	27	b1g9	figs-activepassive	συνήχθησαν	1	were gathered together	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
628	ACT	4	27	nuc1	figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ	1	in this city	The phrase this city refers to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “here in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
629	ACT	4	27	ca33		παῖδά	1	Servant	Here the word Servant is a title for the Messiah. See the discussion of that term in the General Notes to chapter 3, and see how you translated it in 3:13 and 3:26. Alternate translation: “Messiah”
630	ACT	4	27	a303	figs-metaphor	ὃν ἔχρισας	1	whom you anointed	In the Old Testament, ceremonial oil was poured on a person who was being given the authority to assume an office or to do a special task. The believers are speaking figuratively of anointing to indicate that God appointed Jesus to be the Messiah. Alternate translation: “whom you appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
631	ACT	4	28	yz7m	figs-metonymy	ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι	1	all that your hand and your counsel had predetermined to happen	Here, hand figuratively means God’s power and counsel figuratively means God’s plan. Alternate translation: “all that your power and your plan had predetermined to happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
632	ACT	4	28	a304	figs-hendiadys	ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι	1	all that your hand and your counsel had predetermined to happen	The words hand and counsel, joined by and, are expressing a single idea. The word hand, meaning “power,” tells by what means God intended to carry out his counsel, that is, his plan. Alternate translation: “all that you planned in advance to make happen by your power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
633	ACT	4	28	a305	figs-personification	ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι	1	all that your hand and your counsel had predetermined to happen	The believers are speaking figuratively of God’s hand and his counsel (that is, his power and his plan) as if they had predetermined what would happen to Jesus. They mean that God himself had done this. Alternate translation: “all that you planned in advance to make happen by your power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
634	ACT	4	29	b38z		καὶ τὰ νῦν	1	And now	The believers use the expression And now to direct God’s attention to the request they are making in light of what they have said to this point in their prayer. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this same purpose.
635	ACT	4	29	t5qm	figs-idiom	ἔπιδε ἐπὶ τὰς ἀπειλὰς αὐτῶν	1	look upon their threats	The phrase look upon is an idiomatic way of asking God to pay attention to the threats that the Jewish leaders have made against the believers. Alternate translation: “pay attention to the threats they have made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
636	ACT	4	29	a306	figs-123person	τοῖς δούλοις σου	1	to your servants	The believers are speaking of themselves in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “to us, your servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
637	ACT	4	29	zh7j	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον σου	1	your word	The believers are using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
638	ACT	4	29	a307	figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ παρρησίας πάσης	1	with all boldness	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word boldness, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “boldly.” The word all is an intensifier. Alternate translation: “very boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
639	ACT	4	30	x9r1	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ τὴν χεῖρά σου, ἐκτείνειν σε εἰς ἴασιν, καὶ σημεῖα, καὶ τέρατα, γίνεσθαι	1	as you stretch out your hand to heal and for signs and wonders to happen	Here the hand figuratively represents God’s power. To stretch out the hand means to use it. So this is a prayer for God to do powerful things. Alternate translation: “as you do powerful things to heal people and to make signs and wonders happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
640	ACT	4	30	a308	figs-doublet	σημεῖα, καὶ τέρατα	1	signs and wonders	The terms signs and wonders mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:43. Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
641	ACT	4	30	t5uw	figs-metonymy	διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος	1	through the name	Here, name refers figuratively to authority. Alternate translation: “by the authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
642	ACT	4	30	txb5		τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ ἁγίου παιδός σου, Ἰησοῦ	1	the name of your holy Servant Jesus	Here the word Servant is a title for the Messiah. See the discussion of that term in the General Notes to chapter 3, and see how you translated it in 3:13, 3:26, and 4:27. Alternate translation: “the name of Jesus, your holy Messiah”
643	ACT	4	31	a309	writing-endofstory	καὶ	1	And	This verse is the end of the whole story of how the lame man was healed and how Peter and John were arrested as a result. Luke uses the word translated And to introduce information about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
644	ACT	4	31	a310	figs-activepassive	ἐν ᾧ ἦσαν συνηγμένοι	1	in which they were gathered together	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “where they had gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
645	ACT	4	31	x9b3	figs-activepassive	ἐσαλεύθη	1	was shaken	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “shook” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
646	ACT	4	31	ps3m	figs-activepassive	ἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1	they were all filled with the Holy Spirit	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. See how you translated the same expression in 2:4. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
647	ACT	4	31	a311	figs-metaphor	ἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1	they were all filled with the Holy Spirit	Luke is speaking figuratively as if the believers were containers that the Holy Spirit filled. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
648	ACT	4	31	a312	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the word of God	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
649	ACT	4	31	a313	figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ παρρησίας	1	with boldness	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word boldness, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “boldly.” Alternate translation: “boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
650	ACT	4	32	a314	grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	Now	Luke uses the word Now to introduce background information in 4:32–37 that will help readers understand further episodes in the story. These verses introduce Barnabas, who will be an important character in the book, and they also help account for what happens to Ananias and Sapphira in the next chapter. You can translate the word Now with a term or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
651	ACT	4	32	xu3j	figs-metonymy	ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία	1	was one in heart and soul	Here the word heart seems to represent the emotions and the word soul seems to represent the desires. Alternate translation: “thought the same way and desired the same things” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
652	ACT	4	32	a315	figs-doublet	ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία	1	was one in heart and soul	The terms heart and soul mean similar things, and Luke may be using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine the terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “was genuinely united” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
653	ACT	4	32	a316		τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτῷ	1	of the things that were to him	Alternate translation: “of the things that he owned”
654	ACT	4	32	zyp5	figs-hyperbole	ἦν αὐτοῖς πάντα κοινά	1	everything was common to them	The word everything may be a generalization that emphasizes the powerful spirit of generosity among the believers. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:44. Alternate translation: “they shared their belongings with one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
655	ACT	4	33	a317	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	of the resurrection of the Lord Jesus	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “of how God made the Lord Jesus alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
656	ACT	4	33	a318	writing-pronouns	χάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς	1	great grace was upon them all	The pronoun them refers back to “the multitude of those who believed” in 4:32. It does not refer just to the apostles, who are mentioned in this verse. Alternate translation: “great grace was upon all of the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
657	ACT	4	33	d8dr	figs-abstractnouns	χάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς	1	great grace was upon them all	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word grace, you could express the same idea with an equivalent expression. The word could describe: (1) how God was blessing the believers. Alternate translation: “God was blessing all of the believers in wonderful ways” (2) how the people in Jerusalem held the believers in high esteem. Alternate translation: “the people of Jerusalem thought very highly of all the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
658	ACT	4	34	a331	translate-versebridge	οὐδὲ γὰρ ἐνδεής τις ἦν ἐν αὐτοῖς	1	For there was not anyone needy among them	This statement expresses the result of the rest of what Luke says in this verse and what he says in the next verse. If your readers would misunderstand this to put this result after the reasons for it, you could create a verse bridge by moving this statement to the end of the next verse and beginning it with the word “So” instead of For. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
659	ACT	4	34	a319	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	Luke uses the word For in its first instance in this verse to introduce the evidence or reason for his statement at the end of the previous verse that “great grace was upon them all.” The meaning here depends on the meaning there. Alternate translation: (1) “The way God was blessing the believers could be seen in the fact that” or (2) “One thing that made the people think very highly of the believers was that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
660	ACT	4	34	a320	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2	for	Luke uses the word for in its second instance in this verse to introduce the reason why no one in the community of believers was needy. Alternate translation: “and the reason for this was that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
661	ACT	4	34	gw3v	figs-hyperbole	ὅσοι γὰρ κτήτορες χωρίων ἢ οἰκιῶν ὑπῆρχον	1	all who were owners of lands or houses	The word all is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many believers who owned lands or houses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
662	ACT	4	34	l938	figs-activepassive	τὰς τιμὰς τῶν πιπρασκομένων	1	the price of the things being sold	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the money that they received from the things they sold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
663	ACT	4	35	a321	translate-symaction	ἐτίθουν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	they were laying it at the feet of the apostles	The expression laying it at the feet indicates that believers who sold possessions were putting the money they got on the ground in front of the apostles. In this culture, that was a symbolic way of presenting it to them as a gift to be used to help others in the community. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “they were presenting it to the apostles” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction)
664	ACT	4	35	vv4z	translate-symaction	ἐτίθουν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	they were laying it at the feet of the apostles	In this culture, putting the money on the ground in front of the apostles was a symbolic way of presenting it to them as a gift to be used to help others in the community. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “they were presenting it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
665	ACT	4	35	a322	figs-activepassive	διεδίδετο	1	it was being distributed	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the apostles were distributing it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
666	ACT	4	35	ps4s	figs-abstractnouns	ἑκάστῳ, καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν	1	to each one, according as anyone had need	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word need, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “need.” Alternate translation: “to every person in the amount that he needed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
667	ACT	4	36	uc2a	writing-participants	Ἰωσὴφ δὲ	1	Then Joseph	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
668	ACT	4	36	a323	translate-names	Ἰωσὴφ…Βαρναβᾶς	1	Joseph … Barnabas	Joseph and Barnabas are two names for the same man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
669	ACT	4	36	a324	figs-activepassive	ὁ ἐπικληθεὶς Βαρναβᾶς, ἀπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	who was called Barnabas by the apostles	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom the apostles called Barnabas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
670	ACT	4	36	a325	figs-activepassive	ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως	1	which, being translated, is Son of Encouragement	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning of the passive verbal form being translated with an active form. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
671	ACT	4	36	a326	figs-explicit	ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως	1	which, being translated, is Son of Encouragement	Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is saying what the name Barnabas means when translated from the Aramaic language. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement in Aramaic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
672	ACT	4	36	nr4v	figs-idiom	υἱὸς παρακλήσεως	1	Son of Encouragement	The expression Son of figuratively describes a person who shares the qualities of something. The apostles used this name to describe Joseph’s behavior and character, since he was a person who encouraged others. Alternate translation: “the Encourager” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
673	ACT	4	36	a327	figs-abstractnouns	υἱὸς παρακλήσεως	1	Son of Encouragement	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word Encouragement, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “encourage.” Alternate translation: “the One who Encourages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
674	ACT	4	36	a328	translate-names	Λευείτης	1	a Levite	The name Levite describes a person from the tribe of Levi. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
675	ACT	4	36	a329	translate-names	Κύπριος	1	Cyprus	Cyprus is the name of an island. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
676	ACT	4	37	a330		ὑπάρχοντος αὐτῷ	1	that was to him	See how you translated the similar expression in 4:32. Alternate translation: “that he owned”
677	ACT	4	37	gtv5	translate-symaction	ἔθηκεν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	laid it at the feet of the apostles	See how you translated the similar expression in 4:35. Alternate translation: “presented it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
678	ACT	5	intro	k2uh			0		Acts 5 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter “Why has Satan filled your heart for you to lie to the Holy Spirit?” (5:3) No one knows for sure whether Ananias and Sapphira were truly Christians when they decided to lie about the land that they sold (5:1-10), because Luke does not say. However, Peter knew that they lied to the believers, and he knew that they had listened to and obeyed Satan. When they lied to the believers, they also lied to the Holy Spirit. This is because the Holy Spirit lives inside believers. Possible translation difficulties in this chapter Long sentences Acts 5:36 consists of a single long sentence. ULT represents all of it as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does. There is also a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 5:38 to nearly the end of 5:39. In this case as well it may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.
679	ACT	5	1	v27a	writing-participants	ἀνὴρ δέ τις	1	Now a certain man	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
680	ACT	5	1	ysl9	translate-names	Ἁνανίας	1	Ananias	Ananias is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
681	ACT	5	1	a332	writing-participants	σὺν Σαπφείρῃ τῇ γυναικὶ αὐτοῦ	1	with Sapphira his wife	Luke uses this phrase to introduce another new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
682	ACT	5	1	a333	translate-names	Σαπφείρῃ	1	Sapphria	Sapphira is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
683	ACT	5	2	a334	figs-explicit	ἐνοσφίσατο ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς	1	he kept back from the price	The implication, as the story later makes clear, is that Ananias did not tell anyone except his wife that he was keeping some of the money for himself. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly, and you could say why he did this. Alternate translation: “he kept some of the money from the sale for himself, but he did not admit that he was doing that, because he wanted everyone to think he was being completely generous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
684	ACT	5	2	xm1t		συνειδυίης καὶ τῆς γυναικός, καὶ ἐνέγκας μέρος τι…ἔθηκεν	1	his wife also knowing, and bringing a certain portion, he laid	It may be helpful to make two new sentences here, particularly if you add information to the previous phrase as suggested in the preceding note. Alternate translation: “His wife also knew that he was keeping back part of the sale money. He brought a certain portion of the money and laid it”
685	ACT	5	2	dy8b	figs-idiom	παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων ἔθηκεν	1	he laid it at the feet of the apostles	This means that he presented to money to the apostles. See how you translated the same expression in 4:37. Alternate translation: “he presented it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
686	ACT	5	3	grr9	figs-rquestion	διὰ τί ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ Σατανᾶς τὴν καρδίαν σου, ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς τοῦ χωρίου?	1	why has Satan filled your heart for you to lie to the Holy Spirit and to keep back from the price of the land?	Peter is using the question form to rebuke Ananias. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you should not have let Satan fill your heart so that you lied to the Holy Spirit and kept back from the price of the land!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
687	ACT	5	3	pqd4	figs-metaphor	διὰ τί ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ Σατανᾶς τὴν καρδίαν σου	1	why has Satan filled your heart	Peter is speaking figuratively of the heart of Ananias as if it were a container that Satan had filled. Alternate translation: “why have you allowed Satan to influence your heart so strongly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
688	ACT	5	3	a335	figs-metaphor	τὴν καρδίαν σου	1	your heart	Here, the heart figuratively represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “your thoughts and motives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
689	ACT	5	3	a426	figs-events	ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς τοῦ χωρίου	1	for you to lie to the Holy Spirit and to keep back from the price of the land	Ananais first withheld some of the money, then he lied to the Holy Spirit about this by pretending he was giving all of the money. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to describe the events in that order. Alternate translation: “for you to keep back from the price of the land and lie to the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
690	ACT	5	3	zz5u	figs-metonymy	ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον	1	for you to lie to the Holy Spirit	Ananias did not lie literally to the Holy Spirit, but he did lie to the apostles and to all of the believers who would have learned about his gift, and the Holy Spirit was present in them. So by lying to them, he was effectively also lying to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “for you to lie to the Holy Spirit, who is present in us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
691	ACT	5	3	a336	figs-explicit	καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς	1	and to keep back from the price of the land	The implication of what Peter says here is that Ananias claimed or pretended that he was giving the entire amount that he had received from selling his land. Alternate translation: “by pretendng that you were giving us the entire amount when you had kept back some for yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
692	ACT	5	4	vu7g	figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ μένον σοὶ ἔμενεν, καὶ πραθὲν ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν?	1	While it remained, did it not remain yours, and being sold, was it not in your authority?	Peter continues to use the question form to rebuke Ananias. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “While it remained, it remained yours, and after it was sold, it was still in your authority.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
693	ACT	5	4	vi8w		ἔμενεν	1	While it remained	Alternate translation: “While it remained unsold” or “Before you sold it”
694	ACT	5	4	k7nc	figs-activepassive	πραθὲν	1	being sold	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “once you had sold it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
695	ACT	5	4	a337	writing-pronouns	ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν	1	was it not in your authority	The pronoun it refers to the money that Ananias received from the sale of the land. Alternate translation, as a statement: “you could still do whatever you wanted with the money you received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
696	ACT	5	4	a338	writing-pronouns	ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν	1	was it not in your authority	The implications are that Ananias was not obligated to give all of the money to the apostles. He was free to keep some if he wished or if he needed it. He could simply have acknowledged that he was doing that, and giving the rest of the money would still have been a generous act because there was no compulsion. Alternate translation, as a statement: “you could have kept some and acknowledged that and you would have still been making a generous gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
697	ACT	5	4	i5dw	figs-rquestion	τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο?	1	How is it that you placed this thing in your heart?	Peter continues to use the question form to rebuke Ananias. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have placed this thing in your heart!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
698	ACT	5	4	a339	figs-metaphor	τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο?	1	How is it that you placed this thing in your heart?	Here, the heart figuratively represents the thoughts. Alternate translation, as an exclamation: “You should not have placed this thing in your thoughts!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
699	ACT	5	4	a340	figs-metaphor	τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο?	1	How is it that you placed this thing in your heart?	Peter speaks figuratively of this thing, that is, the plan to keep back some of the money, as if Ananias had placed it in his heart, meaning his thoughts. Alternate translation, as an exclamation: “You should not even have thought of doing such a thing!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
700	ACT	5	4	a341	figs-metonymy	οὐκ ἐψεύσω ἀνθρώποις, ἀλλὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1	You have not lied to men, but to God	Ananaias actually has lied to men, but Peter is speaking of the ultimate implications of his act. As in the previous verse, where Peter says that Ananias has lied to the Holy Spirit, here he means that Ananias has lied to the apostles and other believers, and God is present in them. So by lying to them, he has effectively also lied to God. Alternate translation: “You have not lied merely to men, but also to God, who is present in us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
701	ACT	5	4	a342	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις	1	to men	Peter is using the term men in a generic sense to mean “human beings.” Alternate translation: “to human beings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
702	ACT	5	5	a343	figs-metonymy	ἀκούων δὲ…τοὺς λόγους τούτους	1	And hearing these words	Luke is using the term words figuratively to mean what Peter used words to say. Alternate translation: “When he heard what Peter said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
703	ACT	5	5	cc5y	figs-euphemism	πεσὼν ἐξέψυξεν	1	falling down, expired	The word translated expired means that Ananias “breathed out for the last time.” It is a mild way of saying that he died. Alternate translation: “fell down and died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
704	ACT	5	5	a344	figs-events	πεσὼν ἐξέψυξεν	1	falling down, expired	Ananias fell down because he died. He did not die because he fell down. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to say first that he died and then that he fell. Alternate translation: “died and fell to the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
705	ACT	5	5	a345	figs-personification	ἐγένετο φόβος μέγας ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας	1	great fear came upon all who heard	Luke describes this fear figuratively as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Here the word fear describes a deep respect for God. Alternate translation: “everyone who heard about it came to feel a very deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
706	ACT	5	6	a346	figs-idiom	ἀναστάντες δὲ, οἱ νεώτεροι συνέστειλαν αὐτὸν	1	rising up, the young men wrapped him up	Here the expression rising up means that the young men took an action that they recognized they needed to take. It does not mean that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “the young men took action and wrapped him up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
707	ACT	5	6	a347	figs-explicit	οἱ νεώτεροι	1	the young men	This could refer to: (1) some strong young men who were present who realized that burying Ananias was a task they could help with. Alternate translation: “some strong young men who were present” (2) a group of young men among the believers who regularly helped the apostles with tasks that required physical strength. Alternate translation: “the young men who regularly helped the apostles with physical tasks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
708	ACT	5	6	a348	translate-unknown	συνέστειλαν αὐτὸν	1	wrapped him up	It was the custom in this culture to wrap linen cloths around the bodies of people who had died, in order to prepare the bodies for burial. If your readers would not be familiar with such a custom, you could describe it more specifically, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “wrapped a linen burial cloth around his body” or “prepared his body for burial” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
709	ACT	5	7	a349	figs-idiom	ἐγένετο δὲ ὡς ὡρῶν τριῶν διάστημα, καὶ	1	And an interval of about three hours happened, and	This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time passing. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “After about three hours had gone by,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
710	ACT	5	7	ry54	writing-pronouns	ἡ γυνὴ αὐτοῦ	1	his wife	The pronoun his refers to Ananias. Alternate translation: “the wife of Ananias” or “Sapphira” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
711	ACT	5	7	k3c9	figs-explicit	τὸ γεγονὸς	1	what had happened	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly what this means. Alternate translation: “that Peter had exposed their lie and that her husband was dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
712	ACT	5	8	a350		ἀπεκρίθη…πρὸς αὐτὴν	1	said to her	The word translated said means to continue or resume a conversation. Alternate translation: “asked her, based on what her husband had said”
713	ACT	5	8	a351	figs-youdual	ἀπέδοσθε	1	you sold	Since Peter is speaking of two people, Ananaias and Sapphira, you would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
714	ACT	5	8	bcf6	figs-explicit	τοσούτου…ναί, τοσούτου	1	for so much … yes, for so much	This refers to the amount of money that Ananias had given to the apostles. Peter may be naming the amount or, as UST suggests, he may be showing Sapphira the money. Alternate translation: “for this amount of money … yes, for that amount of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
715	ACT	5	9	v7sw	figs-rquestion	τί ὅτι συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου?	1	How is it that it was agreed together by you to test the Spirit of the Lord?	Peter is using the question form to rebuke Sapphira. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have agreed together to test the Spirit of the Lord!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
716	ACT	5	9	hc22	figs-activepassive	συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν	1	it was agreed together by you	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you agreed together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
717	ACT	5	9	w1lb	figs-you	ὑμῖν…σου…σε	1	by you … your … you	The word you in its first instance refers to two people, Ananias and Sapphira, so it would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. The word your and the word you in its second instance refer only to Sapphira, so those words are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
718	ACT	5	9	pg1e		πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου	1	to test the Spirit of the Lord	Here the word test means to challenge. Ananias and Sapphira were trying to see if they could get away with lying about how much they received for the land they sold. Alternate translation: “to challenge the Spirit of the Lord”
719	ACT	5	9	a352	figs-metonymy	πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου	1	to test the Spirit of the Lord	Ananias and Sapphira actually tested or challenged the apostles, but Peter is speaking of the ultimate implications of their act, as he does similarly in 5:3 and 5:4. Since the Spirit of the Lord was present in the apostles, by challenging them, Ananias and Sapphira effectively lied to the Spirit. Alternate translation: “to test the Spirit of the Lord, who is present in us apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
720	ACT	5	9	a353	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, οἱ πόδες	1	Behold, the feet	Peter says Behold to get Sapphira to focus her attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “And now the feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
721	ACT	5	9	xj1l	figs-metonymy	οἱ πόδες τῶν θαψάντων τὸν ἄνδρα σου ἐπὶ τῇ θύρᾳ	1	the feet of those who buried your husband are at the door	Peter is referring figuratively to the return of the young men who buried Ananaias. Their feet represent them by association with the way they are using their feet to walk back. The door represents their return by association with the way they will come through the door when they return. Alternate translation: “the young men who buried your husband are just now returning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
722	ACT	5	9	a354	figs-explicit	οἱ πόδες τῶν θαψάντων τὸν ἄνδρα σου ἐπὶ τῇ θύρᾳ	1	the feet of those who buried your husband are at the door	Peter is telling Sapphira implicitly that her husband died as a judgment from God when Peter confronted him with the lie about the price of the land. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your husband died as a judgment from God when I confronted him with the lie you both told about the price of the land, and the young men who buried him are just now returning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
723	ACT	5	9	a355	figs-explicit	καὶ ἐξοίσουσίν σε	1	and they will carry you out	The implications are that Sapphira is also going to die and that the same young men will carry her out to bury her. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You are also going to die as a judgment from God, and those same young men are going to carry you out and bury you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
724	ACT	5	10	s7en	figs-euphemism	ἔπεσεν…πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐξέψυξεν	1	she fell down at his feet and expired	The word translated expired means that Sapphira “breathed out for the last time.” It is a mild way of saying that she died. Alternate translation: “she fell down at his feet and died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
725	ACT	5	10	a356	figs-events	ἔπεσεν…πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐξέψυξεν	1	she fell down at his feet and expired	Sapphira fell down because she died. She did not die because she fell down. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to say first that she died and then that she fell. Alternate translation: “she died and fell down at his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
726	ACT	5	10	nwb9	figs-metonymy	ἔπεσεν…πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ	1	she fell down at his feet	This means that she fell to the ground in front of Peter. This expression should not be confused with the idea of “falling down at a person’s feet,” that is, bowing down to the ground in front of someone as a sign of humility. Alternate translation: “she collapsed onto the ground in front of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
727	ACT	5	10	a357	figs-explicit	οἱ νεανίσκοι	1	the young men	See how you translated this expression in 5:6. However, it may not be necessary to explain again here who these young men were in terms of their role in the community. Instead, you could identify them by their role in the story. Alternate translation: “the same young men who had buried Ananias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
728	ACT	5	11	vym8	writing-endofstory	καὶ	1	And	This verse is the end of the story about Ananias and Sapphira. Luke uses the word translated And to introduce information about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
729	ACT	5	11	a358	figs-personification	ἐγένετο φόβος μέγας ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, καὶ ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας ταῦτα	1	great fear came upon the whole church and upon all those hearing these things	Luke describes this fear figuratively as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. See how you translated the similar expression in 5:5. Alternate translation: “the whole church and everyone who heard about these things came to feel a very deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
730	ACT	5	12	c2e7	grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	And	Luke uses the word translated And to introduce background information in 5:12–16 that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. You can translate this word with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
731	ACT	5	12	sri8	figs-metonymy	διὰ…τῶν χειρῶν τῶν ἀποστόλων, ἐγίνετο σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα πολλὰ	1	many signs and wonders were happening through the hands of the apostles	Luke is using the hands of the apostles figuratively to represent their actions. Alternate translation: “the apostles were doing many signs and wonders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
732	ACT	5	12	ux3n	figs-doublet	σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα	1	signs and wonders	The terms signs and wonders mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated this expression in 4:30. Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
733	ACT	5	12	aud2	writing-pronouns	ἦσαν…πάντες	1	they were all	The pronoun they refers to the whole community of believers. Alternate translation: “the whole community of believers was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
734	ACT	5	12	a359		ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	unanimously	The word unanimously indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in 1:14. Alternate translation: “meeting together with one accord” or “meeting together harmoniously”
735	ACT	5	12	k99k	translate-names	τῇ Στοᾷ Σολομῶντος	1	the Porch of Solomon	This was a covered walkway that consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof. It was named after King Solomon. See how you translated the phrase “the porch that is called Solomon’s” in 3:11, which is a description of this same walkway. Alternate translation: “Solomon’s Porch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
736	ACT	5	13	a360	figs-explicit	τῶν…λοιπῶν, οὐδεὶς	1	none of the others	The expression the others refers to people who were not believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “none of the people who were not believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
737	ACT	5	13	a361	figs-explicit	ἐτόλμα κολλᾶσθαι αὐτοῖς	1	dared to join them	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly why no unbelievers dared to join them. The reason seems to be that the Jewish leaders had commanded the apostles not to speak or teach about Jesus (4:18), but they were still doing that. Later in this chapter, in 5:28, the Sanhedrin indicates that it has arrested the apostles for violating that command. Alternate translation: “would meet with them, because the apostles were still preaching about Jesus even though the Jewish leaders had commanded them not to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
738	ACT	5	14	a362	figs-metonymy	προσετίθεντο…τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	were being added to the Lord	Luke says the Lord figuratively to mean the community of people who believed in the Lord. Alternate translation: “were being added to the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
739	ACT	5	14	m9wx	figs-activepassive	προσετίθεντο…τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	were being added to the Lord	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:41. Alternate translation: “were becoming part of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
740	ACT	5	15	a364	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	so that	Luke says so that to introduce a result, but it is not the direct result of what he said just before, that many men and women became part of the church. It is the result of what he said in 5:12, that the apostles were doing “many signs and wonders.” All of 5:12–15 could be understood as a single sentence, and in that case what Luke says here would more clearly follow logically and grammatically from what he says in 5:12. However, ULT divides the material into several sentences, which is another way in which it can be understood. UST models a way to show how what Luke says here introduces a result of what he said in 5:12 about the “signs and wonders” that the apostles were doing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
741	ACT	5	15	l9bs	writing-pronouns	ἐκφέρειν	1	they … carried	The pronoun they refers to the people who lived in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “people who lived in Jerusalem … carried” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
742	ACT	5	15	a365	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς ἀσθενεῖς	1	the sick	Luke is using the adjective sick as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who were sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
743	ACT	5	15	a366	figs-doublet	κλιναρίων καὶ κραβάττων	1	cots and mats	The words cots and mats mean similar things. Luke could be using them together for emphasis, although he could also be describing two different ways that people managed to make their sick relatives and friends reasonably comfortable as they waited in the streets for Peter to walk by. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “improvised beds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
744	ACT	5	15	y2ev	figs-explicit	ἡ σκιὰ ἐπισκιάσῃ τινὶ αὐτῶν	1	his shadow might overshadow any one of them	The implication is that God was healing sick people whom Peter’s shadow touched. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “his shadow might overshadow any one of them and God would heal that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
745	ACT	5	15	a367		ἡ σκιὰ ἐπισκιάσῃ τινὶ αὐτῶν	1	his shadow might overshadow	Luke is using a construction in which the subject and verb come from the same root. You may be able to use the same construction in your language to express the meaning here. Alternatively, your language may have its own way of describing this. Alternate translation: “his shadow might fall on”
746	ACT	5	16	a368	figs-nominaladj	ἀσθενεῖς	1	the sick	See how you translated the expression the sick in 5:15. Alternate translation: “people who were sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
747	ACT	5	16	fu1a	figs-activepassive	ὀχλουμένους ὑπὸ πνευμάτων ἀκαθάρτων	1	those afflicted by unclean spirits	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom unclean spirits were afflicting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
748	ACT	5	16	lyc7	figs-activepassive	οἵτινες ἐθεραπεύοντο ἅπαντες	1	who were all healed	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “and the apostles healed them all” or “and God used the apostles to heal them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
749	ACT	5	16	a369	figs-hyperbole	οἵτινες ἐθεραπεύοντο ἅπαντες	1	who were all healed	It does not appear that all is a generalization for emphasis in this case. So it would not be accurate to treat all as figurative and say something like “and large numbers of them were healed.” Luke is describing what remarkable things God did through the apostles at this time, and he does seem to mean that every sick person whom the people brought to Jerusalem was healed. So it would be appropriate to say in your translation just what ULT says here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
750	ACT	5	17	x2ed	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	But	Luke uses the word But to introduce a strong contrast into the story. Your language may have its own way of introducing a contrasting narrative. You could also refer back to the previous action in order to highlight the contrast. Alternate translation: “But even though the apostles were doing so much good,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
751	ACT	5	17	f9ye	figs-events	ἀναστὰς…ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου,	1	rising up, the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy	The high priest and these Sadducees were first filled with jealousy and then they rose up (took action) against the apostles. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to describe the events in that order. Alternate translation: “the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy and they rose up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
752	ACT	5	17	pc45	figs-activepassive	ἀναστὰς…ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου,	1	rising up, the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form were filled. Alternate translation: “jealousy filled the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) and they rose up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
753	ACT	5	17	a370	figs-idiom	ἀναστὰς	1	rising up	Here the expression rising up means that the high priest decided to take action, not that he stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “taking action” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
754	ACT	5	17	a371	figs-explicit	πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων	1	all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees)	The phrase all those with him means specifically all the other priests who joined the high priest in taking action against the apostles. Luke observes here that those other priests were from the group known as the Sadducees. As a note to 4:1 explains, they opposed the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and all of the priests from the group known as the Sadducees who wanted to oppose the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
755	ACT	5	17	a372	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου	1	were filled with jealousy	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word jealousy, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “jealous.” Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
756	ACT	5	17	a373	figs-metaphor	ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου	1	were filled with jealousy	Luke is speaking figuratively as if the high priest and his allies were containers that jealousy filled. Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
757	ACT	5	18	j58p	figs-metonymy	ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους	1	they laid hands on the apostles	The expression laid hands on figuratively means to arrest someone, by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their hands. Alternate translation: “they arrested the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
758	ACT	5	18	a374	figs-synecdoche	ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους	1	they laid hands on the apostles	The high priest and his allies did not arrest the apostles personally. They would have ordered the temple guards to arrest them. But Luke speaks figuratively as if the high priest and his allies did this action because they had a significant part in it by ordering it. Alternate translation: “they had the temple guards arrest the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
759	ACT	5	19	wd37	writing-pronouns	ἐξαγαγών…αὐτοὺς	1	bringing them out	The pronoun them refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “bringing the apostles out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
760	ACT	5	20	qm16	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	in the temple	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
761	ACT	5	20	z1x3	figs-metonymy	πάντα τὰ ῥήματα τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης	1	all the words of this life	The angel is using the term words figuratively to mean the message that the apostles were to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the entire message about this life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
762	ACT	5	20	a375		τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης	1	of this life	Alternate translation: “about the everlasting life that God gives through Jesus” or “about the new way of living that people can have as followers of Jesus”
763	ACT	5	21	a376	figs-idiom	ἀκούσαντες	1	having heard this	Luke may be using the word “hear” in an idiomatic sense to mean “obey.” Alternate translation: “in obedience to this command from the angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
764	ACT	5	21	df1u	figs-explicit	εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν	1	into the temple	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
765	ACT	5	21	l7uf	figs-explicit	ὑπὸ τὸν ὄρθρον	1	about daybreak	The implication is that although the angel led the apostles out of the jail during the night, the sun was rising by the time they reached the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “as it was beginning to get light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
766	ACT	5	21	a377	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	δὲ	1	And	Luke is using the word translated And to introduce other events that took place around the same time as the events he has just described. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
767	ACT	5	21	a378	figs-explicit	παραγενόμενος	1	having arrived	This does not mean that the high priest and his allies arrived in the temple courtyard where the apostles were. Rather, it means that they went into the chamber where the Sanhedrin met so that they could summon the rest of its members to join them there. Alternate translation: “having arrived in the council chamber” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
768	ACT	5	21	a379	figs-explicit	τὸ Συνέδριον καὶ πᾶσαν τὴν Γερουσίαν τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ	1	the Sanhedrin, even all the elders of the sons of Israel	The phrase even all the elders of the sons of Israel clarifies the name Sanhedrin by describing it membership. Luke is using the word elders here in a general sense to mean “leaders.” He is not making a distinction between “elders” and “rulers” as he does in 4:5. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, which was composed of the leaders of the sons of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
769	ACT	5	21	a380	figs-metaphor	τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ	1	the sons of Israel	Here, sons figuratively means “descendants.” Luke is identifying the Israelites as descendants of their ancestor Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
770	ACT	5	21	li6a	figs-ellipsis	ἀπέστειλαν εἰς τὸ δεσμωτήριον	1	sent to the prison	Luke is leaving out a word that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. He means that the high priest and his allies sent someone to the prison to get the apostles. Alternate translation: “sent someone to the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
771	ACT	5	23	a381	figs-activepassive	τὸ δεσμωτήριον εὕρομεν κεκλεισμένον ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ, καὶ τοὺς φύλακας	1	We found the prison shut in all security and the guards	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an active verbal form in place of the passive form shut, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “We found that the guards had shut the prison in all security and we found the guards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
772	ACT	5	23	a382	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ	1	in all security	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word security, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “securely.” The word all is an intensifier. Alternate translation: “very securely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
773	ACT	5	23	a383	figs-explicit	ἀνοίξαντες	1	having opened	Your language may require you to specify the object of opened. Alternate translation: “once we opened the doors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
774	ACT	5	23	ld7d	figs-hyperbole	ἔσω οὐδένα εὕρομεν	1	we found no one inside	By no one, the officers mean that they found none of the men they had been sent to bring, that is, none of the apostles. It is possible that other people were also being held in the prison, but the angel would not have released them, and they would still have been inside. Alternate translation: “we did not find any of the apostles inside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
775	ACT	5	24	k5g6	figs-metonymy	τοὺς λόγους τούτους	1	these words	Luke is using the term words figuratively to mean the report that the officers gave. Alternate translation: “this report” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
776	ACT	5	24	baw2	writing-pronouns	περὶ αὐτῶν	1	concerning them	The pronoun them does not refer to the apostles but to the words that the officers spoke in giving their report. Alternate translation: “about the things the officers had told them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
777	ACT	5	24	p78m	figs-idiom	τί ἂν γένοιτο τοῦτο	1	as to what this might become	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “wondering what would happen as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
778	ACT	5	25	a384	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, οἱ ἄνδρες	1	Behold, the men	This person says Behold to get the council members to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “Right now the men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
779	ACT	5	25	a8dz	figs-you	ἔθεσθε	1	you put	Here the word you refers to the captain of the temple and the chief priests and so it is plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
780	ACT	5	25	c1am	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, ἑστῶτες	1	standing in the temple	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “standing in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
781	ACT	5	26	e24h	writing-pronouns	τότε ἀπελθὼν, ὁ στρατηγὸς σὺν τοῖς ὑπηρέταις ἦγεν αὐτούς, οὐ μετὰ βίας, ἐφοβοῦντο γὰρ τὸν λαόν, μὴ λιθασθῶσιν	1	Then the captain, going with the officers, brought them back, not with violence, for they feared the people, lest they stone them	The first instance of them refers to the apostles, but the second instance of them refers to the captain and the officers. The captain and officers were not afraid that the people would stone the apostles. They were afraid that they would be stoned themselves if they used violence against the apostles. You could reword this to make the referents clear. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “Then the captain went with the officers and brought the apostles back. But the captain and officers did not use any violence, because they were afraid that the people would stone them if they did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
782	ACT	5	27	iq7w	writing-pronouns	ἀγαγόντες δὲ αὐτοὺς	1	And having brought them	The pronoun them refers to the apostles in all three instances in this verse. It may be helpful to specify this here in the first instance. Alternate translation: “Once they had brought the apostles back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
783	ACT	5	28	a385		παραγγελίᾳ παρηγγείλαμεν ὑμῖν	1	We commanded you with a command	For emphasis, the high priest is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. If your language uses the same construction for emphasis, it would be appropriate to use it here in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of conveying this emphasis. Alternate translation: “we commanded you very strictly”
784	ACT	5	28	f7pz	figs-you	ὑμῖν…πεπληρώκατε…ὑμῶν…βούλεσθε	1	you … you have filled … your … you desire	In this verse the words you and your refer to the apostles, and so those words are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
785	ACT	5	28	g2hi	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ	1	in this name	Here, name figuratively means the person of Jesus. See how you translated the similar expression in 4:17. Alternate translation: “about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
786	ACT	5	28	a386	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, πεπληρώκατε	1	behold, you have filled	The high priest says behold to get the apostles to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “nevertheless you have filled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
787	ACT	5	28	j4kr	figs-metaphor	πεπληρώκατε τὴν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τῆς διδαχῆς ὑμῶν	1	you have filled Jerusalem with your teaching	The high priest is speaking figuratively of Jerusalem as if it were a container that the apostles had filled with their teaching. Alternate translation: “you have taught people who live in every part of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
788	ACT	5	28	a387	figs-metaphor	βούλεσθε ἐπαγαγεῖν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς	1	you desire to bring upon us	The high priest is speaking figuratively as if the apostles wanted to put the blood of Jesus on him and his fellow Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you want to make us responsible for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
789	ACT	5	28	a388	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	us	By us, the high priest means himself and his fellow Jewish leaders, but not the apostles to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
790	ACT	5	28	ym1k	figs-metonymy	τὸ αἷμα	1	the blood	The high priest is using the term blood figuratively to mean death, by association with the way Jesus’ blood was shed when he died. Alternate translation: “the death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
791	ACT	5	28	a389	figs-explicit	τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τούτου	1	this man	The phrase this man refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “this man Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
792	ACT	5	29	a390	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς…Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι εἶπαν	1	answering, Peter and the apostles said	Together the words answering and said mean that Peter and the other apostles responded to the high priest. Alternate translation: “Peter and the apostles responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
793	ACT	5	29	di9u	figs-explicit	Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι εἶπαν	1	Peter and the apostles said	Luke seems to mean implicitly that Peter said what follows on behalf of all of the apostles. Alternate translation: “Peter said on behalf of all of the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
794	ACT	5	29	a391	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις	1	men	Peter is using the term men in a generic sense to mean “human beings.” Alternate translation: “human beings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
795	ACT	5	30	a392	figs-metaphor	τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν	1	of our fathers	Peter is using the term fathers figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
796	ACT	5	30	kwsc	figs-gendernotations	τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν	1		Although the term fathers is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “of our fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
797	ACT	5	30	r7av	figs-idiom	ἤγειρεν Ἰησοῦν	1	raised up Jesus	As in 2:24, the idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “brought Jesus back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
798	ACT	5	30	a393	figs-you	ὃν ὑμεῖς διεχειρίσασθε	1	whom you killed	The word you is plural. Even though Peter is responding to the high priest, who has been interrogating the apostles, Peter is referring here to the entire council. If your language does not use separate forms for singular and plural “you,” you could indicate that in some other way. Alternate translation: “whom you Sanhedrin members killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
799	ACT	5	30	a394	figs-synecdoche	ὃν ὑμεῖς διεχειρίσασθε	1	whom you killed	It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says figuratively that the Sanhedrin members killed him because their demands led to his death. Alternate translation: “whom you demanded to be killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
800	ACT	5	30	pu5j	figs-metonymy	κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου	1	having hung him on a tree	The word translated as tree can mean either an actual tree or something made of wood. Peter is using the word to refer to the cross, which was made out of wood. Alternate translation: “having hung him on a wooden cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
801	ACT	5	30	a395	figs-explicit	κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου	1	having hung him on a tree	In some languages the word hung would suggest a different method of execution. For clarity, you could use a different word that might indicate the actual meaning better. Alternate translation: “having suspended him from a wooden cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
802	ACT	5	31	a396	figs-nominaladj	τοῦτον	1	this one	Peter is using the demonstrative adjective this as a noun to refer to a specific person, Jesus. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “this Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
803	ACT	5	31	a397	figs-nominaladj	τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ	1	to his right	Peter is using the adjective right as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:25. Alternate translation: “to his right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
804	ACT	5	31	uh2d	translate-symaction	τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ	1	to his right	God placing Jesus at his right side was a symbolic way of giving him great honor. Alternate translation: “to a place of great honor next to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
805	ACT	5	31	mr1d	figs-abstractnouns	τοῦ δοῦναι μετάνοιαν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ καὶ ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν	1	to give repentance and forgiveness of sins to Israel	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words repentance and forgiveness, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “to give the people of Israel an opportunity to repent and have God forgive their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
806	ACT	5	31	q1il	figs-personification	Ἰσραὴλ	1	Israel	Peter is referring figuratively to all of the people of Israel as if they were a single person, their ancestor, Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
807	ACT	5	32	a398	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	we	Peter is addressing the Sanhedrin, but he is using the word we to refer only to himself and the other apostles. So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive “us,” it would be accurate to use the exclusive form here. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that we is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “we apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
808	ACT	5	32	a399	figs-ellipsis	καὶ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, ὃ ἔδωκεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς πειθαρχοῦσιν αὐτῷ	1	and the Holy Spirit, whom God has given to those obeying him	Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and the Holy Spirit, whom God has given to those obeying him, is also a witness of these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
809	ACT	5	32	yml6	figs-explicit	ὃ ἔδωκεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς πειθαρχοῦσιν αὐτῷ	1	whom God has given to those obeying him	Here at the end of his response to the high priest, Peter is echoing what he said at the beginning: “It is necessary to obey God rather than men.” He is defining himself and his fellow apostles as people who are committed to obeying God and to testifying about Jesus even if the authorities forbid them to do that. Peter is saying that God has given the apostles the Holy Spirit to empower them to give that testimony in obedience to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “whom God has given us to empower us to obey him by testifying about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
810	ACT	5	33	abx6	writing-pronouns	οἱ…ἀκούσαντες διεπρίοντο, καὶ ἐβούλοντο ἀνελεῖν αὐτούς	1	having heard this, they were furious and wanted to kill them	The pronoun they refers to the council members and the pronoun them refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “the council members were furious when they heard this, and they wanted to kill the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
811	ACT	5	34	i2rr	writing-participants	τις…Φαρισαῖος ὀνόματι Γαμαλιήλ	1	a certain Pharisee, Gamaliel by name	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
812	ACT	5	34	a400	translate-names	Φαρισαῖος	1	Pharisee	The name Pharisee describes a member of a group of Jewish priests. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
813	ACT	5	34	a401	translate-names	Γαμαλιήλ	1	Gamaliel	Gamaliel is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
814	ACT	5	34	a402	writing-background	νομοδιδάσκαλος τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ	1	a law teacher, honored by all the people	Luke provides this background information about Gamaliel to help readers understand what happens next in the story, when the council members follow Gamaliel’s advice to be patient rather than acting immediately against the apostles. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. It may be helpful to do that in a separate sentence, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
815	ACT	5	34	fpr4	figs-activepassive	τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ	1	honored by all the people	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom all the people honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
816	ACT	5	34	a403	figs-hyperbole	τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ	1	honored by all the people	The word all is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “whom the people greatly honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
817	ACT	5	34	a404	translate-symaction	ἀναστὰς	1	rising up	Here, rising up means that Gamaliel stood up. He did that to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “standing up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
818	ACT	5	34	xk6g	figs-explicit	ἐκέλευσεν ἔξω…τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ποιῆσαι	1	commanded to put the apostles outside	Your language may require you to specify the object of commanded. Alternate translation: “commanded the officers to take the apostles outside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
819	ACT	5	34	a405	figs-nominaladj	βραχὺ	1	for a little	Luke is using the adjective little as a noun in order to indicate a length of time. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can supply a word such as “while” to show this. Alternate translation: “for a little while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
820	ACT	5	35	a406	grammar-connect-time-sequential	τε	1	And	Luke is using the word translated And to indicate that Gamaliel spoke after the officers had taken the apostles out of the council chamber. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
821	ACT	5	35	a407	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται	1	Men, Israelites	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
822	ACT	5	35	ae1u	figs-explicit	προσέχετε ἑαυτοῖς ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις τί μέλλετε πράσσειν	1	pay attention to yourselves, what you are about to do to these men	Gamaliel is warning the council members not to do something that they will later regret. He means “be very careful about what you do to these men,” and you could say that as an alternate translation. However, the implication is that the council should not kill the apostles, as 5:33 says they want to do. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you need to be very cautious and not kill these men, because you might deeply regret that later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
823	ACT	5	36	a408	figs-idiom	πρὸ…τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν	1	before these days	Gamaliel is using the term days idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “some time ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
824	ACT	5	36	a409	translate-names	Θευδᾶς	1	Theudas	Theudas is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
825	ACT	5	36	uaj6	figs-metaphor	ἀνέστη	1	rose up	In this context, rose up figuratively means that Theudas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
826	ACT	5	36	b3nl	figs-idiom	λέγων εἶναί τινα ἑαυτόν	1	saying himself to be somebody	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “saying that he was somebody important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
827	ACT	5	36	a410	figs-activepassive	ᾧ προσεκλίθη ἀνδρῶν ἀριθμὸς	1	to whom was joined a number of men	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom a number of men joined” or, as a new sentence, “A number of men joined him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
828	ACT	5	36	ie3x	figs-activepassive	ὃς ἀνῃρέθη	1	who was killed	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. It may be helpful to begin another new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom the Romans killed” or, as a new sentence, “But the Romans killed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
829	ACT	5	36	juz1	figs-activepassive	ὅσοι ἐπείθοντο αὐτῷ	1	as many as were persuaded by him	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as many as he had persuaded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
830	ACT	5	36	a411	figs-activepassive	διελύθησαν	1	were dispersed	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “dispersed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
831	ACT	5	36	rzg5		καὶ ἐγένοντο εἰς οὐδέν	1	and they came to nothing	Alternate translation: “and their plans did not succeed”
832	ACT	5	37	f33y	figs-nominaladj	μετὰ τοῦτον	1	After this one	Gamaliel is using the demonstrative adjective this as a noun to refer to a specific person, Theudas. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could use a pronoun or this man’s name. Alternate translation: “After him” or “After Theudas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
833	ACT	5	37	a412	translate-names	Ἰούδας ὁ Γαλιλαῖος	1	Judas the Galilean	Judas is the name of a man. See how you translated the same name in 1:13 and 1:16. (Those verses describe two other men with this name, not the same Judas as here.) Galilean is the name for someone who is from the region of Galilee. See how you translated that name in 1:11. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
834	ACT	5	37	a413	figs-metaphor	ἀνέστη	1	rose up	As in 5:36, rose up here figuratively means that Judas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
835	ACT	5	37	p56f	figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῆς ἀπογραφῆς	1	in the days of the census	Gamaliel is using the term days idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at the time of the census” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
836	ACT	5	37	kz4s	figs-idiom	ἀπέστησε λαὸν ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ	1	drew away people after him	Here, drew away is an idiom that means Judas persuaded people to rebel with him against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “persuaded people to join him in rebellion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
837	ACT	5	37	a414	figs-nominaladj	κἀκεῖνος	1	That one also	Gamaliel is using the demonstrative adjective that as a noun to refer to a specific person, Judas. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you use a pronoun or this man’s name. Alternate translation: “He also” or “Judas also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
838	ACT	5	37	a415	figs-activepassive	ὅσοι ἐπείθοντο αὐτῷ	1	as many as were persuaded by him	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as many as he had persuaded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
839	ACT	5	37	a416	figs-activepassive	διεσκορπίσθησαν	1	were scattered	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “scattered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
840	ACT	5	38	i4bw		καὶ τὰ νῦν λέγω ὑμῖν	1	And now I say these things to you	Gamaliel uses this expression to shift the council members’ attention away from the stories of Theudas and Judas so that he could give them some direct advice. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this same purpose.
841	ACT	5	38	a417	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	And	Gamaliel is using the word translated And to introduce what he wants the council to conclude as a result of the two examples he has given. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
842	ACT	5	38	wz89		ἀπόστητε ἀπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων τούτων καὶ ἄφετε αὐτούς	1	keep away from these men and release them	When Gamaliel tells the council to keep away from these men, he implicitly means that they should not execute them, as 5:33 says they wanted to do. Alternate translation: “do not execute these men or put them back in prison”
843	ACT	5	38	zh1d		ἐὰν ᾖ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων, ἡ βουλὴ αὕτη ἢ τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο	1	if this counsel or this work is from men	Alternate translation: “if men have devised this plan or are doing this work”
844	ACT	5	38	a418	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	men	Gamaliel is using the term men in a generic sense to mean “humans.” Since he contrasts from men here with “from God” in the next verse, it may be appropriate to add the word “mere” to help show that contrast. Alternate translation: “mere humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
845	ACT	5	38	uql8	figs-activepassive	καταλυθήσεται	1	it will be destroyed	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “someone will destroy it” or “it will not last” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
846	ACT	5	39	a419	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	but	Gamaliel uses this word to introduce a contrast between what would happen if the work the apostles are doing were “from men” and what would happen if it were from God. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation, as a new sentence: “However,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
847	ACT	5	39	j819	writing-pronouns	εἰ…ἐκ Θεοῦ ἐστιν	1	if it is from God	Here the pronoun it refers back to the phrase “this counsel or this work” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “if God has devised this plan or commanded these men to do this work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
848	ACT	5	39	a420	figs-explicit	μήποτε	1	lest	It may be helpful to state the implications of the word lest explicitly. Alternate translation: “and if you do try to destroy them,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
849	ACT	5	39	a421	figs-activepassive	καὶ θεομάχοι εὑρεθῆτε	1	you may even be found	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. However, since this is also an idiom (see next note), it would only be meaningful to do that in your translation if your language uses the verb “find” in the same idiomatic sense. Alternate translation: “people may even find you to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
850	ACT	5	39	a422	figs-activepassive	εὑρεθῆτε	1	be found	The expression be found is an idiom. Alternate translation: “turn out to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
851	ACT	5	39	cyp1	figs-activepassive	ἐπείσθησαν…αὐτῷ	1	they were persuaded by him	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Gamaliel persuaded them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
852	ACT	5	40	z31c	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	And	Luke uses the word translated And to introduce what the Sanhedrin did as a result of Gamaliel’s advice. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
853	ACT	5	40	p6lz	figs-synecdoche	προσκαλεσάμενοι τοὺς ἀποστόλους, δείραντες παρήγγειλαν	1	summoning the apostles, having beaten them, they commanded them	The Sanhedrin would have ordered their officers to bring back the apostles and beat them. They did not do those things personally. But Luke speaks figuratively as if they did do those things because they ordered them to be done. Alternate translation: “they had their officers bring back the apostles and beat them, and then they commanded them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
854	ACT	5	40	fca9	figs-metonymy	λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	to speak in the name of Jesus	Here, name figuratively means the person of Jesus. See how you translated the similar expression in 4:17. Alternate translation: “to speak about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
855	ACT	5	41	a423	figs-metaphor	ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Συνεδρίου	1	from the face of the Sanhedrin	Luke is using the word face figuratively to mean “presence.” Alternate translation: “from the presence of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
856	ACT	5	41	cv8y	figs-activepassive	κατηξιώθησαν	1	they had been considered worthy	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “God had considered them worthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
857	ACT	5	41	lk82	figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος	1	for the Name	Here, the Name figuratively means Jesus. Alternate translation: “for Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
858	ACT	5	42	jj94	writing-endofstory	τε	1	And	Luke uses the word translated And to introduce information about what happened after this story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
859	ACT	5	42	kyp6	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	in the temple	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
860	ACT	5	42	x424	figs-litotes	οὐκ ἐπαύοντο, διδάσκοντες καὶ εὐαγγελιζόμενοι	1	they did not cease teaching and proclaiming the gospel	Luke is expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “they continued to teach and to proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
861	ACT	6	intro	z5r5			0		Acts 6 General Notes Structure and formatting Acts 6:7 is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the end of the first major part of the book. Special concepts in this chapter The distribution to the widows The believers in Jerusalem gave food every day to women whose husbands had died. All of them had been raised as Jews, but some of them spoke Hebrew and had lived mostly in Judea, while others spoke Greek and may have lived in Gentile areas. Those who gave out the food gave it to the Hebrew-speaking widows but not equally to the Greek-speaking widows. To please God, the church leaders appointed Greek-speaking men to make sure the Greek-speaking widows received their share of the food. One of these Greek-speaking men was Stephen. Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter “His face was like the face of an angel” No one knows for sure what it was about Stephen’s face that was like the face of an angel, because Luke does not tell us. A note to this phrase offers one suggestion, which you may choose to follow. However, you might also decide to say only what the ULT says about this.
862	ACT	6	1	f8br	writing-newevent	ἐν δὲ ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις	1	Now in those days	Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
863	ACT	6	1	cg5t	figs-idiom	ἐν…ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις	1	in those days	Luke is using the term days idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
864	ACT	6	1	e7vb	translate-names	τῶν Ἑλληνιστῶν	1	of the Hellenists	Hellenists was the name for Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke the Greek language and followed Greek customs. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
865	ACT	6	1	ftz8	translate-names	τοὺς Ἑβραίους	1	the Hebrews	In this context, Luke is using the name Hebrews to mean Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke Aramaic, a language closely related to Hebrew, and who did not follow Greek customs. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
866	ACT	6	1	s4qy	figs-activepassive	παρεθεωροῦντο ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ αἱ χῆραι αὐτῶν	1	their widows were being overlooked in the daily service	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who was doing the action. Alternate translation: “those who were distributing food each day were overlooking their widows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
867	ACT	6	1	rde8	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ	1	in the daily service	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word service, you could express the same idea with an equivalent expression. Alternate translations: “by those who were distributing food each day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
868	ACT	6	2	kwvo	grammar-connect-logic-result	δὲ	1	So	Luke is using the word So to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this same purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
869	ACT	6	2	n5r4	figs-nominaladj	οἱ δώδεκα	1	the Twelve	Luke is using the adjective Twelve as a noun in order to indicate a group of people, the apostles who led the church. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
870	ACT	6	2	is74	translate-names	οἱ δώδεκα	1	the Twelve	Alternatively, even if your language does not ordinarily use adjectives as nouns, you may be able to do that in this case, since this is a title by which the apostles were known. Even though it is a number, if you translate it as a title, as ULT does, follow the conventions for titles in your language. For example, capitalize main words and write out numbers rather than use digits. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
871	ACT	6	2	jm17	figs-metaphor	καταλείψαντας τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	to leave behind the word of God	The apostles are speaking figuratively as if they would walk away from the word of God and leave it behind them. Alternate translation: “to stop preaching and teaching the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
872	ACT	6	2	w9re	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the word of God	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
873	ACT	6	2	fwk6	figs-metaphor	διακονεῖν τραπέζαις	1	to serve tables	To describe the work that would be required for them personally to monitor the church’s program of distributing food to people in need, the apostles speak figuratively as if they would be bringing food to people who were sitting at tables. Alternate translation: “to give our attention to food distribution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
874	ACT	6	3	lcyx	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	See how you translated the term brothers in 1:15. Alternate translation: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
875	ACT	6	3	p1yz	figs-activepassive	ἄνδρας…μαρτυρουμένους	1	men being attested	The expression being attested is a passive verbal form. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the same meaning with an active form. Alternate translation: “men to whose honesty people attest” or “men whom people say they trust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
876	ACT	6	3	mgid	figs-metaphor	πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας	1	full of the Spirit and of wisdom	The apostles are speaking figuratively of these men as if they were containers that the Holy Spirit and wisdom could fill. Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who possess great wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
877	ACT	6	3	pxe5	figs-abstractnouns	πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας	1	full of the Spirit and of wisdom	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word wisdom, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “wisely.” Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who act very wisely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
878	ACT	6	3	i27a	figs-metaphor	ἐπὶ τῆς χρείας ταύτης	1	over this task	When the apostles say that they will appoint these men over the work of food distribution, they are using a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “to be responsible for this task” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
879	ACT	6	4	b3bj	figs-metonymy	τοῦ λόγου	1	of the word	The apostles are using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to teach and preach by using words. Alternate translation: “of teaching and preaching the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
880	ACT	6	5	wh9t	figs-metonymy	ἤρεσεν ὁ λόγος ἐνώπιον παντὸς τοῦ πλήθους	1	the statement was pleasing before the whole multitude	Luke is using the word before to refer to the opinion of the believers, since people assess things that come to their attention in front of them. Alternate translation: “what the apostles recommended pleased all of the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
881	ACT	6	5	jayc	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	2	And	Luke is using the word translated And to introduce what the believers did as a result of the apostles’ request. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
882	ACT	6	5	ajq1	translate-names	Στέφανον…Φίλιππον…Πρόχορον…Νικάνορα…Τίμωνα…Παρμενᾶν…Νικόλαον	1	Stephen…Philip…Prochorus…Nicanor…Timon…Parmenas…Nicolaus	These are the names of seven men. They are all Greek names, and this suggests that all of the men selected were from the group of Greek-speaking Jews among the believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
883	ACT	6	5	vsyk	figs-metaphor	ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	a man full of faith and of the Holy Spirit	Luke is speaking figuratively of Stephen as if they were a container that faith and the Holy Spirit had filled. Alternate translation: “a man who possessed great wisdom and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
884	ACT	6	5	yqsj	figs-abstractnouns	ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	a man full of faith and of the Holy Spirit	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word faith, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trust.” Alternate translation: “a man who confidently trusted in God and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
885	ACT	6	5	cg5s	translate-names	Ἀντιοχέα	1	an Antiochian	The name Antiochian describes a person who comes from the city of Antioch. Alternate translation: “who came from Antioch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
886	ACT	6	6	lvaj	figs-events	προσευξάμενοι, ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας	1		This could mean: (1) that the apostles first prayed and then placed their hands on these men. Alternate translation: “after they had prayed, they placed their hands upon them” (2) that the apostles placed their hands on the men while they were praying for them. Alternate translation: “they prayed for them with their hands placed upon them” or “they placed their hands upon them and prayed for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
887	ACT	6	6	wu1y	translate-symaction	ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας	1	and placed their hands upon them	The apostles placed their hands on the seven men to show publicly that they were giving them the responsibility and authority to oversee the food distribution. Alternate translation: “and placed their hands on them to show that they were giving them responsibility and authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
888	ACT	6	7	x48w	writing-endofstory		0		As the outline in the General Introduction indicates, this verse is the end of the first major section of the book of Acts. That section describes how the apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem. Luke uses this verse to summarize what happened as a result of the events within this whole section of the book. You language may have its own way of indicating how such a summary relates to a significant part of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
889	ACT	6	7	wu4l	figs-metaphor	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν	1	the word of God was growing	Luke is speaking figuratively of the way the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread as if the word of God itself were growing. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
890	ACT	6	7	ueie	figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν	1	the word of God was growing	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that God told the believers to spread by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
891	ACT	6	7	jg8y	figs-synecdoche	ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει	1	became obedient to the faith	Luke speaks generally of the faith (that is, belief in Jesus) to indicate that these priests became obedient to one part of it, Jesus’ teachings about how to live. But that obedience showed that the priests genuinely embraced faith in Jesus as Messiah in its entirety. Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
892	ACT	6	7	qq3l	figs-abstractnouns	ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει	1	became obedient to the faith	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word faith, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believe.” Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
893	ACT	6	8	et2j	writing-participants	Στέφανος δὲ	1	Now Stephen	Luke uses this phrase to introduce Stephen as the main character in this part of the story. Your language may have its own way of doing that. If so, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
894	ACT	6	8	pzr0	figs-metaphor	Στέφανος…πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει	1	Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing	Luke is speaking figuratively as if Stephen were a container that grace and power were filling. Alternate translation: “Stephen had abundant grace and power, and so he was doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
895	ACT	6	8	h8sg	figs-hendiadys	Στέφανος…πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει	1	Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing	Luke may be using the two words grace and power together to express a single idea. The word grace would describe the character of the power that Stephen had. Specifically, it would be power that God was giving him. Alternate translation: “Stephen, full of gracious power, was doing” or “Stephen, full of power from God, was doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
896	ACT	6	8	xscq	figs-abstractnouns	Στέφανος…πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει	1	Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words grace and power, you could express the same ideas with adverbs. Alternate translation: “Stephen was supernaturally and powerfully doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
897	ACT	6	8	m0zh	figs-doublet	τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα μεγάλα	1	great wonders and signs	The terms wonders and signs mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:22. Alternate translation: “many great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
898	ACT	6	9	d74m	figs-idiom	ἀνέστησαν	1	rose up	Here the expression rose up means that these people took action, specifically to oppose Stephen, not that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “took action to oppose Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
899	ACT	6	9	nei0	figs-activepassive	τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων	1	the synagogue called Freedmen	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the synagogue whose name was Freedmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
900	ACT	6	9	k88n	figs-explicit	τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων	1	the synagogue called Freedmen	The word Freedmen probably refers to former slaves. Alternate translation: “the synagogue that former slaves attended” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
901	ACT	6	9	e7b0	translate-names	Κυρηναίων…Ἀλεξανδρέων…Κιλικίας…Ἀσίας	1	of the Cyrenians…of the Alexandrians…Cilicia…Asia	Cyrenians is the name for people from the city of Cyrene, and Alexandrians is the name for people from the city of Alexandria. Cilicia and Asia are the names of two Roman provinces. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
902	ACT	6	10	v5ia	figs-idiom	οὐκ ἴσχυον ἀντιστῆναι	1	they were not able to stand against	The expression stand against is an idiom. Alternate translation: “they could not argue successfully against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
903	ACT	6	10	fnb2	figs-hendiadys	τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει	1	the wisdom and the Spirit with which he spoke	Luke may be using the two words wisdom and Spirit together to express a single idea. The word Spirit would describe the source and character of the wisdom that Stephen was displaying. The word Spirit refers to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Spirit-inspired wisdom by which he spoke” or “the wisdom that the Holy Spirit gave him as he spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
904	ACT	6	10	psha	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει	1	the wisdom and the Spirit with which he spoke	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word wisdom, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “the wise things he said as the Spirit inspired him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
905	ACT	6	11	ren5	figs-explicit	ὑπέβαλον ἄνδρας λέγοντας	1	they instigated men to say	The word instigated means that Stephen’s opponents in some way persuaded these men to lie about what Stephen was saying. They may have offered them money, or they may have convinced them that Stephen was a dangerous person who needed to be stopped. Since Luke does not specify the means, it may be best not to suggest a means in your translation. But it would be appropriate to indicate that what these men were recruited to say about Stephen was a lie. Alternate translation: “recruited some men to lie about Stephen by saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
906	ACT	6	11	s2cl	figs-exclusive	ἀκηκόαμεν	1	We have heard	The men are using the word We to refer only to themselves, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
907	ACT	6	11	x747	figs-metonymy	λαλοῦντος ῥήματα βλάσφημα	1	speaking blasphemous words	The men are using the term words figuratively to mean the things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying blasphemous things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
908	ACT	6	11	dgxi	translate-names	Μωϋσῆν	1	Moses	Moses is the name of a man. God gave him the law to give to Israel. See how you translated his name in 3:22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
909	ACT	6	12	tqk9	writing-pronouns	συνεκίνησάν	1	They…stirred up	In this verse and the next one, the word “they” continues to refer back to the opponents of Stephen who are named in 6:9. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
910	ACT	6	12	l251	figs-metaphor	συνεκίνησάν τε τὸν λαὸν, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς	1	They also stirred up the people, the elders, and the scribes	Luke says figuratively that Stephen’s opponents stirred up these other groups to mean that they said things to make them very upset with Stephen. Alternate translation: “They also said things that made the people, the elders, and the scribes very upset with Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
911	ACT	6	12	dkbj	translate-names	Συνέδριον	1	Sanhedrin	Sanhedrin is the name of the Jewish ruling council. See how you translated it in 4:14. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
912	ACT	6	13	zv6s	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ παύεται λαλῶν	1	does not stop speaking	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb stop. Alternate translation: “continually speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
913	ACT	6	13	ju6w	figs-metonymy	λαλῶν ῥήματα	1	speaking words	The men are using the term words figuratively to mean things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
914	ACT	6	13	o3j2	figs-metonymy	τοῦ τόπου τοῦ ἁγίου	1	the holy place	The men are describing the temple in Jerusalem figuratively by referring to it by something associated with it, that it is a holy place. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
915	ACT	6	14	c5l9	translate-names	ὁ Ναζωραῖος	1	the Nazarene	The word Nazarene describes someone who comes from the city of Nazareth. See how you translated it in 2:23. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
916	ACT	6	14	uok4	figs-explicit	τὸν τόπον τοῦτον	1	this place	By this place, the false witnesses mean the temple, which they described as “the holy place” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “this temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
917	ACT	6	14	vak4	figs-metonymy	τὰ ἔθη ἃ παρέδωκεν ἡμῖν Μωϋσῆς	1	the customs that Moses handed down to us	The phrase handed down is an idiom that refers to something that is passed from generation to generation. The false witnesses are describing how the ancestors of the Jews have passed on the teachings originally received from Moses to each successive generation. Alternate translation: “the customs that our ancestors learned from Moses and have taught each successive generation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
918	ACT	6	15	k8rw	figs-simile	εἶδον τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ, ὡσεὶ πρόσωπον ἀγγέλου	1	saw his face as the face of an angel	Luke offers this comparison but he does not say specifically in what way Stephen’s face was like the face of an angel. However, this may mean that his face was shining brightly, since descriptions of angels in the Bible often say they were shining brightly. So you might choose to say that in your translation. Alternate translation: “saw that his face was shining brightly, like the face of an angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
919	ACT	7	intro	p9h4			0		Acts 7 General Notes Structure and formatting This chapter presents Stephen’s defense against the charges that false witnesses had made against him, as Luke describes in 6:13–14. Those witnesses had said, “This man does not stop speaking words against the holy place and the law. For we have heard him say that this Jesus the Nazarene will destroy this place and change the customs that Moses handed down to us.” In response, Stephen shows that he respects the law, but he then shows how the Israelites have not kept the law. He next shows that he respects the temple, but he then explains that God does not live in temples made by people. Luke presents Stephen’s speech within the narrative setting of his trial by the Sanhedrin. (v. 1) The high priest asks Stephen to answer the charges against him (vv. 2–19) Stephen tells the story of the Israelites up to the time of Moses (vv. 20–37) Stephen explains how Moses gave the law (vv. 38–43) Stephen shows that the Israelites did not keep the law that Moses gave (vv. 44–47) Stephen tells how the tabernacle and temple were built (vv. 48–50) Stephen explains that God does not live in temples that people build (vv. 51–54) Stephen makes his own charges against the Sanhedrin members (vv. 55–60) The Sanhedrin members, enraged, execute Stephen by stoning Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 7:42–43 and 49–50. A note to 7:36–38 suggests making each of these verses a separate paragraph or using formatting in some other way to highlight the repeated phrases that Stephen uses to describe Moses. It appears that 8:1 is part of the narrative of this chapter. Special concepts in this chapter “Stephen said” Stephen told the history of Israel very briefly. He paid special attention to the times that the Israelites had rejected the people God had chosen to lead them. At the end of the story, he said that the Jewish leaders he was talking to had rejected Jesus just as the evil Israelites had always rejected the leaders God had appointed for them. “Full of the Holy Spirit” The Holy Spirit completely controlled Stephen so that he said only and all of what God wanted him to say. Foreshadowing When an author speaks of something that is not important at that time but will be important later in the story, this is called foreshadowing. Luke mentions Saul in 7:58, even though he is not an important person in this part of the story. This is because Saul, also known as Paul, is an important person in the rest of the Book of Acts. Important figures of speech in this chapter Implied information Stephen was talking to Jews who knew the law of Moses well, so he did not explain things that his hearers already knew. But you may need to explain some of these things so that your readers will be able to understand what Stephen was saying. For example, you may need to make explicit that when Joseph’s brothers “sold him into Egypt” (Acts 7:9), Joseph was going to be a slave in Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) Metonymy Stephen spoke of Joseph ruling “over Egypt” and over all of Pharaoh’s household. By this he meant that Joseph ruled over the people of Egypt and of the people and possessions in Pharaoh’s household. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) Important textual issues in this chapter “a dwelling for the house of Jacob” (7:46) In 7:46, some ancient manuscripts read “a dwelling for the house of Jacob.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “a dwelling for the God of Jacob.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter Background knowledge The Jewish leaders to whom Stephen spoke already knew much about the events he was describing. They knew what Moses had written in the book of Genesis. If the book of Genesis has not been translated into your language, it may be difficult for your readers to follow what Stephen said. It may be helpful to provide some background information, either in the text or in notes. Reference of “our” and “you” Throughout this chapter, Stephen uses the word “our” to refer to himself and to his listeners. When he means only them, he says “you,” and “you” is plural.
920	ACT	7	1	hy9r	figs-explicit	ὁ ἀρχιερεύς	1	Connecting Statement:	Luke assumes that his readers will know that the high priest was there and that he asked Stephen to testify because he was a member of the Sanhedrin and its leader. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the high priest, who was the leader of the Sanhedrin,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
921	ACT	7	2	abc7	writing-pronouns	ὁ δὲ ἔφη	1	Then he said	The pronoun he refers to Stephen, not the high priest. Alternate translation: “Then Stephen said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
922	ACT	7	2	zbq0	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες	1		Men, brothers and fathers is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You brothers and fathers of mine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
923	ACT	7	2	v5si	figs-metaphor	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες	1	brothers, and fathers, listen to me	Stephen is using the word brothers figuratively to refer to his fellow Israelites. He is likely using the word fathers figuratively to refer to the leaders of Israel, the members of the Sanhedrin. In both cases he is speaking respectfully. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites and you leaders of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
924	ACT	7	2	kfep	figs-abstractnouns	ὁ Θεὸς τῆς δόξης	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun glory with an adjective such as “glorious.” Alternate translation: “The glorious God” or “God, who is glorious,” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
925	ACT	7	2	n09p	figs-explicit	ὁ Θεὸς τῆς δόξης	1		Stephen apparently chooses to describe God in this way at the beginning of his speech in order to refute the charge made in 6:11 that he says blasphemous things about God. Calling him the God of glory acknowledges that people should rightfully give glory to God. You might choose to bring out this implication in your translation. Alternate translation: “God, to whom we should rightfully give glory,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
926	ACT	7	2	pt4h	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1		Here and throughout this chapter, Stephen is using the word our to refer to himself and to his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
927	ACT	7	2	w1ya	figs-metaphor	τῷ πατρὶ ἡμῶν Ἀβραὰμ	1		Stephen is using the term father figuratively to mean “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “to Abraham our ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
928	ACT	7	2	ust7	translate-names	Μεσοποταμίᾳ…Χαρράν	1		Mesopotamia is the name of a region, and Harran is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
929	ACT	7	3	uksj	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτόν, ἔξελθε ἐκ τῆς γῆς σου καὶ ἐκ τῆς συγγενείας σου, καὶ δεῦρο εἰς τὴν γῆν ἣν ἄν σοι δείξω	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “God told Abraham to go out from his land and from his relatives and come into the land that he would show him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
930	ACT	7	3	kgef	writing-pronouns	εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτόν	1		The pronoun he refers to God, while the pronoun him refers to Abraham. Alternate translation: “God said to Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
931	ACT	7	4	pfg3	writing-pronouns	κατῴκησεν…αὐτοῦ…μετῴκισεν αὐτὸν	1		The pronouns his and him and the first instance of he refer to Abraham, while the second instance of he refers to God. For clarity, in your translation you might say “Abraham lived” and “God brought him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
932	ACT	7	4	mv26	translate-names	γῆς Χαλδαίων	1		Chaldeans is the name of a people group. This group lived in Mesopotamia, so as 7:2 indicates, Abraham had been living among these people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
933	ACT	7	4	pfg4	figs-you	ὑμεῖς	1	you	The word you is plural. Stephen is using it to refer not just to the high priest, whose question he is answering, but also to all of the council members and the others who are listenting to him. So you can use the plural form of the word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
934	ACT	7	5	tnsm	writing-pronouns	οὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ…ἐπηγγείλατο…αὐτῷ…αὐτοῦ…αὐτόν…οὐκ ὄντος αὐτῷ	1		The pronouns him and his and the third instance of he refer to Abraham, while the first two instances of he refer to God. For clarity, in your translation you might say “God did not give Abraham,” “God promised,” and “although Abraham did not have.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
935	ACT	7	5	ax1j		οὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ κληρονομίαν ἐν αὐτῇ	1	he did not give him an inheritance in it	Alternate translation: “he did not give any of it to him as an inheritance”
936	ACT	7	5	qff6	figs-explicit	οὐδὲ βῆμα ποδός	1	not even a stride of a foot	This could mean: (1) not enough ground to stand on or (2) not enough ground on which to take a step. Either way, the expression is implicitly describing a very small area. Alternate translation: “not even a tiny piece of ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
937	ACT	7	5	u6iw	figs-metaphor	αὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν…καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν	1	to him for a possession, and to his seed after him	The term seed figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “to him for a possession, and to his descendants after him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
938	ACT	7	5	j09v	figs-abstractnouns	αὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν…καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun possession with a verb such as “possess.” Stephen is saying that Abraham possessed the land in the sense that it was something that God had promised to him but that it was his descendants who came into actual possession of it. Alternate translation: “as something that his descendants would one day possess” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
939	ACT	7	6	tn6b	figs-explicit	ἐλάλησεν…οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς	1	God spoke to him like this	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this occurred some time after the statement in the previous verse. It may be helpful to state that in your translation. Alternate translation: “Subsequently God told Abraham that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
940	ACT	7	6	jymv	writing-pronouns	ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα αὐτοῦ, πάροικον ἐν γῇ ἀλλοτρίᾳ, καὶ δουλώσουσιν αὐτὸ καὶ κακώσουσιν	1		Stephen is using the singular word seed figuratively to mean “descendants,” and so he uses the singular noun stranger and the singular pronoun him. For clarity in your translation, to show that he is not referring to a single individual, you could say “descendants” and “strangers” and use the plural pronoun them. Alternate translation: “his descendants would be strangers in a foreign land, whose people would enslave them and treat them badly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
941	ACT	7	7	k8pz	figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ τὸ ἔθνος ᾧ ἐὰν δουλεύσωσιν κρινῶ ἐγώ, ὁ Θεὸς εἶπεν; καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα, ἐξελεύσονται καὶ λατρεύσουσίν μοι ἐν τῷ τόπῳ τούτῳ	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But God said that he would judge the nation that would enslave him and that after that they would come out and serve him in this place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
942	ACT	7	7	f7fw	figs-metonymy	τὸ ἔθνος	1	I will judge the nation	Here, nation refers to the people who belong to that nation. Alternate translation: “the people of the nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
943	ACT	7	7	q7y6	writing-pronouns	ἐὰν δουλεύσωσιν	1	the nation that will enslave him	As in 7:6, Stephen is using the singular pronoun him because he is using the singular word seed figuratively to mean “descendants.” For clarity, particularly if you said “descendants” in the previous verse, you could use the plural pronoun “them” instead. That would help readers recognize that Stephen also means Abraham’s descendants when he says “they” later in the verse. Alternate translation: “will enslave them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
944	ACT	7	8	iwfx	writing-pronouns	ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ…ἐγέννησεν	1		The first instance of he refers to God, while the word him and the second instance of he refer to Abraham. For clarity, in your translation you might say “God gave Abraham … Abraham fathered.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
945	ACT	7	8	mwc9	figs-explicit	ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ διαθήκην περιτομῆς	1	God gave him the covenant of circumcision	Stephen’s listeners would have known that this covenant required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family. Alternate translation: “he made a covenant that required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
946	ACT	7	8	oel3	translate-names	τὸν Ἰσαὰκ…τὸν Ἰακώβ	1		Isaac and Jacob are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
947	ACT	7	8	g67f	translate-names	τὸν Ἰσαὰκ…τὸν Ἰακώβ	1		These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
948	ACT	7	8	ams1	figs-ellipsis	καὶ Ἰσαὰκ τὸν Ἰακώβ, καὶ Ἰακὼβ τοὺς δώδεκα πατριάρχας	1	Jacob of the 12 patriarchs	Stephen is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and Isaac fathered Jacob, and Jacob fathered the 12 patriarchs” or “and Isaac became the father of Jacob, and Jacob became the father of the 12 patriarchs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
949	ACT	7	8	gaww	figs-explicit	τοὺς δώδεκα πατριάρχας	1		Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is using the word patriarchs to mean the sons of Jacob who became the ancestors of the tribes of Israel. Alternate translation: “12 sons who became the ancestors of the tribes of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
950	ACT	7	9	n981	translate-kinship	οἱ πατριάρχαι	1	the patriarchs	Here the word patriarchs refers to the older sons of Jacob in their relationship with Joseph. If you refer to them in your translation as Joseph’s brothers, use the word for an older brother if your language makes that distinction. Alternate translation: “Jacob’s older sons” or “Joseph’s older brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
951	ACT	7	9	fq7w	translate-names	τὸν Ἰωσὴφ	1		Joseph is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
952	ACT	7	9	tik7	figs-explicit	ἀπέδοντο εἰς Αἴγυπτον	1	sold him into Egypt	Stephen’s listeners would have known that this meant that their ancestors sold Joseph into slavery and that he was taken to Egypt to be a slave there. Alternate translation: “sold him into slavery and he was taken to Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
953	ACT	7	9	u3dp	translate-names	Αἴγυπτον	1		Egypt is the name of a place. See how you translated it in 2:9. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
954	ACT	7	9	w1is	figs-idiom	ἦν…μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1	was with him	When Stephen says that God was with Joseph, this is an idiom that means God helped him. Alternate translation: “helped him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
955	ACT	7	10	kxgk	writing-pronouns	ἐξείλατο αὐτὸν ἐκ πασῶν τῶν θλίψεων αὐτοῦ; καὶ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ	1		In these phrases the word he refers to God and the words him and his refer to Joseph. Alternate translation: “God rescued Joseph from all his afflictions, and God gave Joseph” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
956	ACT	7	10	bfoo	figs-abstractnouns	ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ χάριν καὶ σοφίαν ἐναντίον Φαραὼ	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns favor and wisdom with adjectives. Alternate translation: “God made Pharaoh favorable towards Joseph and enabled Joseph to give Pharaoh wise advice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
957	ACT	7	10	vpir	figs-idiom	ἐναντίον Φαραὼ	1		Here the phrase before Pharaoh may be an idiom that means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “whenever he was in the presence of Pharaoh” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
958	ACT	7	10	s5vk	figs-metonymy	ἐναντίον Φαραὼ	1		The phrase before Pharaoh could also refer to Pharaoh’s opinion, by association with the way that Pharaoh would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “in Pharaoh’s perspective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
959	ACT	7	10	nycs	writing-pronouns	κατέστησεν αὐτὸν ἡγούμενον ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον, καὶ ὅλον τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ	1		In these phrases the words he and his refer to Pharaoh and the word him refers to Joseph. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh appointed Joseph governor over Egypt and all his household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
960	ACT	7	10	yr7m	figs-metonymy	ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον	1	over Egypt	The word Egypt refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “over all the people of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
961	ACT	7	10	pb4p	figs-metonymy	ὅλον τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ	1	over all his household	The word household refers to Pharaoh’s own servants and all his possessions. Alternate translation: “over all his servants and everything he owned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
962	ACT	7	11	p42j	figs-personification	ἦλθεν…λιμὸς ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν Αἴγυπτον καὶ Χανάαν, καὶ θλῖψις μεγάλη	1	came a famine	Here, Stephen speaks figuratively of famine and tribulation as if they came to Egypt and Canaan on their own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “there was a famine over all Egypt and Canaan, and there was great tribulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
963	ACT	7	11	ncnr	translate-names	Χανάαν	1		Canaan is the name of a place, the land where the Israelites eventually settled. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
964	ACT	7	11	frd4	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ θλῖψις μεγάλη	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of tribulation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and people suffered greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
965	ACT	7	11	p37v	figs-explicit	οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	our fathers	Stephen is using the term fathers figuratively to mean “ancestors.” He means specifically Jacob and his sons (Joseph’s older brothers), as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
966	ACT	7	12	pia8	figs-explicit	ὄντα σιτία εἰς Αἴγυπτον	1	grain	Stephen assumes that his readers will know that with Joseph as his administrator, Pharaoh had stored up grain during prosperous years and was now selling it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that people could buy stored grain from Pharaoh in Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
967	ACT	7	12	cvhm	figs-explicit	ἐξαπέστειλεν τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν πρῶτον	1		By first, Stephen does not mean that Jacob sent Joseph’s older brothers to Egypt before he sent anyone else, or before he did anything else. He means that Jacob sent them for a first time and would later send them for a second time, as Stephen’s listeners would have understood. Alternate translation: “he sent our fathers on a first trip there to buy food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
968	ACT	7	12	mbg8	figs-metaphor	τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν	1	our fathers	Stephen is using the term fathers figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Here he means specifically Joseph’s older brothers, as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
969	ACT	7	13	a5f3	figs-nominaladj	ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ	1		Stephen is using the adjective second as a noun, to mean the second time that Joseph’s brothers went to Egypt. ULT adds time to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “when Jacob sent them to Egypt again to buy more food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
970	ACT	7	13	ce2b	translate-ordinal	ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ	1	On their second time	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “during trip number two” or “on their next trip” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
971	ACT	7	13	m37e	figs-activepassive	ἀνεγνωρίσθη Ἰωσὴφ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς αὐτοῦ	1	was made known	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Joseph made himself known to his brothers” or “Joseph revealed to his brothers his identity as their brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
972	ACT	7	13	jxk8	figs-activepassive	φανερὸν ἐγένετο τῷ Φαραὼ τὸ γένος Ἰωσήφ	1	the family of Joseph became known to Pharaoh	The phrase became known is not actually a passive from in Greek, but it might sound like one in other languages. If your language does not use passive forms, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh learned that they were Joseph’s family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
973	ACT	7	14	aam5	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἀποστείλας…Ἰωσὴφ μετεκαλέσατο Ἰακὼβ	1	sending them back	Stephen means that Joseph sent his brothers back home in order to get their father Jacob. Alternate translation: “Joseph sent his brothers back to Canaan to get Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
974	ACT	7	14	wl32	figs-idiom	ἐν ψυχαῖς ἑβδομήκοντα πέντε	1		Stephen is using a Hebrew idiom here. Alternate translation: “who amounted to 75 people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
975	ACT	7	15	zasp	figs-idiom	κατέβη Ἰακὼβ εἰς Αἴγυπτον	1		Stephen says that Jacob went down because he traveled from the hilly and mountainous terrain of Canaan to the lowlying land of Egypt. Alternate translation: “Jacob traveled to Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
976	ACT	7	15	w2sm	figs-explicit	ἐτελεύτησεν αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	he and our fathers died	Stephen’s listeners would have known that Jacob and his sons lived in Egypt for some time. Make sure that your translation does not make it sound as if they died as soon as they arrived in Egypt. Alternate translation: “eventually Jacob and our ancestors died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
977	ACT	7	15	fe56	figs-metaphor	αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	he and our fathers	Stephen is using the term fathers figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Here he means specifically Jacob’s sons (Joseph’s older brothers), as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “Jacob and his sons who became our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
978	ACT	7	16	slg3	figs-activepassive	μετετέθησαν εἰς Συχὲμ, καὶ ἐτέθησαν	1	they were carried over … and laid	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jacob’s descendants brought his body and his son’s bodies to Shechem and buried them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
979	ACT	7	16	pnur	translate-names	Συχὲμ	1		Shechem is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
980	ACT	7	16	la8a	translate-bmoney	τιμῆς ἀργυρίου	1	for a price in silver	In biblical times, people used silver as money. Alternate translation: “for a sum of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
981	ACT	7	16	pk1p	translate-names	τῶν υἱῶν Ἑμμὼρ	1		Hamor is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
982	ACT	7	17	tuq2	figs-events	καθὼς δὲ ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας…ηὔξησεν ὁ λαὸς καὶ ἐπληθύνθη	1	And as the time of the promise … approached, the people increased and multiplied	In your language it may be helpful to say that the people increased and multiplied before saying that the time of the promise approached. Alternate translation: “the people increased and multiplied in Egypt as the time of the promise … approached” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
983	ACT	7	17	kh8g	figs-personification	καθὼς…ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, ἧς ὡμολόγησεν ὁ Θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ	1		Stephen is speaking figuratively of this time as if it were a person and could have approached on its own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “when it was almost time for God to fulfill the promise he had sworn to Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
984	ACT	7	17	tlh9	figs-explicit	καθὼς…ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, ἧς ὡμολόγησεν ὁ Θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ	1	the time of the promise … approached	Stephen is referring to the promise that he described in 7:7. God promised Abraham that he would deliver his descendants from a nation that would enslave them and that he would bring them back to the land of Canaan. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as the time approached of the promise that God had sworn to Abraham, that he would deliver his descendants from slavery and bring them back to Canaan,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
985	ACT	7	17	s2oe	figs-hendiadys	ηὔξησεν ὁ λαὸς καὶ ἐπληθύνθη	1		Stephen is using the two words increased and multiplied together to express a single idea. The word multiplied tells in what way the people increased. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use and. Alternate translation: “the people increased greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
986	ACT	7	18	whe7	figs-metaphor	ἀνέστη βασιλεὺς ἕτερος ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον	1	there arose over Egypt another king	When Stephen says that this next king arose, he is using a spatial metaphor to mean that this king began his reign. Alternate translation: “another king began to rule over Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
987	ACT	7	18	g2wq	figs-metonymy	ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον	1	over Egypt	The word Egypt refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “over the people of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
988	ACT	7	18	e2y6	figs-metonymy	ὃς οὐκ ᾔδει τὸν Ἰωσήφ	1	who did not know Joseph	Stephen is not saying that this king did not know Joseph personally. Joseph had been dead for centuries by this point. Rather, Joseph refers to the reputation of Joseph. Alternate translation: “who did not know that Joseph had helped Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
989	ACT	7	19	qwbi	writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1		He refers to the new king of Egypt, not to Joseph. Alternate translation: “This king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
990	ACT	7	19	z312	figs-metaphor	τοὺς πατέρας	1		Here and frequently throughout the rest of his speech to the Sanhedrin, Stephen is using the term fathers figuratively to mean “ancestors.” If your readers might not understand this, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
991	ACT	7	19	ug6c	figs-gendernotations	τοὺς πατέρας	1		Although the term fathers is masculine, when Stephen uses it to mean “ancestors,” it has a generic sense that includes both men and women. Here and throughout the speech, if you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “our fathers and mothers” to indicate this generic sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
992	ACT	7	19	rh3k	figs-explicit	τοῦ ποιεῖν τὰ βρέφη ἔκθετα αὐτῶν	1		Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that by exposed he means “left outside.” This was an unfortunate means of infanticide in the ancient world. Alternate translation: “forcing them to leave their babies outside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
993	ACT	7	19	n2vl	figs-doublenegatives	εἰς τὸ μὴ ζῳογονεῖσθαι	1		Stephen is using a double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the verb keep alive, which was negative from Pharaoh’s perspective, since it was contrary to his intentions. If your readers might misunderstand this double negative, , you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “in order to kill them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
994	ACT	7	20	nib6	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ἐν ᾧ καιρῷ	1		Stephen uses this phrase to introduce something that happened while Pharaoh was trying to kill the Israelite babies. Alternate translation: “While this was happening,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
995	ACT	7	20	q66s	writing-participants	ἐγεννήθη Μωϋσῆς	1	At that time Moses was born	Here Stephen introduces Moses into his story. See how you translated his name in 3:22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
996	ACT	7	20	cz9w	figs-activepassive	ἐγεννήθη Μωϋσῆς	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the birth of Moses took place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
997	ACT	7	20	cd5z	figs-idiom	ἦν ἀστεῖος τῷ Θεῷ	1	he was beautiful to God	This could mean: (1) that Moses was beautiful in God’s perspective. Alternate translation: “God considered him to be beautiful” (2) in an idiiom, that Moses was very beautiful. Alternate translation: “he was very beautiful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
998	ACT	7	20	pnb1	figs-activepassive	ὃς ἀνετράφη…ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ τοῦ πατρός	1	was nourished	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you can make Moses’ parents the subject. Alternate translation: “his parents cared for him … in their home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
999	ACT	7	21	w3iu	figs-activepassive	ἐκτεθέντος δὲ αὐτοῦ	1	But when he was exposed	Moses was exposed because of Pharaoh’s command. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the context suggests that it was Moses’ parents. Alternate translation: “when his parents had to place him outside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1000	ACT	7	21	el3b	figs-metaphor	ἀνείλατο αὐτὸν	1		This could mean: (1) that Pharaoh’s daughter adopted Moses. The verb can have this figurative legal meaning. Alternate translation: “adopted him” (2) that she lifted him up out of the basket he was in on the banks of the Nile. (This story is told in Exodus 2:1-10.) Alternate translation: “rescued him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1001	ACT	7	22	c9nw	figs-activepassive	ἐπαιδεύθη Μωϋσῆς πάσῃ σοφίᾳ Αἰγυπτίων	1	Moses was educated	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Egyptians educated Moses in all of their wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1002	ACT	7	22	att9	figs-hyperbole	πάσῃ σοφίᾳ Αἰγυπτίων	1	in all the wisdom of the Egyptians	Stephen says all as an exaggeration for emphasis. Alternate translation: “thoroughly in the wisdom of the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1003	ACT	7	22	m3dm		δυνατὸς ἐν λόγοις καὶ ἔργοις αὐτοῦ	1	mighty in his words and works	Alternate translation: “effective in his speech and actions” or “influential in what he said and did”
1004	ACT	7	23	o4cg	figs-idiom	ὡς…ἐπληροῦτο αὐτῷ τεσσερακονταετὴς χρόνος	1		This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after Moses had turned forty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1005	ACT	7	23	b9gd	figs-activepassive	ὡς…ἐπληροῦτο αὐτῷ τεσσερακονταετὴς χρόνος	1		Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” and use an active verbal form instead of the passive form. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1006	ACT	7	23	ckxj	figs-idiom	ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ	1		The phrase it came up on his heart is an idiom. Alternate translation: “he felt a desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1007	ACT	7	23	fj9s	figs-metonymy	ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ	1	it came into his heart	Here, heart is a metonym for the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “he felt a desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1008	ACT	7	23	x493	figs-metaphor	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ	1	to visit his brothers, the sons of Israel	Stephen is using the word brothers figuratively to mean “kinsmen,” and he is using the word sons figuratively to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “his kinsmen, the descendants of Israel” or, if the word “Israel” might make your readers think of the nation rather than the person, “his kinsmen, the descendants of Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1009	ACT	7	23	i4ko	figs-gendernotations	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ	1		Although the terms brothers and sons are masculine, Stephen is using these words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” and “sons and daughters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1010	ACT	7	24	l4zv	figs-activepassive	ἰδών τινα ἀδικούμενον	1	And seeing a certain one being mistreated, he defended him and made vengeance for the one being oppressed by striking the Egyptian	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the Egyptian who is mentioned later in the verse. Alternate translation: “seeing an Egyptian mistreating an Israelite” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1011	ACT	7	24	y3yh	figs-activepassive	ἐποίησεν ἐκδίκησιν τῷ καταπονουμένῳ, πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “avenged him by striking the Egyptian who was oppressing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1012	ACT	7	24	r2e8	figs-explicit	πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον	1	by striking the Egyptian	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses hit the Egyptian so hard that he died. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “striking and killing the Egyptian” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1013	ACT	7	25	hrsh	figs-metaphor	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1		Stephen is using the word brothers figuratively to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “his kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1014	ACT	7	25	mug9	figs-gendernotations	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1		Although the term brothers is masculine, Stephen is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1015	ACT	7	25	f6sn	figs-abstractnouns	δίδωσιν σωτηρίαν αὐτοῖς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of salvation, you could express the same idea in another way. In context, the word refers to God using Moses to deliver the Israelites from slavery. Alternate translation: “was delivering them from slavery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1016	ACT	7	25	nhb9	figs-metonymy	διὰ χειρὸς αὐτοῦ	1	by his hand was giving salvation to them	Here, hand refers to the actions of Moses. Alternate translation: “through his actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1017	ACT	7	26	t2vc	figs-explicit	αὐτοῖς	1	to them as they were quarreling	It is clear from the context that these were two Israelite men, though Stephen does not say that specifically. Alternate translation: “to two Israelite men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1018	ACT	7	26	qyc2	figs-youdual	αὐτοῖς…αὐτοὺς…ἐστε…ἀδικεῖτε	1		Since Moses is speaking to two people, these uses of them and you would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, they would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
1019	ACT	7	26	mpc7	figs-abstractnouns	συνήλλασσεν αὐτοὺς εἰς εἰρήνην	1	he urged them to peace	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he urged them to stop fighting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1020	ACT	7	26	kyde	figs-quotesinquotes	εἰπών, ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί ἐστε. ἱνα τί ἀδικεῖτε ἀλλήλους?	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “telling them that they were brothers and asking them why they were hurting each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1021	ACT	7	26	zzt4	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες	1	Men, you are brothers	This is an idiomatic form of address. Translate it with an expression that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Friends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1022	ACT	7	26	z5g2	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί	1		Moses is using the word brothers figuratively to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1023	ACT	7	26	k1ku	figs-rquestion	ἱνα τί ἀδικεῖτε ἀλλήλους?	1	Why is it that you are hurting each other?	Moses is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not be hurting each other!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1024	ACT	7	27	xef7	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν	1		The word him refers to Moses, not to the neighbor. Alternate translation: “Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1025	ACT	7	27	iq30	figs-quotesinquotes	εἰπών, τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν ἐφ’ ἡμῶν?	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “asking him who appointed him a ruler and a judge over them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1026	ACT	7	27	q2r4	figs-rquestion	τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν ἐφ’ ἡμῶν?	1	Who appointed you a ruler and a judge over us?	The man is using a rhetorical question to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one appointed you a ruler and judge over us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1027	ACT	7	27	wtq4	figs-doublet	ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν	1		In this context, the words ruler and judge mean basically the same thing. The man is using repetition to emphasize the fact that he feels that Moses has no authority over them. If your language does not use repetition for such a purpose, you could use a single phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “an authority with power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1028	ACT	7	27	t1hw	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1		The man is using the word our to refer to himself and to his neighbor, but not to Moses, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1029	ACT	7	28	vow8	figs-doublenegatives	μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον	1		The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding do you? Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Do you want to kill me the way you killed the Egyptian yesterday” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1030	ACT	7	28	hk1g	figs-rquestion	μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον?	1	You do not want to kill me in the same way you killed the Egyptian yesterday, do you?	The man is using a rhetorical question implicitly to threaten Moses by indicating that he and probably others knew that Moses had killed the Egyptian. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I suppose you want to kill me the way you killed the Egyptian yesterday!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1031	ACT	7	28	qfxh	figs-quotesinquotes	μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον?	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The man asked Moses if he wanted to kill him the way he had killed the Egyptian the day before.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1032	ACT	7	28	jxka		ὃν τρόπον	1		Alternate translation: “in the same way in which”
1033	ACT	7	29	l149	figs-explicit	ἔφυγεν…Μωϋσῆς ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ	1	General Information:	The implication is that Moses fled because he recognized that these Israelites, and probably others, knew that he had killed an Egyptian. Moses feared that he would be punished or even killed for this crime. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses ran away at this word to try to escape from being punished” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1034	ACT	7	29	rbhm	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ	1		Stephen is using the term word figuratively to mean what the man said by using words. Alternate translation: “at this statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1035	ACT	7	29	pit4	translate-names	Μαδιάμ	1		Midian is the name of a country. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1036	ACT	7	29	q8qv	figs-explicit	οὗ ἐγέννησεν υἱοὺς δύο	1	at this statement	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses married a Midianite woman when he fled from Egypt. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “where he married a Midianite woman and fathered two sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1037	ACT	7	30	zx1c	figs-explicit	πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα	1	And when 40 years were past	This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after 40 years had gone by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1038	ACT	7	30	qci0	figs-activepassive	πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα	1		Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” and use an active verbal form instead of the passive form. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1039	ACT	7	30	veft	figs-idiom	ὤφθη αὐτῷ…ἄγγελος	1		The word appeared does not mean that Moses simply saw this angel in a vision. Rather, this expression indicates that the angel was actually present with Moses. Alternate translation: “suddenly an angel was there with Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1040	ACT	7	30	f7yu	figs-explicit	ὤφθη αὐτῷ…ἄγγελος	1	an angel appeared	Stephen assumes that his listeners know that God came to speak with Moses through the angel. The UST makes this explicit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1041	ACT	7	31	q6w6	figs-explicit	ἐθαύμασεν τὸ ὅραμα	1	he marveled at the sight	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses admired the sight because the bush was not burning up, even though it was on fire. Alternate translation: “marveled at what he saw, because the fire was not consuming the bush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1042	ACT	7	31	uk7u	figs-personification	ἐγένετο φωνὴ Κυρίου	1	and as he approached to look at it	Stephen is speaking figuratively of the voice of the Lord as if it were a person and that it came on its own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the Lord spoke to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1043	ACT	7	32	b26o	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐγὼ ὁ Θεὸς τῶν πατέρων σου, ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ Ἰακώβ	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Lord told Moses that he was the God of his fathers, the God of Abraham, and of Isaac, and of Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1044	ACT	7	33	bpml	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν…αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου, ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “the Lord told Moses to untie the sandals that were on his feet, because the place on which he was standing was holy ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1045	ACT	7	33	x7cd	translate-symaction	λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου, ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν	1	Untie the sandals	In this culture, removing footwear was a symbolic way of acknowledging that a place was sacred. Footwear that had been worn elsewhere should not touch it. Your readers may understand the symbolic meaning of this action. If not, you could explain it in your translation. Alternate translation: “Untie your sandals and remove them to acknowledge that the place on which you are standing is holy ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1046	ACT	7	33	rxnj	figs-explicit	λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου	1		The implication is that God wanted Moses not only to untie his sandals but also to remove them. Alternate translation: “Untie your sandals and remove them from your feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1047	ACT	7	33	xl9p		τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου	1		Since this refers to both sandals, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of sandals. If your language uses the dual form, it would be appropriate to use that here. Alternate translation: “the sandals on your feet” or “the sandals you are wearing”
1048	ACT	7	33	clk4	figs-explicit	ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν	1	for the place on which you are standing is holy ground	The implication is that where God is present, the immediate area around God is considered or made holy by God. Alternate translation: “for the place on which you are standing has been made holy by my presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1049	ACT	7	34	l0au	figs-quotesinquotes	ἰδὼν, εἶδον τὴν κάκωσιν τοῦ λαοῦ μου τοῦ ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ, καὶ τοῦ στεναγμοῦ αὐτῶν ἤκουσα, καὶ κατέβην ἐξελέσθαι αὐτούς; καὶ νῦν δεῦρο, ἀποστείλω σε εἰς Αἴγυπτον.	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Lord said that he had certainly seen the oppression of his people who were in Egypt and that he had heard their groaning and that he had come down to rescue them. He told Moses to get ready because he was sending him to Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1050	ACT	7	34	yz7b	figs-idiom	ἰδὼν, εἶδον	1	I have certainly seen	Stephen is reproducing a Hebrew idiom from the biblical account of Moses at the burning bush. The verb seen is repeated in Hebrew. This repetition expresses the intensity, certainty, or clarity of Yahweh’s having seen how his people were being oppressed. This Hebrew practice of verb repetition for intensification cannot be directly translated into English. Use a natural form of strengthening a verb from your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1051	ACT	7	34	x5bg	figs-possession	τοῦ λαοῦ μου	1	of my people	God uses the possessive word my to emphasize that these people were in a covenant relationship with him based on his promises to their ancestors. Alternate translation: “of the descendants of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1052	ACT	7	34	j32c	figs-metaphor	κατέβην ἐξελέσθαι αὐτούς	1	I have come down to rescue them	God describes himself as having come down from heaven to earth to help the Israelites. His presence was in the burning bush, but he also means figuratively that he is taking action to rescue them. Alternate translation: “I will personally bring about their release” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1053	ACT	7	34	atdo	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	3		God is using the word translated And to introduce what he wants Moses to do as a result of what he has told him. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1054	ACT	7	34	sq8y	figs-imperative	νῦν δεῦρο	1	now come	God is giving an order here. Alternate translation: “get ready” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
1055	ACT	7	34	x34c	figs-declarative	ἀποστείλω σε εἰς Αἴγυπτον	1		God is not asking Moses’ permission when he says let me send you to Egypt. This is a way of saying “I will send you to Egypt,” and that statement in turn is functioning as a command. Alternate translation: “you must go to Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
1056	ACT	7	35	x4p2	figs-litany	τοῦτον τὸν Μωϋσῆν	1	General Information:	Verses 35, 36, 37, and 38 contains a series of similar phrases emphasizing the role of Moses. Stephen says This Moses, “This one,” “This is the Moses,” and “This is the one.” If possible, use similar statements in your own translation to emphasize Moses. You may also wish to make each of these verses a separate paragraph or use formatting in some other way to highlight the repeated phrases. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
1057	ACT	7	35	nv5g	figs-quotesinquotes	εἰπόντες, τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν?	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. See what you did in 7:27. Alternate translation: “asking him who appointed him a ruler and a judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1058	ACT	7	35	vuqy	figs-rquestion	τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν?	1		See how you translated this rhetorical question in 7:27. Alternate translation: “No one appointed you a ruler and a judge!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1059	ACT	7	35	oic6	figs-doublet	ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν	1		See how you translated the combination of ruler and judge in 7:27. Alternate translation: “an authority with power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1060	ACT	7	35	vp7e		λυτρωτὴν	1	a redeemer	In this context, the word translated redeemer refers to someone who delivers people from earthly troubles, not someone who brings eternal salvation. Alternate translation: “a rescuer”
1061	ACT	7	35	yjz9	figs-metonymy	σὺν χειρὶ ἀγγέλου	1	with the hand of the angel who appeared to him in the bush	Here, hand is a metonym for the capability and actions of someone. Alternate translation: “accompanied by the power of the angel” or “through the actions of the angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1062	ACT	7	35	abc9	figs-idiom	ὀφθέντος αὐτῷ ἐν τῇ βάτῳ	1	appeared to him	See how you translated the word appeared in 7:30. Here as well, the word does not mean that Moses simply saw this angel in a vision. Alternate translation: “who was with him at the bush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1063	ACT	7	36	gz9r	figs-doublet	τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα	1	during 40 years	The terms wonders and signs mean similar things. Stephen is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:22. Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1064	ACT	7	36	n75x	translate-names	Ἐρυθρᾷ Θαλάσσῃ	1		Stephen is using the name that was common in his culture, the Red Sea, to refer to the body of water that the Old Testament calls “the Sea of Reeds.” Decide whether you want to use the name that Stephen uses here or the name that you are using in your translation in the Old Testament, if they are different. Alternate translation: “the Sea of Reeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1065	ACT	7	37	k710	figs-quotesinquotes	ὁ εἴπας τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραήλ, προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει ὁ Θεὸς, ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “who told the sons of Israel that God would raise up a prophet like him for them from their brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1066	ACT	7	37	vykp	figs-metaphor	τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραήλ	1		Stephen is using the word sons figuratively to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “to the descendants of Israel” or “to the descendants of Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1067	ACT	7	37	b4sg	figs-idiom	προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει…ὡς ἐμέ	1	will raise up a prophet	Here, the expression raise up describes God giving someone the mission to go as a prophet to certain people. See how you translated it in 3:22. Alternate translation: “will send you a prophet like me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1068	ACT	7	37	j2rx	figs-metaphor	τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν	1	from among your brothers	Stephen is using the word brothers figuratively to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “your kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1069	ACT	7	38	fd25	writing-pronouns	οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ	1	This is the one	This is the one refers to Moses. You may have decided to use similar language and special formatting in verses 35–38 to highlight the way Stephen is emphasizing Moses. However, if you think the reference would not be clear at this point, you could state his name. Alternate translation: “Moses is the one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1070	ACT	7	38	z1z7	figs-infostructure	μετὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου τοῦ λαλοῦντος αὐτῷ ἐν τῷ Ὄρει Σινά, καὶ τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, ὃς ἐδέξατο λόγια ζῶντα	1		It might be more natural to put the information about Mount Sinai next to the information about Moses receiving living words. Alternate translation: “with our fathers and with the angel who was speaking to him on Mount Sinai, who received living words” or “with our fathers and with the angel who was speaking to him on Mount Sinai, where he received living words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1071	ACT	7	38	vdnz	writing-pronouns	τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, ὃς ἐδέξατο	1		This second instance of who in the verse refers to Moses, not to the fathers. For clarity, you could state his name and start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “with our fathers. Moses received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1072	ACT	7	38	y2zu	figs-explicit	ὃς ἐδέξατο λόγια ζῶντα	1	who received living words to give to us	It may be helpful in your language to specify who gave Moses the words that he received. Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this was God. Alternate translation: “to whom God gave living words” or “to whom God spoke living words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1073	ACT	7	38	p3xk	figs-metonymy	λόγια ζῶντα	1	living words	Stephen is using the term words to mean the message that God communicated through words. Alternate translation: “a living message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1074	ACT	7	38	w2gs	figs-metaphor	λόγια ζῶντα	1		Stephen is using the term living figuratively to describe God’s words as if they were alive. This could mean: (1) that God’s message is always effective. Alternate translation: “an enduring message” (2) that God’s message shows how to live as God wishes. Alternate translation: “a life-giving message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1075	ACT	7	39	ab0s	writing-pronouns	ᾧ οὐκ ἠθέλησαν ὑπήκοοι γενέσθαι οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1		The word whom refers to Moses. It may be helpful to state his name and to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Our fathers were not willing to be obedient to Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1076	ACT	7	39	mvz8	figs-metaphor	ἀπώσαντο	1	they pushed him away	Stephen is speaking figuratively to emphasize the Israelites’ rejection of Moses. Alternate translation: “they rejected him as their leader” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1077	ACT	7	39	z3ze	figs-metonymy	ἐστράφησαν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν εἰς Αἴγυπτον	1	turned back in their hearts	Here, hearts is a metonym for people’s desires. Alternate translation: “made it their desire to return to Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1078	ACT	7	40	l8u7	figs-quotesinquotes	εἰπόντες τῷ Ἀαρών, ποίησον ἡμῖν θεοὺς οἳ προπορεύσονται ἡμῶν. ὁ γὰρ Μωϋσῆς οὗτος, ὃς ἐξήγαγεν ἡμᾶς ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, οὐκ οἴδαμεν τί ἐγένετο αὐτῷ.	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “They asked Aaron to make gods for them who would go ahead of them, because they did not know what had happened to Moses, who had brought them from the land of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1079	ACT	7	40	kb3o		εἰπόντες τῷ Ἀαρών	1		It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They said to Aaron”
1080	ACT	7	40	fzsq	translate-names	τῷ Ἀαρών	1		Aaron is the name of a man, the older brother of Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1081	ACT	7	40	a68q	figs-infostructure	ὁ γὰρ Μωϋσῆς οὗτος, ὃς ἐξήγαγεν ἡμᾶς ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, οὐκ οἴδαμεν τί ἐγένετο αὐτῷ	1		It may be more natural to put the information about Moses at the end of the sentence. Alternate translation: “For we do not know what has happened to this Moses who brought us from the land of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1082	ACT	7	41	ux1j	figs-explicit	ἐμοσχοποίησαν	1	they made an image of a calf	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this image of a calf was a statue that the Israelites wanted to worship as an idol. Stephen refers to it as the idol later in the sentence. Alternate translation: “they made a statue that looked like a calf to worship as an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1083	ACT	7	41	v6tx	figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις	1		Stephen is using the term days idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1084	ACT	7	41	hjp0	writing-pronouns	ἐμοσχοποίησαν	1		The pronoun they refers back to “our fathers” in verse 39, that is, to the Israelites whom Moses led out of Egypt. Alternate translation: “the Israelites made an image of a calf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1085	ACT	7	41	hh77	figs-metonymy	τοῖς ἔργοις τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν	1	they made an image of a calf … to the idol … the work of their hands	Stephen describes what he also calls the calf and the idol as the works of their hands, by association with the way the Israelites used their hands to make the calf. Alternate translation: “the statue they had made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1086	ACT	7	42	d3dd	figs-metaphor	ἔστρεψεν…ὁ Θεὸς	1	God turned away	Stephen is speaking figuratively as if God had physically turned away. He speaks this way to emphasize that God was not pleased with the Israelites and no longer helped them. Alternate translation: “God stopped helping them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1087	ACT	7	42	u7lx	figs-metaphor	τῇ στρατιᾷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	the host of heaven	Here, the word host means “army,” and the word heaven means “sky.” Stephen is speaking figuratively of the stars in the sky as if they were an army. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the stars in the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1088	ACT	7	42	ya6v	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the book of the prophets says” or “the book of the prophets records” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1089	ACT	7	42	f314	figs-explicit	βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν	1	the book of the prophets	This was apparently a collection of the writings of several of the Old Testament prophets on one scroll. Alternate translation: “the scroll that records sayings of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1090	ACT	7	42	w38i	figs-quotemarks	μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ	1		This is the beginning of a quotation from the prophet Amos, which continues through the end of verse 43. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Amos as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1091	ACT	7	42	o5ly	figs-doublenegatives	μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ?	1		The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding did you? Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Did you offer slain beasts and offerings to me for 40 years in the wilderness, O house of Israel?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1092	ACT	7	42	gd1b	figs-rquestion	μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ?	1	You did not offer to me slain beasts and sacrifices for 40 years in the wilderness, did you, O house of Israel?	Speaking through the prophet Amos, God used the question form to emphasize to the people of Israel that they did not really worship Him in the wilderness with their sacrifices. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You did not honor me when you offered slain beasts and sacrifices for 40 years in the wilderness, O house of Israel!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1093	ACT	7	43	zek5		καὶ ἀνελάβετε τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ, καὶ τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν, τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε προσκυνεῖν αὐτοῖς. καὶ μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος.	1		The quotation from the prophet Amos continues here.
1094	ACT	7	42	q9rr	figs-yousingular	μὴ…προσηνέγκατέ	1		You is plural in these instances, even though the addressee (house) is singular, because God is actually speaking to all of the Israelites. If it would not be natural in your language to use the plural in such a case, you can use singular you in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1095	ACT	7	42	tck0	figs-merism	σφάγια καὶ θυσίας	1		In a figure of speech, God is using the two main categories of sacrifices, those that involve shedding blood (slain beasts) and those that are bloodless (offerings), to mean sacrifices of all kinds. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “all kinds of sacrifices” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
1096	ACT	7	42	j4q8	figs-metaphor	οἶκος Ἰσραήλ	1	O house of Israel	Here, house means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So the house of Israel figuratively means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “nation of Israel” or “people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1097	ACT	7	43	h20h	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	καὶ	1		And at the beginning of this verse introduces God’s own answer to the question he asked in the previous verse, 7:42: “You did not offer slain beasts and offerings to me …, did you?” The answer is in contrast to what the question asks. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation, followed by a sentence break: “No!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1098	ACT	7	43	q85n	figs-irony	ἀνελάβετε…μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς	1		The term took up indicates that the Israelites carried the idols this verse describes around with them as they traveled in the wilderness. The term remove in this context means that God will send them into exile as a punishment, with the sense of carrying them away from their homeland. So the punishment is ironic; if possible, use similar terms in your language that will bring out this irony. Alternate translation: “you carried around … I will carry you away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
1099	ACT	7	43	gxh2	figs-yousingular	ἀνελάβετε…ὑμῶν…ἐποιήσατε…ὑμᾶς	1		As in 7:42, you is plural here, even though the addressee (“house”) is singular, since God is speaking to all of the Israelites. In this verse your is also plural. If it would not be natural in your language to use the plural in these cases, you can use the singular in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1100	ACT	7	43	im7e	figs-explicit	τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ	1	the tabernacle of Molech	The tabernacle of Molech was a tent or shrine that housed an idol of the false god Molech. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1101	ACT	7	43	cq47	figs-explicit	τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν	1	the star of your god Rephan	The Israelites were not carrying around an actual star, but an image designed to look like a star. This image was used in the worship of the false god Rephan. (This may have been the planet Saturn.) Alternate translation: “the star-shaped image of your god Rephan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1102	ACT	7	43	gm4g	figs-explicit	τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε	1	and the images that you made	The word images refers to the idol of Molech and the star-shaped image of Rephan. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You made that idol of Molech and that star-shaped image of Rephan so that you could worship those false gods.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1103	ACT	7	43	zgq6	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	3	I will carry you away beyond Babylon	Speaking through Amos, God uses the word translated and to introduce what he will do as a result of the Israelites’ unfaithfulness and disobedience. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1104	ACT	7	44	fs4q			0	Connecting Statement:	Stephen continues his response to the high priest and the council which he began in Acts 7:2.
1105	ACT	7	43	rrn8	figs-quotemarks	μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος	1		This is the end of the quotation from the prophet Amos that began in verse 42. See how you marked the beginning of the quotation there. It would be appropriate to mark its ending here with a closing second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a second-level quotation. If you used special formatting to set off the quotation, you can return to regular formatting after this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1106	ACT	7	44	hfmx	figs-ellipsis	ἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου ἦν τοῖς πατράσιν ἡμῶν ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, καθὼς διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ	1		Stephen is not saying that the tabernacle was with the Israelites just as God had commanded. He means that the tabernacle was built according to the pattern that Moses saw on Mount Sinai. To make this clear, it may be helpful to supply some of the words that Stephen is leaving out. It may also be helpful to introduce a sentence break. Alternate translation: “The tabernacle of the testimony was with our fathers in the wilderness. It was built just as the one speaking to Moses had commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1107	ACT	7	44	m9gw	figs-metonymy	ἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου	1	The tabernacle of the testimony	Stephen calls this tent the tabernacle of the testimony by association with the way it housed the ark of the covenant, which was also known as the ark of the testimony. The “testimony” of the ark, as UST indicates, was to the covenant between God and the Israelites and to his presence with them wherever they went in the wilderness. Alternate translation: “the tent that housed the ark of the covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1108	ACT	7	44	fk06	figs-infostructure	καθὼς διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ, ποιῆσαι αὐτὴν κατὰ τὸν τύπον ὃν ἑωράκει	1		It may be more natural to put the information about the command to Moses before the information about how Moses fulfilled the command. It may also be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The one speaking to Moses had commanded him to make the tabernacle according to the pattern that he had seen, and he made it just that way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1109	ACT	7	44	masq	figs-explicit	διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ	1		Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the way God spoke to Moses on Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “God commanded Moses when he spoke to him on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1110	ACT	7	44	avqh	figs-explicit	τὸν τύπον ὃν ἑωράκει	1		Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the pattern for the tabernacle that God showed Moses on Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “the pattern that he showed him on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1111	ACT	7	45	uqca	writing-pronouns	ἣν καὶ εἰσήγαγον, διαδεξάμενοι οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1		The pronoun which refers to the tabernacle. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Our ancestors received the tabernacle from their ancestors and they brought it in”
1112	ACT	7	45	qjov		διαδεξάμενοι	1		The phrase having received … in turn translates a Greek verb that refers to receiving something in succession, in this case from one’s ancestors. Alternate translation: “having received it from their ancestors”
1113	ACT	7	45	n2sc		εἰσήγαγον…μετὰ Ἰησοῦ	1	Our fathers, under Joshua, received it and brought it with them	When Stephen says that the Israelites brought in the tabernacle with Joshua, he does not mean that they brought in both the tabernacle and Joshua. He means that the Israelites did the things he describes in obedience to Joshua’s directions. Alternate translation: “brought in as Joshua directed them”
1114	ACT	7	45	e3gu	figs-explicit	εἰσήγαγον	1		Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the Israelites entering the land of Canaan. Alternate translation: “brought in to the land of Canaan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1115	ACT	7	45	znov	translate-names	Ἰησοῦ	1		Joshua is the name of a man, the successor of Moses as leader of the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1116	ACT	7	45	eww5	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ κατασχέσει τῶν ἐθνῶν	1		Stephen is using the term nations to mean the land that these people groups occupied. Alternate translation: “when they took possession of land that had been occupied by the nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1117	ACT	7	45	spm5	figs-metaphor	ἀπὸ προσώπου τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν	1	when they took possession of the nations who God drove out from the face of our fathers	Stephen is using the word face figuratively to mean “presence.” Alternate translation: “from the presence of our ancestors” or “so that our ancestors alone would live there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1118	ACT	7	45	zjlj	figs-ellipsis	ἕως τῶν ἡμερῶν Δαυείδ	1		Stephen is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The tabernacle remained there until the days of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1119	ACT	7	45	wot8	figs-idiom	τῶν ἡμερῶν Δαυείδ	1		Stephen is using the term days idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “the time of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1120	ACT	7	46	k9vh	figs-idiom	εὑρεῖν	1		Stephen is speaking idiomatically. David did not ask God if he could go look for this dwelling. David asked God if he could build it. Alternate translation: “to build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1121	ACT	7	45	bux7	translate-names	Δαυείδ	1		David is the name of a man. See how you translated it in 1:16. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1122	ACT	7	46	x4kl	writing-pronouns	ὃς εὗρεν χάριν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		The pronoun who refers to David. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “David found favor before God”
1123	ACT	7	46	ykio	figs-metonymy	ὃς εὗρεν χάριν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here the phrase before God refers to God’s opinion, by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “God regarded David with favor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1124	ACT	7	46	yl80	figs-idiom	εὑρεῖν	1		Stephen is speaking idiomatically. David did not ask God if he could go look for this dwelling. David asked God if he could build it. Alternate translation: “to build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1125	ACT	7	46	w3cu	figs-metaphor	σκήνωμα	1	a dwelling place for the house of Jacob	The word dwelling refers to a permanent habitation, that is, a house. Stephen is using the word figuratively to mean a temple. He is speaking of this temple as if it was a house in which God lived, since God’s presence was there. Alternate translation: “a temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1126	ACT	7	46	in7m	translate-textvariants	τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰακώβ	1		See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to use the reading the house of Jacob or another possible reading, “the God of Jacob.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1127	ACT	7	46	fsmp	figs-metaphor	τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰακώβ	1		Here, house means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So the house of Jacob figuratively means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1128	ACT	7	47	bo1q	translate-names	Σολομῶν	1		Solomon is the name of a man. See how you translated it in 3:11. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1129	ACT	7	47	k54c	figs-metaphor	αὐτῷ οἶκον	1		Stephen is using the word house figuratively to mean a temple. Alternate translation: “a temple for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1130	ACT	7	47	dlk8	writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ οἶκον	1		The pronoun him refers to God. Alternate translation: “a temple for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1131	ACT	7	48	wuce		ὁ Ὕψιστος	1		This is a respectful title for God. UST suggests one way to express its meaning.
1132	ACT	7	48	fwvu	figs-nominaladj	χειροποιήτοις	1		Stephen is using the adjective made with hands (or “handmade”) as a noun, to mean structures built by humans. ULT adds houses to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “temples that people build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1133	ACT	7	48	c822	figs-synecdoche	χειροποιήτοις	1	houses made with hands	Stephen is using the word hand, one part of a person, figuratively to mean the whole person. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “houses that people build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1134	ACT	7	48	ota0	figs-metaphor	χειροποιήτοις	1		The word houses figuratively means “temples.” Alternate translation: “temples that people build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1135	ACT	7	48	d4fh	figs-explicit	καθὼς ὁ προφήτης λέγει	1		Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that by the prophet, he means Isaiah. Alternate translation: “as the prophet Isaiah says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1136	ACT	7	49	oyax	figs-quotemarks	ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου	1		This is the beginning of a quotation from the prophet Isaiah, which continues through the end of verse 50. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Isaiah as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1137	ACT	7	49	k2vn	figs-metaphor	ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου	1	Heaven is my throne, and the earth is the footstool for my feet	Speaking through Isaiah, God figuratively describes Heaven as his throne and the earth as his footstool. If your readers would not understand what these figures mean, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture, or you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. This could mean: (1) that God is present both in heaven and on earth. Alternate translation: “I dwell in heaven and I am also present throughout the earth” (2) that God rules over heaven and earth. Alternative translation: “I rule from heaven and I have complete authority over the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1138	ACT	7	49	i4u3	figs-merism	ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου	1		God is using the two parts of creation, Heaven and earth, to mean all of creation. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. This could mean: (1) Alternate translation: “I am present everywhere in creation” (2) Alternate translation: “I rule over all of creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
1139	ACT	7	49	wc9m	figs-rquestion	ποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι? λέγει Κύριος, ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου?	1	What kind of house will you build for me?	God is using the question form to emphasize that human beings cannot build a temple worthy of him or adequate for him. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You can not build a temple that is worthy of me or a place to live that is adequate for me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1140	ACT	7	49	rqr4	figs-parallelism	ποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι? λέγει Κύριος, ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου?	1		These two phrases mean basically the same thing. God says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “You can not build a temple that is worthy for me to live in!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1141	ACT	7	49	mshp	figs-metaphor	ποῖον οἶκον	1		The word house figuratively means a “temple.” Alternate translation: “What kind of temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1142	ACT	7	49	vjaq	figs-abstractnouns	τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of rest, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the place where I can live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1143	ACT	7	50	hqjr	figs-quotemarks	οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα?	1		This is the end of the quotation from the prophet Isaiah that began in verse 49. See how you marked the beginning of the quotation there. It would be appropriate to mark its ending here with a closing second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a second-level quotation. If you used special formatting to set off the quotation, you can return to regular formatting after this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1144	ACT	7	50	rfk1	figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα?	1	Did my hand not make all these things?	God is using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express its meaning as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “My hand made all these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1145	ACT	7	50	jlg1	figs-synecdoche	οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα?	1		God is using one part of himself, his hand, to represent all of himself figuratively in the act of creating. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “Did I not make all these things?” or, if you choose to represent the rhetorical question as an exclamation, “I made all these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1146	ACT	7	50	gzw0	figs-explicit	ταῦτα πάντα	1		The phrase all these things refers back to “Heaven” and “earth” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “everything in creation”
1147	ACT	7	51	umq6	figs-exclamations	σκληροτράχηλοι καὶ ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν	1	O stiff-necked	Stephen is using the exclamatory word O to make a transition in his speech. Up to this point, he has been identifying with the Sanhedrin members, saying “our fathers” as he describes what earlier generations of Israelites did. Now, as he shifts to rebuking them, he addresses them with the vocative O. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for this same purpose. Alternate translation: “You stiff-necked people who are uncircumcised in your heart and ears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1148	ACT	7	51	yxe3	figs-nominaladj	σκληροτράχηλοι καὶ	1		Stephen is using the adjective stiff-necked as a noun, to describe a kind of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “O people who are stiff-necked and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1149	ACT	7	51	vn7h	figs-metaphor	σκληροτράχηλοι	1	O stiff-necked	Stephen is speaking figuratively of the Sanhedrin members as if they were horses or mules that stiffened their necks in order not to be turned in one direction or another. He means that they are being stubborn. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture, or you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “O stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1150	ACT	7	51	zp55	figs-metonymy	ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν	1	uncircumcised in heart and ears	Stephen speaks figuratively of the Sanhedrin members’ heart and ears as uncircumcised by association with the way that Gentiles, who are uncircumcised because they are not part of the covenant community, do not obey or listen to God. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1151	ACT	7	51	esfc	figs-synecdoche	ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν	1		Stephen is using one part of a person, the heart, figuratively meaning the desires and will, to represent all of a person in the act of obeying or disobeying. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1152	ACT	7	51	jslb	figs-synecdoche	ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν	1		Stephen is figuratively using one part of a person, the ears, to represent all of a person in the act of listening. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1153	ACT	7	51	zgon	figs-hyperbole	ὑμεῖς ἀεὶ τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ Ἁγίῳ ἀντιπίπτετε	1		The word always is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “You keep resisting the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1154	ACT	7	51	w164	figs-you	ὑμεῖς…ὑμῶν…ὑμεῖς	1		The words you and your are plural, since Stephen is speaking to all the members of the Sanhedrin. So use plural forms in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1155	ACT	7	51	d2v8	figs-ellipsis	ὡς οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν, καὶ ὑμεῖς	1		Stephen is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “As your ancestors disobeyed God and did not listen to him, so you disobey God and do not listen to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1156	ACT	7	52	x7kf	figs-rquestion	τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν?	1	Which of the prophets did your fathers not persecute?	Stephen is not asking for information. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Your ancestors persecuted each of the prophets!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1157	ACT	7	52	eiw2	figs-hyperbole	τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν?	1		Stephen’s rhetorical question has an implicit generalization for emphasis. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that conveys emphasis. Alternate translation: “Your ancestors kept persecuting the prophets!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1158	ACT	7	52	q8wb	figs-nominaladj	τοῦ Δικαίου	1	of the Righteous One	Stephen is using the adjective Righteous as a noun in order to describe a specific person. ULT adds One to show this. This is a title that refers to the Christ, the Messiah. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of the Messiah, who was righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1159	ACT	7	52	agd9		οὗ νῦν ὑμεῖς προδόται καὶ φονεῖς ἐγένεσθε	1	of whom you have now become betrayers and murderers	It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You have now betrayed and murdered him”
1160	ACT	7	53	axhl	writing-pronouns	οἵτινες ἐλάβετε	1		The pronoun who refers to the Sanhedrin members whom Stephen is addressing. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1161	ACT	7	53	t92q	figs-synecdoche	οἵτινες ἐλάβετε	1		The Sanhedrin members whom Stephen is addressing did not receive the law themselves. Rather, Stephen is using them figuratively to represent the entire Jewish community down through the years. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “whose community received” or, if you choose to start a new sentence, “Your community received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1162	ACT	7	53	euw5	figs-explicit	εἰς διαταγὰς ἀγγέλων	1	the law as ordained by angels	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to God giving the law to the Israelites at Mount Sinai. A later Jewish tradition said that angels acted as God’s intermediaries at that time. (Stephen says in 7:38 that an angel was speaking to Moses on Mount Sinai.) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as angels delivered it on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1163	ACT	7	54	ef2g	figs-activepassive	ἀκούοντες…ταῦτα διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	Now hearing these things	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “these things cut them to their hearts when they heard them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1164	ACT	7	54	u4l7	figs-idiom	διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	they were cut to their hearts	Here, the expression they were cut to their hearts is an idiom that means the Sanhedrin members became very angry. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they became furious at Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1165	ACT	7	54	ae9s	translate-symaction	ἔβρυχον τοὺς ὀδόντας ἐπ’ αὐτόν	1	they ground their teeth at him	This action expressed their strong anger at Stephen. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “they became so angry at Stephen that they ground their teeth together” or “they moved their teeth back and forth as they looked angrily at Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1166	ACT	7	55	dlux	figs-explicit	πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1		Luke is speaking figuratively of Stephen as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit could fill. Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1167	ACT	7	55	ntp4	figs-explicit	ἀτενίσας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν, εἶδεν	1	and looking intently into heaven	The implication is that only Stephen saw this vision, not anyone else who was present. Alternate translation: “staring up into heaven, he saw in a vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1168	ACT	7	55	bl2j	figs-explicit	δόξαν Θεοῦ	1	he saw the glory of God	The implication is that Stephen saw a bright light that expressed the magnificent presence of God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “a bright light that expressed the glorious presence of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1169	ACT	7	55	zpry	figs-nominaladj	Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Luke is using the adjective right as a noun in order to indicate the right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “Jesus standing at the right side of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1170	ACT	7	55	vamz	figs-explicit	Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus standing in a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1171	ACT	7	55	vyz3	translate-symaction	Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	and Jesus standing at the right hand of God	Elsewhere in the New Testament, Jesus is described as “sitting” at the right of God. Many interpreters believe that Jesus stood on this occasion to honor Stephen for his courage and faithful testimony. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “Jesus, in a place of honor next to God, standing to honor him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1172	ACT	7	56	gzvv	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1		Stephen is using the term behold to focus his listener’ attention on what he is about to say. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “Now listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1173	ACT	7	56	p0jg	figs-metaphor	θεωρῶ τοὺς οὐρανοὺς διηνοιγμένους, καὶ	1		Stephen is speaking figuratively of the heavens being opened to mean that they are open to his view. Alternate translation: “the heavens are open to my view, and I see” or “I can see into heaven, and I see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1174	ACT	7	56	aqp8	figs-explicit	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	Son of Man	The title Son of Man is equivalent to “Messiah.” Jesus himself used that title to claim that role subtly and implicitly. You may want to translate the title directly into your language. Alternatively, if you think it would be helpful to your readers, you could express what it means. Alternate translation: “Jesus the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1175	ACT	7	56	imoa	figs-nominaladj	ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		See how you translated the nominal adjective right in 7:55. Alternate translation: “standing at the right side of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1176	ACT	7	56	cr19	figs-explicit	ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		See how you expressed the implicit significance of the phrase at the right of God in 7:55. Alternate translation: “standing in a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1177	ACT	7	56	rvwp	translate-symaction	ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		See how you expressed the significance of the symbolic action of Jesus standing in 7:55. Alternate translation: “, in a place of honor next to God, standing to honor me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1178	ACT	7	57	p4cg	translate-symaction	κράξαντες…φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, συνέσχον τὰ ὦτα αὐτῶν	1	they covered their ears	The Sanhedrin members did these things to demonstrate that they did not want to hear any more of what Stephen said. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly to drown out Stephen, they put their hands over their ears to show that they did not want to hear any more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1179	ACT	7	57	wtwk	figs-idiom	κράξαντες…φωνῇ μεγάλῃ	1		This is an idiom that suggests figuratively that the Sanhedrin members had another, louder voice that they could use. It means that they raised the volume of their voices. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1180	ACT	7	57	hm0q		κράξαντες…φωνῇ μεγάλῃ	1		If you would like to reproduce this idiom but it would be unusual in your language to speak as if a whole group of people had one voice, you could make this plural. Alternate translation: “with loud voices” or “in loud voices”
1181	ACT	7	57	t287		ὥρμησαν ὁμοθυμαδὸν ἐπ’ αὐτόν	1		This could mean: (1) that the Sanhedrin members all rushed at Stephen at the same time. Alternate translation: “rushed at him all at once” (2) that every one of the Sanhedrin members rushed at Stephen. Alternate translation: “every one of them rushed at him”
1182	ACT	7	58	ks1u	figs-metaphor	ἐκβαλόντες ἔξω τῆς πόλεως	1	throwing him outside the city	Luke is likely speaking figuratively when he speaks of the Sanhedrin members throwing Stephen outside the city. It is unlikely that they actually picked him up and heaved him through the air. Alternate translation: “seizing Stephen and forcefully taking him out of the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1183	ACT	7	58	teas	figs-explicit	οἱ μάρτυρες	1		These were the “false witnesses” whom the Sanhedrin brought in to accuse Stephen, as described in 6:13. According to the Law of Moses, it was their responsibility to carry out the execution of the man they had accused. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the false witnesses, who were responsible to carry out the execution,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1184	ACT	7	58	ryrh	figs-explicit	ἀπέθεντο τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν, παρὰ τοὺς πόδας νεανίου καλουμένου Σαύλου	1		The implications are that the witnesses took off their long robes so that they could throw stones at Stephen more easily and that they left them with Saul for safekeeping. UST models one way to make these implications explicit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1185	ACT	7	58	wy7n	translate-unknown	τὰ ἱμάτια	1	outer garments	These outer garments were long cloaks or robes that people wore outside to stay warm. They were also a sign of wealth and status. If your readers would not be familiar with this kind of garment, you could use the name of another garment that they would recognize, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “coats” or “robes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1186	ACT	7	58	sx2p	figs-idiom	παρὰ τοὺς πόδας	1	at the feet	The expression at the feet is an idiom. Alternate translation: “on the ground in front of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1187	ACT	7	58	e2vl	translate-names	Σαύλου	1	of a young man	Saul is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1188	ACT	7	59	fxhz	figs-hendiadys	ἐπικαλούμενον καὶ λέγοντα	1		This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The phrase calling out tells how Stephen was saying what he said. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “as he was saying loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1189	ACT	7	59	k2el	figs-imperative	δέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά μου	1	receive my spirit	This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please receive my spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
1190	ACT	7	60	u86q	translate-symaction	θεὶς…τὰ γόνατα	1	But having knelt down on his knees	Kneeling down was an act of submission to God and a reverent posture of prayer. Alternate translation: “after he had knelt down reverently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1191	ACT	7	60	hi24	figs-idiom	ἔκραξεν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ	1		This is an idiom that means that Stephen raised the volume of his voice. Alternate translation: “he cried out loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1192	ACT	7	60	dfjs	figs-imperative	μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν	1		This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please do not hold this sin against them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
1193	ACT	7	60	tvf8	figs-doublenegatives	μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν	1	do not hold this sin against them	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb hold … against. Alternate translation: “forgive them for this sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1194	ACT	7	60	r9vi	figs-euphemism	ἐκοιμήθη	1	he fell asleep	Luke is describing the death of Stephen when he says he fell asleep. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or use plain language. Alternate translation: “he passed away” or, as in UST, “he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1195	ACT	8	intro	q9d9			0		Acts 8 General Notes Structure and formatting The story here shifts from Stephen to Saul. Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 8:32-33. The first sentence of verse 1 ends the description of the events in chapter 7. Luke begins a new part of his history with the words “And on that day.” Special concepts in this chapter Receiving the Holy Spirit In this chapter Luke speaks for the first time of people receiving the Holy Spirit (Acts 8:15-19). The Holy Spirit had already enabled the believers to speak in tongues, to heal the sick, and to live as a community, and he had filled Stephen. But when the Jews started putting believers in prison, those believers who could leave Jerusalem did leave, and as they went, they told people about Jesus. When the people who heard about Jesus received the Holy Spirit, the church leaders knew that those people had truly become believers. Proclaimed This chapter, more than any other in the book of Acts, speaks of the believers proclaiming the word, proclaiming the good news, and proclaiming that Jesus is the Christ. The word “proclaim” translates a Greek word that means to tell good news about something.
1196	ACT	8	1	ez88	writing-background	Σαῦλος δὲ ἦν συνευδοκῶν τῇ ἀναιρέσει αὐτοῦ	1	there began on that day a great persecution against the church that was in Jerusalem, and they all were scattered throughout the regions of Judea and Samaria, except the apostles	Luke is providing this background information to help readers understand why Saul was persecuting the church, as he relates in 8:3 and in chapter 9. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now Saul approved of the Sanhedrin executing Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
1197	ACT	8	1	i1tc	writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, διωγμὸς μέγας ἐπὶ τὴν ἐκκλησίαν	1		Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story, the scattering of the church and its witness beyond Jerusalem. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “And so began that day a great persecution against the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1198	ACT	8	1	vc8x	figs-explicit	ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ	1	that day	Here, day is not a figurative word for “time.” Luke is referring to a specific day, the day on which Stephen was killed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the day Stephen was killed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1199	ACT	8	1	xp25	figs-activepassive	πάντες…διεσπάρησαν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they all fled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1200	ACT	8	1	u5pi	figs-hyperbole	πάντες…διεσπάρησαν	1	they were all scattered	The word all is a generalization that emphasizes that a large number of the believers were affected. Alternate translation: “many of the believers were scattered” or “many of the believers fled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1201	ACT	8	1	ok0h	translate-names	τῆς Ἰουδαίας καὶ Σαμαρείας	1		Judea and Samaria are the names of regions. See how you translated them in 1:8. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1202	ACT	8	1	k5a2	figs-explicit	πλὴν τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	except the apostles	The implication is that the apostles remained in Jerusalem, even though they too experienced this great persecution. Alternate translation: “except the apostles, who remained in Jerusalem despite the persecution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1203	ACT	8	2	tp9e	translate-versebridge	συνεκόμισαν δὲ τὸν Στέφανον ἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς, καὶ ἐποίησαν κοπετὸν μέγαν ἐπ’ αὐτῷ	1	General Information:	It may be helpful to your readers to move these parts of the story about Stephen together by using a verse bridge for verses 1-2 as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
1204	ACT	8	2	sjc8	figs-explicit	συνεκόμισαν…τὸν Στέφανον	1	devout men	The word translated carried away means to carry away for burial. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. You could also say explicitly that it was Stephen’s body that these men carried away. Alternate translation: “carried Stephen’s body away to bury it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1205	ACT	8	3	yd2i		κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους	1	according to the houses	Alternate translation: “entering one house after another”
1206	ACT	8	3	w6vk	figs-explicit	κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους…τε ἄνδρας καὶ γυναῖκας	1	men and women	Luke may mean houses where Christians met, as described in 2:46, and he means men and women who believed in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the houses where Christians met…believers in Jesus, both men and women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1207	ACT	8	4	n52l	figs-nominaladj	οἱ…διασπαρέντες	1		Luke is using the participle having been scattered, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term ones to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the believers who had been scattered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1208	ACT	8	4	ymy5	figs-activepassive	οἱ…διασπαρέντες	1	had been scattered	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. See how you translated it in 8:1. Alternate translation: “the believers who had fled from the persecution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1209	ACT	8	4	su6i	figs-metonymy	εὐαγγελιζόμενοι τὸν λόγον	1	the word	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that these believers shared by using words. See how you translated the term in 4:4. Also see the General Notes to this chapter for the meaning of the word translated proclaiming here and many other times in this chapter. Alternate translation: “telling the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1210	ACT	8	5	dh3x	translate-names	Φίλιππος	1	Connecting Statement:	Philip is the name of a man. See how you translated it in 1:13. Philip was one of the apostles. A man by that same name, possibly the same man, was chosen as one of the deacons in 6:5. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1211	ACT	8	5	gz5m	figs-idiom	κατελθὼν	1	went down to the city of Samaria	Luke speaks of Philip going down from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “traveling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1212	ACT	8	5	f45b	figs-idiom	τὴν πόλιν τῆς Σαμαρείας	1	the city of Samaria	This is an idiom that means the principal city in the region of Samaria, probably the one known at that time as Sebaste, although some interpreters believe that Luke may have had the city of Sychar in mind instead. Alternate translation: “the main city in Samaria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1213	ACT	8	5	pk1l	figs-metonymy	τὸν Χριστόν	1	proclaimed to them the Christ	Luke is using the name Christ figuratively by association to mean the message about Christ. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1214	ACT	8	6	cnt9	figs-explicit	οἱ ὄχλοι	1	And the crowds	Luke implicitly means the crowds in the city that Philip traveled to. Alternate translation: “the people in that city of Samaria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1215	ACT	8	6	jyvw		ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1		Alternate translation: “all together”
1216	ACT	8	6	tt0i	figs-nominaladj	τοῖς λεγομένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Φιλίππου	1		Luke is using the participle being spoken, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term things to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the things that Philip was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1217	ACT	8	6	g0ft	figs-activepassive	τοῖς λεγομένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Φιλίππου	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that Philip was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1218	ACT	8	6	wm83		τὰ σημεῖα	1	were paying attention to	Here the word signs has the same sense that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in 2:22 and elsewhere in Acts. It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “the miracles”
1219	ACT	8	7	un6b	figs-infostructure	πολλοὶ γὰρ τῶν ἐχόντων πνεύματα ἀκάθαρτα, βοῶντα φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, ἐξήρχοντο	1		As Luke tells the story of this event, he changes from the people who had unclean spirits being the subject of the sentence to the unclean spirits themselves being the subject. This may be because the unclean spirits controlled people such an extent that the spirits seemed to be the people themselves. It may be helpful to your readers to put the information about the spirits before the information about the people who had them. Alternate translation: “unclean spirits, shouting with a loud voice, were coming out of many of those who had them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1220	ACT	8	7	pehe	figs-nominaladj	τῶν ἐχόντων	1		Luke is using the participle having, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term those to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the people who had” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1221	ACT	8	7	xb2n		ἐχόντων πνεύματα ἀκάθαρτα	1	having unclean spirits	Alternate translation: “who were controlled by unclean spirits”
1222	ACT	8	7	nz7y	figs-idiom	βοῶντα φωνῇ μεγάλῃ	1		This is an idiom that means that the unclean spirits raised the volume of their voices. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1223	ACT	8	7	v8uj	figs-activepassive	πολλοὶ…παραλελυμένοι καὶ χωλοὶ ἐθεραπεύθησαν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it would be appropriate to say Jesus, since the book of Acts shows that the apostles healed people in the name of Jesus, for example, in 4:10. Alternate translation: “Jesus, through the power of his name, healed many who had been paralyzed and lame” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1224	ACT	8	7	imbh	figs-nominaladj	πολλοὶ…παραλελυμένοι	1		Luke is using the participle paralyzed as an adjective. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “many who had been paralyzed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1225	ACT	8	7	anq3	figs-activepassive	πολλοὶ…παραλελυμένοι	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “many who had paralysis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1226	ACT	8	8	s8bm	grammar-connect-logic-result	δὲ	1		Luke is using the word translated And to introduce what the people in the city did as a result of the many healings that Philip performed. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1227	ACT	8	8	z5z3	figs-metonymy	ἐγένετο…πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ	1	And there was much joy in that city	The phrase that city refers figuratively by association to the people who lived in that city. Alternate translation: “there was much joy among the people of that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1228	ACT	8	8	r0nz	figs-abstractnouns	ἐγένετο…πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of joy, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the people of that city rejoiced greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1229	ACT	8	9	jm7n	writing-background	ἀνὴρ δέ τις ὀνόματι Σίμων, προϋπῆρχεν ἐν τῇ πόλει μαγεύων	1		Luke is providing background information to help readers understand who Simon was and why he said and did the things Luke describes in the rest of this chapter. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now there was a man named Simon who had been practicing sorcery in that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1230	ACT	8	9	bed1	writing-participants	ἀνὴρ…τις ὀνόματι Σίμων	1	But … a certain man named Simon	Luke uses this phrase to introduce Simon as a new character in the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1231	ACT	8	9	cx7a	translate-names	Σίμων	1	the city	Simon is the name of a man. See how you translated this name, for a different man, in 1:13.
1232	ACT	8	10	mvcm	writing-pronouns	ᾧ προσεῖχον πάντες ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου	1		The phrase to whom refers to Simon. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “All of them, from little to great, were paying attention to Simon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1233	ACT	8	10	evt7	figs-hyperbole	πάντες	1	they all … were paying attention	Luke is using the word all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Samaritans in that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1234	ACT	8	10	h51l	figs-nominaladj	ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου	1		Luke is using the adjectives little and great as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “from the least important people to the most important ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1235	ACT	8	10	ibl1	figs-merism	ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου	1	from least to greatest	Luke is speaking figuratively, using these two extremes in order to include all of the people in between. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “no matter how important they were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
1236	ACT	8	10	h5ya	writing-pronouns	οὗτός	1		The demonstrative pronoun This stands for Simon. Alternate translation: “This man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1237	ACT	8	10	j3d8	translate-names	ἡ Δύναμις τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡ καλουμένη Μεγάλη	1	This man is the power of God which is called Great	The Samaritans believed that Simon must be the embodiment of some great power, and thinking that this power was God, the highest of powers, they called it Great. Alternate translation: “an embodiment of the Great God” or “an embodiment of the supreme God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1238	ACT	8	10	yw5v	figs-activepassive	ἡ καλουμένη	1	the power of God which is called Great	If your language does not use the passive form called, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1239	ACT	8	11	pxj8	writing-background	προσεῖχον δὲ αὐτῷ	1	General Information:	This verse gives additional background information about Simon and what he was doing among the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “Now they were paying attention to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translatewriting-background]])
1240	ACT	8	12	h1hg	writing-pronouns	ἐπίστευσαν	1		The pronoun they refers to the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “the Samaritans believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1241	ACT	8	12	zwoj	figs-abstractnouns	εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a kingdom, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the good news that God had begun to rule and that Jesus the Messiah had come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1242	ACT	8	12	zjh5	figs-metonymy	εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		Here the name of Jesus figuratively represents his authority, specifically as the Messiah, as the title Christ indicates. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the good news that God had begun to rule and that Jesus the Messiah had come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1243	ACT	8	12	jg1w	figs-infostructure	εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		Since Jesus inaugurated the kingdom of God when he came to earth, it may be helpful to put the information about Jesus before the information about the kingdom of God. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the gospel about the name of Jesus Christ and the kingdom of God” or “proclaiming the good news that Jesus the Messiah had come and that God had begun to rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1244	ACT	8	12	vsy8	figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίζοντο	1	they were baptized	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Philip was baptizing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1245	ACT	8	13	k2th	figs-rpronouns	ὁ δὲ Σίμων καὶ αὐτὸς ἐπίστευσεν	1	Simon himself also believed	Luke uses the word himself to emphasize how significant it was that Simon, who had claimed to be an embodiment of God, had believed in Jesus as the Messiah whom God sent. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. Alternate translation: “Even Simon believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1246	ACT	8	13	bayg		ἦν προσκαρτερῶν τῷ Φιλίππῳ	1		Alternate translation: “he followed Philip around everywhere”
1247	ACT	8	13	v91t	figs-activepassive	βαπτισθεὶς	1	having been baptized	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “after Philip baptized him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1248	ACT	8	13	rnr3	figs-irony	θεωρῶν τε σημεῖα καὶ δυνάμεις μεγάλας	1		The word that ULT translates as works here is the same word that it translates as “power” in 8:10. It can mean either power or works that demonstrate power. Luke is using the word to show what an ironic situation Simon is in. He claimed to be “the power … that is called Great,” but now he recognizes that works of power that are truly great are done in the name of Jesus. If your language has a word for works that demonstrate power that has the same root as its word for power, it would be appropriate to use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
1249	ACT	8	13	d4yb	figs-doublet	τε σημεῖα καὶ δυνάμεις	1		The terms signs and works mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation, as in UST: “miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1250	ACT	8	14	s7lr	writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Now when the apostles in Jerusalem heard	Luke is using the word translated And to introduce a new event in the story of the Samaritans becoming believers. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1251	ACT	8	14	lk9b	figs-quotations	ἀκούσαντες…ὅτι δέδεκται ἡ Σαμάρεια τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀπέστειλαν	1		It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Samaria has received the word of God,’ sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
1252	ACT	8	14	uwxo	figs-exclamations	ἀκούσαντες…ὅτι δέδεκται ἡ Σαμάρεια τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀπέστειλαν	1		If you decide to have a direct quotation here, you might also decide to make it an exclamation. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Samaria has received the word of God!’ sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1253	ACT	8	14	ju21	figs-metonymy	ἡ Σαμάρεια	1	Samaria	Luke is using the word Samaria figuratively by association to mean the people of Samaria. Alternate translation: “the people of Samaria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1254	ACT	8	14	e682	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	had received	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that Philip shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1255	ACT	8	14	td5t	translate-names	Πέτρον καὶ Ἰωάννην	1		Peter and John are the names of two men. See how you translated them in 1:13. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1256	ACT	8	15	af1n	writing-pronouns	οἵτινες καταβάντες, προσηύξαντο περὶ αὐτῶν	1	who, having come down	The pronoun who stands for Peter and John, and the pronoun them stands for the Samaritans. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “When Peter and John had come down, they prayed for the Samaritans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1257	ACT	8	15	hd1w	figs-youdual	οἵτινες	1		Since the pronoun who stands for two men, it should be in the dual if your language uses that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
1258	ACT	8	15	hk1m	figs-idiom	καταβάντες	1	having come down	Luke speaks of Philip having come down from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “having traveled from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1259	ACT	8	15	bun9	figs-go	καταβάντες	1	prayed for them	Your language may say “gone” rather than come in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having gone down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1260	ACT	8	16	d2z9	figs-metaphor	οὐδέπω…ἦν ἐπ’ οὐδενὶ αὐτῶν ἐπιπεπτωκός	1		Luke is speaking figuratively of the Holy Spirit as if it could fall on the Samaritan believers. Alternate translation: “none of them had yet received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1261	ACT	8	16	l4ez	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Luke is using the word For to introduce the reason why Peter and John had to pray for the Samaritans to receive the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “They prayed for them because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1262	ACT	8	16	qmjp	figs-doublenegatives	οὐδέπω…ἦν ἐπ’ οὐδενὶ αὐτῶν ἐπιπεπτωκός	1		In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “he had not yet fallen upon none of them.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1263	ACT	8	16	bpzz	writing-pronouns	οὐδέπω…ἦν…ἐπιπεπτωκός	1		The pronoun he stands for the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit had not yet fallen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1264	ACT	8	16	rn3c	figs-metonymy	μόνον…βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	they had only been baptized into the name of the Lord Jesus	Here, the name of the Lord Jesus represents his authority, and being baptized into his name represents being baptized in order to be under his authority. Alternate translation: “they had only been baptized to become disciples of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1265	ACT	8	16	m1nw	figs-activepassive	μόνον…βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον	1	they had only been baptized	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. If you must state who did the action, the context suggests it was Philip. Alternate translation: “Philip had only baptized them” or “Philip had only baptized the Samaritan believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1266	ACT	8	17	bsll	writing-pronouns	ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς, καὶ ἐλάμβανον	1		The first instance of the pronoun they stands for Peter and John, and the pronoun them and the second instance of they stand for the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “When Peter and John were laying their hands on the Samaritans, and the Samaritans were receiving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1267	ACT	8	17	bldf	figs-youdual	ἐπετίθεσαν	1		Since this instance of the pronoun they stands for two men, it should be in the dual if your language uses that form. The same is true of “them” in 8:18 and “they” and “the ones” in 8:25. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
1268	ACT	8	17	q7gd	translate-symaction	ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς	1	they were laying their hands on them	Peter and John laying their hands on the Samaritans who had believed Philip’s message of the gospel was a symbolic action that showed that Peter and John wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to these believers. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])d John placed their hands on the Samaritan people who had believed Stephen’s message of the gospel. This symbolic action shows that Peter and John wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to the believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1269	ACT	8	18	rh79	figs-activepassive	δίδοται τὸ Πνεῦμα	1	the Holy Spirit was being given through the laying on of the hands of the apostles	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is clear from the context that this was God. Alternate translation: “God was giving the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1270	ACT	8	19	fbw9		δότε κἀμοὶ τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην, ἵνα ᾧ ἐὰν ἐπιθῶ τὰς χεῖρας, λαμβάνῃ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον	1	so that whoever I lay my hands on may receive the Holy Spirit	Alternate translation: “Give me the authority to give the Holy Spirit to anyone I lay my hands on”
1271	ACT	8	20	df1j	figs-exclamations	τὸ ἀργύριόν σου, σὺν σοὶ εἴη εἰς ἀπώλειαν	1		Peter is using the exclamation form to emphasize how forcefully he rejects Simon’s offer. You may want to use an exclamation to convey this same emphasis in your language. Alternate translation: “I refuse your offer! I can see that you are going to perdition, and you can take your money with you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1272	ACT	8	20	y4ny	figs-metonymy	τὸ ἀργύριόν	1		Peter is referring figuratively to money, by association with the way that silver was used for money at this time. Alternate translation: “money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1273	ACT	8	20	gh12	figs-metonymy	τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the gift of God	Peter is referring figuratively to the ability to confer the Holy Spirit by the laying on of hands. Since this is an ability that only God can give, by association Peter calls it the gift of God. Alternate translation: “the power to confer the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1274	ACT	8	21	p2ev	figs-doublet	οὐκ ἔστιν σοι μερὶς οὐδὲ κλῆρος ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ	1	There is to you no part or share in this matter	The terms part and share mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “We will not let you have anything to do with this work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1275	ACT	8	21	ufk3	figs-doublet	σοι	1		The phrase to you represents a possessive form. Alternate translation: “yours” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1276	ACT	8	21	xbh2	figs-metaphor	ἡ γὰρ καρδία σου οὐκ ἔστιν εὐθεῖα	1	because your heart is not right	Here, the heart figuratively represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “your thoughts and motives are not right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1277	ACT	8	21	p9v4	figs-metonymy	ἔναντι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		This could mean: (1) that Simon’s heart is not right in God’s opinion, by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “as far as God is concerned” (2) that Simon does not have the right thoughts about God or intentions towards God. Alternate translation: “in its attitude towards God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1278	ACT	8	22	sa6s	figs-abstractnouns	ἀπὸ τῆς κακίας σου ταύτης	1	this wickedness	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of wickedness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for trying to buy God’s gift with money” or “for trying to bribe God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1279	ACT	8	22	ppk5	figs-metaphor	ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου	1	the intention of your heart	Here, the heart figuratively represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “what you intended to do” or “what you were thinking of doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1280	ACT	8	22	pe2u	grammar-connect-condition-fact	δεήθητι τοῦ Κυρίου, εἰ ἄρα ἀφεθήσεταί σοι ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου	1	if therefore the intention of your heart will be forgiven to you	Peter is using the conditional word if to introduce a desired result. There is actually no doubt about whether God will forgive someone who sincerely repents and prays for forgiveness. Alternate translation: “pray to the Lord so that, as a result, the intention of your heart will be forgiven to you” or “pray to the Lord and ask him to forgive you for the intention of your heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1281	ACT	8	22	lq4i	figs-activepassive	ἀφεθήσεταί σοι ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he will forgive you for the intention of your heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1282	ACT	8	23	tf3s	translate-unknown	εἰς…χολὴν πικρίας	1		The gall plant has a bitter taste and is poisonous. If your readers would not be familiar with this plant, you could use the name of a similar plant in your area. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1283	ACT	8	23	kpu6	figs-metonymy	εἰς…χολὴν πικρίας	1		Peter is using the gall plant figuratively by association to mean “poison.” Alternate translation: “in the poison of bitterness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1284	ACT	8	23	d3v7	figs-metaphor	εἰς…χολὴν πικρίας	1	in the poison of bitterness	Peter is describing bitterness figuratively as if it were made of gall or poison. He means that bitterness, here in the sense of envy, spiritually poisons a person, that is, it leads them towards spiritual death. Alternate translation: “dangerously envious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1285	ACT	8	23	j696	figs-metaphor	σύνδεσμον ἀδικίας	1	the bond of unrighteousness	Peter speaks figuratively of the bond of unrighteousness as if unrighteousness were restraining Simon and keeping him a prisoner. He means Simon is not able to stop himself from sinning. Alternate translation: “unable to stop sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1286	ACT	8	24	n5cw	figs-youdual	ὑμεῖς…εἰρήκατε	1		Even though it was only Peter who spoke to Simon, in his response, Simon is addressing both Peter and John, since he offered money to both of them, as 8:18 describes. Since Simon is speaking to two men, You and you would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise it would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
1287	ACT	8	24	v2wy	figs-imperative	δεήθητε ὑμεῖς ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ πρὸς τὸν Κύριον	1		This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please pray to the Lord for me” or “I ask you to pray to the Lord for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
1288	ACT	8	24	hwc6	writing-pronouns	δεήθητε ὑμεῖς ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ πρὸς τὸν Κύριον	1		Simon is stating the pronoun You, which is already implied in the verb pray, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “Pray to the Lord for me yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1289	ACT	8	24	u1a4		ὅπως μηδὲν ἐπέλθῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ὧν εἰρήκατε	1	so that nothing of which you have spoken may happen to me	Alternate translation: “so that the things you have said may not happen to me”
1290	ACT	8	24	sk5w	figs-explicit	μηδὲν ἐπέλθῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ὧν εἰρήκατε	1	nothing … of which you have spoken	Simon is referring implicitly to Peter’s rebuke, in which Peter spoke of Simon’s silver perishing along with him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I will not perish as you said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1291	ACT	8	25	nzvg	grammar-connect-time-sequential	οὖν	1		Luke is using the word translated Then to introduce what Peter and John did after being in the city where Philip had been telling the Samaritans about Jesus. Alternate translation: “After that,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
1292	ACT	8	25	p3rj	figs-explicit	οἱ…διαμαρτυράμενοι καὶ λαλήσαντες τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1		The ones Luke is describing are Peter and John. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter and John, after they had testified and spoken the word of the Lord,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1293	ACT	8	25	uz15	figs-nominaladj	οἱ…διαμαρτυράμενοι καὶ λαλήσαντες	1	when they had testified	Luke is using the participles having testified and having spoken, which function as adjectives, as nouns. ULT adds the term ones to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the ones who had testified and spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1294	ACT	8	25	ww9k	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	spoken the word of the Lord	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that Peter and John shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1295	ACT	8	25	eu66	figs-metonymy	πολλάς…κώμας τῶν Σαμαρειτῶν	1	to many villages of the Samaritans	The term villages refers figuratively by association to the people who lived in these villages. Alternate translation: “to the people in many Samaritan villages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1296	ACT	8	26	mbj9	writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Now	Luke is using the word translated But to introduce a new event. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1297	ACT	8	26	w1nk	figs-idiom	ἀνάστηθι	1	Arise and go	Here the word arise means that the angel wanted Philip to take action, not that the angel wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “Pack for a journey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1298	ACT	8	26	le2c	figs-idiom	τὴν ὁδὸν τὴν καταβαίνουσαν ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ εἰς Γάζαν	1	that goes down from Jerusalem to Gaza	The angel speaks of the road going down from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “the road that leads from Jerusalem to Gaza” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1299	ACT	8	26	a18y	writing-background	αὕτη ἐστὶν ἔρημος	1	This is desert	This sentence could be: (1) something that Luke adds to provide background information about the area through which Philip would be travelling. Alternate translation: “from Jerusalem to Gaza.’ (Now that road leads through a desert.)” (2) part of what the angel is saying to Philip. Alternate translation: “from Jerusalem to Gaza, which is a desert road.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1300	ACT	8	27	s0yn	figs-idiom	ἀναστὰς, ἐπορεύθη	1		As in the previous verse, the word arising means that Philip took preparatory action, not that he stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “he prepared for a journey and left” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1301	ACT	8	27	xy7x	writing-participants	ἰδοὺ	1	behold	Luke is using the word behold to alert his audience to a new person in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1302	ACT	8	27	zkc5	writing-background	ἀνὴρ, Αἰθίοψ εὐνοῦχος, δυνάστης Κανδάκης βασιλίσσης Αἰθιόπων, ὃς ἦν ἐπὶ πάσης τῆς γάζης αὐτῆς, ὃς ἐληλύθει προσκυνήσων εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1		This verse provides background information about this Ethiopian official and why he was travelling along this road. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence and to use a natural form for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “a man from Ethiopia. Now this man was a eunuch, an official of the Kandake, the queen of the Ethiopians, who was over all her treasure, and he had come to Jerusalem to worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translatewriting-background]])
1303	ACT	8	27	i5zh	figs-idiom	ἀνὴρ, Αἰθίοψ	1		This is an idiomatic way of describing someone. Alternate translation: “a man from Ethiopia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1304	ACT	8	27	s1uf	translate-unknown	εὐνοῦχος, δυνάστης Κανδάκης	1	a eunuch	While the word eunuch describes a man who has been castrated, as men sometimes were who served in royal courts in the ancient world, the emphasis here is on the fact that this man was a high government official, not on his physical state. Alternate translation: “an important official in the court of the Kandake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1305	ACT	8	27	t5t1	translate-names	Κανδάκης	1	of Candace	Kandake was a title for the queens of Ethiopia. It is similar to the word Pharaoh, the title that was used for the kings of Egypt. So in your translation, make clear that it is a title rather than a name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1306	ACT	8	27	nm48	figs-metaphor	ὃς ἦν ἐπὶ πάσης τῆς γάζης αὐτῆς	1		Luke is using a spatial metaphor when says that this man was over the treasure of the Kandake. He means that the man was responsible for it. Alternate translation: “who was in charge of her treasury” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1307	ACT	8	27	v8q7	figs-explicit	ὃς ἐληλύθει προσκυνήσων εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	who had come to Jerusalem to worship	The implication is that this man was a Gentile who believed in the true God and had come to worship at the Jewish temple. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Even though he was a Gentile, he had come to worship the true God at the temple in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1308	ACT	8	27	uk32	figs-go	ὃς ἐληλύθει	1		Your language may say “gone” rather than come in a context such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “who had gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1309	ACT	8	28	d3kv	translate-unknown	τοῦ ἅρματος	1	chariot	Here and in 8:29 and 8:38, the term chariot probably means something like “carriage.” Chariots were vehicles for war, not for long-distance travel, and people stood to ride in chariots, while this man was seated. Alternate translation, as in UST: “his carriage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1310	ACT	8	28	bx2j	figs-metonymy	ἀνεγίνωσκεν τὸν προφήτην Ἠσαΐαν	1	was reading the prophet Isaiah	Luke is using the phrase the prophet Isaiah figuratively to mean the prophecies that Isaiah spoke and recorded. Alternate translation: “he was reading from the book of Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1311	ACT	8	28	n40c	figs-explicit	ἀνεγίνωσκεν	1		Since Philip was able to hear what the man was reading, as 8:30 explains, the implication is that the man was reading aloud. Alternate translation: “he was reading aloud from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1312	ACT	8	29	llh1	figs-metonymy	πρόσελθε καὶ κολλήθητι τῷ ἅρματι τούτῳ	1	be joined to this chariot	The Spirit means figuratively that Philip is to stay close to the person riding in the chariot. Alternate translation: “Go over to that chariot so you can be near the man in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1313	ACT	8	30	ffh7	figs-metonymy	ἀναγινώσκοντος Ἠσαΐαν τὸν προφήτην	1	reading Isaiah the prophet	Luke is using the phrase Isaiah the prophet figuratively to mean the prophecies that Isaiah spoke and recorded. Alternate translation: “reading from the book of Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1314	ACT	8	30	x98i	figs-explicit	ἆρά γε γινώσκεις ἃ ἀναγινώσκεις	1	Do you understand what you are reading?	The Ethiopian was a literate, educated man who could read, but he lacked spiritual discernment. Philip is asking implicitly whether he understands the meaning of the passage from Isaiah. Alternate translation: “Do you understand the meaning of what you are reading?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1315	ACT	8	31	r5g2	figs-rquestion	πῶς γὰρ ἂν δυναίμην ἐὰν μή τις ὁδηγήσει με?	1	how would I be able, unless someone will guide me?	The man is not asking for information. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No, I cannot understand unless someone guides me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1316	ACT	8	31	zx9h	figs-explicit	παρεκάλεσέν…τὸν Φίλιππον, ἀναβάντα καθίσαι σὺν αὐτῷ	1	he summoned Philip, having come up, to sit with him	The implication is that when the man invited Philip to come up and sit with him, Philip agreed to travel down the road with him to explain the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “he invited Philip to come up and sit with him and explain the Scriptures, and Philip accepted the invitation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1317	ACT	8	32	nd93	figs-explicit	ὡς πρόβατον ἐπὶ σφαγὴν ἤχθη	1		This a quotation from Isaiah 53:7–8. It describes the Messiah, whom Isaiah calls “the servant of the Lord.” But since the Ethiopian official did not know whom Isaiah was describing and had to ask Philip, it would be better not to specify that at this point by saying, for example, “The Messiah was led like a sheep to the slaugher” or “The servant of the Lord was led like a sheep to the slaughter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1318	ACT	8	32	bgk9	figs-abstractnouns	ὡς πρόβατον ἐπὶ σφαγὴν ἤχθη	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of slaughter, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “He was led like a sheep that was going to be slaughtered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1319	ACT	8	32	kh97	figs-activepassive	ἤχθη	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People led him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1320	ACT	8	32	lu3j	translate-unknown	ἐναντίον τοῦ κείραντος αὐτὸν ἄφωνος	1	like a lamb before its shearer is silent	A shearer is a person who cuts the wool off the sheep so that it may be used. If your readers would not be familiar with this word and you have no comparable word in your language, you could express the meaning in another way. Alternate translation: “is silent while its wool is being cut off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1321	ACT	8	32	k8sy	figs-metonymy	οὐκ ἀνοίγει τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ	1		This means that the Messiah does not speak, by association with the way a person would open his mouth in order to speak. Alternate translation: “he says nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1322	ACT	8	33	dwur	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ ταπεινώσει, ἡ κρίσις αὐτοῦ ἤρθη	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of humiliation and justice, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “Because he acted humbly and did not defend himself, his enemies were able to treat him unjustly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1323	ACT	8	33	y2a1	figs-activepassive	ἡ κρίσις αὐτοῦ ἤρθη	1	In humiliation his justice was taken away	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his enemies denied him justice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1324	ACT	8	33	k3uz	figs-rquestion	τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται?	1	Who can fully describe his generation?	Isaiah is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one will describe his generation.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1325	ACT	8	33	ec09	figs-declarative	τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται?	1		Isaiah is using a future statement to describe capability. If this would be confusing for your readers, you could use form that is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Who can describe his generation?” or “No one will be able to describe his generation.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
1326	ACT	8	33	yxxn	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται?	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of generation, you could express the same idea in another way. This could mean: (1) that no one will be able to describe the Messiah’s descendants because he will die without having any children. Alternate translation: “No one will be able to describe his descendants.” (2) that no one will be able to describe the other people living at the same time as the Messiah because they will be so wicked. Alternate translation: “No one will be able to describe how wicked his contemporaries are.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1327	ACT	8	33	idk8	figs-activepassive	αἴρεται ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς ἡ ζωὴ αὐτοῦ	1	his life was taken from the earth	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his enemies will take his life from the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1328	ACT	8	34	agq5	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ εὐνοῦχος τῷ Φιλίππῳ εἶπεν	1		Together the words answering and said mean that the Ethiopian official responded to Philip’s question about whether he understood what he was reading. Alternate translation: “The eunuch responded to Philip’s question by saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1329	ACT	8	34	htb2	figs-idiom	δέομαί σου	1	I am begging you	The Ethiopian official is using a polite, idiomatic expression. Alternate translation: “Please tell me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1330	ACT	8	34	pa3m	writing-pronouns	ἑτέρου τινός	1		In this context, the pronoun other means “other person.” Alternate translation: “some other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1331	ACT	8	35	j7xw	figs-metonymy	ἀνοίξας…τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ	1		This means that Philip spoke, by association with the way a person would be opening his mouth in order to speak. The image of the open mouth suggests a certain confidence and freedom in speaking. Alternate translation: “speaking confidently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1332	ACT	8	35	uw21	figs-explicit	τῆς Γραφῆς ταύτης	1	this scripture	By this scripture, Luke implicitly means the passage that the official had been reading. Alternate translation: “the passage from Isaiah that the official had been reading” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1333	ACT	8	35	xg4i	figs-metonymy	εὐηγγελίσατο αὐτῷ τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1		Luke is using the name Jesus figuratively by association to mean the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1334	ACT	8	36	ip13	figs-metonymy	τι ὕδωρ…ὕδωρ	1	they were going along the road	Luke and the official are using the word water figuratively to mean a body of water, such as a pool at a desert oasis. Alternate translation: “a pool of water … there is a pool of water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1335	ACT	8	36	muz2	figs-rquestion	τί κωλύει με βαπτισθῆναι?	1	What is preventing me from being baptized?	This question could be: (1) a rhetorical question that the eunuch is using as a polite way to ask Philip to baptize him. Alternate translation: “Please allow me to be baptized.” (2) a genuine request for information, since Philip seems to answer this question in 8:37 by identifying something that could keep the official from being baptized. Alternate translation: “Is there a condition I must meet in order to be baptized?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1336	ACT	8	36	wb9j	figs-activepassive	με βαπτισθῆναι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you from baptizing me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1337	ACT	8	37	ov75	translate-textvariants	εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ ὁ Φίλιππος ἐὰν πιστεύεις ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου σωθήσει; ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ εἶπεν Πιστεύω εἰς τὸν Χριστὸν τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ θεοῦ	1		As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this verse is found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but it is not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting the verse in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1338	ACT	8	37	qj5i	figs-metaphor	ἐὰν πιστεύεις ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου	1		Here, the heart figuratively represents the thoughts and intentions. Alternate translation: “If you genuinely believe in Jesus and want to be his disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1339	ACT	8	37	djq2	figs-activepassive	σωθήσει	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1340	ACT	8	37	e3uu	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς…εἶπεν	1		Together the words answering and said mean that the eunuch responded to the what Philip told him. Alternate translation: “the eunuch responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1341	ACT	8	38	l8wl	figs-metonymy	ἐκέλευσεν στῆναι τὸ ἅρμα	1	he commanded the chariot to stop	Luke is using the term chariot figuratively by association to mean the driver of the chariot. Alternate translation: “the official told the driver of the chariot to stop” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1342	ACT	8	38	nn00	writing-pronouns	ἐβάπτισεν αὐτόν	1		The pronoun he stands for Philip, and the pronoun him stands for the eunuch. Alternate translation: “Philip baptized the eunuch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1343	ACT	8	39	xp52	grammar-connect-time-sequential	γὰρ	1	the eunuch did not see him anymore	While the word translated for often introduces a reason, that does not seem to be its function here. Luke is not saying that the eunuch did not see Philip any more because he did not look for him but instead went on his way. Rather, the word for seems simply to introduce a continuation of the narrative. Alternate translation: “but” or “nevertheless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
1344	ACT	8	40	r1x7	figs-explicit	Φίλιππος…εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον	1	Philip was found at Azotus	The implication is that there was no indication of Philip traveling between where he baptized the Ethiopian and Azotus. He suddenly disappeared along the road to Gaza and reappeared at the town of Azotus. Alternate translation: “Philip suddenly reappeared at Azotus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1345	ACT	8	40	bbws	figs-activepassive	Φίλιππος…εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Philip reappeared at Azotus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1346	ACT	8	40	arh5		διερχόμενος	1	passed through	Alternate translation: “as he passed through that area, he was”
1347	ACT	8	40	zfn6	figs-hyperbole	τὰς πόλεις πάσας	1	to all the cities	Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “to the cities in that region” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1348	ACT	8	40	yf7i	grammar-connect-time-background	Ἄζωτον…Καισάρειαν	1		Azotus and Caesarea are the names of cities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1349	ACT	9	intro	jm6x			0		Acts 9 General Notes Structure and formatting In 9:1, the story shifts back to Saul and tells about his salvation. In 9:32, the story shifts from Saul to a new part of the story about Peter. Acts 9:31 is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the third major part of the book. Special concepts in this chapter “Letters for the synagogues in Damascus” The “letters” Paul asked for in 9:2 were probably legal papers that permitted him to put Christians in prison. The synagogue leaders in Damascus would have obeyed the letter because it was written by the high priest. If the Romans had seen the letter, they also would have allowed Saul to persecute the Christians, because they permitted the Jews to do as they desired to people who broke their religious laws. “The Way” No one knows for sure who first started calling the community of Jesus’ followers “the Way.” This may be what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God. However, in the book of Acts the term is only used by outsiders, as in 9:2, or by believers speaking to outsiders. So it could also be a term by which the community of Jesus’ followers was known outside that community. “the church” Acts 9:31 is the first use of the word church in the singular to refer to more than one local congregation. In that verse it refers to all the believers in all the groups throughout Judea, Galilee, and Samaria. It shows that they recognized that they all had a common identity as followers of Jesus. Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter What Saul saw when he met Jesus It is clear that Saul saw a light and that it was because of this light that he “fell upon the ground.” Some people think that Saul knew that it was the Lord speaking to him without seeing a human form, because the Bible often speaks of God as being light and living in light. Other people think that later in his life he was able to say, “I have seen the Lord Jesus” because it was a human form that he saw here.
1350	ACT	9	1	r4n5	writing-newevent	δὲ	1	General Information:	Luke uses the word translated But to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1351	ACT	9	1	anb6	figs-hendiadys	ἐμπνέων ἀπειλῆς καὶ φόνου εἰς	1	still speaking threats even of murder against the disciples	Luke is using the two words threat and murder together to express a single idea. The word murder tells what kind of threat Saul was making. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use and. Alternate translation: “making murderous threats against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1352	ACT	9	1	lrre	figs-metonymy	ἐμπνέων	1		Luke is using the term breathing figuratively by association to mean “speaking,” since people breathe out while they speak. Alternate translation: “speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1353	ACT	9	2	wyfp	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ…εὕρῃ…ἀγάγῃ	1		The pronoun him refers to the high priest and both instances of the pronoun he refer to Saul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1354	ACT	9	2	zu6j	translate-unknown	ἐπιστολὰς	1		See the General Notes to this chapter for an explanation of what these letters were. This may help you decide what word in your language to use for them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1355	ACT	9	2	v9lw	figs-metonymy	εἰς Δαμασκὸν πρὸς τὰς συναγωγάς	1	to the synagogues	Luke is using the terms Damascus and synagogues figuratively by association to mean the people, probably the leaders, of the synagogues in Damascus. Alternate translation: “to the people in the synagogues of Damascus” or “to the leaders of the synagogues in Damascus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1356	ACT	9	2	lvzt	translate-names	Δαμασκὸν	1		Damascus is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1357	ACT	9	2	thuy	translate-names	τῆς ὁδοῦ, ὄντας	1		As the General Notes to this chapter explain, the Way was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. Alternate translation: “who belonged to the Way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1358	ACT	9	2	mma1	figs-activepassive	δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he might bind them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1359	ACT	9	2	grch	figs-synecdoche	δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1		Luke is figuratively using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “he might arrest them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1360	ACT	9	2	a6z4	figs-explicit	δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	having bound them, he might bring them to Jerusalem	The implication is that Saul wanted to bring believers in Jesus to Jerusalem for trial and punishment by the Jewish leaders. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he might take them as prisoners to Jerusalem so that the Jewish leaders there could judge and punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1361	ACT	9	3	jf4g	figs-explicit	ἐν…τῷ πορεύεσθαι	1	as he was traveling	Luke means implicitly that the high priest gave Saul the letters he asked for and that Saul then left Jerusalem to go to Damascus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as he was traveling to Damascus with letters that the high priest gave him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1362	ACT	9	3	by55	writing-newevent	ἐγένετο	1	it happened that	Luke uses the phrase it happened that to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1363	ACT	9	3	dm6c		αὐτὸν περιήστραψεν φῶς ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	there shone on him a light from heaven	Alternate translation: “a light from heaven shone all around him”
1364	ACT	9	3	gua8		ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	from heaven	This could mean: (1) heaven, where God lives or (2) the sky. The first meaning is preferable. Use that meaning if your language has a separate word for it.
1365	ACT	9	4	y4u4	figs-explicit	πεσὼν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν	1	he fell to the ground	Saul did not fall down accidentally. This could mean: (1) that the light caused him to fall to the ground. Alternate translation: “falling to the ground stunned by the dazzling light” (2) that Saul fainted when he saw the light. Alternate translation: “falling faint because of the glorious light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1366	ACT	9	4	c9l4	figs-rquestion	τί με διώκεις?	1	why are you persecuting me?	The voice is using the question form to rebuke Saul. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate its words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the rebuke in another way. Alternate translation: “you should not be persecuting me.” or “stop persecuting me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1367	ACT	9	5	jaq2		τίς εἶ, κύριε?	1	Who are you, Lord?	Saul is not yet acknowledging that Jesus is Lord. He uses that title because he recognizes that he is speaking to someone of divine power. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use a similar term of respect. Alternate translation: “Who are you, Sir”
1368	ACT	9	5	abc0	writing-pronouns	εἶπεν…ὁ	1	he	The first instance of he stands for Saul, and the second instance of he stands for Jesus. Alternate translation: “Saul said … Jesus replied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1369	ACT	9	5	q8ge		εἶ…σὺ	1		Both occurrences of the word you here are singular.
1370	ACT	9	6	fbi6	figs-activepassive	λαληθήσεταί σοι	1	it will be told to you	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone will tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1371	ACT	9	8	puw3	figs-explicit	ἀνεῳγμένων…τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτοῦ	1	his eyes being opened	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation, as in UST: “when he opened his eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1372	ACT	9	8	dgg8	writing-pronouns	εἰσήγαγον	1	he was seeing nothing	The pronoun they stands for the men who were traveling with Saul, as described in 9:8. Alternate translation: “the men who were traveling with him brought him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1373	ACT	9	9	fhn6		ἦν ἡμέρας τρεῖς μὴ βλέπων	1	he was … without sight	Alternate translation: “he remained blinded for three days”
1374	ACT	9	9	t8uc	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔφαγεν οὐδὲ ἔπιεν	1	neither ate nor drank	This could mean: that Saul chose not to eat or drink as a form of worship. 9:11 says that Saul was praying at this time, and he may have been fasting along with his prayers. Alternate translation: “he fasted from food and drink” (2) that Saul had no appetite or thirst because he was too distressed from his situation. Alternate translation: “he was too distressed to eat or drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1375	ACT	9	10	j847	writing-participants	ἦν δέ τις μαθητὴς ἐν Δαμασκῷ ὀνόματι Ἁνανίας	1	Now there was	Luke uses this sentence to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1376	ACT	9	10	kgn9	translate-names	Ἁνανίας	1		Ananias is the name of a man. This is not the same Ananias whom Luke described in 5:1 (that man died), but you may translate the name here the same way you did there. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1377	ACT	9	10	vqh0		ὁ Κύριος	1		Here and throughout this chapter, the Lord is a respectful title that Luke is using to refer to Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus”
1378	ACT	9	10	vl8k	figs-idiom	ἰδοὺ, ἐγώ, Κύριε	1	he said	Behold, I is a Hebrew idiom that Ananias is using to identify himself as the Ananias to whom the Lord is calling. Alternate translation: “Yes, Lord, this is Ananias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1379	ACT	9	10	u3e1	figs-explicit	ἰδοὺ, ἐγώ, Κύριε	1		Ananias is saying implicitly that he is present and available to serve the Lord. Alternate translation: “Yes, Lord, this is Ananias, and I am here ready to do what you ask” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1380	ACT	9	11	mn24	figs-idiom	ἀναστὰς, πορεύθητι ἐπὶ τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν	1	go to the street which is called Straight	Here, the word arising means that God wants Ananias to take action, not that Ananias is lying down or sitting down and God wants him to stand up. You may be able to convey this with a different kind of expression. Alternate translation: “Go on over to Straight Street” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1381	ACT	9	11	kopv	figs-activepassive	τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν	1		If your language does not use the passive form called, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the street that people call Straight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1382	ACT	9	11	pyr2	translate-names	τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν	1		Straight is the name of a street. Alternate translation: “Straight Street” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1383	ACT	9	11	ie1l		Ἰούδα	1	the house of Judas	Judas it the name of a man. This is not the disciple who betrayed Jesus (that man died); this Judas was the owner of a house in Damascus where Saul was staying. But you may translate the name here the same way you did in 1:13, 1:16, and 5:37 for the disciple and two other men with the same name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1384	ACT	9	11	u5j8	translate-names	Σαῦλον ὀνόματι Ταρσέα	1	a man named Saul, from Tarsus	Tarsus is the name of a city. Alternate translation: “a man named Saul from the city of Tarsus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1385	ACT	9	11	k3ve	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ γὰρ, προσεύχεται	1		The Lord says behold to get Ananias to focus his attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Now listen carefully: He is praying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1386	ACT	9	12	jk46	translate-symaction	ἐπιθέντα αὐτῷ χεῖρας	1	laying hands on him	In this culture, laying hands on people was a symbolic way of conveying a spiritual blessing to them, as the apostles did in 6:6 for the men chosen to oversee the food distribution. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “giving him a spiritual blessing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1387	ACT	9	13	quxn	figs-nominaladj	ἀπὸ πολλῶν	1		Ananias is using the adjective many as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “from many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1388	ACT	9	13	sh2m	figs-abstractnouns	ὅσα κακὰ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of evils, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how many harmful things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1389	ACT	9	13	la9t	figs-metonymy	τοῖς ἁγίοις σου ἐποίησεν ἐν Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	to your saints	Ananias is using the term saints figuratively by association to mean believers in Jesus, since the term means “holy ones” or “ones who are set apart.” Alternate translation: “to the people in Jerusalem who are dedicated to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1390	ACT	9	14	ptd6	figs-abstractnouns	ἔχει ἐξουσίαν παρὰ τῶν ἀρχιερέων	1	he has authority … to bind all	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of authority, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the chief priests have authorized him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1391	ACT	9	14	gk5o	figs-synecdoche	δῆσαι	1		Ananias is figuratively using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “to arrest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1392	ACT	9	14	hi6x	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου	1		Ananias is using the participle calling, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term ones to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the people who call on your name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1393	ACT	9	14	t3fl	figs-metonymy	τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου	1	who call upon your name	Here, name figuratively represents a person, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “the ones calling upon you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1394	ACT	9	14	ampz	figs-idiom	τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου	1		Here, calling on is an idiom. Alternate translation: “the ones worshiping you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1395	ACT	9	15	jmt7	figs-possession	σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς…μοι	1	this one is a chosen instrument of mine	The Lord is using the possessive form to describe Saul as an instrument who is characterized by his choosing. Alternate translation: “an instrument I have chosen” or “someone I have chosen as an instrument” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1396	ACT	9	15	gk29	writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1		The demonstrative pronoun this refers to Saul. Alternate translation: “this man” or “this man Saul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1397	ACT	9	15	ndxu	figs-metaphor	σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς…μοι	1		The Lord describes Saul figuratively as an instrument or tool to indicate that he intends to use Saul to advance his purposes. Alternate translation: “someone I have chosen to use” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1398	ACT	9	15	z5fj	figs-metaphor	τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄνομά μου	1	who will carry my name	The Lord says figuratively that Saul will carry his name, meaning that he will go to many places and speak about it. Alternate translation: “to speak about my name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1399	ACT	9	15	h8vw	figs-metonymy	τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄνομά μου	1		Here, name figuratively represents a person, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “to speak about me” or “to tell others about me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1400	ACT	9	15	wh8c	figs-explicit	ἐθνῶν	1		The term nations refers to people groups that are not Jewish. See how you translated it in 4:25. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1401	ACT	9	15	bbfd	figs-synecdoche	βασιλέων	1		The Lord is using kings, one kind of ruler, to mean all kinds of rulers. Saul, later known as Paul, testified before various rulers and officials. Alternate translation: “rulers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1402	ACT	9	15	uq9b	figs-metaphor	υἱῶν…Ἰσραήλ	1		The Lord is using the word sons figuratively to mean “descendants.” He is speaking of the Israelites, who were descendants of the patriarch Jacob, also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” or “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1403	ACT	9	16	kty3	figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματός μου	1	for my name	Here, name figuratively represents a person, by association with the way that each person has a name. This could mean: (1) that Saul will suffer for telling people about Jesus. Alternate translation: “to make me known” (2) that Saul will suffer for Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “for me” or “for my sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1404	ACT	9	17	s8ms	figs-explicit	ἀπῆλθεν δὲ Ἁνανίας καὶ εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν	1	And Ananias departed, and entered into the house	It may be helpful to state that Ananias went to the house before he entered into it. UST models one way to express this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1405	ACT	9	17	my6m	translate-symaction	ἐπιθεὶς ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας	1	having laid his hands on him	When Ananias laid his hands on Saul, this was a symbolic way of giving him a blessing. See the explanation at 9:2 and see how you translated the same expression there. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1406	ACT	9	17	q61x	figs-you	σοι…ἤρχου…ἀναβλέψῃς	1		All of the occurrences of the word you in this verse are singular and refer to Saul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1407	ACT	9	17	cah9	figs-metaphor	Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφέ	1		Brother is a figurative title that Ananias is using for Saul. The two men are not actual brothers. This could mean: (1) that Ananias is already addressing Saul as someone who shares the same faith. See how you translated “brother” with this meaning in 1:15 and 6:3. Alternate translation: “Saul, my fellow believer” (2) that Ananias is addressing Saul as a fellow Israelite, as the word is used in 3:17 and many other places in this book. Alternate translation: “Saul, my kinsman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1408	ACT	9	17	cxu4	figs-nominaladj	ὁ ὀφθείς σοι	1		Ananias is using the participle having appeared, which functions as an adjective, as a noun to mean a person, Jesus. ULT adds the term one to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “who appeared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1409	ACT	9	17	ptg0	figs-go	ᾗ ἤρχου	1		Your language may say “coming” rather than going in a context such as this. Use whichever word is more natural. Alternate translation: “by which you were coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1410	ACT	9	17	a89q	figs-activepassive	ὅπως ἀναβλέψῃς καὶ πλησθῇς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	so that you might see again and be filled with the Holy Spirit	If your language does not use the passive form filled, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that you might see again and that the Holy Spirit might fill you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1411	ACT	9	17	x4ey	figs-metaphor	πλησθῇς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1		Ananias is speaking figuratively as if Saul were a container that the Holy Spirit could fill. Alternate translation: “receive the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1412	ACT	9	18	m1hx	translate-unknown	λεπίδες	1	something like scales fell	It may be helpful to your readers if you use something they would recognize that has scales to describe the scales that fell from Saul’s eyes. Alternate translation: “fish scales” or “lizard scales” or “snake scales” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1413	ACT	9	18	efs9	figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίσθη	1	rising up, he was baptized	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Ananias baptized him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1414	ACT	9	19	rxfi	figs-activepassive	ἐνισχύθη	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he felt stronger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1415	ACT	9	20	rc49	writing-pronouns	ἐκήρυσσεν τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		The personal pronoun he refers to Saul, and the demonstrative pronoun this refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Saul proclaimed that Jesus is the Son of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
1416	ACT	9	20	w65r	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Son of God	Son of God is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1417	ACT	9	21	xid8	figs-hyperbole	πάντες οἱ ἀκούοντες	1	all who were hearing	Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “those who heard him” or “many who heard him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1418	ACT	9	21	a8j8	figs-nominaladj	οἱ ἀκούοντες…ὁ πορθήσας…τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους	1		Luke is using the participles hearing, having destroyed, and calling on, which function as adjective, as as nouns. ULT adds the terms ones and one to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate these with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “those who heard … the man who destroyed … those who call” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1419	ACT	9	21	f4fd	figs-rquestion	οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ πορθήσας ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο	1	Is not this the one who destroyed those in Jerusalem who call on this name?	The people in Damascus are using the question form to emphasize that Saul was indeed the man who had persecuted the believers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate its words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This is the man who destroyed those in Jerusalem who call on this name!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1420	ACT	9	21	ctg3	figs-explicit	τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο	1	this name	By this name the speakers implicitly mean the name of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the ones calling on the name of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1421	ACT	9	21	l82i	figs-metonymy	τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο	1		Here, the name of Jesus figuratively represents his person. Alternate translation: “the ones calling on Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1422	ACT	9	21	zuoi	figs-idiom	τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο	1		Here, calling on is an idiom. See how you translated it in 9:14. Alternate translation: “the ones worshiping Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1423	ACT	9	21	locy	figs-rquestion	καὶ ὧδε εἰς τοῦτο ἐληλύθει, ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς?	1		This could be: (1) a continuation of the rhetorical question in the first part of the quotation. (ULT starts a new sentence here, but the entire quotation may be a single sentence.) If you would not use a rhetorical question in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “And he had come here for this, to arrest them and bring them to the chief priests!” (2) a statement that the people in Damascus are making to give a further reason for their surprise. Alternate translation: “Indeed, he had come here for this, to arrest them and bring them to the chief priests.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1424	ACT	9	21	i512	figs-activepassive	ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that he might bind them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1425	ACT	9	21	pnrp	figs-synecdoche	ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς	1		Like Ananias in 9:14, the people here are figuratively using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “that he might arrest them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1426	ACT	9	22	r1np	figs-explicit	καὶ συνέχυννεν τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς κατοικοῦντας ἐν Δαμασκῷ, συμβιβάζων ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ Χριστός	1	was stirring up the Jews	Saul was not intentionally stirring up the Jews. They became agitated because they could not find a way to refute Saul’s arguments that Jesus was the Messiah. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “As he proved that Jesus is the Christ, the Jews living in Damascus became agitated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1427	ACT	9	23	cg9k	figs-idiom	ὡς…ἐπληροῦντο ἡμέραι ἱκαναί	1		As in 2:1 and 7:23, this is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after many days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1428	ACT	9	23	nyh4	figs-activepassive	ὡς…ἐπληροῦντο ἡμέραι ἱκαναί	1		Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” but use an active verbal form instead of the passive form here. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1429	ACT	9	23	g74c	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews	This refers to the leaLuke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])ders of the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1430	ACT	9	23	g6gw	writing-pronouns	αὐτόν	1		The pronoun him refers to Saul. Alternate translation: “Saul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1431	ACT	9	24	gnm1	figs-infostructure	ἐγνώσθη δὲ τῷ Σαύλῳ ἡ ἐπιβουλὴ αὐτῶν	1		This could mean: (1) that a person realized there was a plot by recognizing that the Jewish leaders were watching the gates, and that person told Saul. In that case it may be helpful to move this information to the end of the verse, as UST does. (2) that someone told Saul about the plot, but even so, he was not able to flee for his life, because the gates were being watched. In that case you could change the second instance of But in the verse to “However.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1432	ACT	9	24	lv62	figs-activepassive	ἐγνώσθη δὲ τῷ Σαύλῳ ἡ ἐπιβουλὴ αὐτῶν	1	But their plan became known to Saul	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Saul learned about their plot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1433	ACT	9	24	cy9n	figs-explicit	παρετηροῦντο…τὰς πύλας…ὅπως αὐτὸν ἀνέλωσιν	1	indeed they were watching the gates	The city of Damascus had a wall surrounding it. People could normally only enter and exit the city through the gates in this wall. Saul’s enemies expected that he would try to leave the city eventually and they hoped to catch him and kill him when he did. Alternate translation: “they were … watching the gates in the city wall … in order to kill him when he tried to leave the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1434	ACT	9	24	b0gv	figs-metonymy	τὰς πύλας	1		Luke is using the gates figuratively to mean the people going through the gates. Alternate translation: “to see who was going through the gates” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1435	ACT	9	24	aezc	figs-merism	ἡμέρας τε καὶ νυκτὸς	1		Luke is figuratively using the two parts of a full day, day and night, to mean all the time. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (1) Alternate translation: “all the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
1436	ACT	9	25	lc8m	figs-explicit	οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ	1	his disciples	These disciples were people who had believed Saul’s message and become committed followers of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the people who had believed Saul’s message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1437	ACT	9	26	e38m	figs-hyperbole	πάντες ἐφοβοῦντο αὐτόν	1	but they were all afraid of him	Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were afraid of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1438	ACT	9	27	abca	writing-pronouns	Βαρναβᾶς…ἐπιλαβόμενος αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστόλους; καὶ διηγήσατο αὐτοῖς πῶς ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ εἶδεν τὸν Κύριον, καὶ ὅτι ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ…ἐπαρρησιάσατο	1	told them	The pronoun him refers to Saul in every instance. The pronoun he refers to Saul in the first and third instances and to the Lord in the second instance. The pronoun them refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “taking hold of Saul, Barnabas brought him to the apostles and told the apostles how Saul had seen the Lord on the road and that the Lord had spoken to Saul … Saul had spoken boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1439	ACT	9	27	abcb	translate-names	Βαρναβᾶς	1	he had seen	Barnabas is the name of a man. See how you translated it in 4:36. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1440	ACT	9	27	n9f1	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	he had spoken boldly in the name of Jesus	Here the name of Jesus figuratively represents his authority. Saul had spoken boldly with delegated authority, representing Jesus. Alternate translation: “as a representative of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1441	ACT	9	28	cgb1	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1		Luke uses the word translated And to introduce what Saul was able to do after Barnabas reassured the apostles about him. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1442	ACT	9	28	m5rs	writing-pronouns	ἦν μετ’ αὐτῶν	1	he was with them	The pronoun he refers to Saul. The pronoun them refers to the apostles and probably other disciples in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “Saul was with the apostles and other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1443	ACT	9	28	r6ok	figs-idiom	εἰσπορευόμενος καὶ ἐκπορευόμενος	1		This is a Hebrew idiom that refers to freedom of movement. Saul was completely accepted by the believers in Jerusalem and could go anywhere among them. Alternate translation: “moving about freely among them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1444	ACT	9	28	fbb7	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου	1	in the name of the Lord	See how you translated the similar expression in 9:27. Alternate translation: “as a representative of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1445	ACT	9	29	d7lm	translate-names	Ἑλληνιστάς	1	debated with the Hellenists	Hellenists was the name for Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke the Greek language and followed Greek customs. See how you translated this name in 6:1. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
1446	ACT	9	29	lgqe	figs-explicit	οἱ δὲ ἐπεχείρουν ἀνελεῖν αὐτόν	1		The implication is that the Hellenists were not able to refute what Saul was saying about Jesus, and so they saw him as a threat and wanted to get rid of him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and because they could not refute him, they were attempting to kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1447	ACT	9	30	uz9a	figs-metaphor	οἱ ἀδελφοὶ	1	the brothers	Luke is using the term brothers figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “his fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1448	ACT	9	30	j4mt	figs-idiom	κατήγαγον αὐτὸν εἰς Καισάρειαν	1	they brought him down to Caesarea	Luke uses the phrase brought him down because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Caesarea is lower in elevation. Alternate translation: “made sure he got safely to Caesarea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1449	ACT	9	30	aqn6	figs-explicit	ἐξαπέστειλαν αὐτὸν	1	sent him away to Tarsus	Caesarea was a seaport, and the believers probably sent Saul to Tarsus by ship. Alternate translation: “sent him away by ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1450	ACT	9	31	fh2g	figs-abstractnouns	εἶχεν εἰρήνην	1	had peace	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “enjoyed peaceful conditions once more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1451	ACT	9	31	elq7	figs-activepassive	οἰκοδομουμένη καὶ πορευομένη	1	being built up and going on	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could say “God” or “the Holy Spirit.” Alternate translation: “As God built it up and it journeyed” or “As the Holy Spirit built it up and it journeyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1452	ACT	9	31	vx51	figs-metaphor	οἰκοδομουμένη	1		Luke is speaking figuratively of the church as if it were a building that God was constructing. Alternate translation: “growing stronger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1453	ACT	9	31	j8c9	figs-metaphor	πορευομένη τῷ φόβῳ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	walking in the fear of the Lord	Here, journeying figuratively means “living.” Alternate translation: “living in the fear of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1454	ACT	9	31	z59s		πορευομένη τῷ φόβῳ τοῦ Κυρίου	1		Here the word fear describes a deep respect for God. Alternate translation: “living with a deep respect for the Lord”
1455	ACT	9	31	hl24	figs-possession	τῇ παρακλήσει τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1	in the comfort of the Holy Spirit	Luke is using the possessive form to describe the Holy Spirit as the one who was giving the church encouragement. Alternate translation: “with the Holy Spirit encouraging them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1456	ACT	9	32	w68g	writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ	1	Now it happened that	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1457	ACT	9	32	m9sg	figs-hyperbole	διὰ πάντων	1	throughout the whole region	Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many places in the region of Judea, Galilee, and Samaria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1458	ACT	9	32	ad7g	figs-idiom	κατελθεῖν	1	to come down	Luke says to come down because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, where Peter was living, since that city is up on a mountain. Lydda is lower in elevation. Alternate translation: “to travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1459	ACT	9	32	tckc	figs-metonymy	τοὺς ἁγίους τοὺς κατοικοῦντας Λύδδα	1		Luke says to come down because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, where Peter was living, since that city is up on a mountain. Lydda is lower in elevation. Alternate translation: “to travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1460	ACT	9	32	g5c4	translate-names	Λύδδα	1	in Lydda	Lydda is the name of a city in Israel. It is located where the foothills meet the coastal plain. This city was called Lod in the Old Testament and it has that name in modern Israel as well. Decide what name would be most helpful to your readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1461	ACT	9	33	hzd7		εὗρεν…ἐκεῖ ἄνθρωπόν τινα	1	he found there a certain man	The word found does not ean that Peter was intentionally searching for a certain man; he happened to meet him. Alternate translation: “there Peter happened to meet a man”
1462	ACT	9	33	jnc4	writing-participants	ἄνθρωπόν τινα ὀνόματι Αἰνέαν	1	a certain man named Aeneas	Luke uses this sentence to introduce Aeneas as a new character in the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1463	ACT	9	33	owf3	translate-names	Αἰνέαν	1		Aeneas is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1464	ACT	9	33	uj5f	writing-background	ἐξ ἐτῶν ὀκτὼ κατακείμενον ἐπὶ κραβάττου, ὃς ἦν παραλελυμένος	1	lying in a bed … who was paralyzed	In this verse, Luke provides background information about Aeneas to help readers understand what happens next in the story. This information shows how remarkable it was that Jesus could heal a man who had been bedridden for that long. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural and meaningful in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1465	ACT	9	33	k7hw	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐξ ἐτῶν ὀκτὼ κατακείμενον ἐπὶ κραβάττου, ὃς ἦν παραλελυμένος	1	paralyzed	The reason why Aeneas had been lying in a bed for eight years was that he was paralyzed. It may be clearer in your language to describe this result after giving the reason for it. Alternate translation: “who was paralyzed and so had lain in a bed for eight years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1466	ACT	9	34	t13n		ἀνάστηθι	1		Arise in this context is literal, not figurative. It means to get up from a position of lying down, rather than to take action or make preparations.
1467	ACT	9	34	ff2a	figs-rpronouns	ἀνάστηθι, καὶ στρῶσον σεαυτῷ	1	make your bed	Peter says for yourself to emphasize that Jesus has healed Aeneas so completely that he will now be able to do for himself what others previously had to do for him. Alternate translation: “Get up, you can make your own bed now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1468	ACT	9	34	khrm	translate-symaction	στρῶσον σεαυτῷ	1		Getting up and making his own bed was also a symbolic action by which Aeneas demonstrated that Jesus had healed him. Alternate translation: “Arise and make your bed to show everyone that Jesus has healed you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/ translate-symaction]])
1469	ACT	9	35	wykn	writing-pronouns	εἶδαν αὐτὸν πάντες οἱ κατοικοῦντες Λύδδα καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα, οἵτινες ἐπέστρεψαν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον	1		The pronoun him refers to Aeneas. The pronoun who refers to the people of Lydda and Sharon. Alternate translation: “when all the people living in Lydda and Sharon saw him, they turned to the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1470	ACT	9	35	z3fp	figs-hyperbole	πάντες οἱ κατοικοῦντες Λύδδα καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα	1	all who were living in Lydda and in Sharon	Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “those who lived in Lydda and in Sharon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1471	ACT	9	35	qkv4	translate-names	καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα	1	in Lydda and in Sharon	Sharon is the name of a plain, on which Lydda was located. Alternate translation: “and in the surrounding area of Sharon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1472	ACT	9	35	pf23	figs-explicit	εἶδαν αὐτὸν	1	saw him	The implication is that the people knew Aeneas was bedridden and now they saw that he was healed. Alternate translation: “saw that Aeneas was healed” or “saw Aeneas up and walking around” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1473	ACT	9	35	x9yw	figs-metaphor	οἵτινες ἐπέστρεψαν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον	1	and they turned to the Lord	Here, turned to the Lord figuratively means that the people believed in Jesus and started to obey him. Alternate translation: “and they repented of their sins and started obeying Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1474	ACT	9	36	zgq5	writing-newevent	δέ	1	Now there was	Luke uses the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1475	ACT	9	36	gy8u	translate-names	Ἰόππῃ	1	General Information:	Joppa is the name of a city that was about 15 kilometers or about 10 miles from Lydda. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1476	ACT	9	36	gwr4	translate-names	Ταβειθά, ἣ διερμηνευομένη λέγεται, Δορκάς	1	Tabitha, which is translated to say “Dorcas.”	Tabitha was this woman’s name in Aramaic, and Dorcas was her name Greek. (Both names mean “gazelle.” Note how, later in the story, Luke, writing in Greek, calls her Dorcas, while Peter, speaking in Aramaic, calls her Tabitha.) It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Her name in Aramaic was Tabitha, and her name in Greek was Dorcas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1477	ACT	9	36	z8la	figs-activepassive	λέγεται	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “means” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1478	ACT	9	36	q2rn	figs-metaphor	πλήρης ἔργων ἀγαθῶν	1	full of good works	Alternate translatLuke speaks figuratively of Dorcas as if she were a container that was full of good works and almsgivings. Alternate translation: Alternate translation: “doing many good things and giving to others generously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])ion: “doing many good things”
1479	ACT	9	37	mg72	figs-explicit	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις	1	And it happened that in those days	The phrase in those days refers to the time when Peter was nearby in Lydda. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “while Peter was nearby” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1480	ACT	9	37	y8sx	figs-explicit	λούσαντες…αὐτὴν ἔθηκαν	1	having washed her	This was washing to prepare for Dorcas’s body for burial. Customarily her family and friends would have done it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. “Once her family and friends had washed her body to prepare it for burial, they laid it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1481	ACT	9	37	znj4	figs-explicit	ἔθηκαν ἐν ὑπερῴῳ	1	they laid her in an upper room	This was a temporary display of the body during the funeral process. Alternate translation: “they laid her body in an upper room so that people could come there and pay their respects” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1482	ACT	9	37	lbrl	translate-unknown	ὑπερῴῳ	1		In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built above other rooms. If your community does not have houses like that, you can use another expression to describe a large sheltered space that people could use for funeral visitation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1483	ACT	9	38	qlp8	figs-quotations	ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Πέτρος ἐστὶν ἐν αὐτῇ, ἀπέστειλαν	1		It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Peter is in Lydda,’ sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
1484	ACT	9	38	pukn	figs-youdual	παρακαλοῦντες	1		Since two men are speaking, if your language marks participles for number, urging would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise it would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
1485	ACT	9	39	k1se	figs-idiom	ἀναστὰς…Πέτρος συνῆλθεν αὐτοῖς	1	to the upper room	Here the word arising means that Peter took action in order to be able to make the trip with these men, not that he got up from a sitting or lying position. Alternate translation: “Peter quickly prepared and went with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1486	ACT	9	39	tdrr	figs-youdual	αὐτοῖς	1		This first instance of them in the verse would be dual if your language uses that form, since it applies to two men. The second instance of them would be plural, since it refers to the group of widows. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
1487	ACT	9	39	me79	figs-hyperbole	πᾶσαι αἱ χῆραι	1	all the widows	Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “a large crowd of widows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1488	ACT	9	39	piu7	figs-explicit	χιτῶνας καὶ ἱμάτια, ὅσα ἐποίει μετ’ αὐτῶν οὖσα ἡ Δορκάς	1	widows	It may be helpful to say explicitly that Dorcas made these coats and garments to help these widows because they were poor and could not afford clothes. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “coats and garments. When she was alive, Dorcas used to make many of these to help the widows because they were poor and could not afford clothes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1489	ACT	9	39	y6q5	figs-euphemism	μετ’ αὐτῶν οὖσα	1	while being with them	This may be a delicate way of speaking about Dorcas’s death, rather than saying “before she died.” Alternate translation, as in UST: “while she was still alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1490	ACT	9	40	yp2u	translate-symaction	θεὶς τὰ γόνατα	1	put out all of them	Kneeling down was a reverent posture of prayer. Alternate translation: “having knelt down reverently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1491	ACT	9	40	wr7h	figs-imperative	Ταβειθά, ἀνάστηθι	1		This was not a command that Tabitha was capable of obeying. Instead, it was a command that directly caused her to be restored to life. Alternate translation: “I restore you to life, so you can get up now” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative)
1492	ACT	9	40	k28m	translate-symaction	Ταβειθά, ἀνάστηθι	1		Getting up was a symbolic action by which Tabitha could demonstrate that Jesus had restored her to life. Alternate translation: “Get up to show everyone that Jesus has restored you to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/ translate-symaction]])
1493	ACT	9	41	r7n6	figs-explicit	δοὺς…αὐτῇ χεῖρα, ἀνέστησεν αὐτήν	1	having given his hand to her, he raised her up	The implication is that Peter extended his hand to Tabitha to help her stand up. Alternate translation: “he let her hold onto his hand for support as he helped her stand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1494	ACT	9	41	b73s	figs-infostructure	τοὺς ἁγίους καὶ τὰς χήρας	1	the saints and the widows	These saints and widows were probably not two different groups. The widows were likely also believers, but Luke mentions them specifically because Tabitha was so important to them. To show this, it may be helpful to put the information about the widows before the information about the believers. Alternate translation: “the widows and the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1495	ACT	9	41	ex8e	figs-metonymy	τοὺς ἁγίους	1		Luke is using the term saints figuratively by association to mean believers in Jesus. See how you translated the term in 9:33. Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1496	ACT	9	42	nda9	figs-activepassive	γνωστὸν δὲ ἐγένετο καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰόππης	1	And this became known throughout all Joppa	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People throughout all Joppa heard about this matter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1497	ACT	9	43	k9ik	writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ	1	Now it happened that	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1498	ACT	9	43	qar2	translate-unknown	βυρσεῖ	1	Simon, a tanner	A tanner is someone who makes leather from animal skins. If this is not an occupation that your readers would recognize or understand, you could use the name of a similar occupation in your culture that they would recognize. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1499	ACT	10	intro	ym7z			0		Acts 10 General Notes Structure and formatting Verses 1-2 give background information about Cornelius. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence at the start of v. 2. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) In verse 9, the story shifts away from Cornelius and tells how God prepared Peter to preach the gospel to the Gentiles. In verse 24, the story brings Peter and Cornelius together. The long sentence in verses 36-38 can be broken up into several sentences, as in the UST. Special concepts in this chapter Jews visiting with Gentiles The Jews believed that they would become unclean in God’s sight if they visited or ate food with a Gentile. This was because the Pharisees had made a law against this, wanting to keep Jews from eating foods that the law of Moses said were unclean. The law of Moses did say that some foods were unclean, but it did not say that Jewish people could not visit or eat with Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]]) Baptism and the Holy Spirit Those who were listening to Peter received the Holy Spirit even as he was speaking to them. This showed the Jewish believers that Gentiles could believe the word of God and receive the Holy Spirit just as the Jewish believers had. After that, the Gentiles were baptized.
1500	ACT	10	1	wtb9	writing-participants	ἀνὴρ δέ τις	1	Now there was a certain man	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1501	ACT	10	1	h6zu	translate-names	Κορνήλιος	1		Cornelius is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1502	ACT	10	1	x476	translate-unknown	ἑκατοντάρχης	1	named Cornelius, a centurion from the regiment that was called ‘Italian.’	A centurion was an officer in the Roman army who was in charge of a group of 100 soldiers. Such a group was called a “century.” Alternate translation: “an army officer in charge of 100 soldiers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1503	ACT	10	1	abcd		Σπείρης τῆς καλουμένης Ἰταλικῆς	1	the regiment that was called ‘Italian.’	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the regiment people called Italian” or “the regiment whose name was Italian” or “the Italian Regiment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1504	ACT	10	1	h2a4	translate-unknown	Σπείρης	1		A regiment was a military unit consisting of six centuries or 600 soldiers. You may have a term in your languge that you can use for a unit of about this size. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1505	ACT	10	1	e88y	translate-names	Ἰταλικῆς	1		Italian is the name of a military unit. The name indicates that although the soldiers in it were stationed in Syria, they came from Italy and thus were native Romans. This made them more reliable protection for the high-ranking Roman officials whose residence was in Caesarea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1506	ACT	10	2	s6rh	figs-doublet	εὐσεβὴς καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν	1	devout and fearing God	The word devout and the phrase fearing God mean similar things. (In this context, the word fearing has the sense of deep respect and awe.) Luke may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “sincerely devoted to God” or see next nore for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1507	ACT	10	2	rz4h	figs-explicit	εὐσεβὴς καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν	1		Jews in the time of the New Testament used the expression fearing God to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel, attended the synagogue, prayed at regular times, and supported the needs of the Jewish community. Luke may be using the expression in this way and assuming that his readers will recognize it. Alternate translation: “a Gentile who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1508	ACT	10	2	abce	figs-explicit	τῷ λαῷ	1	to the people	Luke assumes that his readers will know that the people refers to Jewish people who were in need. Alternate translation: “to Jewish people in need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1509	ACT	10	2	imrx	figs-ellipsis	διὰ παντός	1		The phrase through all is an ellipsis for “through all times.” See how you translated it in 2:25. Alternate translation: “always” or “at all times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1510	ACT	10	2	w2kx	figs-hyperbole	δεόμενος τοῦ Θεοῦ διὰ παντός	1	praying to God through all	The phrase through all, meaning “at all times,” is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “often” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1511	ACT	10	3	up3j	figs-explicit	ὥραν ἐνάτην	1	the ninth hour	This was the normal afternoon prayer time for Jews. Cornelius, as a Gentile who worshiped the God of Israel, would have praying at this time. Alternate translation: “during his afternoon prayer time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1512	ACT	10	3	ttsl	figs-idiom	ὥραν ἐνάτην	1		In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1513	ACT	10	3	z5ty	translate-ordinal	ὥραν ἐνάτην	1		If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “around hour nine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
1514	ACT	10	4	abcf	writing-pronouns	ὁ δὲ, ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ	1	But he stared at him	The pronoun he stands for Cornelius, and the pronoun him stands for the angel. Alternate translation: “But Cornelius, staring at the angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1515	ACT	10	4	bd2h		τί ἐστιν, κύριε	1		Cornelius uses the respectful title lord because he recognizes that he is speaking to a messenger from God. See how you translated the similar term in 9:5.
1516	ACT	10	4	abcg	writing-pronouns	εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ	1	And he said to him	The pronoun he stands for the angel, and the pronoun him stands for Cornelius. Alternate translation: “And the angel said to Cornelius” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1517	ACT	10	4	p5ml	figs-metaphor	αἱ προσευχαί σου, καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου, ἀνέβησαν εἰς μνημόσυνον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Your prayers and your alms have gone up for a memorial offering before God	A memorial offering was the portion of an offering brought to the priests for their support that was burned on the altar as a pleasing aroma for God, to give God an occasion to remember the worshiper. The angel is using this offering figuratively to tell Cornelius that God is aware of his devotion and generosity and that God is pleased with those things. You could translate this metaphor as a simile, or you could explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “Your prayers and your alms have gone up like a memorial offering before God” or “God is aware of your prayers and your alms, and he is pleased with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1518	ACT	10	4	xpa1	figs-idiom	ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here, before means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “into the presence of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1519	ACT	10	5	h33i	figs-activepassive	ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people call Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1520	ACT	10	6	hou9	figs-activepassive	ξενίζεται παρά	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “is the guest of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1521	ACT	10	6	bw0q	translate-unknown	βυρσεῖ	1		See how you translated the term tanner in 9:43.
1522	ACT	10	7	g6lq		ὡς δὲ ἀπῆλθεν ὁ ἄγγελος ὁ λαλῶν αὐτῷ	1	And when the angel who spoke to him had left	Alternate translation: “And when Cornelius’ vision of the angel had ended”
1523	ACT	10	7	yg7g		εὐσεβῆ	1	devout	The adjective devout describes a person who worships God and serves him. Alternate translation: “sincerely religious”
1524	ACT	10	8	pcg2	figs-hyperbole	ἅπαντα	1	having told them everything	By everything, Luke means the details of the vision that Cornelius had. Alternate translation: “how an angel had spoken to him in a vision and what the angel had said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1525	ACT	10	9	ey9n	writing-pronouns	ὁδοιπορούντων ἐκείνων	1		The demonstrative pronoun those refers to Cornelius’ two servants and the soldier under Cornelius’ command. Alternate translation: “as the men whom Cornelius had sent were traveling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1526	ACT	10	9	tu7n	translate-unknown	περὶ ὥραν ἕκτην	1	at about the sixth hour	In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “at around noon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1527	ACT	10	9	r6l8	translate-ordinal	περὶ ὥραν ἕκτην	1	went up to the housetop	If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “at around hour six” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
1528	ACT	10	10	im7x	figs-personification	ἐγένετο ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἔκστασις	1	a vision came upon him	Luke speaks figuratively of this vision as if it were a living thing that could come onto someone. Alternate translation: “he had a vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1529	ACT	10	11	n4hi		θεωρεῖ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνεῳγμένον	1	he sees the sky having been opened	To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “And he saw” or “And Peter saw”
1530	ACT	10	11	u9u4	figs-activepassive	τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνεῳγμένον	1	like a large sheet … by four corners	If your language does not use the passive form opened, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the sky break open” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1531	ACT	10	11	jh1m	figs-activepassive	καθιέμενον	1	being let down by four corners	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It appeared as if someone was letting it down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1532	ACT	10	12	fdt3	figs-hyperbole	πάντα τὰ	1		The word all is likely a generalization for emphasis, although since this was a vision, it is possible that the container Peter saw did contain every kind of these creatures. Alternate translation: “various” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1533	ACT	10	12	ua3j	figs-explicit	καὶ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	all the four-footed animals and creeping things on the earth, and birds of the sky	From Peter’s response in the next verse, the implication is that the law of Moses commanded the Jews not to eat some of the creatures in the container. Alternate translation: “and birds of the sky, including some that the law of Moses commanded Jews not to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1534	ACT	10	13	a2z4	figs-personification	ἐγένετο φωνὴ πρὸς αὐτόν	1	a voice came to him	Luke speaks figuratively of this voice as if it were a living thing that could come to someone. Alternate translation: “he heard a voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1535	ACT	10	13	zmeg	figs-idiom	ἀναστάς	1		Here the term arising means that the voice wanted Peter to take action, not that the voice wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “Go ahead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1536	ACT	10	14	z7r5	figs-exclamations	μηδαμῶς	1	Not at all	Not at all is an exclamation that communicates a strong refusal to do or even to consider something. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “No, never” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1537	ACT	10	14	p0bf	figs-doublet	κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον	1		The words defiled and unclean mean similar things. Luke may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “that our Jewish laws forbid us to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1538	ACT	10	14	a2jj	figs-explicit	οὐδέποτε ἔφαγον πᾶν κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον	1	I have never eaten anything defiled and unclean	The implication is that some the animals in the container were forbidden for Jews to eat. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “defiled and unclean, like some of those animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1539	ACT	10	15	xs5s	figs-123person	ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν	1	What God has cleansed	If God is the speaker, he is referring to himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “What I, God, have cleansed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1540	ACT	10	15	as42	figs-personification	φωνὴ πάλιν…πρὸς αὐτόν	1		The implied verb here is came, and so Luke is speaking once again of this voice figuratively as if it were a living thing that could come to someone. Alternate translation: “he heard the voice speaking to him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1541	ACT	10	16	rlr9	figs-explicit	τοῦτο…ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς	1	this happened three times	This could mean: (1) that the voice told Peter three times to kill and eat, Peter refused three times, and each time the voice told him not to call unclean what God had cleansed. Alternate translation: “Peter had this exchange with the voice three times” (2) that after Peter first refused, the voice said to him three times, “What God has cleansed, you must not make common.” Alternate translation: “the voice said this three times” You may find it simplest to say “this happened three times,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1542	ACT	10	16	ej9h	figs-activepassive	ἀνελήμφθη τὸ σκεῦος	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it appeared as if someone was pulling the container back up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1543	ACT	10	17	d4zi		ἐν ἑαυτῷ διηπόρει ὁ Πέτρος, τί ἂν εἴη τὸ ὅραμα ὃ εἶδεν	1	Peter was very confused … about	Alternate translation: “Peter was wondering how God could have given him a vision like that”
1544	ACT	10	17	n6da	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, οἱ ἄνδρες	1	behold	Luke is using the term behold to focus readers’ attention on how suddenly these men appeared. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then the men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1545	ACT	10	17	cg9a	figs-activepassive	οἱ ἀπεσταλμένοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κορνηλίου	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom Cornelius had sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1546	ACT	10	17	e62m	figs-explicit	ἐπέστησαν ἐπὶ τὸν πυλῶνα	1	stood before the gate	The implication is that the house of Simon the tanner had a wall around it and that there was a gate in the wall that people could use to enter the property. Alternate translation: “stood before the gate to the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1547	ACT	10	18	qe9d	figs-activepassive	ὁ ἐπικαλούμενος Πέτρος	1	they called out	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people called Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1548	ACT	10	18	r91o	figs-activepassive	ξενίζεται	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “was a guest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1549	ACT	10	19	iqx5	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, ἄνδρες τρεῖς	1	Behold	The Spirit is using the term behold to focus Peter’s attention on what he is about to say. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “Pay attention, this is important: Three men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1550	ACT	10	19	va39	translate-textvariants	ἄνδρες τρεῖς	1	three men are looking for you	Cornelius sent two of his servants and one soldier. As the General Introduction to Acts explains, some ancient texts say “two men” or “some men.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the readings of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1551	ACT	10	20	ndju	figs-idiom	ἀναστὰς	1		Here the term arising means that the voice wanted Peter to take action, not that the voice wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “Go ahead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1552	ACT	10	20	ym1x	figs-explicit	κατάβηθι	1	go down	The implication is that Peter is to go down from the roof of the house and greet the men. Alternate translation: “go down from the roof of the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1553	ACT	10	20	wx4n	figs-explicit	πορεύου σὺν αὐτοῖς	1	go with them. Do not hesitate	It would be natural for Peter not to want to go with the men, because they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “go with them, even though they are Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1554	ACT	10	22	rva1	figs-quotesinquotes	οἱ…εἶπαν, Κορνήλιος, ἑκατοντάρχης ἀνὴρ δίκαιος, καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν, μαρτυρούμενός τε ὑπὸ ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ἐχρηματίσθη ὑπὸ ἀγγέλου ἁγίου, μεταπέμψασθαί σε εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκοῦσαι ῥήματα παρὰ σοῦ.	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “they told Peter that Cornelius, a centurion, a man righteous and fearing God and attested by the whole nation of the Jews, was directed by a holy angel to summon him to his house and to hear words from him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1555	ACT	10	22	i4zh	writing-pronouns	οἱ…εἶπαν	1		The pronoun they refers to the two servants and the soldier whom Cornelius sent. Alternate translation: “The messengers from Cornelius replied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1556	ACT	10	22	ue5z	figs-synecdoche	οἱ…εἶπαν	1		One of the messengers probably spoke these words on behalf of all three of them. Alternate translation: “one of them said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1557	ACT	10	22	wvl1	figs-doublet	φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν	1	fearing God	The word righteous and the phrase fearing God mean similar things. (In this context, the word fearing has the sense of deep respect and awe.) Luke may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “a man sincerely devoted to God” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1558	ACT	10	22	hrta	figs-explicit	ἀνὴρ δίκαιος, καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν	1		Jews in the time of the New Testament used the expression fearing God to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel. Luke may be using the expression in this way. See how you translated it in 10:2. Alternate translation: “a Gentile who sincerely worships the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1559	ACT	10	22	hihl	figs-activepassive	μαρτυρούμενός τε ὑπὸ ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ἐχρηματίσθη ὑπὸ ἀγγέλου ἁγίου	1		If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “about whom the whole nation of the Jews testifies, received instructions from a holy angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1560	ACT	10	22	gv91	figs-hyperbole	ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	the whole nation of the Jews	Luke says whole as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1561	ACT	10	22	e15o	figs-metonymy	ῥήματα	1		The messengers are using the term words figuratively to mean what Peter would say to Cornelius by using words. Alternate translation: “a message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1562	ACT	10	23	shs5	figs-explicit	εἰσκαλεσάμενος οὖν αὐτοὺς ἐξένισεν	1	he hosted them	The implication is that the journey to Caesarea was too long for them to begin that afternoon. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But since the journey to Caesarea was too long for them to make that day, Peter invited the men into Simon’s house and hosted them there overnight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1563	ACT	10	23	ycoi	figs-idiom	ἀναστὰς	1		Here the word arising means that Peter took action to prepare, not that he stood up from a seated or lying position. Alternate translation: “after packing for a journey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1564	ACT	10	23	t7cz	figs-metaphor	τινες τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	some of the brothers who were from Joppa	Luke is using the term brothers figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “some fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1565	ACT	10	24	c3s6		τῇ…ἐπαύριον	1	the following day	The next day means the day after they left Joppa. The journey to Caesarea took longer than one day. Alternate translation: “on the following day”
1566	ACT	10	25	wxt8		ὡς…ἐγένετο τοῦ εἰσελθεῖν τὸν Πέτρον	1	as Peter entered	ὡς…ἐγένετο τοῦ εἰσελθεῖν τὸν Πέτρον
1567	ACT	10	25	b4pn	translate-symaction	πεσὼν ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας	1	and falling down at his feet	He knelt down at Peter’s feet as a gesture to honor him. Alternate translation: “kneeling down and putting his face close to Peter’s feet to honor him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1568	ACT	10	26	s7n5	figs-declarative	ἀνάστηθι, καὶ ἐγὼ αὐτὸς ἄνθρωπός εἰμι	1	Get up! I too am a man myself	Peter is using the statement form to give a mild rebuke or correction to Cornelius. It may be clearer for your readers if you translate this as an imperative. Alternate translation: “Stop doing that! I am only a man, as you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
1569	ACT	10	27	f9x6	writing-pronouns	συνομιλῶν αὐτῷ, εἰσῆλθεν	1		The pronoun him refers to Cornelius, and the pronoun he refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “talking with Cornelius, Peter went in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1570	ACT	10	27	kdva	writing-pronouns	εὑρίσκει	1		To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “found”
1571	ACT	10	27	twp9	figs-activepassive	συνεληλυθότας πολλούς	1	many people gathered together	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “many people whom Cornelius had gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1572	ACT	10	28	iyx6	figs-explicit	ὡς ἀθέμιτόν ἐστιν ἀνδρὶ Ἰουδαίῳ	1	how unlawful it is for a Jewish man	This phrase refers to the requirements of the Jewish religious law. Alternate translation: “that the Jewish law forbids a Jewish man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1573	ACT	10	28	k3we	figs-explicit	ἀλλοφύλῳ	1	a foreigner	Here, the term foreigner refers to people who are not Jews. It is not a reference to where they live. Alternate translation: “a Gentile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1574	ACT	10	28	ztt0	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπον	1		Although the term man is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1575	ACT	10	28	tl2h	figs-doublet	κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον	1		The words common and unclean mean similar things. Peter may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “unacceptable to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1576	ACT	10	29	x0p4	figs-activepassive	μεταπεμφθείς	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when you summoned me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1577	ACT	10	29	x0v3	figs-you	μετεπέμψασθέ	1		The word you is plural. Peter is speaking to everyone who has gathered in the home of Cornelius. Use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1578	ACT	10	30	mqv8	translate-textvariants	ἀπὸ τετάρτης ἡμέρας μέχρι ταύτης τῆς ὥρας, ἤμην τὴν ἐνάτην προσευχόμενος ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ μου	1	praying	Some ancient texts say, “From the fourth day until this hour, I was fasting, and at the ninth hour I was praying in my house.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1579	ACT	10	30	na4u	figs-idiom	ἀπὸ τετάρτης ἡμέρας	1	Four days ago	In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” yesterday was the “second day,” the day before yesterday was the “third day,” and the day before that was the “fourth day” or Four days ago. You may wish to express this in your translation in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation, as in UST: “Three days ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1580	ACT	10	30	pkhh	figs-idiom	ταύτης τῆς ὥρας	1		Cornelius is using the term hour figuratively to mean a particular time. Alternate translation: “this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1581	ACT	10	30	x4m7	figs-nominaladj	τὴν ἐνάτην	1		Cornelius is using the adjective ninth as a noun. ULT adds hour to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. See how you translated this expression in 10:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1582	ACT	10	30	u1es	figs-idiom	τὴν ἐνάτην	1		In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. See how you translated this expression in 10:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1583	ACT	10	30	p73u	translate-ordinal	τὴν ἐνάτην	1		If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour nine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
1584	ACT	10	30	yy6e	figs-explicit	τὴν ἐνάτην	1	at the ninth hour	This was the normal afternoon prayer time for Jews. Cornelius, as a Gentile who worshiped the God of Israel, would have praying at this time. Alternate translation: “during my usual afternoon prayer time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1585	ACT	10	30	oicx	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, ἀνὴρ	1		Cornelius is using the term behold to focus Peter’s attention on how suddenly this man appeared. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then a man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1586	ACT	10	30	g485	figs-explicit	ἀνὴρ	1		Luke says in 10:3 that Cornelius saw an angel. Cornelius calls him a man here because the angel appeared to him in human form. You could say that explicitly in your translation if your readers might be confused otherwise. Alternate translation: “an angel in human form” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1587	ACT	10	31	twnu	figs-quotesinquotes	φησί, Κορνήλιε, εἰσηκούσθη σου ἡ προσευχὴ καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “he told me that my prayer had been heard and that my alms had been remembered before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])Q
1588	ACT	10	31	uep3		φησί	1		To call attention to a development in the story, here Cornelius uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said”
1589	ACT	10	31	heh3	figs-activepassive	εἰσηκούσθη σου ἡ προσευχὴ καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	your prayer has been heard	If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has heard your prayer and has remembered your alms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1590	ACT	10	31	s6nz	figs-idiom	ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	have been remembered before God	The word remembered does not imply that God had forgotten about these alms. Rather, it means that God is aware of Cornelius’s devotion and generosity and is pleased with them. See how you translated the similar expression in 10:4. Alternate translation: “God is aware of your alms and is pleased with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1591	ACT	10	31	xd0x	figs-idiom	ἐνώπιον	1		Here the word before is being used idiomatically. Alternate translation: “in the presence of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1592	ACT	10	32	jjnn	figs-quotesinquotes	πέμψον οὖν εἰς Ἰόππην καὶ μετακάλεσαι Σίμωνα, ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος; οὗτος ξενίζεται ἐν οἰκίᾳ Σίμωνος, βυρσέως παρὰ θάλασσαν	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “He said I should therefore send to Joppa and summon Simon who is called Peter, who was being hosted in the house of Simon, a tanner, by the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1593	ACT	10	32	ci31	figs-activepassive	ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος	1	summon Simon who is called Peter	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people call Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1594	ACT	10	32	u1t6	figs-activepassive	οὗτος ξενίζεται	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “He is a guest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1595	ACT	10	32	jhzt	translate-textvariants	μετακάλεσαι Σίμωνα…παρὰ θάλασσαν	1		Some ancient manuscripts add at the end of this verse, “When he comes, he will speak to you.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1596	ACT	10	33	p5ee	figs-yousingular	σέ…σύ…σοι	1	immediately	The word you is singular in each of these instances. Even though Peter came with other believers, Cornelius is addressing Peter directly. So use the singular form of “you” in your translation if your language makes that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1597	ACT	10	33	ruf3	writing-politeness	σύ τε καλῶς ἐποίησας παραγενόμενος	1	and you did well in coming	This expression is a polite way of thanking Peter for coming. Alternate translation: “and we are grateful to you for coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
1598	ACT	10	33	lzie	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1		Corneluis is using the word we to refer to himself and to his guests, but not to Peter and the believers who came with him, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1599	ACT	10	33	ry21	figs-idiom	ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	before God	Cornelius is using the word before idiomatically. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1600	ACT	10	33	xt4x	figs-activepassive	τὰ προστεταγμένα σοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	that you have been instructed by the Lord	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that the Lord has told you to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1601	ACT	10	33	jc88	translate-textvariants	τὰ προστεταγμένα σοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου	1		Instead of instructed by the Lord, some ancient manuscripts read “instructed by God to say.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1602	ACT	10	34	cyn8	figs-explicitinfo	ἀνοίξας…Πέτρος τὸ στόμα εἶπεν	1	And Peter opened his mouth and said	It might seem that the expression opening his mouth … said contains redundant information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “Peter replied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
1603	ACT	10	34	iii7		προσωπολήμπτης	1	God is not one who shows partiality	Alternate translation: “one who shows favoritism”
1604	ACT	10	34	ha31	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔστιν προσωπολήμπτης ὁ Θεός	1	In truth	As the next verse shows, Peter means implicitly that God does not favor Jewish people above people of other nations. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God does not favor Jewish people above people of other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1605	ACT	10	35	b5cr		ὁ φοβούμενος αὐτὸν καὶ ἐργαζόμενος δικαιοσύνην	1	fears	Here, fearing has the sense of deep respect and awe. Alternate translation: “anyone who sincerely worships him and works righteousness”
1606	ACT	10	35	j78e	figs-abstractnouns	ὁ φοβούμενος αὐτὸν καὶ ἐργαζόμενος δικαιοσύνην	1	the one who fears him and works righteous deeds is acceptable to him	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “anyone who worships him and does righteous deeds” or “anyone who worships him and does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1607	ACT	10	36	aac8	figs-explicit	τὸν λόγον	1		Here Peter is implicitly saying to Cornelius and his guests that they know about this word; he says that explicitly in the next verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say “You know the word” in this verse as well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1608	ACT	10	36	ht1z	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1		Peter is using the term word figuratively to mean what God said to the Israelites by using words. Alternate translation: “The message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1609	ACT	10	36	anlh	figs-metaphor	τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραὴλ	1		Peter is using the word sons figuratively to mean “descendants.” He is speaking of the Israelites, who were descendants of the patriarch Jacob, also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1610	ACT	10	36	ok9b	figs-abstractnouns	εὐαγγελιζόμενος εἰρήνην διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “proclaiming that Jesus Christ reconciles us to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1611	ACT	10	36	md1l		πάντων	1	he is Lord of all	The word all could mean: (1) all people groups, both Jewish and non-Jewish. Alternate translation: “of all people, whether or not they are Jews” (2) all created things. Alternate translation: “of everything in God’s creation”
1612	ACT	10	37	wecw	figs-metonymy	ὑμεῖς οἴδατε τὸ…ῥῆμα	1		Peter is using the term word figuratively to mean the things that happened through the life and ministry of Jesus. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You know the things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1613	ACT	10	37	ch65	figs-hyperbole	καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας	1	throughout all Judea	Peter says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “in many places in Judea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1614	ACT	10	37	sq2i		μετὰ τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐκήρυξεν Ἰωάννης	1	after the baptism that John proclaimed	Alternate translation: “after John preached to the people that they should repent and he then baptized them”
1615	ACT	10	38	seli	figs-infostructure	Ἰησοῦν τὸν ἀπὸ Ναζαρέθ, ὡς ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς	1		It may be helpful to put the information about God anointing before the information that it was Jesus whom God anointed. Alternate translation: “how God anointed Jesus, the one from Nazareth,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1616	ACT	10	38	p2qi	figs-explicit	Ἰησοῦν τὸν ἀπὸ Ναζαρέθ, ὡς ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς	1		Peter is once again saying implicitly that Cornelius and his guests know about the things he is describing. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You know how God anointed Jesus, the one from Nazareth,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1617	ACT	10	38	ku82	figs-metaphor	ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ καὶ δυνάμει	1	God anointed him with the Holy Spirit and with power	Peter speaks figuratively of the Holy Spirit and of God’s power as if they could be poured over someone like oil. Alternate translation: “God enabled him to do powerful works through the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1618	ACT	10	38	vuwo	figs-abstractnouns	εὐεργετῶν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of good, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “doing good things” or “helping people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1619	ACT	10	38	y5ya	figs-hyperbole	πάντας τοὺς καταδυναστευομένους ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβόλου	1	all who were oppressed by the devil	Peter says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “those who were oppressed by the devil” or “many people who were oppressed by the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1620	ACT	10	38	tj3u	figs-idiom	ὁ Θεὸς ἦν μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1	God was with him	The expression was with him is an idiom. See how you translated it in 7:9. Alternate translation: “God was helping him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1621	ACT	10	39	kal7	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς μάρτυρες	1		Here, we refers to Peter and the apostles and believers who were with Jesus when he was on earth, not to Cornelius and his guests. So use the exclusive form of “we” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1622	ACT	10	39	sx3a	writing-pronouns	ὃν καὶ ἀνεῖλαν	1	in the country of the Jews	The pronoun whom refers to Jesus, and the pronoun they refers to the enemies of Jesus, the Jewish leaders who consipired against him and the Romans who ordered and carried out his execution. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Also, the enemies of Jesus killed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1623	ACT	10	39	z4dt	figs-metonymy	κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου	1	by hanging him on a tree	This expression refers to crucifixion. Peter says tree figuratively to mean a wooden cross. Alternate translation: “crucifying him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1624	ACT	10	40	zxuk	writing-pronouns	τοῦτον	1		The demonstrative pronoun this refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1625	ACT	10	40	cxj5	figs-idiom	τοῦτον ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν	1	but God raised up this one	Here, raised … up is an idiom that refers to causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “God caused Jesus to become alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1626	ACT	10	40	w8kv	figs-idiom	τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ	1	on the third day	In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” tomorrow was the “second day,” and the day after tomorrow was the “third day.” You may wish to express this in your translation in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “two days after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1627	ACT	10	40	iz8l	figs-activepassive	ἔδωκεν αὐτὸν ἐμφανῆ γενέσθαι	1	caused him to be seen	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “permitted many people to see him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1628	ACT	10	41	nm81	figs-activepassive	οὐ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ, ἀλλὰ μάρτυσι τοῖς προκεχειροτονημένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡμῖν, οἵτινες συνεφάγομεν καὶ συνεπίομεν αὐτῷ μετὰ τὸ ἀναστῆναι αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1		If you used an active form instead of “caused him to be seen” in the previous verse, you can adjust the language here to fit. It may be helpful to make this two new sentences. Alternate translation: “All the people did not see him, but witnesses chosen beforehand by God saw him. We who ate and drank with him after he rose from the dead saw him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1629	ACT	10	41	jq89	figs-explicit	παντὶ τῷ λαῷ	1		By the people, Peter means the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “by all the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1630	ACT	10	41	zpyj	figs-activepassive	τοῖς προκεχειροτονημένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom God chose beforehand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1631	ACT	10	41	xlbl	figs-synecdoche	οἵτινες συνεφάγομεν καὶ συνεπίομεν αὐτῷ	1		Peter is figuratively using one activity that he and the other apostles did with Jesus after he rose from the dead, eating and drinking (that is, sharing meals), to mean spending time with him personally. Alternate translation: “who spend time with him personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1632	ACT	10	41	q7d1	figs-nominaladj	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	from the dead	Peter is using the adjective dead as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1633	ACT	10	42	ik96	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1		Here, us refers to Peter and the other apostles whom Jesus chose, not to Cornelius and his guests. So use the exclusive form of “us” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1634	ACT	10	42	zne5	figs-explicit	τῷ λαῷ	1	Connecting Statement:	By the people, Peter means the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “to the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1635	ACT	10	42	c1ak	figs-activepassive	ὁ ὡρισμένος ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	that he is the one who has been chosen by God	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom God has chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1636	ACT	10	42	ws4t	figs-nominaladj	ζώντων καὶ νεκρῶν	1	of the living and the dead	Peter is using the adjective dead as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of those who are alive and of those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1637	ACT	10	43	ub5d	writing-pronouns	τούτῳ	1	To this one, all the prophets bear witness that	The demonstrative pronoun this refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “To Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1638	ACT	10	43	y6d1	figs-metonymy	διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ	1	through his name	Peter is speaking figuratively of the name of Jesus. It could mean: (1) his actions. Alternate translation: “through what Jesus has done for them” (2) his authority. Alternate translation: “by his authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1639	ACT	10	44	cz7x	figs-metaphor	ἐπέπεσε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας τὸν λόγον	1	the Holy Spirit fell	Luke is speaking figuratively of the Holy Spirit as if it could fall on Cornelius and his guests. See how you translated the similar expression in 8:16. Alternate translation: “all the ones listening to his word received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])Q
1640	ACT	10	44	wf7u	figs-hyperbole	πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας	1	all of those who were listening	While the believers who came with Peter from Joppa were also listening to his message, the word all refers to the Gentiles who were present. Alternate translation: “Cornelius and his guests, who were listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1641	ACT	10	44	o839	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1		Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean what Peter was saying by using words. Alternate translation: “his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1642	ACT	10	45	j6wt	figs-nominaladj	οἱ…πιστοὶ	1	the gift of the Holy Spirit	Luke is using the adjective faithful as a noun, to mean people who have faith in Jesus. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the faithful men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1643	ACT	10	45	qlpu	figs-metonymy	ἐκ περιτομῆς	1		Luke is using the term circumcision figuratively by association to identify these faithful people as Jewish. Alternate translation: “who were Jewish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1644	ACT	10	45	g161	figs-activepassive	ἡ δωρεὰ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος ἐκκέχυται	1	the gift of the Holy Spirit was poured out	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God was pouring out the gift of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1645	ACT	10	45	mqs8	figs-metaphor	ἐκκέχυται	1	was poured out	Luke is speaking figuratively of the Holy Spirit as if he were a liquid that could be poured on people. This image implies a generous amount. Alternate translation: “was generously given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1646	ACT	10	45	hfs9	figs-possession	ἡ δωρεὰ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1		Luke is using a possessive form to identify the Holy Spirit as a gift from God. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit as a gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1647	ACT	10	45	f33n	figs-explicit	καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ ἔθνη	1	also on the Gentiles	Here, also refers to the fact that the Holy Spirit had already been given to the Jewish believers. Alternate translation: “on the Gentiles, as it had been on Jewish believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1648	ACT	10	45	rt18	translate-names	τὰ ἔθνη	1		Gentiles is a name for people who are not Jewish. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1649	ACT	10	46	p6pa	figs-explicit	λαλούντων γλώσσαις	1	speaking with tongues and praising God	The implication is that at least some of these languages were ones that the Jews recognized and could understand, but which Cornelius and his guests had not learned. This caused the Jews to acknowledge that the Holy Spirit was giving them the ability to speak these languages. Alternate translation: “speaking in languages they had not learned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1650	ACT	10	47	zktm	figs-doublenegatives	μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς	1		The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding is he. Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Is anyone able to withhold water so that these are not baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1651	ACT	10	47	u5d5	figs-rquestion	μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς?	1	No one is able to withhold water, is he, that these are not baptized, who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did?	Peter is using the question form to convince the Jewish Christians that the Gentile believers should be baptized. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “No one should withhold water so that these are not baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1652	ACT	10	47	vuax	figs-doublenegatives	μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς?	1		Even if the negative question is turned into a positive statement, a double negative still remains, the negative verb withhold and the negative particle not. This double negative can also be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “We should make water available so that these can be baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1653	ACT	10	47	df24	figs-synecdoche	τὸ ὕδωρ	1		Peter is figuratively using water, one thing necessary for baptism, to signify all the means and permission necessary for baptism. Alternate translation: “the means and permission” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1654	ACT	10	47	kwv5	figs-activepassive	τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that these do not receive baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1655	ACT	10	48	z4fh	figs-activepassive	προσέταξεν…αὐτοὺς…βαπτισθῆναι	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he commanded them to receive baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1656	ACT	10	48	ax6x	figs-idiom	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ βαπτισθῆναι	1	be baptized in the name of Jesus Christ	Here, in the name is an idiomatic way of saying “on the basis of naming.” Peter commanded Cornelius and his guests to acknowledge Jesus as the Messiah as the basis of their baptism for the forgiveness of their sins, as described in 10:43. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:48. Alternate translation: “on the basis of naming Jesus as the Christ” or “upon acknowledging that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1657	ACT	11	intro	hva5			0		Acts 11 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter “The Gentiles also had received the word of God” Almost all of the first believers were Jewish. Luke writes in this chapter that many Gentiles started to believe in Jesus. They believed that the message about Jesus was true and so began to “receive the word of God.” Some of the believers in Jerusalem did not believe that Gentiles could truly follow Jesus, so Peter went to them and told them what had happened to him and how he had seen the Gentiles receive the Word of God and receive the Holy Spirit.
1658	ACT	11	1	uw5m		δὲ	1		Now signals the beginning of a new event in the story.
1659	ACT	11	1	ab75	writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Now	This marks a new part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1660	ACT	11	1	f1md		οἱ…ἀδελφοὶ	2	the brothers	The phrase the brothers here refers to the believers in Judea.
1661	ACT	11	1	q8wl		οἱ ὄντες κατὰ τὴν Ἰουδαίαν	1	who were throughout Judea	Alternate translation: “who were throughout the province of Judea”
1662	ACT	11	1	w3rx	figs-metonymy	ἐδέξαντο τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	had received the word of God	This expression refers to the fact that the Gentiles believed the gospel message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “had believed the message of God about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1663	ACT	11	2	j7f7			0	Connecting Statement:	Peter arrives in Jerusalem and begins talking to the Jews there.
1664	ACT	11	2	kb4m		ἀνέβη…εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	came up to Jerusalem	Jerusalem was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for Israelites to speak of coming up to Jerusalem and going down from it.
1665	ACT	11	2	yar6	figs-metonymy	οἱ ἐκ περιτομῆς	1	those from the circumcision	This is a reference to some of the Jews who believed that every believer must be circumcised. Alternate translation: “some Jewish believers in Jerusalem who wanted all followers of Christ to be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1666	ACT	11	3	ah7v	figs-metonymy	ἄνδρας, ἀκροβυστίαν ἔχοντας	1	uncircumcised men	The phrase uncircumcised men refers to Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1667	ACT	11	3	t9e1		συνέφαγεν αὐτοῖς	1	ate with them	It was against Jewish tradition for Jews to eat with Gentiles.
1668	ACT	11	4	lrh6			0	Connecting Statement:	Peter responds to the Jews by telling them about his vision and about what had happened at Cornelius’ house.
1669	ACT	11	4	bfp5		ἀρξάμενος…Πέτρος ἐξετίθετο	1	Peter began to explain	Peter did not criticize the Jewish believers but reacted in a friendly explanatory manner.
1670	ACT	11	4	nuy6		καθεξῆς	1	in an orderly manner	Alternate translation: “exactly what happened”
1671	ACT	11	5	j37p		ὡς ὀθόνην μεγάλην	1	like a large sheet	The container holding the animals had the appearance of a large square piece of cloth. See how you translated this in Acts 10:11.
1672	ACT	11	5	axu6		τέσσαρσιν ἀρχαῖς	1	by its four corners	See how you translated this in Acts 10:11. Alternate translation: “suspended by its four corners”
1673	ACT	11	6	lbh4	figs-explicit	τὰ τετράποδα τῆς γῆς, καὶ τὰ θηρία, καὶ τὰ ἑρπετὰ, καὶ τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	the four-legged animals of the earth, and the wild beasts, and the creeping animals, and the birds of the sky	From Peter’s response, it can be implied that the law of Moses commanded the Jews not to eat some of them. See how you translated a similar phrase in Acts 10:12. Alternate translation: “many kinds of animals and reptiles and birds that the Mosaic laws forbade Jews to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1674	ACT	11	6	ew64		θηρία	1	wild beasts	Here, wild beasts probably refer to the animals people do not or can not tame or control.
1675	ACT	11	6	t36i		ἑρπετὰ	1	creeping animals	These are reptiles.
1676	ACT	11	7	i5ic	figs-synecdoche	ἤκουσα…καὶ φωνῆς	1	I heard … a voice	The person speaking is not specified. The voice was probably God, although it could possibly have been an angel from God. See how you translated a voice in Acts 10:13. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1677	ACT	11	8	m4mu		μηδαμῶς	1	By no means	See how you translated this in Acts 10:14. Alternate translation: “I will not do that”
1678	ACT	11	8	m5p5	figs-explicit	κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου	1	the profane or unclean has never entered into my mouth	Apparently the animals in the sheet were animals which the Jewish law in the Old Testament forbade the Jews to eat. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1679	ACT	11	8	wwbw	figs-doublenegatives	κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου	1		If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative profane or unclean … never entered, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “I have eaten only meat from holy and clean animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1680	ACT	11	8	kj91		ἀκάθαρτον	1	unclean	In the Old Testament Jewish law, a person became ritually unclean in various ways, such as eating certain forbidden animals.
1681	ACT	11	9	n2gn	figs-metonymy	ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν, σὺ μὴ κοίνου	1	What God has cleansed, do not call unclean	This refers to the animals in the sheet. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1682	ACT	11	10	xrq6		τοῦτο…ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς	1	this happened three times	It is possible that everything Peter saw happened did not happen three times, but that the phrase, “What God has cleansed, do not call it defiled,” was repeated three times. However, it may be best to simply say “this happened three times.” See how you translated This happened three times in Acts 10:16.
1683	ACT	11	11	ias8	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here, we refers to Peter and the believers in Joppa. It does not include his current audience in Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1684	ACT	11	11	b2qv		ἰδοὺ	1	behold	The word behold alerts us to the new people in the story. Your language may have a way of doing this.
1685	ACT	11	11	k44j		ἐξαυτῆς	1	right away	Alternate translation: “immediately” or “at that exact moment”
1686	ACT	11	11	qwn5	figs-activepassive	ἀπεσταλμένοι	1	having been sent	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “someone had sent them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1687	ACT	11	12	lf6m		μηδὲν διακρίναντα	1	not making any distinction	Alternate translation: “not being concerned that they were Gentiles”
1688	ACT	11	12	cf8x		ἦλθον…σὺν ἐμοὶ	1	went with me	Alternate translation: “went with me to Caesarea”
1689	ACT	11	12	xrc6		οἱ ἓξ ἀδελφοὶ οὗτοι	1	these six brothers	Alternate translation: “these six Jewish believers”
1690	ACT	11	12	w6ia		εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ ἀνδρός	1	into the house of the man	This refers to the house of Cornelius.
1691	ACT	11	13	few6		Σίμωνα, τὸν ἐπικαλούμενον Πέτρον	1	Simon, who is called Peter	See how you translated the same phrase in Acts 10:32. Alternate translation: “Simon, who is also called Peter”
1692	ACT	11	14	hpr2	figs-metonymy	πᾶς ὁ οἶκός σου	1	all your household	This refers to all the people in the household. Alternate translation: “everyone who lives in your house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1693	ACT	11	15	qy12	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the word us refers to Peter, the apostles, and any of the Jewish believers who had received the Holy Spirit at Pentecost. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1694	ACT	11	15	a8jw		ἐν…τῷ ἄρξασθαί με λαλεῖν, ἐπέπεσεν τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς	1	as I began to speak, the Holy Spirit came on them	This implies that Peter had not finished speaking but had intended to say more.
1695	ACT	11	15	ak2p	figs-ellipsis	ἐπέπεσεν τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ὥσπερ καὶ ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ἐν ἀρχῇ	1	the Holy Spirit came on them, just as also on us in the beginning	Peter leaves out some things to keep the story short. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit came on the Gentile believers, just as he also came on the Jewish believers at Pentecost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1696	ACT	11	15	th4m		ἐν ἀρχῇ	1	in the beginning	Peter is referring to the day of Pentecost.
1697	ACT	11	16	v116	figs-activepassive	ὑμεῖς…βαπτισθήσεσθε ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1	you will be baptized in the Holy Spirit	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will baptize you in the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1698	ACT	11	17	pe42	figs-exclusive	αὐτοῖς…ἡμῖν	1		The word them refers to Cornelius and his Gentile guests and household. Peter does not call them Gentiles in his account to the Jewish believers at Jerusalem. The word us includes all of the Jewish believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1699	ACT	11	17	u3nu	figs-rquestion	εἰ οὖν τὴν ἴσην δωρεὰν ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς, ὡς καὶ ἡμῖν πιστεύσασιν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν, ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην δυνατὸς κωλῦσαι τὸν Θεόν?	1	If, therefore, God gave to them the same gift as also to us when we believed on the Lord Jesus Christ, who was I, able to oppose God?	Peter uses this question to emphasize that he was only obeying God. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Since God gave to them the same gift as he also gave to us when we believed on the Lord Jesus Christ, I decided that I could not oppose God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1700	ACT	11	17	y7ag		τὴν ἴσην δωρεὰν	1	the same gift	Peter refers to the gift of the Holy Spirit.
1701	ACT	11	18	xlpt		ἀκούσαντες…ἡσύχασαν	1		The word they refers to the Jewish believers to whom Peter spoke.
1702	ACT	11	18	nr7g		ἡσύχασαν	1	they became quiet	Alternate translation: “they did not argue with Peter”
1703	ACT	11	18	z3fy	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ὁ Θεὸς τὴν μετάνοιαν εἰς ζωὴν ἔδωκεν	1	God has given repentance unto life to the Gentiles also	Here, life refers to eternal life. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words repentance and life, you could express the same ideas with the verbs “repent” and “live.” Alternate translation: “God has allowed the Gentiles also to repent and live eternally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1704	ACT	11	19	bwb8	writing-newevent	οὖν	1	Then	This introduces the new part of the story. He tells about what happened to the believers who fled after the stoning of Stephen.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1705	ACT	11	19	m3i7		οἱ…διασπαρέντες ἀπὸ τῆς θλίψεως τῆς γενομένης ἐπὶ Στεφάνῳ, διῆλθον	1	those who had been scattered from the persecution that happened over Stephen spread	The Jews began persecuting Jesus’ followers because Stephen had said and done things that the Jews did not like. Because of this persecution, many of Jesus’ followers left Jerusalem and went to many different places.
1706	ACT	11	19	whm6	figs-activepassive	οἱ…διασπαρέντες ἀπὸ τῆς θλίψεως τῆς γενομένης ἐπὶ Στεφάνῳ	1	those who had been scattered from the persecution that happened over Stephen	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the ones whom the Jews had been persecuting after they killed Stephen, who had left Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1707	ACT	11	19	w5jn		διῆλθον	1	spread	Alternate translation: “went in many different directions”
1708	ACT	11	19	c8ha		μόνον Ἰουδαίοις	1	only to Jews	The believers thought God’s message was for the Jewish people, and not for the Gentiles.
1709	ACT	11	20	mww9	figs-explicit	ἐλάλουν καὶ πρὸς τοὺς Ἑλληνιστάς	1	and spoke also to Greeks	These Greek-speaking people were Gentiles, not Jews. Alternate translation: “and also spoke to Gentiles who spoke Greek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1710	ACT	11	21	aj5g	figs-metonymy	ἦν χεὶρ Κυρίου μετ’ αὐτῶν	1	The hand of the Lord was with them	God’s hand signifies his powerful help. Alternate translation: “God was powerfully enabling those believers to preach effectively” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1711	ACT	11	21	n9pq	figs-metaphor	ἐπέστρεψεν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον	1	turned to the Lord	Here, turned to the Lord is a metaphor for starting to obey the Lord. Alternate translation: “and they repented of their sins and began to obey the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1712	ACT	11	22	i7vs	figs-metonymy	τὰ ὦτα τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	the ears of the church	Here, ears refers to the believers’ hearing about the event. Alternate translation: “the believers in the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1713	ACT	11	23	mrg9		ὃς…ἰδὼν…ἐχάρη…παρεκάλει	1		All occurrences of the word he refer to Barnabas. The word them refers to the new believers (Acts 11:20).
1714	ACT	11	23	b7w7		ἰδὼν τὴν χάριν τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	saw the grace that is of God	Alternate translation: “saw how God acted kindly toward the believers”
1715	ACT	11	23	m1q9		παρεκάλει πάντας	1	exhorted them all	Alternate translation: “kept on encouraging them”
1716	ACT	11	23	qlu4		προσμένειν τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	to remain with the Lord	Alternate translation: “to remain faithful to the Lord” or “to continue to trust in the Lord”
1717	ACT	11	23	bz6w	figs-metonymy	τῇ προθέσει τῆς καρδίας	1	with purpose of heart	Here the heart refers to a person’s will and desire. Alternate translation: “with all their will” or “with complete commitment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1718	ACT	11	24	he5z		πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	full of the Holy Spirit	The Holy Spirit controlled Barnabas as he obeyed the Holy Spirit.
1719	ACT	11	24	e57t	figs-metonymy	προσετέθη ὄχλος ἱκανὸς τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	a considerable crowd was added to the Lord	Here, added means they came to believe the same thing as the others. Alternate translation: “many more people also believed in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1720	ACT	11	25	yhl6		ἐξῆλθεν	1		Here the word he refers to Barnabas.
1721	ACT	11	25	dm92		ἐξῆλθεν…εἰς Ταρσὸν	1	he went out to Tarsus	Alternate translation: “he went out to the city of Tarsus”
1722	ACT	11	26	hu2g		καὶ εὑρὼν	1	and when he found him	It probably took some time and effort for Barnabas to locate Saul.
1723	ACT	11	26	wf5l	writing-newevent	ἐγένετο	1	It happened that	This begins a new event in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1724	ACT	11	26	w4dz		αὐτοῖς…συναχθῆναι ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	they were gathered together with the church	Alternate translation: “Barnabas and Saul were gathered together with the church”
1725	ACT	11	26	x8gx	figs-activepassive	χρηματίσαι τε πρώτως ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ τοὺς μαθητὰς, Χριστιανούς	1	And the disciples were called Christians first in Antioch	This implies that other people called the believers by this name. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “The people of Antioch were the first to call the disciples Christians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1726	ACT	11	26	r6sl		πρώτως ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ	1	first in Antioch	Alternate translation: “for the first time in Antioch”
1727	ACT	11	27	h6zw		δὲ	1	Now	The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story-line.
1728	ACT	11	27	pz7y	writing-background		0	General Information:	Here Luke tells background information about a prophecy in Antioch. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1729	ACT	11	27	d8bb		κατῆλθον ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων…εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν	1	came down from Jerusalem to Antioch	Jerusalem was higher in elevation than Antioch, so it was normal for Israelites to speak of going up to Jerusalem or going down from it.
1730	ACT	11	28	wyk8		ὀνόματι Ἅγαβος	1	named Agabus	Alternate translation: “whose name was Agabus”
1731	ACT	11	28	q3tl		ἐσήμανεν διὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	and indicated by the Spirit that	Alternate translation: “and the Holy Spirit enabled him to prophesy that”
1732	ACT	11	28	l3iz		λιμὸν μεγάλην μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι	1	a great famine was about to occur	Alternate translation: “a great shortage of food would happen”
1733	ACT	11	28	pd2t	figs-hyperbole	ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν οἰκουμένην	1	over the whole world	Here, whole was a generalization referring to the part of the world that they were interested in. Alternate translation: “all over the inhabited world” or “throughout the Roman Empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1734	ACT	11	28	jmc5	figs-explicit	ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου	1	in the days of Claudius	Luke’s audience would know that Claudius was the emperor of Rome at that time. Alternate translation: “when Claudius was the Roman emperor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1735	ACT	11	28	fjyk	translate-names	Κλαυδίου	1		Claudius is a man’s name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1736	ACT	11	29	de92		δὲ	1	So	The word So marks an event that happened because of something else that happened first. In this case, they sent money because of Agabus’ prophesy or the famine.
1737	ACT	11	29	rk9z		καθὼς εὐπορεῖτό τις	1	just as anyone prospered	The richer people sent more; the poorer people sent less.
1738	ACT	11	29	up7a		τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν ἐν τῇ Ἰουδαίᾳ ἀδελφοῖς	1	to the brothers living in Judea	Alternate translation: “to the believers in Judea”
1739	ACT	11	30	lhp8		καὶ ἐποίησαν	1		Here, they refers to the believers in the church in Antioch (Acts 11:27).
1740	ACT	11	30	l8i8	figs-idiom	διὰ χειρὸς Βαρναβᾶ καὶ Σαύλου	1	by the hand of Barnabas and Saul	Here, hand is a synecdoche for the action of the whole person. Alternate translation: “by having Barnabas and Saul take to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1741	ACT	12	intro	f66j			0		Acts 12 General Notes Structure and formatting Chapter 12 tells what happened to King Herod while Barnabas was bringing Saul back from Tarsus and they were delivering money from Antioch Jerusalem (11:25-30). He killed many of the leaders of the church, and he put Peter in prison. After God helped Peter escape the prison, Herod killed the prison guards, and then God killed Herod. In the last verse of the chapter, Luke tells how Barnabas and Saul return to Antioch. Important figures of speech in this chapter Personification The “word of God” is spoken of as if it were a living thing that could grow and become many. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wordofgod]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1742	ACT	12	1	ua9p			0	Connecting Statement:	This begins the new persecution, first of James’ death and then of Peter’s imprisonment and then release.
1743	ACT	12	1	ti1y	writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Now	This begins a new part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1744	ACT	12	1	f2gr		κατ’ ἐκεῖνον…τὸν καιρὸν	1	about that time	Here, that time refers to the time of the famine.
1745	ACT	12	1	zy6y	figs-idiom	ἐπέβαλεν…τὰς χεῖρας	1	laid hands on	This means Herod had the believers arrested. See how you translated this in Acts 5:18. Alternate translation: “sent soldiers to arrest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1746	ACT	12	1	u1gv	figs-explicit	τινας τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	some of those from the church	Only James and Peter are specified, which implies that these were leaders of the church in Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1747	ACT	12	1	s7lc		κακῶσαί	1	to harm them	Alternate translation: “in order to cause the believers to suffer”
1748	ACT	12	2	u4w7	writing-background	ἀνεῖλεν δὲ Ἰάκωβον, τὸν ἀδελφὸν Ἰωάννου, μαχαίρῃ	1		This is background information about Herod’s killing James. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1749	ACT	12	2	r1zv	figs-metonymy	ἀνεῖλεν…Ἰάκωβον	1	he killed James	This could mean: (1) Herod himself killed James or (2) Herod ordered someone to kill James. Alternate translation: “Herod gave the order and they killed James” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1750	ACT	12	3	pms7		ἰδὼν…προσέθετο	1		Here the word he refers to Herod (Acts 12:1).
1751	ACT	12	3	v4ag		ἰδὼν δὲ ὅτι ἀρεστόν ἐστιν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	And when he saw that this is pleasing to the Jews	Alternate translation: “And when Herod realized that putting James to death pleased the Jewish leaders”
1752	ACT	12	3	cu7s		ὅτι…ἐστιν	1	that this is	Alternate translation: “that Herod did this” or “that this happened”
1753	ACT	12	3	wpm1		ἀρεστόν ἐστιν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	this is pleasing to the Jews	Alternate translation: “made the Jewish leaders happy”
1754	ACT	12	3	ly66		ἡμέραι τῶν Ἀζύμων	1	the days of unleavened bread	This phrase refers to a time of Jewish religious feast time during the Passover season. Alternate translation: “the festival when the Jewish people ate bread without yeast”
1755	ACT	12	4	pps1		τέσσαρσιν τετραδίοις στρατιωτῶν	1	to four squads of soldiers	Each squad had four soldiers that guarded Peter, one group at a time. The groups divided the 24-hour day into four shifts. Each time two soldiers would have been at his side and the other two soldiers by the entrance. Alternate translation: “to four groups of soldiers”
1756	ACT	12	4	i23a		βουλόμενος…ἀναγαγεῖν αὐτὸν τῷ λαῷ	1	he was intending to bring him out to the people	Alternate translation: “Herod planned to judge Peter in the presence of the people” or “Herod planned to judge Peter before the Jewish people”
1757	ACT	12	5	v2yz	figs-explicit	ὁ μὲν οὖν Πέτρος ἐτηρεῖτο ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ	1	So Peter was kept in the prison	This implies that the soldiers continually guarded Peter in the prison. Alternate translation: “So Peter was guarded by soldiers in the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1758	ACT	12	5	xpcx	figs-activepassive	ὁ μὲν οὖν Πέτρος ἐτηρεῖτο ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “So the soldiers guarded Peter in the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1759	ACT	12	5	f8qc	figs-activepassive	προσευχὴ…ἦν ἐκτενῶς γινομένη ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	prayer was being made earnestly to God for him by the church	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the group of believers in Jerusalem earnestly prayed to God for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1760	ACT	12	6	km83	figs-explicit	ἤμελλεν προαγαγεῖν αὐτὸν ὁ Ἡρῴδης τῇ νυκτὶ ἐκείνῃ	1	Herod was going to bring him out for trial, that night	That Herod planned to execute him can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “the same night before Herod was going to bring Peter out from prison to put him on trial and then to execute him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1761	ACT	12	6	g2bh		δεδεμένος ἁλύσεσιν δυσίν	1	bound with two chains	Each chain would have been attached to one of the two guards who stayed beside Peter. Alternate translation: “tied with two chains” or “fastened with two chains”
1762	ACT	12	6	aqv1		ἐτήρουν τὴν φυλακήν	1	were keeping watch over the prison	Alternate translation: “were guarding the prison doors”
1763	ACT	12	7	kk4i		ἐπέστη…αὐτὸν…αὐτοῦ	1		The words him and his refer to Peter.
1764	ACT	12	7	i7g3		ἰδοὺ	1	behold	The word behold alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows.
1765	ACT	12	7	lu25		ἐπέστη	1	appeared by him	Alternate translation: “appeared next to him” or “suddenly stood beside him”
1766	ACT	12	7	z2i1		ἐν τῷ οἰκήματι	1	in the prison cell	Alternate translation: “in the prison room”
1767	ACT	12	7	dc5b		πατάξας…τοῦ Πέτρου	1	he struck Peter	Peter was evidently sleeping deeply enough that this was required to wake him. Alternate translation: “the angel tapped Peter” or “the angel poked Peter”
1768	ACT	12	7	dqn9		ἐξέπεσαν αὐτοῦ αἱ ἁλύσεις ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν	1	his chains fell away from his hands	The angel caused the chains to fall from Peter without touching them.
1769	ACT	12	8	hxt9		ἐποίησεν…οὕτως	1	he did thus	Alternate translation: “Peter did what the angel told him to do” or “Peter obeyed”
1770	ACT	12	8	abch		λέγει αὐτῷ	1	he said to him	Alternate translation: “the angel said to Peter”
1771	ACT	12	9	gx77		ἠκολούθει…ᾔδει…ἐδόκει	1		Here the word he refers to Peter.
1772	ACT	12	9	abci		ἠκολούθει	1	he followed him	Alternate translation: “Peter followed the angel”
1773	ACT	12	9	sh8k		οὐκ ᾔδει	1	he did not know	Alternate translation: “he did not understand”
1774	ACT	12	9	p9ty	figs-activepassive	ἀληθές ἐστιν τὸ γινόμενον διὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου	1	what is done by the angel is real	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the actions of the angel were real” or “what the angel did truly happened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1775	ACT	12	10	ursb		διελθόντες…ἦλθαν…αὐτοῖς…προῆλθον	1		The words they and them refer to Peter and the angel.
1776	ACT	12	10	r7gy	figs-explicit	διελθόντες δὲ πρώτην φυλακὴν καὶ δευτέραν	1	But when they had passed by the first guard and the second	It is implied that the soldiers were not able to see Peter and the angel as they walked by. Alternate translation: “The first and second guards did not see them as they passed by, and then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1777	ACT	12	10	c18q		διελθόντες	1	when they had passed by	Alternate translation: “when they had walked by”
1778	ACT	12	10	e36s	figs-ellipsis	καὶ δευτέραν	1	and the second	The word guard is understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “and the second guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1779	ACT	12	10	y86k		ἦλθαν ἐπὶ τὴν πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν	1	they came to the iron gate	Alternate translation: “Peter and the angel arrived at the iron gate”
1780	ACT	12	10	if3c		τὴν φέρουσαν εἰς τὴν πόλιν	1	that led into the city	Alternate translation: “that opened to the city” or “that went from the prison to the city”
1781	ACT	12	10	i3st	figs-rpronouns	ἥτις αὐτομάτη ἠνοίγη αὐτοῖς	1	it opened for them by itself	Here, by itself means neither Peter nor the angel opened it. Alternate translation: “the gate swung open for them” or “the gate opened itself for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1782	ACT	12	10	j268		προῆλθον ῥύμην μίαν	1	they went down a street	Alternate translation: “they walked along a street”
1783	ACT	12	10	fl89		εὐθέως ἀπέστη ὁ ἄγγελος ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	right away the angel went away from him	Alternate translation: “the angel left Peter suddenly” or “suddenly the angel disappeared”
1784	ACT	12	11	wlb6	figs-idiom	καὶ ὁ Πέτρος ἐν ἑαυτῷ γενόμενος	1	And when Peter had come to himself	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “And when Peter became fully awake and alert” or “And when Peter became aware that what had happened was real” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1785	ACT	12	11	ue4k	figs-metonymy	ἐξείλατό με ἐκ χειρὸς Ἡρῴδου	1	delivered me from the hand of Herod	Here, the hand of Herod refers to “Herod’s power” or “Herod’s plans.” Alternate translation: “brought me from the harm Herod had planned for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1786	ACT	12	11	hw63		ἐξείλατό με	1	delivered me	Alternate translation: “rescued me”
1787	ACT	12	11	p739	figs-synecdoche	πάσης τῆς προσδοκίας τοῦ λαοῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	from all the expectations of the Jewish people	Here, the Jewish people probably referred mainly to the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “from all that the Jewish leaders thought would happen to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1788	ACT	12	12	tfh3		συνιδών	1	having realized this	He became aware that God had rescued him.
1789	ACT	12	12	ux4v	figs-activepassive	Ἰωάννου, τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Μάρκου	1	of John, who was called Mark	John was also called Mark. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “John, whom people also called Mark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1790	ACT	12	13	pfn7		κρούσαντος…αὐτοῦ	1	when he knocked	Tapping on the door was a normal Jewish custom to let others know you wish to visit them. You may need to change this to fit your culture. Alternate translation: “when Peter knocked”
1791	ACT	12	13	c634		τὴν θύραν τοῦ πυλῶνος	1	at the door of the gate	Alternate translation: “at the outer door” or “at the door of the entrance from the street to the courtyard”
1792	ACT	12	13	khq1		προσῆλθε…ὑπακοῦσαι	1	came to answer	Alternate translation: “came to the gate to ask who was knocking”
1793	ACT	12	14	x5fg		ἐπιγνοῦσα…οὐκ ἤνοιξεν…ἀπήγγειλεν	1		Here the words she and her all refer to the servant girl Rhoda.
1794	ACT	12	14	y2ff		ἀπὸ τῆς χαρᾶς	1	from joy	Alternate translation: “because she was so joyful” or “being overly excited”
1795	ACT	12	14	m3m7		οὐκ ἤνοιξεν τὸν πυλῶνα	1	she did not open the gate	Alternate translation: “she did not open the door” or “she forgot to open the door”
1796	ACT	12	14	yq3r		ἀπήγγειλεν	1	she reported	Alternate translation: “she told them” or “she said”
1797	ACT	12	14	a19k		ἑστάναι…πρὸ τοῦ πυλῶνος	1	stands at the gate	Peter was still standing outside. Alternate translation: “is standing outside the door”
1798	ACT	12	15	j2kx		οἱ…οἱ	1		Here the word they refers to the people who were inside praying (Acts 12:12).
1799	ACT	12	15	ybz7		μαίνῃ	1	You are insane	The people not only did not believe her, but rebuked her by saying she was crazy. Alternate translation: “You are crazy”
1800	ACT	12	15	xnm2		ἡ…διϊσχυρίζετο οὕτως ἔχειν	1	she insisted that it was thus	Alternate translation: “she insisted that what she said was true”
1801	ACT	12	15	en8b		οἱ…ἔλεγον	2	they said	Alternate translation: “they answered”
1802	ACT	12	15	qa8m		ὁ ἄγγελός ἐστιν αὐτοῦ	1	It is his angel	Some Jews believed in guardian angels and may have thought that Peter’s angel had come to them. Alternate translation: “What you have seen is Peter’s angel”
1803	ACT	12	16	wwg1		εἶδαν	1		Here the word they refers to the people in the house.
1804	ACT	12	16	bi6l		ὁ δὲ Πέτρος ἐπέμενεν κρούων	1	But Peter continued knocking	The word continued means that Peter kept knocking the entire time those inside were talking.
1805	ACT	12	17	jx1a		ἀπαγγείλατε…ταῦτα	1	Report these things	Alternate translation: “Tell these things”
1806	ACT	12	17	jf16		τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς	1	the brothers	Alternate translation: “the other believers”
1807	ACT	12	18	ail9		δὲ	1	Now	The word Now is used to mark a break in the story-line. Time has passed; it is now the next day.
1808	ACT	12	18	iqv4		γενομένης…ἡμέρας	1	when it became day	Alternate translation: “in the morning”
1809	ACT	12	18	zl7i	figs-litotes	ἦν τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος ἐν τοῖς στρατιώταις, τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο	1	there was no small disturbance among the soldiers over what therefore had happened to Peter	This phrase is used to emphasize what really happened. This could be said in a positive way. Alternate translation: “there was a great disturbance among the soldiers over what had happened to Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1810	ACT	12	18	ilz4	figs-abstractnouns	ἦν τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος ἐν τοῖς στρατιώταις, τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο	1	there was no small disturbance among the soldiers over what had happened to Peter	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words disturbance, you could express the same ideas with the words “disturbed” or “upset.” Alternate translation: “the soldiers were very disturbed about what had happened to Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1811	ACT	12	19	blx5		αὐτὸν…εὑρὼν…διέτριβεν	1		The word him here refers to Peter. The word he refers to Herod.
1812	ACT	12	19	pz6v		Ἡρῴδης δὲ ἐπιζητήσας αὐτὸν	1	And Herod, having searched for him	This could mean: (1) “And when Herod heard Peter was missing, he went himself to search the prison” or (2) “And when Herod heard Peter was missing, he sent other soldiers to search the prison.”
1813	ACT	12	19	c69i		ἀνακρίνας τοὺς φύλακας, ἐκέλευσεν ἀπαχθῆναι	1	questioned the guards and ordered them to be put to death	It was the normal punishment for the Roman government to kill the guards if their prisoner escaped.
1814	ACT	12	19	br16		καὶ κατελθὼν	1	And having gone down	The phrase having gone down is used here because Caesarea is lower in elevation than Judea.
1815	ACT	12	20	n2lw			0	Connecting Statement:	Luke continues with another event in Herod’s life.
1816	ACT	12	20	aip7	writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Now	The word Now is used here to mark the next event in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1817	ACT	12	20	gxs4	figs-hyperbole	ὁμοθυμαδὸν…παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν	1	they went to him together	Here the word they is a generalization. It is unlikely that all the people of Tyre and Sidon went to Herod. Alternate translation: “men representing the people of Tyre and Sidon went together to talk with Herod” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1818	ACT	12	20	t6mi		πείσαντες Βλάστον	1	having persuaded Blastus	Alternate translation: “these men persuaded Blastus”
1819	ACT	12	20	qsg4	translate-names	Βλάστον	1	Blastus	Blastus was an assistant to or an officer of King Herod. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1820	ACT	12	20	l5r1		ᾐτοῦντο εἰρήνην	1	they asked for peace	Alternate translation: “these men requested peace”
1821	ACT	12	20	j253	figs-explicit	τὸ τρέφεσθαι αὐτῶν τὴν χώραν ἀπὸ τῆς βασιλικῆς	1	their food for their country was from the king’s country	They probably purchased this food. Alternate translation: “the people of Tyre and Sidon bought all their food from the people that Herod ruled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1822	ACT	12	20	dy51	figs-explicit	τὸ τρέφεσθαι αὐτῶν	1	their food	It is implied that Herod restricted this supply of food because he was angry with the people of Tyre and Sidon. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1823	ACT	12	21	e3w9		τακτῇ…ἡμέρᾳ	1	on a set day	This was probably the day on which Herod agreed to meet with the representatives. Alternate translation: “on the day when Herod agreed to meet them”
1824	ACT	12	21	kv7g		ἐσθῆτα βασιλικὴν	1	in royal clothing	This royal clothing was expensive clothing that would demonstrate he was the king.
1825	ACT	12	21	g6ir		καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος	1	sitting on the throne	The throne was where Herod formally addressed people who came to see him.
1826	ACT	12	23	b4bc		παραχρῆμα…ἄγγελος	1	immediately an angel	Alternate translation: “right away an angel” or “while the people were still praising Herod, an angel”
1827	ACT	12	23	b5s9		ἐπάταξεν αὐτὸν	1	struck him	Alternate translation: “afflicted Herod” or “caused Herod to become very ill”
1828	ACT	12	23	iw57		οὐκ ἔδωκεν τὴν δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ	1	he did not give the glory to God	Herod let those people worship him instead of telling them to worship God.
1829	ACT	12	23	d419	figs-activepassive	γενόμενος σκωληκόβρωτος, ἐξέψυξεν	1	becoming worm-eaten, he died	Here, worm refers to worms inside the body, probably intestinal worms. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “worms ate Herod’s insides and he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1830	ACT	12	24	m1sw	figs-metaphor	ὁ…λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐπληθύνετο	1	the word of God increased and was multiplied	The word of God is spoken of as if it was a living plant that was able to grow and reproduce. Alternate translation: “the message of God spread to more places and more people believed in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1831	ACT	12	24	wn8m		ὁ…λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the word of God	Alternate translation: “the message God sent about Jesus”
1832	ACT	12	25	j2un	writing-endofstory		0		This verse continues the history from 11:30. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
1833	ACT	12	25	t7d8		Βαρναβᾶς δὲ καὶ Σαῦλος ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	And Barnabas and Saul returned to Jerusalem	Although some ancient copies read “Barnabas and Saul returned from Jerusalem,” the reading of “to Jerusalem” is probably correct. We know they went back to Antioch from Jerusalem, Therefore, this verse may indicate that they went somewhere else in Judea, and then returned to Jerusalem before they went back to Antioch.
1834	ACT	12	25	pv6a	figs-explicit	πληρώσαντες τὴν διακονίαν	1	having completed their service	This refers back to when they brought money from the believers at Antioch in Acts 11:29-30. Alternate translation: “when they had delivered the money to the church leaders in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1835	ACT	13	intro	rlh6			0		Acts 13 General Notes Structure and formatting Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the three quotes from Psalms in 13:33-35. Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 13:41. The chapter is where the second half of the Book of Acts begins. Luke writes more about Paul than about Peter, and it describes how it is the Gentiles and not the Jews to whom the believers tell the message about Jesus. Special concepts in this chapter A light for the Gentiles The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. The Jews considered all Gentiles as walking in darkness, but Paul and Barnabas spoke of telling the Gentiles about Jesus as if they were going to bring them physical light. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
1836	ACT	13	1	ce7s	writing-background		0	General Information:	Verse 1 gives background information about the people in the church at Antioch. Here the first word “they” probably refers to these five leaders but may also include the other believers. The next words “they” and “their” probably refer to the other three leaders not including Barnabas and Saul but could include other believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1837	ACT	13	1	qa2i			0	Connecting Statement:	Luke begins to tell about the mission trips on which the church at Antioch send Barnabas and Saul.
1838	ACT	13	1	rej8		δὲ ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ κατὰ τὴν οὖσαν ἐκκλησίαν	1	Now there were in Antioch, in the church that was there	Alternate translation: “At that time in the church at Antioch”
1839	ACT	13	1	srw6	translate-names	Συμεὼν…Νίγερ…Λούκιος…Μαναήν	1	Simeon … Niger … Lucius … Manaen	These are men’s names. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1840	ACT	13	1	u48c		Ἡρῴδου τοῦ τετράρχου σύντροφος	1	one brought up with Herod the tetrarch	Manaen was probably Herod’s playmate or close friend growing up. Some scholars suggest he was Herod’s foster brother.
1841	ACT	13	2	ifb9		ἀφορίσατε	1	Set apart	Alternate translation: “Appoint to serve”
1842	ACT	13	2	j6ym		προσκέκλημαι αὐτούς	1	I have called them	The verb here means that God chose them to do this work.
1843	ACT	13	3	ku45	translate-symaction	ἐπιθέντες τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῖς	1	laid their hands on them	This act showed that the leaders agreed that the Holy Spirit had called Barnabas and Saul to do this work. Alternate translation: “laid their hands on these men whom God had set apart for his service” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1844	ACT	13	3	p1us		ἀπέλυσαν	1	they sent them off	Alternate translation: “they sent those men off” or “they sent those men off to do the work the Holy Spirit told them to do”
1845	ACT	13	4	br2m			0	General Information:	Here the words “they,” “They,” and “their” refer to Barnabas and Silas.
1846	ACT	13	4	mt3h		οὖν	1	So	This word marks an event that happened because of a previous event. In this case, the previous event is Barnabas and Saul being set apart by the Holy Spirit.
1847	ACT	13	4	abcj		αὐτοὶ…ἐκπεμφθέντες	1	they, having been sent out	Alternate translation: “Barnabas and Saul were sent out”
1848	ACT	13	4	iyh8		κατῆλθον	1	went down	The phrase went down is used here because Seleucia is lower in elevation than Antioch.
1849	ACT	13	4	d1q5		Σελεύκιαν	1	Seleucia	a city by the sea
1850	ACT	13	5	at85		Σαλαμῖνι	1	Salamis	The city of Salamis was on Cyprus Island.
1851	ACT	13	5	ct8b	figs-synecdoche	κατήγγελλον τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	they were proclaiming the word of God	Here, word of God is a synecdoche for “message of God.” Alternate translation: “they proclaimed the message of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1852	ACT	13	5	p5t3		συναγωγαῖς τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	synagogues of the Jews	This could mean: (1) “there were multiple Jewish synagogues in the city of Salamis where Barnabas and Saul preached” or (2) “Barnabas and Saul started at the synagogue at Salamis and continued to preach in all the synagogues they found while they traveled around the Island of Cyprus.”
1853	ACT	13	5	sxw6		εἶχον δὲ καὶ Ἰωάννην, ὑπηρέτην	1	And they also had John as an assistant	Alternate translation: “And John Mark went with them and was helping them”
1854	ACT	13	6	h9he		εὗρον	1		Here the word they refers to Paul, Silas, and John Mark.
1855	ACT	13	6	ja1i		ὅλην τὴν νῆσον	1	the whole island	They crossed from one side of the island to the other and shared the gospel message in each town they passed through.
1856	ACT	13	6	cl2z		Πάφου	1	Paphos	Paphos was a major city on Cyprus island where the proconsul lived.
1857	ACT	13	6	zf3b		εὗρον	1	they found	Here, found means they came upon him without looking for him. Alternate translation: “they met” or “they came upon”
1858	ACT	13	6	xe7h		ἄνδρα, τινὰ μάγον	1	a certain man, a magician	Alternate translation: “a particular person who practices witchcraft” or “a person who practices supernatural magic arts”
1859	ACT	13	6	ak38	translate-names	ᾧ ὄνομα Βαριησοῦς	1	whose name was Bar Jesus	Bar Jesus means “Son of Jesus.” There is no relation between this man and Jesus Christ. Jesus was a common name at that time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1860	ACT	13	7	bee2		ἦν σὺν	1	was with	Alternate translation: “was often with” or “was often in the company of”
1861	ACT	13	7	s1su		ἀνθυπάτῳ	1	proconsul	A proconsul was a governor in charge of a Roman province. Alternate translation: “governor”
1862	ACT	13	7	h5xx	writing-background	ἀνδρὶ συνετῷ	1	an intelligent man	This is background information about Sergius Paulus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1863	ACT	13	7	abck		οὗτος, προσκαλεσάμενος	1	He summoned	Alternate translation: “The proconsul summoned”
1864	ACT	13	8	lp2u	translate-names	Ἐλύμας ὁ μάγος	1	Elymas “the magician”	This was Bar-Jesus, who was also called “the magician.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1865	ACT	13	8	qw4j		οὕτως γὰρ μεθερμηνεύεται τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	for that is how his name is translated	Alternate translation: “for that was what he was called in Greek”
1866	ACT	13	8	n23s		ἀνθίστατο…αὐτοῖς…ζητῶν διαστρέψαι τὸν ἀνθύπατον	1	opposed them; he sought to turn the proconsul away	Alternate translation: “resisted them by trying to turn the proconsul away” or “attempted to stop them by trying to turn the proconsul away”
1867	ACT	13	8	w2xt	figs-metaphor	ζητῶν διαστρέψαι τὸν ἀνθύπατον ἀπὸ τῆς πίστεως	1	he sought to turn the proconsul away from the faith	Here, to turn … away from is a metaphor for convincing someone to not do something. Alternate translation: “he attempted to persuade the governor not to believe the gospel message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1868	ACT	13	9	gws2		αὐτὸν	1		The word him refers to the magician Elymas, who is also called Bar Jesus (Acts 13:6-8).
1869	ACT	13	9	ey6d	figs-activepassive	Σαῦλος…ὁ καὶ Παῦλος	1	Saul, who is also Paul	Saul was his Jewish name, and Paul was his Roman name. Since he was speaking to a Roman official, he used his Roman name. Alternate translation: “Saul, who now called himself Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1870	ACT	13	9	xjy9		ἀτενίσας εἰς αὐτὸν	1	stared at him intensely	Alternate translation: “looked at him intensely”
1871	ACT	13	10	r8x2		ὦ πλήρης παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας	1	O one full of all deceit and all wickedness	Alternate translation: “O you are always intent in causing others to believe what is not true using falsehood and always doing what is wrong”
1872	ACT	13	10	d2pk	figs-metonymy	υἱὲ διαβόλου	1	son of the devil	Paul is saying the man is acting like the devil. Alternate translation: “you are like the devil” or “you act like the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1873	ACT	13	10	pyu7		ῥᾳδιουργίας	1	wickedness	In this context, wickedness means to be lazy and not diligent in following God’s law.
1874	ACT	13	10	hlq9		ἐχθρὲ πάσης δικαιοσύνης	1	enemy of all righteousness	Paul is grouping Elymas with the devil. Just as the devil is an enemy of God and is against righteousness, so also was Elymas.
1875	ACT	13	10	bc9p	figs-rquestion	οὐ παύσῃ διαστρέφων τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας?	1	will you not stop perverting the straight paths of the Lord?	Paul uses this question to rebuke Elymas for opposing God. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “you are always saying that the truth about the Lord God is false!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1876	ACT	13	10	p8sa	figs-idiom	τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας	1	the straight paths of the Lord	Here, straight paths refer to the ways that are true. Alternate translation: “the true ways of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1877	ACT	13	11	xul9	figs-metonymy	χεὶρ Κυρίου ἐπὶ σέ	1	the hand of the Lord upon you	Here, hand represents the power of God and upon you implies punishment. Alternate translation: “the Lord will punish you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1878	ACT	13	11	rse8	figs-activepassive	ἔσῃ τυφλὸς	1	you will be blind	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will make you blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1879	ACT	13	11	w3gh		μὴ βλέπων τὸν ἥλιον	1	not seeing the sun	Elymas will be so completely blind that he not even be able to see the sun. Alternate translation: “you will not even see the sun”
1880	ACT	13	11	b5b8		ἄχρι καιροῦ	1	for a time	Alternate translation: “for a period of time” or “until the time appointed by God”
1881	ACT	13	11	t7j1		ἔπεσεν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἀχλὺς καὶ σκότος	1	a mist and darkness fell on Elymas	Alternate translation: “the eyes of Elymas became blurry and then dark” or “Elymas started seeing unclearly and then he could not see anything”
1882	ACT	13	11	a7es		περιάγων	1	he is going around	Alternate translation: “Elymas wandered around” or “Elymas started feeling around and”
1883	ACT	13	12	x9fl		ἀνθύπατος	1	proconsul	A proconsul was a governor in charge of a Roman province. Alternate translation: “governor”
1884	ACT	13	12	pyh7		ἐπίστευσεν	1	believed	Alternate translation: “believed in Jesus”
1885	ACT	13	12	twa8	figs-activepassive	ἐκπλησσόμενος ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	being astonished at the teaching of the Lord	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the teaching about the Lord amazing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1886	ACT	13	13	r9hi		δὲ	1	Now	The word Now marks the beginning of a new part of the story about Paul in Antioch in Pisidia.
1887	ACT	13	13	i65t	writing-background	οἱ περὶ, Παῦλον	1		Verses 13 and 14 give background information about this part of the story. Here, those around Paul refers to Barnabas and John Mark (also called John). From this point on, Saul is called Paul in Acts. Paul’s name is listed first which indicates that he had become the leader of the group. It is important to keep this order in the translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1888	ACT	13	13	abcl		οἱ περὶ, Παῦλον	1	those around Paul	This refers to Paul and his companions.
1889	ACT	13	13	k4s9		ἀναχθέντες…ἀπὸ τῆς Πάφου	1	having set sail from Paphos	Alternate translation: “having traveled by sailboat from Paphos”
1890	ACT	13	13	h1cb		ἦλθον εἰς Πέργην τῆς Παμφυλίας	1	came to Perga in Pamphylia	Alternate translation: “arrived in Perga which is in Pamphylia”
1891	ACT	13	13	g6l5		Ἰωάννης δὲ ἀποχωρήσας ἀπ’ αὐτῶν	1	But John, withdrawing from them	Alternate translation: “But John Mark, leaving Paul and Barnabas”
1892	ACT	13	14	vrp1		Ἀντιόχειαν τὴν Πισιδίαν	1	Antioch of Pisidia	Alternate translation: “the city of Antioch in the district of Pisidia”
1893	ACT	13	15	dnb4	figs-synecdoche	μετὰ δὲ τὴν ἀνάγνωσιν τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν	1	And after the reading of the law and of the prophets	The phrase the law and the prophets refers to parts of the Jewish scriptures which were read. Alternate translation: “And after someone read from the books of the law and the writings of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1894	ACT	13	15	z7bh		ἀπέστειλαν…πρὸς αὐτοὺς λέγοντες	1	sent to them, saying	Alternate translation: “told someone to say to them” or “asked someone to tell them”
1895	ACT	13	15	td4h		ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	The term brothers is here used by the people in the synagogue to refer to Paul and Barnabas as fellow Jews.
1896	ACT	13	15	jru8		εἴ τίς ἐστιν ἐν ὑμῖν λόγος παρακλήσεως πρὸς τὸν λαόν	1	if there is among you any word of exhortation for the people	Alternate translation: “if you want to say anything to encourage our people”
1897	ACT	13	15	kj1h		λέγετε	1	speak it	Alternate translation: “please speak it” or “please tell it to us”
1898	ACT	13	16	p93q			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul begins his speech to those in the synagogue in Pisidian Antioch. He begins by talking about things that happened in Israel’s history.
1899	ACT	13	16	i8pz	translate-symaction	κατασείσας τῇ χειρὶ	1	motioned with his hand	This phrase could refer to moving his hands as a signal that he was ready to speak. Alternate translation: “moving his hands to show that he was about to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1900	ACT	13	16	rh93		οἱ φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν	1	ones who fear God	This refers to Gentiles who had converted to Judaism. “you who are not Israelites but who worship God”
1901	ACT	13	16	ah55		τὸν Θεόν, ἀκούσατε	1	God, listen	Alternate translation: “God, listen to me” or “God, listen to what I am about to say”
1902	ACT	13	17	se2b		ὁ Θεὸς τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου Ἰσραὴλ	1	The God of this people Israel	Alternate translation: “The God whom the people of Israel worship”
1903	ACT	13	17	tbc4	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1		Here the word our refers to Paul and his fellow Jews. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1904	ACT	13	17	l9cn		τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν	1	our fathers	Alternate translation: “our ancestors”
1905	ACT	13	17	aaj5		τὸν λαὸν ὕψωσεν	1	exalted the people	Alternate translation: “caused our people to become very numerous”
1906	ACT	13	17	vw4z	figs-metonymy	μετὰ βραχίονος ὑψηλοῦ	1	with an uplifted arm	This refers to God’s mighty power. Alternate translation: “with great power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1907	ACT	13	17	b74t		ἐξ αὐτῆς	1	from it	Alternate translation: “out from the land of Egypt”
1908	ACT	13	18	zv9e		ἐτροποφόρησεν αὐτοὺς	1	he put up with them	This means “he tolerated them.” Some versions have a different word that means “he took care of them.” Alternate translation: “God endured their disobedience” or “God took care of them”
1909	ACT	13	19	nvp7	figs-exclusive	καθελὼν…κατεκληρονόμησεν τὴν γῆν αὐτῶν	1		Here the word he refers to God. The word them refers to the people of Israel. The words their land refer to the land the seven nations had previously occupied. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1910	ACT	13	19	h5qg		ἔθνη	1	nations	Here the word nations refers to different people groups and not to geographical boundaries.
1911	ACT	13	20	abcm		ἔδωκεν	1	he gave them	Alternate translation: “God gave them”
1912	ACT	13	20	qmc8		ἕως Σαμουὴλ προφήτου	1	until Samuel the prophet	Alternate translation: “until the time of the prophet Samuel”
1913	ACT	13	21	yxi8		ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα	1	for 40 years	Alternate translation: “to be their king for 40 years”
1914	ACT	13	22	z4x3		μεταστήσας αὐτὸν	1	having removed him	This expression means God caused Saul to stop being king. Alternate translation: “rejected Saul from being king”
1915	ACT	13	22	bsp6		ἤγειρεν τὸν Δαυεὶδ αὐτοῖς εἰς βασιλέα	1	he raised up David for them as their king	Alternate translation: “God chose David to be their king”
1916	ACT	13	22	iyd6		βασιλέα	1	their king	Alternate translation: “the king of Israel” or “the king over the Israelites”
1917	ACT	13	22	sw2r		ᾧ καὶ εἶπεν μαρτυρήσας	1	to whom having testified, he also said	Alternate translation: “about whom God testified by saying”
1918	ACT	13	22	akg6		εὗρον Δαυεὶδ τὸν τοῦ Ἰεσσαί, ἄνδρα κατὰ τὴν καρδίαν μου, ὃς ποιήσει πάντα τὰ θελήματά μου	1		The quotation here is from the history of Samuel and from a Psalm of Ethan in the Old Testament.
1919	ACT	13	22	dbu5		εὗρον	1	I have found	Alternate translation: “I have observed that”
1920	ACT	13	22	mp53	figs-idiom	ἄνδρα κατὰ τὴν καρδίαν μου	1	a man according to my heart	This expression means he “a man who wants what I want.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1921	ACT	13	23	xj5a		τούτου…ἀπὸ τοῦ σπέρματος	1	From the descendants of this one	This phrase is placed at the beginning of the sentence to emphasize that the Savior had to be one of David’s descendants (Acts 13:22). Alternate translation: “From David’s descendants”
1922	ACT	13	23	kc76	figs-metonymy	ἤγαγεν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ	1	brought to Israel	Here, Israel refers to the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “gave to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1923	ACT	13	23	mk5g		κατ’ ἐπαγγελίαν	1	according to promise	Alternate translation: “just as God promised he would do”
1924	ACT	13	24	abcn		πρὸ προσώπου τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ	1	before the face of his coming	Alternate translation: “before the coming of Jesus”
1925	ACT	13	24	x892	figs-abstractnouns	βάπτισμα μετανοίας	1	a baptism of repentance	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word repentance, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “a baptism to repent” or “a baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent for their sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1926	ACT	13	25	lby6		τί ἐμὲ ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι? οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ, ἀλλ’ ἰδοὺ, ἔρχεται μετ’ ἐμὲ, οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν λῦσαι	1		The quotation here is from the Gospels.
1927	ACT	13	25	vww3	figs-rquestion	τί ἐμὲ ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι?	1	Who do you think I am?	John asked this question to compel the people to think about who he was. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Think about who I am.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1928	ACT	13	25	rp32	figs-explicit	οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ	1	I am not him	John was referring to the Messiah, whom they were expecting to come. Alternate translation: “I am not the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1929	ACT	13	25	nnl5		ἀλλ’ ἰδοὺ	1	But behold	This phrase emphasizes the importance of what he will say next.
1930	ACT	13	25	r1pl	figs-explicit	ἔρχεται μετ’ ἐμὲ	1	one is coming after me	This also refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “the Messiah will soon come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1931	ACT	13	25	gys2		οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν λῦσαι	1	of whom the sandals of his feet I am not worthy to untie	The Messiah is so much greater than John that he did not even feel worthy do the lowest job for him. Alternate translation: “and I am not worthy even to untie his shoes”
1932	ACT	13	26	jdp6	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1		Here the word us includes Paul and his entire audience in the synagogue. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1933	ACT	13	26	kci9		ἀδελφοί, υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ οἱ ἐν ὑμῖν φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν	1	brothers, sons of the family of Abraham, and those among you who fear God	Paul addresses his audience of Jews and Gentile converts to Judaism to remind them of their special status as worshiping the true God.
1934	ACT	13	26	u6zn	figs-activepassive	ὁ λόγος τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης ἐξαπεστάλη	1	the word about this salvation has been sent	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has sent the message about this salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1935	ACT	13	26	v6r3	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης	1	about this salvation	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word salvation, you could express the same idea with the verb “save.” Alternate translation: “that God will save people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1936	ACT	13	27	psk5		τοῦτον ἀγνοήσαντες	1	did not recognize this one	Alternate translation: “did not realize that this man Jesus was the one whom God had sent to save them”
1937	ACT	13	27	ri1f	figs-metonymy	τὰς φωνὰς τῶν προφητῶν	1	the voices of the prophets	Here the word voices represents the message of the prophets. Alternate translation: “the writings of the prophets” or “the message of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1938	ACT	13	27	m4tz	figs-activepassive	τὰς…ἀναγινωσκομένας	2	that are read	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “which someone reads” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1939	ACT	13	27	rle6		τὰς φωνὰς τῶν προφητῶν…ἐπλήρωσαν	1	they fulfilled the voices of the prophets	Alternate translation: “they actually did just what the prophets said that they would do”
1940	ACT	13	28	v3hw			0	General Information:	Here the word they refers to the Jewish people and their religious leaders in Jerusalem. The word him here refers to Jesus.
1941	ACT	13	28	y9j6		μηδεμίαν αἰτίαν θανάτου εὑρόντες	1	they found no reason for death	Alternate translation: “they did not find any reason why anyone should kill Jesus”
1942	ACT	13	28	d4xm		ᾐτήσαντο Πειλᾶτον	1	they asked Pilate	The word asked here is a strong word meaning to demand, beg or plead for.
1943	ACT	13	29	sq1j		ὡς δὲ ἐτέλεσαν πάντα τὰ περὶ αὐτοῦ γεγραμμένα	1	And when they had completed all that had been written about him	Alternate translation: “And when they did to Jesus all the things that the prophets said would happen to him”
1944	ACT	13	29	m5f1	figs-explicit	καθελόντες ἀπὸ τοῦ ξύλου	1	taking him down from the tree	It may be helpful to explicitly say Jesus died before this happened. Alternate translation: “they killed Jesus and then took him down from the cross after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1945	ACT	13	29	vwt4	figs-explicit	τοῦ ξύλου	1	from the tree	This was another way people at that time referred to the cross. Alternate translation: “the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1946	ACT	13	30	h5jw		ὁ δὲ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν	1	But God raised him	But indicates a strong contrast between what the people did and what God did.
1947	ACT	13	30	mqx8		ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	raised him from the dead	To be with the dead means that Jesus was dead. Alternate translation: “raised him from among those who were dead”
1948	ACT	13	30	zsx4	figs-idiom	ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν	1	raised him	Here, raised is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “caused him to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1949	ACT	13	30	d14p		ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	from the dead	This phrase means “from among all those who have died.” This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To raise someone from among them speaks of making that person alive again.
1950	ACT	13	31	ig7w	figs-activepassive	ὃς ὤφθη ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους τοῖς συναναβᾶσιν αὐτῷ ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	He was seen for many days by those who had come up with him from Galilee to Jerusalem	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “The disciples who traveled with Jesus from Galilee to Jerusalem saw him for many days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1951	ACT	13	31	g4vl		ἡμέρας πλείους	1	many days	We know from other writings that this period was 40 days. Translate many days with a term that would be appropriate for that length of time.
1952	ACT	13	31	vqj4		νῦν εἰσιν μάρτυρες αὐτοῦ πρὸς τὸν λαόν	1	are now his witnesses to the people	Alternate translation: “are now testifying to the people about Jesus” or “are now telling the people about Jesus”
1953	ACT	13	32	hr2g		τοὺς πατέρας	1	our fathers	Paul is still speaking to the Jews and Gentile converts in the synagogue at Antioch of Pisidia. These were the physical ancestors of the Jews, and the spiritual ancestors of the converts. Alternate translation: “our ancestors”
1954	ACT	13	33	b1uh	translate-versebridge	ταύτην ὁ Θεὸς ἐκπεπλήρωκεν τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν	1	God has fulfilled this for our children	You may need to rearrange the parts of this sentence, which begins in verse 32. “God has fulfilled for us, their children, these promises that he made to our ancestors, by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
1955	ACT	13	33	dy6w		τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν	1	for our children	Paul is still speaking to the Jews and Gentile converts in the synagogue at Antioch of Pisidia. Some ancient copies read, “for us, their children” but the best copies read, “for our children.”
1956	ACT	13	33	d95n	figs-idiom	ἀναστήσας Ἰησοῦν	1	by raising up Jesus	Here, raising up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “by making Jesus alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1957	ACT	13	33	y3tz		ὡς καὶ ἐν τῷ ψαλμῷ γέγραπται τῷ δευτέρῳ	1	As it is also written in the second Psalm	Alternate translation: “This is what was also written in the second Psalm”
1958	ACT	13	33	h9ir		τῷ ψαλμῷ…τῷ δευτέρῳ	1	the second Psalm	Alternate translation: “Psalm 2”
1959	ACT	13	33	tla1	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱός…γεγέννηκά σε	1	Son … I have fathered you	Son is an important title that describes the relationship between Jesus and God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1960	ACT	13	34	ipb9		δώσω ὑμῖν τὰ ὅσια Δαυεὶδ τὰ πιστά	1		This quotation here is from the prophet Isaiah.
1961	ACT	13	34	iy5q		ὅτι δὲ ἀνέστησεν αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν, μηκέτι μέλλοντα ὑποστρέφειν εἰς διαφθοράν, οὕτως εἴρηκεν	1	And that he raised him up from the dead, never to be about to return to decay, he has spoken in this way	Alternate translation: “God spoke these words about his making Jesus alive again so that he would never die again”
1962	ACT	13	34	h3nj		ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	from the dead	From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
1963	ACT	13	34	q3kq		τὰ ὅσια…τὰ πιστά	1	the holy and sure blessings	Alternate translation: “the holy and certain blessings”
1964	ACT	13	35	r1ev	figs-explicit	διότι καὶ ἐν ἑτέρῳ λέγει	1	On account of this he also says in another place	Paul’s audience would have understood that this Psalm refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “In another Psalm of David, he also says about the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1965	ACT	13	35	gl8s		καὶ…λέγει	1	he also says	David is the author of Psalm 16 from which this quotation is taken. Alternate translation: “David also says”
1966	ACT	13	35	hvt8	figs-metonymy	οὐ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	You will not allow your Holy One to see decay	The phrase see decay is a metonym for “decay.” Alternate translation: “You will not allow the body of your Holy One to rot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1967	ACT	13	35	ry97		οὐ δώσεις	1	You will not allow	David is speaking to God here.
1968	ACT	13	36	u8vh		ἰδίᾳ γενεᾷ	1	in his own generation	Alternate translation: “during his lifetime”
1969	ACT	13	36	m5wx		ὑπηρετήσας τῇ τοῦ Θεοῦ βουλῇ	1	having served the counsel of God	Alternate translation: “having done what God wanted him to do” or “after he had done what pleased God”
1970	ACT	13	36	rpb4	figs-euphemism	ἐκοιμήθη	1	fell asleep	This was a polite way to refer to death. Alternate translation: “he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1971	ACT	13	36	nwy9		προσετέθη πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας αὐτοῦ	1	was laid with his fathers	Alternate translation: “was buried with his ancestors who had died”
1972	ACT	13	36	la5s	figs-metonymy	εἶδεν διαφθοράν	1	saw decay	The phrase saw decay is a metonym for “his body decayed.” Alternate translation: “his body rotted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1973	ACT	13	37	bmw3		ὃν δὲ	1	But he whom	Alternate translation: “But Jesus whom”
1974	ACT	13	37	n9pl	figs-idiom	ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν	1	God raised up	Here, raised up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “God caused to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1975	ACT	13	37	j52x	figs-metonymy	οὐκ εἶδεν διαφθοράν	1	did not see decay	The phrase did not see decay is a way to say “his body did not decay.” Alternate translation: “did not rot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1976	ACT	13	38	yg35		γνωστὸν…ἔστω ὑμῖν	1	let it be known to you	Alternate translation: “know this” or “this is important for you to know”
1977	ACT	13	38	qy18		ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Paul uses the term brothers because they are his fellow-Jews and followers of Judaism. They are not Christian believers at this point. Alternate translation: “my fellow Israelites and other friends”
1978	ACT	13	38	t3i5	figs-activepassive	ὅτι διὰ τούτου, ὑμῖν ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν καταγγέλλεται, καὶ	1	that because of this, forgiveness of sins is being proclaimed to you, and freedom	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that we proclaim to you that your sins can be forgiven through Jesus, and you can be free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1979	ACT	13	38	w7y1	figs-abstractnouns	ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν	1	forgiveness of sins	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word forgiveness, you could express the same idea with the verb “to forgive.” Alternate translation: “that God can forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1980	ACT	13	39	g5h9	figs-activepassive	ἐν τούτῳ πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων δικαιοῦται	1	In this one every one who believes is justified	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Jesus justifies everyone who believes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1981	ACT	13	39	ki8q		τούτῳ	1		Here the term this one refers to Jesus.
1982	ACT	13	39	j6rr		ἐν τούτῳ πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων	1	In this one every one who believes	Alternate translation: “By him every person who believes” or “Every one who believes in him”
1983	ACT	13	40	y2kg	figs-explicit	βλέπετε	1	be careful that	It is implied that the thing they should be careful about is Paul’s message. Alternate translation: “give close attention to the things I have said so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1984	ACT	13	40	tt1x		τὸ εἰρημένον ἐν τοῖς προφήταις	1	the thing spoken about in the prophets	Alternate translation: “what the prophets spoke about”
1985	ACT	13	41	tqk5		ἴδετε, οἱ καταφρονηταί	1	Look, you despisers	Alternate translation: “Look, you who feel contempt” or “Look, you who ridicule”
1986	ACT	13	41	ky3s		θαυμάσατε	1	be astonished	Alternate translation: “be amazed” or “be shocked”
1987	ACT	13	41	ilh2		καὶ ἀφανίσθητε	1	and perish	Alternate translation: “and die”
1988	ACT	13	41	kk1j		ἔργον ἐργάζομαι ἐγὼ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν, ἔργον ὃ οὐ μὴ πιστεύσητε, ἐάν τις ἐκδιηγῆται ὑμῖν	1		In his message to the people in the synagogue, Paul quotes the prophet Habakkuk. Here the word I refers to God.
1989	ACT	13	41	dvn1		ἔργον ἐργάζομαι	1	am doing a work	Alternate translation: “am doing something”
1990	ACT	13	41	nm2q		ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν	1	in your days	Alternate translation: “during your lifetime”
1991	ACT	13	41	w6tq		ἔργον ὃ	1	A work that	Alternate translation: “I am doing something which”
1992	ACT	13	41	p4c2		ἐάν τις ἐκδιηγῆται ὑμῖν	1	even if someone would announce it to you	Alternate translation: “even if someone would tell you about it”
1993	ACT	13	42	ax8v		ἐξιόντων δὲ, αὐτῶν	1	And as they were leaving	Alternate translation: “When Paul and Barnabas were leaving”
1994	ACT	13	42	f3sw		παρεκάλουν	1	they begged them	Alternate translation: “the people begged them”
1995	ACT	13	42	y4p9	figs-metonymy	τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα	1	these same words	Here, words refers to the message that Paul had spoken. Alternate translation: “this same message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1996	ACT	13	43	a58z		λυθείσης δὲ τῆς συναγωγῆς	1	And when the synagogue meeting had ended	This could mean: (1) this restates “As Paul and Barnabas left” in verse 42 or (2) Paul and Barnabas left the meeting before it ended and this occurs later.
1997	ACT	13	43	sws7		προσηλύτων	1	proselytes	These proselytes were non-Jewish people who had converted to Judaism.
1998	ACT	13	43	q2aj		οἵτινες προσλαλοῦντες αὐτοῖς, ἔπειθον αὐτοὺς	1	who speaking to them, urged them	Alternate translation: “and Paul and Barnabas spoke to those people and urged them”
1999	ACT	13	43	fv15	figs-explicit	προσμένειν τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	to continue in the grace of God	It is implied that they believed Paul’s message that Jesus was the Messiah. Alternate translation: “to continue to trust that God kindly forgives people’s sins because of what Jesus did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2000	ACT	13	44	vq3y	figs-metonymy	σχεδὸν πᾶσα ἡ πόλις συνήχθη	1	almost the whole city was gathered together	The city represents the people in the city. This phrase is used to show the great response to the Lord’s word. Alternate translation: “almost all the people of the city were gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2001	ACT	13	44	yga7	figs-explicit	ἀκοῦσαι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	to hear the word of the Lord	It is implied that Paul and Barnabas were the ones who spoke the word of the Lord. Alternate translation: “to hear Paul and Barnabas speak about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2002	ACT	13	45	j4zq	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews	Here, Jews represents Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2003	ACT	13	45	qrh2	figs-metaphor	ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου	1	they were filled with jealousy	Here, jealousy is spoken of as if it were something that could fill up a person. Alternate translation: “they became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2004	ACT	13	45	nc5l		ἀντέλεγον	1	spoke against	Alternate translation: “contradicted” or “opposed”
2005	ACT	13	45	m1an	figs-activepassive	τοῖς ὑπὸ Παύλου λαλουμένοις	1	the things that were said by Paul	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2006	ACT	13	46	zvt5	figs-exclusive	ὑμῖν…ἀπωθεῖσθε…στρεφόμεθα	1		The first two instances of the word you are plural and refer to the Jews to whom Paul is speaking. Here the word we refers to Paul and Barnabas but not the crowd that was present. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2007	ACT	13	46	as6q	figs-explicit	ἦν ἀναγκαῖον	1	It was necessary for	This implies that God had commanded this be done. Alternate translation: “God commanded that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2008	ACT	13	46	jn55	figs-synecdoche	ὑμῖν…ἀναγκαῖον πρῶτον λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	necessary for the word of God first to be spoken to you	Here, word of God is a synecdoche for “message from God.” Alternate translation: “the message of God had to be spoken to you first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2009	ACT	13	46	d08v	figs-activepassive	ὑμῖν…ἀναγκαῖον πρῶτον λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “necessary that we speak the message from God to you first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2010	ACT	13	46	lly5	figs-metaphor	ἐπειδὴ ἀπωθεῖσθε αὐτὸν	1	Since you reject it	Their rejection of the word of God is spoken of as if it were something they pushed away. Alternate translation: “Since you reject the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2011	ACT	13	46	ms36		οὐκ ἀξίους κρίνετε ἑαυτοὺς τῆς αἰωνίου ζωῆς	1	judge yourselves unworthy of eternal life	Alternate translation: “seem to think you are not worthy of eternal life” or “act as though you are not worthy of eternal life”
2012	ACT	13	46	rf9k	figs-explicit	στρεφόμεθα εἰς τὰ ἔθνη	1	we will turn to the Gentiles	Paul and Barnabas were implying that they would preach to the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “we will leave you and start preaching to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2013	ACT	13	47	tx94	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1		Here the word us refers to Paul and Barnabas but not the crowd that was present. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2014	ACT	13	47	xbiw	figs-you	τέθεικά σε εἰς φῶς ἐθνῶν, τοῦ εἶναί σε εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς	1		Paul’s quotation is from the prophet Isaiah in the Old Testament. In the original passage, the word I refers to God and the word you is singular and refers to the Messiah. Here, Paul and Barnabas seem to be saying that the quotation also refers to their ministry. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
2015	ACT	13	47	v8au	figs-metaphor	εἰς φῶς	1	as a light	Here the truth about Jesus that Paul was preaching is spoken of as if it were a light that allowed people to see. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2016	ACT	13	47	t5sp	figs-abstractnouns	εἶναί…εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς	1	should be for salvation as far as the end of the earth	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word salvation, you could express the same idea with the verb “to save.” The phrase end refers to everywhere. Alternate translation: “should tell people everywhere in the world that I want to save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2017	ACT	13	48	e9ag	figs-metonymy	ἐδόξαζον τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	glorified the word of the Lord	Here, word refers to the message about Jesus that they had believed. Alternate translation: “praised God for the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2018	ACT	13	48	jct2	figs-activepassive	ὅσοι ἦσαν τεταγμένοι εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	as many as were appointed to eternal life	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as many as God appointed to eternal life” or “all the people whom God had chosen to receive eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2019	ACT	13	49	qh9z	figs-metonymy	διεφέρετο…ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου δι’ ὅλης τῆς χώρας	1	the word of the Lord was being spread throughout the whole region	Here, word refers to the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “and the message of Jesus was being spread through the whole region by those who believed spread the word of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2020	ACT	13	49	fpkr	figs-activepassive	διεφέρετο…ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου δι’ ὅλης τῆς χώρας	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “those who believed went everywhere in the region and told others about the message of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2021	ACT	13	50	eqi5		αὐτοὺς	1		Here the word them refers to Paul and Barnabas.
2022	ACT	13	50	u8rm	figs-synecdoche	οἱ…Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews	This probably refers to the leaders of the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2023	ACT	13	50	cf21		παρώτρυναν	1	stirred up	Alternate translation: “convinced” or “urged on”
2024	ACT	13	50	wmm5		τοὺς πρώτους	1	the leading men	Alternate translation: “the most important men”
2025	ACT	13	50	n7qe		ἐπήγειραν διωγμὸν ἐπὶ τὸν Παῦλον καὶ Βαρναβᾶν	1	a persecution arose against Paul and Barnabas	Alternate translation: “They convinced the important men and women to persecute Paul and Barnabas”
2026	ACT	13	50	cq9h		ἐξέβαλον αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν	1	threw them out from their boundaries	Alternate translation: “they removed Paul and Barnabas from their city”
2027	ACT	13	51	t4bv		ἦλθον εἰς Ἰκόνιον	1	Connecting Statement:	This ends Paul and Barnabas’ time in Antioch of Pisidia and they go to Iconium.
2028	ACT	13	51	abco		οἱ δὲ, ἐκτιναξάμενοι	1	But when they had shaken off	Alternate translation: “But after Paul and Silas shook off”
2029	ACT	13	51	xi1z	writing-symlanguage	οἱ…ἐκτιναξάμενοι τὸν κονιορτὸν τῶν ποδῶν ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς	1	when they had shaken off the dust from their feet against them	This was a symbolic act to indicate to the unbelieving people that God had rejected them and would punish them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
2030	ACT	13	52	dp5k		οἵ…μαθηταὶ	1	the disciples	Here, the disciples probably refers to the new believers in the Antioch of Pisidia that Paul and Silas just left.
2031	ACT	14	intro	rsg2			0		Acts 14 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter “The message of his grace” The message of Jesus is the message that God will show grace to those who believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]]) Zeus and Hermes The Gentiles in the Roman Empire worshiped many different false gods who do not really exist. Paul and Barnabas told them to believe in the “living God.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]]) Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter “We must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings.” Jesus told his followers before he died that everyone who followed him would suffer persecution. Paul is saying the same thing using different words.
2032	ACT	14	1	vh8u			0	General Information:	The story of Paul and Barnabas in Iconium continues.
2033	ACT	14	1	hk1z		ἐγένετο δὲ, ἐν Ἰκονίῳ	1	And it happened that Iconium	This begins a new event.
2034	ACT	14	1	f4sq	figs-explicit	λαλῆσαι οὕτως	1	spoke in such a way	It may be helpful to state that they spoke the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “spoke the message about Jesus powerfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2035	ACT	14	2	wc4x		οἱ…ἀπειθήσαντες Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews who were disobedient	This refers to a portion of the Jews who did not believe the message about Jesus.
2036	ACT	14	2	n2pp	figs-metaphor	ἐπήγειραν…τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	stirred up the souls of the Gentiles	Causing the Gentiles to become angry is spoken of as if calm waters were disturbed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2037	ACT	14	2	k8mv	figs-synecdoche	τὰς ψυχὰς	1	the souls	Here the word souls refers to the people. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2038	ACT	14	2	fu13		τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	the brothers	Here, brothers refers to Paul and Barnabas and the new believers.
2039	ACT	14	3	lp4v			0	General Information:	Here the word “He” refers to the Lord.
2040	ACT	14	3	a3gp		μὲν οὖν…διέτριψαν	1	So they stayed there	Paul and Barnabas stayed in Iconium to help the many people who had believed in Acts 14:1. So could be omitted if it adds confusion to the text. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless they stayed there”
2041	ACT	14	3	f2xh		τῷ μαρτυροῦντι τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ	1	who is testifying to the word of his grace	Alternate translation: “who demonstrated that the message about his grace was true”
2042	ACT	14	3	wcn5		τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ	1	to the word of his grace	Alternate translation: “about the message of the Lord’s grace”
2043	ACT	14	3	c2cv	figs-activepassive	διδόντι σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα γίνεσθαι διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν	1	by granting signs and wonders to be done by their hands	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “by enabling Paul and Barnabas to perform signs and wonders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2044	ACT	14	3	p9iq	figs-synecdoche	διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν	1	by their hands	Here, hands refers to the will and effort of these two men as guided by the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “by the ministry of Paul and Barnabas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2045	ACT	14	4	btu3	figs-metonymy	ἐσχίσθη…τὸ πλῆθος τῆς πόλεως	1	the population of the city was divided	Here, population of the city refers to the people in the city. Alternate translation: “most of the people of the city were divided” or “most of the people of the city did not agree with each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2046	ACT	14	4	smz5		ἦσαν σὺν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	were with the Jews	The first group mentioned did not agree with the message about grace. Alternate translation: “supported the Jews” or “agreed with the Jews”
2047	ACT	14	4	q1xc	figs-ellipsis	σὺν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις	1	with the apostles	The second group mentioned agreed with the message about grace. It may be helpful to restate the verb. Alternate translation: “sided with the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2048	ACT	14	4	mw9h		τοῖς ἀποστόλοις	1	the apostles	Luke refers to Paul and Barnabas. Here, apostles might be used in the general sense of “ones sent out.”
2049	ACT	14	5	s5h7			0	General Information:	Here the word “they” refers to Paul and Barnabas.
2050	ACT	14	5	q6g2		ὑβρίσαι καὶ λιθοβολῆσαι αὐτούς	1	to mistreat and stone them	Alternate translation: “to beat Paul and Barnabas and to kill them by throwing stones at them”
2051	ACT	14	6	tpl1	translate-names	τῆς Λυκαονίας	1	of Lycaonia	A district in Asia Minor (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2052	ACT	14	6	m5gv	translate-names	Λύστραν	1	Lystra	A city in Asia Minor south of Iconium and north of Derbe (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2053	ACT	14	6	tl4q	translate-names	Δέρβην	1	Derbe	Derbe is a city in Asia Minor south of Iconium and Lystra (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2054	ACT	14	7	z5nd		κἀκεῖ εὐαγγελιζόμενοι ἦσαν	1	and where they continued to proclaim the gospel	Alternate translation: “and where Paul and Barnabas continued to proclaim the good news”
2055	ACT	14	8	wb5k	writing-participants	τις ἀνὴρ…ἐκάθητο	1	a certain man sat	This phrase introduces a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2056	ACT	14	8	kz7d		ἀδύνατος…τοῖς ποσὶν	1	powerless in his feet	Alternate translation: “unable to move his legs” or “unable to walk on his feet”
2057	ACT	14	8	tca1		χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ	1	lame from the womb of his mother	Alternate translation: “having been born as a cripple”
2058	ACT	14	9	di49		ὃς ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ	1	He looked intently at him	Alternate translation: “Paul looked straight at the man”
2059	ACT	14	9	xak4	figs-abstractnouns	ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι	1	he has faith to be saved	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word faith, you can express it with the verb “believe”. Alternate translation: “he believed so that he could be healed” or “he believed so that he could be made well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2060	ACT	14	9	uwov	figs-activepassive	ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he believed that Jesus could heal him” or “he believed that Jesus could make him well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2061	ACT	14	10	v1kz		ἥλατο	1	he jumped up	This implies that the man’s legs were completely healed. Alternate translation: “he leaped in the air”
2062	ACT	14	11	axe6		ὃ ἐποίησεν Παῦλος	1	what Paul had done	This refers to Paul’s healing the crippled man.
2063	ACT	14	11	lvs9		ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν	1	they raised their voice	Here, raised their voice means to speak loudly. Alternate translation: “they spoke loudly” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom)
2064	ACT	14	11	d1gz	figs-explicit	οἱ θεοὶ…κατέβησαν πρὸς ἡμᾶς	1	The gods … have come down to us	A large number of people believed Paul and Barnabas were their pagan gods who had come down from heaven. Alternate translation: “The gods … have come down from heaven to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2065	ACT	14	11	x3bi		Λυκαονιστὶ	1	in the Lycaonian language	The people of Lystra spoke Lycaonian and also Greek. Alternate translation: “in their own Lycaonian language”
2066	ACT	14	11	rm85		ὁμοιωθέντες ἀνθρώποις	1	being made like men	These people believed that the gods needed to change their appearance in order to look like men.
2067	ACT	14	12	t7uu	translate-names	Δία	1	Zeus	Zeus was the king over all the other pagan gods. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2068	ACT	14	12	hh25	translate-names	Ἑρμῆν	1	Hermes	Hermes was the pagan god who brought messages to people from Zeus and the other gods. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2069	ACT	14	13	iz6r	figs-explicit	ὅ τε ἱερεὺς τοῦ Διὸς, τοῦ ὄντος πρὸ τῆς πόλεως…ἐνέγκας	1	And the priest of the temple of Zeus, which was in front of the city, brought	It may be helpful to include additional information about the priest. Alternate translation: “And there was a temple just outside the city where the people worshiped Zeus. When the priest who served in the temple heard what Paul and Barnabas had done, he brought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2070	ACT	14	13	v2a9		ταύρους καὶ στέμματα	1	oxen and wreaths	The oxen were to be sacrificed. The wreaths were either to crown Paul and Barnabas, or put on the oxen for sacrifice.
2071	ACT	14	13	iha1		ἐπὶ τοὺς πυλῶνας	1	to the gates	The gates of the cities were often used as a meeting place for the people of the city.
2072	ACT	14	13	ud37		ἤθελεν θύειν	1	wanting to sacrifice	Alternate translation: “wanting to offer sacrifice to Paul and Barnabas as the gods Zeus and Hermes”
2073	ACT	14	14	kt1f		οἱ ἀπόστολοι Βαρναβᾶς καὶ Παῦλος	1	the apostles, Barnabas and Paul	Luke is here probably using apostles in the general sense of “ones sent out.”
2074	ACT	14	14	kx43		διαρρήξαντες τὰ ἱμάτια ἑαυτῶν	1	they tore their clothing	This was a symbolic action to show that they were deeply distressed and upset that the crowd wanted to sacrifice to them.
2075	ACT	14	15	w4fd	figs-rquestion	ἄνδρες, τί ταῦτα ποιεῖτε?	1	Men, why are you doing these things?	Barnabas and Paul are rebuking the people for trying to sacrifice to them. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Men, you must not do these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2076	ACT	14	15	f8vc		ταῦτα ποιεῖτε	1	are you doing these things	Alternate translation: “are you worshiping us”
2077	ACT	14	15	u9pq		καὶ ἡμεῖς ὁμοιοπαθεῖς ἐσμεν ὑμῖν ἄνθρωποι	1	We also are men with the same feelings as you	By this statement, Barnabas and Paul are saying that they are not gods. Alternate translation: “We are just human beings like you. We are not gods!”
2078	ACT	14	15	n9e4		ὁμοιοπαθεῖς…ὑμῖν	1	with the same feelings as you	Alternate translation: “like you in every way”
2079	ACT	14	15	n98g	figs-metaphor	ἀπὸ τούτων τῶν ματαίων ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ Θεὸν ζῶντα	1	turn from these useless things to a living God	Here, turn from … to is a metaphor meaning to stop doing one thing and start doing something else. Alternate translation: “stop worshiping these false gods that cannot help you, and instead begin to worship the living God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2080	ACT	14	15	qr5b		Θεὸν ζῶντα	1	a living God	Alternate translation: “a God who truly exists” or “a God who lives”
2081	ACT	14	16	s2rn		ἐν ταῖς παρῳχημέναις γενεαῖς	1	In the generations gone by	Alternate translation: “In previous times” or “Until now”
2082	ACT	14	16	vpt5	figs-metaphor	πορεύεσθαι ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν	1	to go their own ways	Going in a way, or going along a path, is a metaphor for living one’s life. Alternate translation: “to live their lives the way they wanted to” or “to do whatever they wanted to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2083	ACT	14	17	kig8	figs-litotes	οὐκ ἀμάρτυρον αὑτὸν ἀφῆκεν	1	he did not leave himself without witness	If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative not … without, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “God has certainly left a witness” or “God has indeed testified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2084	ACT	14	17	ps9z	figs-metonymy	ἐμπιπλῶν τροφῆς καὶ εὐφροσύνης τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν	1	filling your hearts with food and gladness	Here, your hearts refers to the people. Alternate translation: “giving you enough to eat and things about which to be happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2085	ACT	14	18	ut73		μόλις κατέπαυσαν τοὺς ὄχλους τοῦ μὴ θύειν αὐτοῖς	1	they barely restrained the crowds from sacrificing to them	Paul and Barnabas stopped the multitude from sacrificing to them, but it was difficult to do so.
2086	ACT	14	18	la43		μόλις κατέπαυσαν	1	they barely restrained	Alternate translation: “had difficulty preventing”
2087	ACT	14	19	wmc2	figs-explicit	πείσαντες τοὺς ὄχλους	1	persuaded the crowds	It my be helpful to explicitly state what they persuaded the crowds to do. Alternate translation: “persuaded the people not to believe Paul and Barnabas, and to turn against them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2088	ACT	14	19	xbv3		τοὺς ὄχλους	1	the crowds	These crowds may not be the same group as the “multitude” in the previous verse. Some time had passed, and this might be a different group that gathered together.
2089	ACT	14	19	t8mg		νομίζοντες αὐτὸν τεθνηκέναι	1	thinking him to be dead	Alternate translation: “because they thought that he was already dead”
2090	ACT	14	20	pan3		τῶν μαθητῶν	1	the disciples	These disciples were new believers in the city of Lystra.
2091	ACT	14	20	aqx3		εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὴν πόλιν	1	he entered into the city	Alternate translation: “Paul re-entered Lystra with the believers”
2092	ACT	14	20	e2y9		ἐξῆλθεν σὺν τῷ Βαρναβᾷ εἰς Δέρβην	1	he went with Barnabas to Derbe	Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas went to the city of Derbe”
2093	ACT	14	21	ykt4		τὴν πόλιν ἐκείνην	1	in that city	Alternate translation: “in Derbe” (Acts 14:20)
2094	ACT	14	22	rh8q	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1		Here the word us includes Paul, Barnabas, and the believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2095	ACT	14	22	ek9l	figs-synecdoche	ἐπιστηρίζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν μαθητῶν	1	They were strengthening the souls of the disciples	Here, souls refers to the disciples. This emphasizes their inner thoughts and beliefs. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas urged the believers to continue to believe the message about Jesus” or “Paul and Barnabas urged the believers to continue to grow strong in their relationship with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2096	ACT	14	22	zkd2		παρακαλοῦντες ἐμμένειν τῇ πίστει	1	and encouraging them to continue in the faith	Alternate translation: “and encouraging the believers to keep trusting in Jesus”
2097	ACT	14	22	d9ic	writing-quotations	καὶ ὅτι διὰ πολλῶν θλίψεων, δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	and saying, “It is necessary for us to enter into the kingdom of God through many afflictions.”	Some version translate this as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “and saying that we must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
2098	ACT	14	22	wu1c	figs-exclusive	δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν	1	It is necessary for us to enter	Paul includes his hearers, so the word us is inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2099	ACT	14	23	pk5l		χειροτονήσαντες…παρέθεντο…πεπιστεύκεισαν	1		The first two occurrences of they here refer to Paul and Barnabas. The third occurrence of they refers to the people that Paul and Barnabas had led to the Lord.
2100	ACT	14	23	mqp9		χειροτονήσαντες δὲ αὐτοῖς κατ’ ἐκκλησίαν πρεσβυτέρους	1	And when they had appointed for them elders in every church	Alternate translation: “And when Paul and Barnabas had appointed leaders in each new group of believers”
2101	ACT	14	23	nd87		παρέθεντο αὐτοὺς	1	they entrusted them	This could mean: (1) “Paul and Barnabas entrusted the elders they had appointed” or (2) “Paul and Barnabas entrusted the leaders and other believers”
2102	ACT	14	23	ls62		εἰς ὃν πεπιστεύκεισαν	1	in whom they had believed	Who they refers to depends on your choice for the meaning of “them” in the previous note (either elders or leaders and other believers).
2103	ACT	14	25	t513	figs-metonymy	καὶ λαλήσαντες ἐν Πέργῃ τὸν λόγον	1	And when they had spoken the word in Perga	Here, word is a metonym for “message of God.” Alternate translation: “And when they had spoken the message about Jesus in Perga” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2104	ACT	14	25	h8sh		κατέβησαν εἰς Ἀττάλιαν	1	they went down to Attalia	The phrase went down is used here because Attalia is lower in elevation than Perga.
2105	ACT	14	26	f2cg		ὅθεν ἦσαν παραδεδομένοι τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	where they had been commended to the grace of God	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “where believers and leaders in Antioch had commended Paul and Barnabas to the grace of God” or “where the people of Antioch prayed that God would care for and protect Paul and Barnabas”
2106	ACT	14	27	vcd3		παραγενόμενοι…ἀνήγγελλον…αὐτῶν…ἤνοιξεν	1		Here the words they and them refer to Paul and Barnabas. The word he refers to God.
2107	ACT	14	27	i9dv		συναγαγόντες τὴν ἐκκλησίαν	1	gathered together the church	Alternate translation: “called the local believers to meet together”
2108	ACT	14	27	b4id	figs-metaphor	ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως	1	he had opened a door of faith for the Gentiles	God’s enabling the Gentiles to believe is spoken of as if he had opened a door that had prevented them from entering into faith. Alternate translation: “God had made it possible for the Gentiles to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2109	ACT	14	28	abcq	figs-litotes	χρόνον οὐκ ὀλίγον	1	for not a little time	This phrase is a litotes. The words not and a little together mean “a lot.” Alternate translation: “for a long time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2110	ACT	15	intro	h917			0		Acts 15 General Notes Structure and formatting Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 15:16-17. The meeting that Luke describes in this chapter is commonly called the “Jerusalem Council.” This was a time when many church leaders got together to decide if believers needed to obey the whole law of Moses. Special concepts in this chapter Brothers In this chapter Luke begins to use the word “brothers” to refer to fellow Christians instead of fellow Jews. Obeying the law of Moses Some believers wanted the Gentiles to be circumcised because God had told Abraham and Moses that everyone who wanted to belong to him had to be circumcised and that this was a law that would always exist. But Paul and Barnabas had seen God give uncircumcised Gentiles the gift of the Holy Spirit, so they did not want the Gentiles to be circumcised. Both groups went to Jerusalem to have the church leaders decide what they should do. “Abstain from things sacrificed to idols, blood, things strangled, and from sexual immorality” It is possible that the church leaders decided on these laws so that Jews and Gentiles could not only live together but eat the same foods together.
2111	ACT	15	1	qck6			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul and Barnabas are still in Antioch when there is a dispute about the Gentiles and circumcision.
2112	ACT	15	1	su66	figs-explicit	τινες	1	certain ones	You can make explicit that these men were Jews who believed in Christ. Alternate translation: “some men who believed in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2113	ACT	15	1	p3k9		κατελθόντες ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰουδαίας	1	coming down from Judea	The phrase coming down is used here because Judea is higher in elevation than Antioch.
2114	ACT	15	1	zi1n	figs-explicit	ἐδίδασκον τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	taught the brothers	Here, brothers stands for believers in Christ. It is implied that they were in Antioch. Alternate translation: “taught the believers at Antioch” or “were teaching the believers at Antioch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2115	ACT	15	1	pm8h	figs-activepassive	ἐὰν μὴ περιτμηθῆτε τῷ ἔθει τῷ Μωϋσέως, οὐ δύνασθε σωθῆναι	1	Unless you are circumcised in the custom of Moses, you are not able to be saved	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Unless someone circumcises you in the custom of Moses, God cannot save you” or “God will not save you from your sins unless you receive circumcision according to the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2116	ACT	15	2	abcr	figs-litotes	στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως οὐκ ὀλίγης	1	not a little dispute and debate	This phrase is a litotes. The words not and a little together mean “a lot.” Alternate translation: “a sharp dispute and debate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2117	ACT	15	2	f9nd	figs-abstractnouns	στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως οὐκ ὀλίγης	1	not a little dispute and debate	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words dispute and debate, you could express the same ideas with verbs and where the men came from can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “strongly confronted and debated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2118	ACT	15	2	ek6a		ἀναβαίνειν…εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	to go up … in Jerusalem	Jerusalem was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for Israelites to speak of going up to Jerusalem.
2119	ACT	15	2	z983		τοῦ ζητήματος τούτου	1	this question	Alternate translation: “this issue”
2120	ACT	15	3	av5y	figs-activepassive	οἱ μὲν οὖν προπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	Therefore, the ones who had been sent by the church	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Therefore the community of believers sent them from Antioch to Jerusalem, and they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2121	ACT	15	3	aia5	figs-metonymy	προπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	who had been sent by the church	Here, church refers to the people that were a part of the church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2122	ACT	15	3	i5kd		διήρχοντο τήν τε Φοινίκην καὶ Σαμάρειαν, ἐκδιηγούμενοι	1	passed through both Phoenicia and Samaria announcing	The words passed through and announcing indicate they spent some time in different places sharing in detail what God was doing.
2123	ACT	15	3	rk37	figs-abstractnouns	ἐκδιηγούμενοι τὴν ἐπιστροφὴν τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	announcing the conversion of the Gentiles	Here, conversion means the Gentiles were rejecting their false gods and believing in God. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word conversion, you could express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “announced to the community of believers in those places that Gentiles were believing in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2124	ACT	15	3	nje7	figs-metaphor	ἐποίουν χαρὰν μεγάλην πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς	1	they brought great joy to all the brothers	Their message causing the brothers to be joyful is spoken of as if joy were an object that they brought to the brothers. Alternate translation: “what they said caused their fellow believers to rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2125	ACT	15	3	bbd4		πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς	1	to all the brothers	Here, brothers refers to fellow believers.
2126	ACT	15	4	ej1r	figs-activepassive	παρεδέχθησαν ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας, καὶ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων	1	they were welcomed by the church, and the apostles, and the elders	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the apostles, the elders, and the rest of the community of believers welcomed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2127	ACT	15	4	a2x1		μετ’ αὐτῶν	1	with them	Alternate translation: “through them”
2128	ACT	15	5	efe5		αὐτοὺς, παραγγέλλειν	1		Here both occurrences of the word them refers to non-Jewish believers who were not circumcised and did not keep the Old Testament laws of God.
2129	ACT	15	5	k6k7		δέ τινες	1	But certain ones	Here Luke uses the word But to contrast those who believe that salvation is only in Jesus to others who believe salvation is by Jesus yet also believe that circumcision is required for salvation.
2130	ACT	15	5	b9nt		τηρεῖν τὸν νόμον Μωϋσέως	1	to keep the law of Moses	Alternate translation: “to obey the law of Moses”
2131	ACT	15	6	ugu6		ἰδεῖν περὶ τοῦ λόγου τούτου	1	to see about this matter	The church leaders decided to discuss whether or not Gentiles needed to be circumcised and obey the law of Moses in order for God to save them from their sins.
2132	ACT	15	7	wct8	figs-you	αὐτούς…ὑμεῖς…ὑμῖν	1		The word them refers to apostles and elders (Acts 15:6). Both occurrences of you are plural and refer to the apostles and elders present. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
2133	ACT	15	7	hxu9			0	Connecting Statement:	Peter begins to speak to the apostles and elders who met to discuss whether Gentiles had to receive circumcision and keep the law (Acts 15:5-6).
2134	ACT	15	7	a6q9		ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Peter is addressing all of the believers who were present.
2135	ACT	15	7	s3wb	figs-synecdoche	διὰ τοῦ στόματός μου	1	by my mouth	Here, my mouth refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “from me” or “by me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2136	ACT	15	7	yer1		ἀκοῦσαι τὰ ἔθνη	1	the Gentiles to hear	Alternate translation: “that the Gentiles would hear”
2137	ACT	15	7	b5s8	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ εὐαγγελίου	1	the word of the gospel	Here, word stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2138	ACT	15	8	m1xc	figs-metonymy	καρδιογνώστης	1	who knows the heart	Here, heart refers to the “minds” or “inner beings.” Alternate translation: “who knows the people’s minds” or “who knows what people think” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2139	ACT	15	8	p6d2		ἐμαρτύρησεν αὐτοῖς	1	testified to them	Alternate translation: “witnesses to the Gentiles”
2140	ACT	15	8	i1gc		δοὺς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον	1	giving them the Holy Spirit	Alternate translation: “causing the Holy Spirit to come upon them”
2141	ACT	15	8	abcs	figs-ellipsis	καθὼς καὶ ἡμῖν	1	just as also to us	Here Luke expects his readers to understand the words “he gave” that he leaves out. Alternate translation: “just as he also gave to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2142	ACT	15	8	wlzx	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1		Here, us is plural and refers to Peter, the apostles and elders, and all Jewish believers in general. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2143	ACT	15	9	zs2g		οὐδὲν διέκρινεν	1	he did not distinguish	God did not treat Jewish believers different from Gentile believers.
2144	ACT	15	9	ase1	figs-metaphor	τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν	1	having made their hearts clean by faith	God’s forgiving the Gentile believers’ sins is spoken as though he literally cleaned their hearts. Alternate translation: “forgiving their sins because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2145	ACT	15	9	yi8r	figs-metonymy	τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν	1		Here, heart stands for the person’s inner being. Alternate translation: “forgiving them because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2146	ACT	15	10	ha45	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν…ἡμεῖς	1		Peter includes his audience by his use of our and we. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2147	ACT	15	10	rfr4		νῦν	1	Now	Here, Now does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
2148	ACT	15	10	zaz6	figs-rquestion	τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν, ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν, ὃν οὔτε οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν οὔτε ἡμεῖς ἰσχύσαμεν βαστάσαι?	1	why are you testing God, to put a yoke upon the neck of the disciples which neither our fathers nor we were able to bear?	Peter uses this question to convict the disciples. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “do not test God by putting a yoke on the neck of the non-Jewish believers which we Jews were not able to bear!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2149	ACT	15	10	qpyd	figs-metaphor	ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν	1		Peter uses a word picture to tell the Jewish believers they should not require the non-Jewish believers to perform circumcision to be saved. Alternate translation: “putting a burden on the non-Jewish believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2150	ACT	15	10	bfd5		οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	our fathers	Here, our fathers refers to their Jewish ancestors.
2151	ACT	15	11	q28c	figs-activepassive	ἀλλὰ διὰ τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ, πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι καθ’ ὃν τρόπον κἀκεῖνοι	1	But we believe to be saved through the grace of the Lord Jesus, and they according to that same manner	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But we believe the Lord Jesus shall save us by his grace, just as he saved the non-Jewish believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2152	ACT	15	12	um1p		αὐτῶν	1		Here the word them refers to Paul and Barnabas.
2153	ACT	15	12	d1uc		πᾶν τὸ πλῆθος	1	all the crowd	See how you translated this phrase in (Acts 15:6) Alternate translation: “everyone” or “the whole group”
2154	ACT	15	12	uks6		ἐποίησεν ὁ Θεὸς	1	God had worked	Alternate translation: “God had done” or “God had caused”
2155	ACT	15	13	vb25		αὐτοὺς	1		Here the word they refers to Paul and Barnabas (Acts 15:12).
2156	ACT	15	13	l7mp			0	Connecting Statement:	James begins to speak to the apostles and elders (Acts 15:6).
2157	ACT	15	13	pl6m		ἀδελφοί, ἀκούσατέ	1	brothers, listen	James was probably speaking only to men. Alternate translation: “fellow believers, listen”
2158	ACT	15	14	abct		ἐπεσκέψατο, λαβεῖν ἐξ ἐθνῶν	1	concerned himself to take from the Gentiles	Alternate translation: “graciously helped the Gentiles by taking out of them”
2159	ACT	15	14	s9dn		λαβεῖν ἐξ ἐθνῶν λαὸν	1	to take from them a people	Alternate translation: “so that he might choose from among them a people”
2160	ACT	15	14	pnr9	figs-metonymy	τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ	1	for his name	Here, name refers to God. Alternate translation: “for himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2161	ACT	15	15	ibb2			0	Connecting Statement:	In verses 16-18, James quotes the prophet Amos from the Old Testament.
2162	ACT	15	15	am6y	figs-metonymy	τούτῳ συμφωνοῦσιν οἱ λόγοι τῶν προφητῶν	1	this agrees with the words of the prophets	Here, words stands for a message. Alternate translation: “what the prophets said agrees” or “the prophets agree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2163	ACT	15	15	nbi1		τούτῳ συμφωνοῦσιν	1	this agrees with	Alternate translation: “this confirms”
2164	ACT	15	15	j4f5	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	just as it is written	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “just as they wrote” or “just as the prophet Amos wrote long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2165	ACT	15	16	h9um		ἀναστρέψω…ἀνοικοδομήσω…ἀνοικοδομήσω	1		Here I refers to God who spoke through the words of his prophet.
2166	ACT	15	16	f5wf	figs-metaphor	ἀνοικοδομήσω τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν, καὶ τὰ κατεστραμμένα αὐτῆς, ἀνοικοδομήσω καὶ ἀνορθώσω αὐτήν	1	I will build again the tent of David, which has fallen down; and I will rebuild its ruins and will restore it	This speaks of God’s again choosing one of David’s descendants to rule over his people as though he were setting up a tent again after it fell down. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2167	ACT	15	16	ist8	figs-metonymy	τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ	1	the tent of David	Here, tent stands for David’s family. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2168	ACT	15	17	sm79	figs-metaphor	ἐκζητήσωσιν οἱ κατάλοιποι τῶν ἀνθρώπων τὸν Κύριον	1	the remnant of men may seek the Lord	This speaks about people wanting to obey God and learn more about him as if they were literally looking for him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2169	ACT	15	17	hkw1	figs-gendernotations	κατάλοιποι τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	remnant of men	Here, men includes males and females. Alternate translation: “remnant of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2170	ACT	15	17	pe4l	figs-123person	ἐκζητήσωσιν…τὸν Κύριον	1	may seek the Lord	God is speaking about himself in the third person. Alternate translation: “may seek me, the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
2171	ACT	15	17	tu21	figs-activepassive	καὶ πάντα τὰ ἔθνη, ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς	1	including all the Gentiles upon whom my name has been called upon them	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “including all the Gentiles who belong to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2172	ACT	15	17	c8gm	figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομά μου	1	my name	Here, my name stands for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2173	ACT	15	18	tr27	figs-activepassive	γνωστὰ	1	known	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that people have known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2174	ACT	15	19	pyb9	figs-explicit	μὴ παρενοχλεῖν τοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν ἐθνῶν, ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν	1	not to trouble those from the Gentiles who are turning to God	You can make explicit in what way James does not want to trouble the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “we should not require the Gentiles who are believing in God to become circumcised and to obey the laws of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2175	ACT	15	19	vr6u	figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν	1	who are turning to God	A person who starts obeying God is spoken of as if the person is physically turning towards God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2176	ACT	15	20	wx8f		ἀπέχεσθαι τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων, καὶ τῆς πορνείας, καὶ τοῦ πνικτοῦ, καὶ τοῦ αἵματος	1	to keep away from the pollution of idols, and sexual immorality, and things that are strangled, and blood	Sexual immorality, strangling animals, and consuming blood were often part of ceremonies to worship idols and false gods.
2177	ACT	15	20	n6f2	figs-explicit	ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων	1	pollution of idols	This phrase possibly refers to eating the meat of an animal that someone has sacrificed to an idol or to anything to do with idol worship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2178	ACT	15	20	j2rl	figs-explicit	τοῦ πνικτοῦ, καὶ τοῦ αἵματος	1	things that are strangled, and blood	God did not allow Jews to eat meat that still had the blood in it. Also, even earlier in Moses’ writings in Genesis, God had forbidden the drinking of blood. Therefore, they could not eat an animal that someone strangled because the blood was not properly drained from the body of the animal. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2179	ACT	15	21	si1h	figs-explicit	Μωϋσῆς γὰρ ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς κατὰ πᾶν Σάββατον ἀναγινωσκόμενος.	1	For Moses has in every city, from ancient generations, those proclaiming him, being read in the synagogues every Sabbath	James is implying that Gentiles know how important these rules are because Jews preach them in every city where there is a synagogue. It also implies the Gentiles can go to the teachers from the synagogues to learn more about these rules. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2180	ACT	15	21	zd7t	figs-metonymy	Μωϋσῆς	1	Moses	Here, Moses represents the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2181	ACT	15	21	wp1s	figs-activepassive	Μωϋσῆς…ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει	1	Moses has in every city, from ancient generations, those proclaiming him	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “there are Jews in every city, from ancient generations, who are proclaiming the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2182	ACT	15	21	xg5n	figs-hyperbole	κατὰ πόλιν	1	in every city	The word every here is a generalization. Alternate translation: “in many cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2183	ACT	15	22	hp6j	figs-metonymy	ὅλῃ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	the whole church	Here, church refers to the people who are a part of the church in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the church in Jerusalem” or “the whole community of believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2184	ACT	15	22	c711	translate-names	Ἰούδαν τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν	1	Judas called Barsabbas	Judas is the name of a man. Barsabbas is a second name that people called him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2185	ACT	15	23	e4g2		οἱ ἀπόστολοι καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι, ἀδελφοὶ, τοῖς κατὰ τὴν Ἀντιόχειαν, καὶ Συρίαν, καὶ Κιλικίαν, ἀδελφοῖς τοῖς ἐξ ἐθνῶν, χαίρειν	1	The apostles and the elders, brothers, to those throughout Antioch and Syria and Cilicia, who are brothers from among the Gentiles. Greetings	This is the introduction of the letter. Your language may have a way of introducing the author of the letter and to whom it is written. Alternate translation: “This letter is from your brothers, the apostles and elders. We are writing to you Gentile believers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings to you” or “To our Gentile brothers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings from the apostles and elders, your brothers”
2186	ACT	15	23	kp51		ἀδελφοὶ…ἀδελφοῖς	1	brothers … brothers	Here both instances of the word brothers refer to fellow believers. By using these words, the apostles and elders assure the Gentile believers that they accept them as fellow believers.
2187	ACT	15	23	php8	translate-names	Κιλικίαν	1	Cilicia	Cilicia is the name of a province on the coast in Asia Minor north of the Island of Cyprus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2188	ACT	15	24	g8m9	figs-exclusive	ὑμᾶς…οὐ διεστειλάμεθα	1		Here us and we refer to the believers in the church in Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and Acts 15:22)
2189	ACT	15	24	p1tl		ὅτι τινὲς	1	that certain ones	Alternate translation: “that some men”
2190	ACT	15	24	kh16		οἷς οὐ διεστειλάμεθα	1	who were not ordered by us	Alternate translation: “even though we gave no orders for them to go”
2191	ACT	15	24	bxq8	figs-synecdoche	ἐτάραξαν ὑμᾶς λόγοις ἀνασκευάζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν	1	to disturb you with teachings that are upsetting your souls	Here, souls refers to the people. Alternate translation: “to teach things that have troubled you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2192	ACT	15	25	c3dl		ἐκλεξαμένοις ἄνδρας	1	chosen men	The men they sent were Judas called Barsabbas and Silas (Acts 15:22).
2193	ACT	15	26	t7vw	figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	for the name of our Lord Jesus Christ	Here, name refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “because they believe in our Lord Jesus Christ” or “because they serve our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2194	ACT	15	27	j1jb	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the word we refers to the leaders and believers in the church in Jerusalem (Acts 15:22). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2195	ACT	15	27	xw8l	figs-explicit	αὐτοὺς διὰ λόγου ἀπαγγέλλοντας τὰ αὐτά	1	they are reporting to you the same thing in words	This phrase emphasizes that Judas and Silas will say the same things that the apostles and elders had written. Alternate translation: “they themselves will tell you the same things about which we have written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2196	ACT	15	28	l9z6	figs-metaphor	μηδὲν πλέον ἐπιτίθεσθαι ὑμῖν βάρος, πλὴν τούτων τῶν ἐπάναγκες	1	to be laid upon you no greater burden than these necessary things	This speaks about laws that people need to obey as if they were objects that people carry on their shoulders. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2197	ACT	15	29	nt7s		εἰδωλοθύτων	1	things sacrificed to idols	This means they are not allowed to eat the meat of an animal that someone sacrifices to an idol.
2198	ACT	15	29	vcc6	figs-explicit	αἵματος	1	blood	This refers to drinking blood or eating meat from which the blood has not been drained. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2199	ACT	15	29	rt55		πνικτῶν	1	things strangled	A strangled animal was killed but its blood was not drained.
2200	ACT	15	29	buy9		ἔρρωσθε	1	Farewell	The word Farewell announces the end of the letter. Alternate translation: “Goodbye”
2201	ACT	15	30	khi8			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas leave for Antioch.
2202	ACT	15	30	c3uk		οἱ μὲν οὖν ἀπολυθέντες, κατῆλθον εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν	1	So when they were dismissed, they came down to Antioch	The word they refers to Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas. Alternate translation: “So when the four men were dismissed, they came down to Antioch”
2203	ACT	15	30	usz6	figs-activepassive	οἱ…ἀπολυθέντες	1	when they were dismissed	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when the apostles and elders dismissed the four men” or “when the believers in Jerusalem sent them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2204	ACT	15	30	t55a		κατῆλθον εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν	1	they came down to Antioch	The phrase came down is used here because Antioch is lower in elevation than Jerusalem.
2205	ACT	15	31	k1mr		ἐχάρησαν	1	they rejoiced	Alternate translation: “the believers in Antioch rejoiced”
2206	ACT	15	31	e4gf	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπὶ τῇ παρακλήσει	1	because of the encouragement	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word encouragement, you could express the same idea with the verb “encourage.” Alternate translation: “because what the apostles and elders wrote encouraged them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2207	ACT	15	32	r65l		καὶ αὐτοὶ προφῆται ὄντες	1	also being prophets themselves	Prophets were teachers authorized by God to speak for him. Alternate translation: “because they were also prophets” or “who were also prophets”
2208	ACT	15	32	e2en		τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	the brothers	Alternate translation: “the fellow believers”
2209	ACT	15	32	j99g	figs-metaphor	ἐπεστήριξαν	1	strengthened them	Helping someone to depend even more on Jesus is spoken of as if they were making them physically stronger. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2210	ACT	15	33	y2ls			0	Connecting Statement:	Judas and Silas return to Jerusalem while Paul and Barnabas remain in Antioch.
2211	ACT	15	33	v7pj	figs-metaphor	ποιήσαντες δὲ χρόνον	1	And after they had spent time there	This speaks about time as if it were a commodity that a person could spend. The word they refers to Judas and Silas. Alternate translation: “And after they stayed there for a while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2212	ACT	15	33	v6im	figs-activepassive	ἀπελύθησαν μετ’ εἰρήνης ἀπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	they were sent away with peace from the brothers	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the brothers sent Judas and Silas back in peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2213	ACT	15	33	wzw4		τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	the brothers	Here, the brothers refers to the believers in Antioch.
2214	ACT	15	33	xv3h		πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστείλαντας αὐτούς	1	to those who had sent them	See how you translated this in (Acts 15:22) Alternate translation: “to the believers in Jerusalem who sent Judas and Silas”
2215	ACT	15	35	e7s4	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	the word of the Lord	Here, word stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2216	ACT	15	36	k6c6			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul and Barnabas go on separate journeys.
2217	ACT	15	36	i1n5		ἐπιστρέψαντες δὴ	1	Returning, then	Alternate translation: “On our way back to Antioch” or “As we are going back”
2218	ACT	15	36	ib2j		ἐπισκεψώμεθα τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	let us visit the brothers	Alternate translation: “let us care for the brothers” or “we should offer to help the believers”
2219	ACT	15	36	ua1f	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	the word of the Lord	Here, word stands for the message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2220	ACT	15	36	y9i9		πῶς ἔχουσιν	1	how they are	They want to learn about the current condition of the brothers and how they are holding on to God’s truth. Alternate translation: “to learn how they are doing”
2221	ACT	15	38	a5nn	figs-litotes	Παῦλος…ἠξίου…μὴ συνπαραλαμβάνειν τοῦτον	1	Paul thought it wise not to take along him	The words wise not are used to say the opposite of wise. Alternate translation: “Paul thought that taking Mark along would be foolish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2222	ACT	15	38	ht3k		Παμφυλίας	1	Pamphylia	Pamphylia was a province in Asia Minor. See how you translated this in Acts 2:10.
2223	ACT	15	38	ln7w		μὴ συνελθόντα αὐτοῖς εἰς τὸ ἔργον	1	did not go with them in the work	Alternate translation: “did not continue to work with them” or “did not continue to serve with them”
2224	ACT	15	39	u97a	figs-abstractnouns	ἐγένετο δὲ παροξυσμὸς, ὥστε ἀποχωρισθῆναι αὐτοὺς ἀπ’ ἀλλήλων	1	And there arose a sharp disagreement, so as to separate them from each other	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word disagreement, you could express the same idea with the verb “disagree.” Alternate translation: “And they so strongly disagreed with each other that they separated from each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2225	ACT	15	40	l2uq	figs-activepassive	παραδοθεὶς τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Κυρίου ὑπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	after he had been entrusted by the brothers to the grace of the Lord	To entrust to someone means to place the care and responsibility for someone or something to another person. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “after the believers in Antioch entrusted Paul to the grace of the Lord” or “after the believers in Antioch prayed for the Lord to take care of Paul and show kindness to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2226	ACT	15	41	e3ym	figs-explicit	διήρχετο	1	he went through	The previous sentence implies that Silas was with Paul. Alternate translation: “they went through” or “Paul and Silas went all around in” or “Paul took Silas and went throughout” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2227	ACT	15	41	t81z		τὴν Συρίαν καὶ τὴν Κιλικίαν	1	Syria and Cilicia	Syria and Cilicia are provinces or areas in Asia Minor, near the island of Cyprus.
2228	ACT	15	41	tbv3	figs-metaphor	ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας	1	strengthening the churches	Encouraging the believers in the churches is spoken of as though Paul and Silas were making the believers physically stronger. Alternate translation: “encouraging the believers in the churches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2229	ACT	15	41	s7yf	figs-metonymy	ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας	1		The word churches refers to the groups of believers in Syria and Cilicia. Alternate translation: “helping the community of believers to depend even more in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2230	ACT	16	intro	e7z2			0		Acts 16 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter Timothy’s circumcision Paul circumcised Timothy because they were telling the message of Jesus to Jews and Gentiles. Paul wanted the Jews to know that he respected the law of Moses even though the church leaders in Jerusalem had decided that Christians did not need to be circumcised. The woman who had a spirit of divination Most people want very much to know the future, but the law of Moses said that speaking with the spirits of dead people to learn about the future is a sin. This woman seems to have been able to tell the future very well. She was a slave, and her masters made much money from her work. Paul wanted her to stop sinning, so he told the spirit to leave her. Luke does not say that she began to follow Jesus or tell us anything more about her.
2231	ACT	16	1	km5q	figs-go	κατήντησεν…καὶ	1	Paul also came down	This continues the missionary journeys of Paul with Silas. Here, came can be translated as “went.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2232	ACT	16	1	f49m	writing-background	μαθητής τις ἦν ἐκεῖ ὀνόματι Τιμόθεος, υἱὸς γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς, πατρὸς δὲ Ἕλληνος	1		Timothy is introduced into the story and joins Paul and Silas. Verses 1 and 2 give background information about Timothy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2233	ACT	16	1	d4ka		Δέρβην	1	Derbe	Derbe is the name of a city in Asia Minor. See how you translated it in Acts 14:6.
2234	ACT	16	1	u3vr		ἰδοὺ	1	behold	The word behold alerts us to a new person in the narrative. Your language may have a way of doing this.
2235	ACT	16	1	wxl8	figs-ellipsis	γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς	1	a believing Jewish woman	The words “in Christ” are understood. Alternate translation: “a Jewish woman who believed in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2236	ACT	16	2	t1lu	figs-activepassive	ὃς ἐμαρτυρεῖτο ὑπὸ τῶν…ἀδελφῶν	1	He was well spoken of by the brothers	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “The brothers spoke well of him” or “Timothy had a good reputation among the brothers” or “The brothers said good things about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2237	ACT	16	2	rez2		ὑπὸ τῶν…ἀδελφῶν	1	by the brothers	Here, brothers refers to believers. Alternate translation: “by the believers”
2238	ACT	16	3	p6z8		περιέτεμεν αὐτὸν	1	he circumcised him	It is possible that Paul himself circumcised Timothy, but it is more likely that he had someone else circumcise Timothy.
2239	ACT	16	3	za93		διὰ τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς ὄντας ἐν τοῖς τόποις ἐκείνοις	1	because of the Jews who were in those places	Alternate translation: “because of the Jews living in the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling”
2240	ACT	16	3	hk2l	figs-explicit	ᾔδεισαν γὰρ ἅπαντες, ὅτι Ἕλλην ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ ὑπῆρχεν	1	for they all knew that his father was a Greek	Since Greek men did not have their sons circumcised, the Jews would have known Timothy was not circumcised, and they would have rejected Paul and Timothy before hearing their message about Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2241	ACT	16	4	n46i		διεπορεύοντο…παρεδίδοσαν	1		The word they here refers to Paul, Silas (Acts 15:40), and Timothy (Acts 16:3).
2242	ACT	16	4	bu6r		αὐτοῖς φυλάσσειν	1	for them to keep	Alternate translation: “for the church members to obey” or “for the believers to obey”
2243	ACT	16	4	gpi3	figs-activepassive	τὰ κεκριμένα ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων καὶ πρεσβυτέρων τῶν ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις	1	that had been decided by the apostles and elders who were in Jerusalem	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that the apostles and elders in Jerusalem had written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2244	ACT	16	5	q8v9	figs-activepassive	αἱ…ἐκκλησίαι ἐστερεοῦντο τῇ πίστει, καὶ ἐπερίσσευον τῷ ἀριθμῷ καθ’ ἡμέραν	1	the churches were being strengthened in the faith and were increasing in number each day	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the believers became stronger in their faith, and there were more and more people becoming believers every day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2245	ACT	16	5	lv4f	figs-metaphor	αἱ…ἐκκλησίαι ἐστερεοῦντο τῇ πίστει	1	the churches were being strengthened in the faith	This speaks of helping someone to believe more confidently as if it were making them physically stronger. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2246	ACT	16	6	g97e		τὴν Φρυγίαν	1	Phrygia	Phrygia is a region in Asia. See how you translated this name in Acts 2:10.
2247	ACT	16	6	ue3k	figs-activepassive	κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1	having been forbidden by the Holy Spirit	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “for the Holy Spirit had forbidden them” or “because the Holy Spirit did not permit them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2248	ACT	16	6	h4u4	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	the word	Here, word stands for “message.” Alternate translation: “the message about Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2249	ACT	16	7	x1b1	figs-go	ἐλθόντες	1	when they had come	Here, had come can be translated as “had gone” or “had arrived.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2250	ACT	16	7	b1xq	translate-names	Μυσίαν…Βιθυνίαν	1	Mysia … Bithynia	Mysia and Bithynia are two more regions in Asia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2251	ACT	16	7	b539		τὸ Πνεῦμα Ἰησοῦ	1	the Spirit of Jesus	Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit”
2252	ACT	16	8	s6l1		κατέβησαν εἰς Τρῳάδα	1	they came down to the city of Troas	The phrase came down is used here because Troas is lower in elevation than Mysia.
2253	ACT	16	8	xq6n	figs-go	κατέβησαν	1	they came down	Here, came can be translated as “went.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2254	ACT	16	9	t6v2		ὅραμα…τῷ Παύλῳ ὤφθη	1	a vision appeared to Paul	Alternate translation: “Paul saw a vision from God” or “Paul had a vision from God”
2255	ACT	16	9	hq8e		παρακαλῶν αὐτὸν	1	calling him	Alternate translation: “begging him” or “inviting him”
2256	ACT	16	9	cm2u		διαβὰς εἰς Μακεδονίαν	1	Coming over into Macedonia	The phrase coming over is used because Macedonia is across the sea from Troas.
2257	ACT	16	10	fg5h		ἐζητήσαμεν ἐξελθεῖν εἰς Μακεδονίαν, συμβιβάζοντες ὅτι προσκέκληται ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς εὐαγγελίσασθαι αὐτούς	1	we sought to go out to Macedonia, reasoning together that God had called us to proclaim the gospel to them	Here the words we and us refer to Paul and his companions including Luke, the author of Acts.
2258	ACT	16	11	m2p5			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul and his companions are now in Philippi on their missionary trip.
2259	ACT	16	11	q2pr	translate-names	Σαμοθρᾴκην…Νέαν Πόλιν	1	Samothrace … Neapolis	Samothrace and Neapolis are coastal cities near Phillipi in Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2260	ACT	16	12	tl9f	figs-explicit	κολωνία	1	a colony	This colony was a city outside of Italy where many people who came from Rome lived. The people there had the same rights and freedoms as people who lived in cities in Italy. They could govern themselves and they did not have to pay taxes. Alternate translation: “a Roman colony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2261	ACT	16	14	n952	writing-participants	τις γυνὴ ὀνόματι Λυδία	1	a certain woman named Lydia	Here, a certain woman introduces Lydia as a new person in the story. Alternate translation: “there was a woman named Lydia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2262	ACT	16	14	qj86	figs-ellipsis	πορφυρόπωλις	1	a seller of purple	Here “cloth” is understood. Alternate translation: “a merchant who sold purple cloth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2263	ACT	16	14	c6n8	translate-names	Θυατείρων	1	of Thyatira	Thyatira is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2264	ACT	16	14	cyk3		σεβομένη τὸν Θεόν	1	worshiping God	When Luke says Lydia was worshiping God, he is saying that she was a Gentile who gave praise to God and followed him, but did not obey all of the Jewish laws.
2265	ACT	16	14	rd4r	figs-metaphor	ἧς ὁ Κύριος διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν, προσέχειν	1	of whom the Lord opened the heart to pay attention to	For the Lord to cause someone to pay attention and believe a message is spoken of as if he were opening a person’s heart. Alternate translation: “and the Lord caused her to listen well and to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2266	ACT	16	14	s9ju	figs-metonymy	διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν	1	opened the heart	Here, heart stands for a person’s mind. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2267	ACT	16	14	ddx8	figs-metaphor	διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν	1		The author speaks about the heart or “mind” as if it were a box that a person could open so it is ready for someone to fill it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2268	ACT	16	14	a74y	figs-activepassive	τοῖς λαλουμένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου	1	what was being said by Paul	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what Paul was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2269	ACT	16	15	g7e9	figs-activepassive	ὡς δὲ ἐβαπτίσθη καὶ ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς	1	And when she was baptized, and her household	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And when they baptized Lydia and members of her household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2270	ACT	16	15	s799	figs-metonymy	ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς	1	her household	Here, her household refers to all the people who live in her house. Alternate translation: “the members of her household” or “her family and household servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2271	ACT	16	16	ufy4		ἐγένετο δὲ	1	And it happened that	This phrase marks the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
2272	ACT	16	16	vyn4	writing-background	παιδίσκην τινὰ ἔχουσαν πνεῦμα Πύθωνα, ὑπαντῆσαι ἡμῖν, ἥτις ἐργασίαν πολλὴν παρεῖχεν τοῖς κυρίοις αὐτῆς μαντευομένη	1		This verse give background information to explain that this young fortune teller brought much financial gain to her masters by guessing people’s futures. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2273	ACT	16	16	y1gc	writing-participants	παιδίσκην τινὰ	1	a certain young female slave	The phrase a certain introduces a new person to the story. Alternate translation: “there was a young female slave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2274	ACT	16	16	ymt9		πνεῦμα Πύθωνα	1	a spirit of divination	An evil spirit spoke to her often about the immediate future of people.
2275	ACT	16	17	tni9	figs-metaphor	ὁδὸν σωτηρίας	1	the way of salvation	How a person can be saved is spoken of here as if it were a way or path that a person walks on. Alternate translation: “how God can save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2276	ACT	16	18	lj79	figs-activepassive	διαπονηθεὶς δὲ Παῦλος, καὶ ἐπιστρέψας	1	But Paul, being greatly annoyed and turning	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But she greatly annoyed Paul so he turned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2277	ACT	16	18	qi1k	figs-metonymy	ἐν ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	in the name of Jesus Christ	Here, name stands for speaking with the authority or as the representative of Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2278	ACT	16	18	u4z8		ἐξῆλθεν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ	1	it came out that same hour	Alternate translation: “the spirit came out immediately”
2279	ACT	16	19	m1y7		οἱ κύριοι αὐτῆς	1	her masters	Alternate translation: “the owners of the slave girl”
2280	ACT	16	19	r1a1	figs-explicit	ἰδόντες…οἱ κύριοι αὐτῆς, ὅτι ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς ἐργασίας αὐτῶν	1	when her masters saw that their hope of profit was gone	It can be stated clearly why they no longer hoped to make money. Alternate translation: “when her masters saw that she could no longer earn money for them by telling fortunes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2281	ACT	16	19	bws7		εἰς τὴν ἀγορὰν	1	into the marketplace	The marketplace was a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services took place. Alternate translation: “into the public square”
2282	ACT	16	19	hf82		ἐπὶ τοὺς ἄρχοντας	1	before the authorities	Alternate translation: “into the presence of the authorities” or “so that the authorities could judge them”
2283	ACT	16	20	d2rg		προσαγαγόντες αὐτοὺς τοῖς στρατηγοῖς	1	when they had brought them to the magistrates	Alternate translation: “when they had brought them to the judges”
2284	ACT	16	20	wa94		τοῖς στρατηγοῖς	1	to the magistrates	These magistrates were rulers or judges.
2285	ACT	16	20	dkz2	figs-exclusive	οὗτοι οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐκταράσσουσιν ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν	1	These men are stirring up our city	Here the word our refers to the people of the city and includes the magistrates who ruled it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2286	ACT	16	21	gna6		παραδέχεσθαι οὐδὲ ποιεῖν	1	to accept nor to practice	Alternate translation: “to believe nor to obey” or “to accept nor to do”
2287	ACT	16	22	r1gr		αὐτῶν…περιρήξαντες αὐτῶν τὰ ἱμάτια, ἐκέλευον	1		Here the words their and them refer to Paul and Silas.
2288	ACT	16	22	at6i	figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευον ῥαβδίζειν	1	commanding them to be beaten with rods	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “commanding the soldiers to beat them with rods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2289	ACT	16	23	dsr3		πολλάς…ἐπιθέντες αὐτοῖς πληγὰς	1	when they had laid many blows upon them	Alternate translation: “when they had hit them many times with rods”
2290	ACT	16	23	y4mc		παραγγείλαντες τῷ δεσμοφύλακι ἀσφαλῶς τηρεῖν αὐτούς	1	having commanded the jailer to guard them securely	Alternate translation: “having told the jailer to make sure they did not escape”
2291	ACT	16	23	zkp7		δεσμοφύλακι	1	jailer	A jailer was a person responsible for all the people held in the jail or prison.
2292	ACT	16	24	a79x		ὃς παραγγελίαν τοιαύτην λαβὼν	1	who, having received such a command	Alternate translation: “who, when he heard this command”
2293	ACT	16	24	rl8c		τοὺς πόδας ἠσφαλίσατο αὐτῶν εἰς τὸ ξύλον	1	fastened their feet in the stocks	Alternate translation: “securely locked their feet in the stocks”
2294	ACT	16	24	jug6		ξύλον	1	stocks	The stocks was a wooden frame with holes for a person’s feet that prevented them from moving.
2295	ACT	16	26	q7z1	figs-activepassive	σεισμὸς ἐγένετο μέγας, ὥστε σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου	1	a great earthquake happened, so that the foundations of the prison were shaken	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “a severe earthquake shook the foundations of the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2296	ACT	16	26	m4ye	figs-synecdoche	σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου	1	the foundations of the prison	When the foundations shook, this caused the entire prison to shake. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2297	ACT	16	26	s6mu	figs-activepassive	ἠνεῴχθησαν…αἱ θύραι πᾶσαι	1	all the doors were opened	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “all the doors opened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2298	ACT	16	26	p393	figs-activepassive	πάντων τὰ δεσμὰ ἀνέθη	1	the chains of everyone were unfastened	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “everyone’s chains came loose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2299	ACT	16	27	hr9q	figs-activepassive	ἔξυπνος…γενόμενος ὁ δεσμοφύλαξ	1	the jailer became awake	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the jailer woke up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2300	ACT	16	27	cwt5		ἤμελλεν ἑαυτὸν ἀναιρεῖν	1	he was about to kill himself	The jailer preferred to commit suicide rather than suffer the consequences of letting the prisoners escape. Alternate translation: “he was ready to kill himself”
2301	ACT	16	28	ljy6	figs-exclusive	ἐσμεν	1		Here the word we refers to Paul, Silas, and all of the other prisoners but excludes the jailer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2302	ACT	16	29	pe66	figs-explicit	αἰτήσας…φῶτα	1	having called for lights	The reason why the jailer needed light can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “after he called for someone to bring light so he could see who was still in the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2303	ACT	16	29	h5ai	figs-metonymy	φῶτα	1	lights	The word lights stands for something that makes light. Alternate translation: “torches” or “lamps” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2304	ACT	16	29	r6is		εἰσεπήδησεν	1	he rushed in	Alternate translation: “he quickly entered the jail”
2305	ACT	16	29	bb6t	translate-symaction	προσέπεσεν τῷ Παύλῳ καὶ Σιλᾷ	1	fell down before Paul and Silas	The jailer humbled himself by bowing down at the feet of Paul and Silas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2306	ACT	16	30	a3h6		προαγαγὼν αὐτοὺς ἔξω	1	having brought them out	Alternate translation: “after he had led them outside the jail”
2307	ACT	16	30	u132	figs-activepassive	τί με δεῖ ποιεῖν, ἵνα σωθῶ	1	what must I do in order to be saved	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what must I do in order for God to save me from my sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2308	ACT	16	31	br4k	figs-activepassive	σωθήσῃ	1	you will be saved	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will save you” or “God will save you from your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2309	ACT	16	31	w8ed	figs-metonymy	ὁ οἶκός σου	1	your household	Here, your household refers to all the people who lived in the house. Alternate translation: “all the members of your household” or “your family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2310	ACT	16	32	pq5w	figs-metonymy	ἐλάλησαν αὐτῷ τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	they spoke the word of the Lord to him	Here, word stands for a message. Alternate translation: “they told him the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2311	ACT	16	33	r3la	figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίσθη, αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ αὐτοῦ πάντες παραχρῆμα	1	he was baptized immediately—he and all those who were his	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas immediately baptized the jailer and all the members of his household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2312	ACT	16	35	lb4z		δὲ	1	Now	The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells the last event in the story that started in Acts 16:16.
2313	ACT	16	35	vev9		ἀπόλυσον τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ἐκείνους	1	Release those men	Alternate translation: “Allow those men to leave”
2314	ACT	16	36	k3i6		ἐξελθόντες	1	having come out	Alternate translation: “having come out of the jail”
2315	ACT	16	37	v4yk	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς…ἔβαλαν…ἡμᾶς…ἡμᾶς	1		The word us refers only to Paul and Silas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2316	ACT	16	37	b4jm	figs-explicit	ἔφη πρὸς αὐτούς	1	said to them	Probably Paul is speaking to the jailer, but he intends for the jailer to tell the magistrates what he says. Alternate translation: “said to the jailer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2317	ACT	16	37	b7cc	figs-metonymy	δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ	1	They have beaten us in public	Here They refers to the magistrates who commanded their soldiers to beat them. Alternate translation: “The magistrates ordered their soldiers to beat us in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2318	ACT	16	37	wc37		ἀκατακρίτους ἀνθρώπους Ῥωμαίους ὑπάρχοντας, ἔβαλαν εἰς φυλακήν	1	without trial—men being Romans—they threw us into prison	Alternate translation: “without a trial to prove us guilty, even though we are Roman citizens, and they had their soldiers put us in jail”
2319	ACT	16	37	qq1u	figs-rquestion	λάθρᾳ ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν? οὔ γάρ	1	they cast us out secretly? No indeed!	Paul uses a question to emphasize that he will not allow the magistrates to send them out the city in secret after they had mistreated Paul and Silas. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not let them send us out of the city in secret!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2320	ACT	16	37	jr2j	figs-rpronouns	ἀλλὰ ἐλθόντες αὐτοὶ	1	Instead, coming themselves	Here, themselves is used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2321	ACT	16	38	ym2u	figs-explicit	ἐφοβήθησαν…ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν	1	they were terrified when they heard that they are Romans	To be a Roman meant to be a legal citizens of the Roman Empire. Citizenship provided freedom from torture and the right to a fair trial. The city leaders were afraid that more important Roman authorities might learn how the city leaders had mistreated Paul and Silas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2322	ACT	16	40	q59h		εἰσῆλθον…ἰδόντες, παρεκάλεσαν	1		Here the word they refers to Paul and Silas. The word them refers to the believers in Philippi.
2323	ACT	16	40	y14i	writing-endofstory		0		This is the end of Paul and Silas’ time in Philippi. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
2324	ACT	16	40	t1pf	figs-go	εἰσῆλθον πρὸς τὴν Λυδίαν	1	they came to the house of Lydia	Here, came can be translated as “went.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2325	ACT	16	40	ylk9		τὴν Λυδίαν	1	the house of Lydia	Alternate translation: “the home of Lydia”
2326	ACT	16	40	ntc9	figs-gendernotations	ἰδόντες…τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	when they had seen the brothers	Here, the brothers refers to believers whether male or female. Alternate translation: “when they had visited with the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2327	ACT	17	intro	gj4c			0		Acts 17 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter Misunderstandings about the Messiah The Jews expected the Christ or Messiah to be a powerful king because the Old Testament says so many times. But it also says many times that the Messiah would suffer, and that was what Paul was telling the Jews. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]]) The religion of Athens Paul said that the Athenians were “religious,” but they did not worship the true God. They worshiped many different false gods. In the past they had conquered other peoples and begun to worship the gods of the people they had conquered. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]]) In this chapter Luke describes for the first time how Paul told the message of Christ to people who knew nothing of the Old Testament.
2328	ACT	17	1	e4w5		δὲ	1	Now	The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke, the author, starts to tell a new part of the story.
2329	ACT	17	1	b7np		διοδεύσαντες	1	having passed through	Alternate translation: “when they had traveled through”
2330	ACT	17	1	q9x4		ἦλθον	1		Here the word they refers to Paul and Silas. They arrive in Thessalonica, apparently without Luke, since he says “they” and not “we.” Compare Acts 16:40.
2331	ACT	17	1	kll1	translate-names	τὴν Ἀμφίπολιν καὶ τὴν Ἀπολλωνίαν	1	Amphipolis and Apollonia	Amphipolis and Apollonia are coastal cities in Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2332	ACT	17	1	yj66	figs-go	ἦλθον εἰς Θεσσαλονίκην	1	they came to Thessalonica	Here, came can be translated as “went” or “arrived.” Alternate translation: “they went to Thessalonica” or “they arrived at Thessalonica” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2333	ACT	17	2	vbf2		κατὰ…τὸ εἰωθὸς	1	according to his custom	Paul usually went to the synagogue on the Sabbath when Jews would be present. Alternate translation: “as his habit was” or “as his common practice was”
2334	ACT	17	2	bt5e		ἐπὶ Σάββατα τρία	1	for three Sabbaths	Alternate translation: “on each Sabbath day for three weeks”
2335	ACT	17	2	wp3k	figs-explicit	διελέξατο αὐτοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν Γραφῶν	1	reasoned with them from the scriptures	Paul explained what the Scriptures means in order to prove to the Jews that Jesus is the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2336	ACT	17	2	qf4t		διελέξατο αὐτοῖς	1	reasoned with them	Alternate translation: “debated with them” or “discussed with them”
2337	ACT	17	3	ir9q	figs-metaphor	διανοίγων	1	He is fully opening	This could mean: (1) to explain the scriptures in a way that people can understand is spoken of as if Paul were opening something so people can see what is inside of it, or (2) Paul was literally opening a book or scroll and reading from it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2338	ACT	17	3	he78		ἔδει	1	it was necessary for	Alternate translation: “it was part of God’s plan for”
2339	ACT	17	3	ipb2		ἀναστῆναι	1	to rise	Alternate translation: “to come back to life”
2340	ACT	17	3	b9qi		ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	from the dead	From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
2341	ACT	17	4	es2u	figs-activepassive	τινες ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐπείσθησαν	1	some from them were persuaded	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews believed” or “some of the Jews understood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2342	ACT	17	4	nyp2		προσεκληρώθησαν τῷ Παύλῳ	1	joined Paul	Alternate translation: “became associated with Paul”
2343	ACT	17	4	t21z		σεβομένων Ἑλλήνων	1	of worshiping Greeks	This refers to Greeks who worship God but have not converted to Judaism through circumcision.
2344	ACT	17	4	ye8v	figs-litotes	γυναικῶν…τῶν πρώτων οὐκ ὀλίγαι	1	not a few of the leading women	Here, not a few is an understatement to emphasize that many leading women joined them. Alternate translation: “many leading women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2345	ACT	17	5	nuh6		ἐθορύβουν τὴν πόλιν…ἐζήτουν	1		Here the word they refers to the unbelieving Jews and wicked men from the marketplace.
2346	ACT	17	5	uj43	figs-metaphor	ζηλώσαντες	1	having become jealous	The feeling of jealousy is spoken of as if jealousy were actually moving the person. Alternate translation: “feeling very jealous” or “feeling very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2347	ACT	17	5	vev6	figs-explicit	ζηλώσαντες	1	having become jealous	It can be stated explicitly that these Jews were jealous because some of the Jews and Greeks believed Paul’s message. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2348	ACT	17	5	btw6		προσλαβόμενοι τῶν ἀγοραίων ἄνδρας τινὰς πονηροὺς	1	having taken certain wicked men of the marketplace	Here, having taken does not mean the Jews took these people by force. It means the Jews persuaded these wicked men to help them.
2349	ACT	17	5	lc6g		ἄνδρας τινὰς πονηροὺς	1	certain wicked men	The word men here refers specifically to males. Alternate translation: “some evil men”
2350	ACT	17	5	ie1f		τῶν ἀγοραίων	1	of the marketplace	The marketplace was a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services take place. Alternate translation: “from the public square”
2351	ACT	17	5	t3bc	figs-metonymy	ἐθορύβουν τὴν πόλιν	1	they set the city in an uproar	Here, the city stands for the people in the city. Alternate translation: “they caused the people of the city to be in an uproar” or “they caused the people of the city to riot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2352	ACT	17	5	s3uv		ἐπιστάντες τῇ οἰκίᾳ	1	having assaulted the house	This phrase probably means the people were throwing rocks at the house and trying to break down the door of the house. Alternate translation: “having violently attacking the house”
2353	ACT	17	5	ks2l	translate-names	Ἰάσονος	1	of Jason	Jason is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2354	ACT	17	5	abcu		αὐτοὺς προαγαγεῖν	1	to lead them	Alternate translation: “to bring Paul and Silas”
2355	ACT	17	5	pp7k		εἰς τὸν δῆμον	1	to the people	This could mean: (1) a governmental or legal group of citizens gathered to make a decision or (2) an unruly mob.
2356	ACT	17	6	i79p		τινας ἀδελφοὺς	1	certain brothers	Here, brothers refers to believers. Alternate translation: “some other believers”
2357	ACT	17	6	e44z		ἐπὶ τοὺς πολιτάρχας	1	before the city officials	Alternate translation: “in the presence of the city officials”
2358	ACT	17	6	g7xj		οἱ…οὗτοι	1	Those who … they	The Jewish leaders were using the pronouns Those and they to refer to Paul and Silas.
2359	ACT	17	6	c2av	figs-idiom	τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες	1	have turned the inhabited world upside down	This phrase is another way of saying Paul and Silas where causing trouble everywhere they went. Alternate translation: “have caused trouble everywhere in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2360	ACT	17	6	x90b	figs-hyperbole	τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες	1		The Jewish leaders were exaggerating the influence Paul and Silas were having with their teaching. Alternate translation: “have caused trouble everywhere they have gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2361	ACT	17	7	hlc9		ὑποδέδεκται Ἰάσων; καὶ οὗτοι πάντες	1	Jason and all these men have welcomed	This phrase signals that Jason and his companions were in agreement with the apostles’ troubling message.
2362	ACT	17	8	th2f		ἐτάραξαν	1	were disturbed	Alternate translation: “were worried”
2363	ACT	17	9	ya44		λαβόντες τὸ ἱκανὸν παρὰ τοῦ Ἰάσονος καὶ τῶν λοιπῶν	1	after they had received a bond from Jason and the rest of them	Jason and the others had to pay the money to the city officials as a promise of good behavior; that money might be returned if all went well or it might be used to repair the damages brought on by bad behavior.
2364	ACT	17	9	bj48		τῶν λοιπῶν	1	the rest of them	The words the rest of them refers to other believers that the Jews brought before the officials.
2365	ACT	17	9	aru6		ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς	1	they released them	Alternate translation: “the officials let Jason and the other believers go”
2366	ACT	17	10	na8h			0	General Information:	Paul and Silas travel on to the town of Berea.
2367	ACT	17	10	qy5c	figs-gendernotations	οἱ…ἀδελφοὶ	1	the brothers	The word brothers here refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2368	ACT	17	11	k2st	writing-background	δὲ	1	Now	The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells background information about the people in Berea and how they were willing to listen to Paul and examine what he said. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2369	ACT	17	11	gu6s		οὗτοι…ἦσαν εὐγενέστεροι	1	these were more open-minded than	These open-minded people were willing to think more objectively about new ideas than other people. Alternate translation: “the Bereans were more willing to listen”
2370	ACT	17	11	hle3	figs-metonymy	ἐδέξαντο τὸν λόγον	1	received the word	Here, word refers to a teaching. Alternate translation: “listened to the teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2371	ACT	17	11	uh8a		μετὰ πάσης προθυμίας	1	with all readiness	These Bereans were prepared to examine earnestly Paul’s teachings about the scripture.
2372	ACT	17	11	lzm3		καθ’ ἡμέραν ἀνακρίνοντες τὰς Γραφὰς	1	examining the scriptures each day	Alternate translation: “carefully reading and evaluating the scriptures every day”
2373	ACT	17	11	g8an		ἔχοι ταῦτα οὕτως	1	these things were so	Alternate translation: “the things Paul said were true”
2374	ACT	17	12	abcv	figs-litotes	ἀνδρῶν οὐκ ὀλίγοι	1	not a few men	Here, not a few is an understatement to emphasize that many men believed the message. Alternate translation: “many men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2375	ACT	17	13	asb4	figs-metaphor	ἦλθον κἀκεῖ, σαλεύοντες	1	they came and there stirred up	This speaks about their agitating people as though it were a person stirring a liquid and causing the things at the bottom of the liquid to rise to the surface. Alternate translation: “they came there and agitated” or “they went there and disturbed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2376	ACT	17	13	wjq3		ταράσσοντες τοὺς ὄχλους	1	troubled the crowds	Alternate translation: “worried the crowds” or “caused the people to become upset”
2377	ACT	17	14	ael8	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοὶ	1	brothers	The word brothers here refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2378	ACT	17	14	zw1c		πορεύεσθαι ἕως ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν	1	to go as far as to the sea	From here Paul would probably sail to another city. Alternate translation: “to go all the way to the coast”
2379	ACT	17	15	tjh5		καθιστάνοντες τὸν Παῦλον	1	were leading Paul down	Alternate translation: “who were accompanying Paul” or “who were going down with Paul”
2380	ACT	17	15	vn8h	translate-names	Ἀθηνῶν	1		Athens is down the coast from Barea which is in Macedonia. Athens was one of the most important cities in Greece. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2381	ACT	17	15	gs1p	figs-quotations	λαβόντες ἐντολὴν πρὸς τὸν Σιλᾶν καὶ τὸν Τιμόθεον	1	after receiving a command to Silas and Timothy	This can also be stated as a direct quotation as in the UST. Alternate translation: “after telling them to command Silas and Timothy so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2382	ACT	17	16	y9cr		δὲ	1	Now	The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke starts to tell a new part of the story.
2383	ACT	17	16	wk63		ἐν…ταῖς Ἀθήναις, ἐκδεχομένου αὐτοὺς τοῦ Παύλου	1		This is another part of the story of Paul and Silas’ travels. Paul is now in Athens where he is waiting for Silas and Timothy to join him.
2384	ACT	17	16	we78	figs-synecdoche	παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ, θεωροῦντος κατείδωλον οὖσαν τὴν πόλιν	1	his spirit was being provoked within him, seeing the city being full of idols	Here, his spirit stands for Paul himself. Alternate translation: “he was provoked because he saw that there were idols everywhere in the city” or “seeing the idols everywhere in the city, he was provoked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2385	ACT	17	16	s011	figs-activepassive	παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he became upset” or “the city upset him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2386	ACT	17	17	q8px		διελέγετο	1	he reasoned	This phrase means that there is interaction from the listeners rather than only his preaching. They are talking with him as well. Alternate translation: “he debated” or “he discussed”
2387	ACT	17	17	jkj8		τοῖς σεβομένοις	1	those who were worshiping	This refers to Gentiles (non-Jews) who give praise to God and follow him but do not obey all of the Jewish laws.
2388	ACT	17	17	ec14		ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ	1	in the marketplace	The marketplace was a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services take place. Alternate translation: “in the public square”
2389	ACT	17	18	ru6a		αὐτῷ…δοκεῖ…εὐηγγελίζετο	1		Here the words him, He, and he refer to Paul.
2390	ACT	17	18	l7le	translate-names	τῶν Ἐπικουρίων καὶ Στοϊκῶν φιλοσόφων	1	of the Epicurean and Stoic philosophers	These people believed all things were formed by chance and that the gods were too busy being happy to be bothered with governing the universe. They rejected the resurrection and wanted only simple pleasures. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2391	ACT	17	18	f976	translate-names	Στοϊκῶν φιλοσόφων	1	Stoic philosophers	These Stoic philosophers believed freedom comes from resigning oneself to fate. They rejected a personal loving God and the resurrection. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2392	ACT	17	18	dnj8		τινες ἔλεγον	1	some said	Alternate translation: “some of the Stoic philosophers said”
2393	ACT	17	18	g4bv	figs-metaphor	τί ἂν θέλοι ὁ σπερμολόγος οὗτος λέγειν?	1	What is this babbler wanting to say?	The word babbler was used to refer to birds picking up seeds as food. It refers negatively to a person who only knows a little bit of information. The philosophers said Paul had bits of information which were not worth listening to. Alternate translation: “What is this uneducated person trying to say?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2394	ACT	17	18	k2ps		οἱ δέ	1	But others said	Alternate translation: “But other philosophers said”
2395	ACT	17	18	l41t		δοκεῖ καταγγελεὺς εἶναι	1	He seems to be a proclaimer	Alternate translation: “He seems to be teaching a philosophy”
2396	ACT	17	18	sx9t		ξένων δαιμονίων	1	of foreign gods	That is, gods that Greeks and Romans do not worship or know about.
2397	ACT	17	19	mv8c		ἐπιλαβόμενοί τε αὐτοῦ, ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον ἤγαγον	1	And taking hold of him, they brought him to the Areopagus	This does not mean they arrested Paul. The philosophers invited Paul to speak formally to their leaders.
2398	ACT	17	19	b56g	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον	1	to the Areopagus	The Areopagus was the place where the leaders met. Alternate translation: “to the leaders that met on the Areopagus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2399	ACT	17	19	ze7e		τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον…λέγοντες	1	the Areopagus, saying	Here the leaders on the Areopagus are speaking. This can stated as a new sentence. Alternate translation: “the Areopagus. The leaders said to Paul”
2400	ACT	17	19	unc8	translate-names	Ἄρειον Πάγον	1	Areopagus	The Areopagus is a prominent rock outcropping or hill in Athens upon which the supreme court of Athens may have met. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2401	ACT	17	20	lay8	figs-metaphor	ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν	1	For you are bringing some strange things to our ears	Paul’s teachings about Jesus and the resurrection are spoken of as an object that a person can bring to another person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2402	ACT	17	20	fs5g	figs-exclusive	βουλόμεθα	1		Here the word we refers to the Epicurean and Stoic philosophers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2403	ACT	17	20	us7g	figs-metonymy	ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν	1		Here, ears refers to what they hear. Alternate translation: “For you are teaching some things that we have never heard before” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2404	ACT	17	21	dn1t	figs-hyperbole	Ἀθηναῖοι δὲ πάντες καὶ οἱ ἐπιδημοῦντες ξένοι	1	And all the Athenians and the foreigners living there	The word all is a generalization referring to many. Alternate translation: “And many of the Athenians and the strangers living there” or “And many of the Athenians and the strangers living there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2405	ACT	17	21	d8yb	translate-names	Ἀθηναῖοι	1	the Athenians	Here, the Athenians are people from Athens, a city near the coast below Macedonia (present day Greece). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2406	ACT	17	21	sk5b	figs-metaphor	εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον ηὐκαίρουν, ἢ λέγειν τι ἢ ἀκούειν	1	spent their time in nothing other than either to tell something or to listen to	Here, time is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could spend. Alternate translation: “used their time doing nothing but either telling or listening to” or “were always doing nothing but telling or listening to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2407	ACT	17	21	ij4e	figs-hyperbole	εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον ηὐκαίρουν	1	spent their time in nothing other than	The phrase spent their time in nothing is an exaggeration. Alternate translation: “did not do much but” or “spent much of their time only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2408	ACT	17	21	wr1r		λέγειν τι ἢ ἀκούειν τι καινότερον	1	to tell something or to listen to something new	Alternate translation: “discussing new philosophical ideas” or “talking about what was new to them”
2409	ACT	17	22	zq3y		ἄνδρες, Ἀθηναῖοι, κατὰ πάντα ὡς δεισιδαιμονεστέρους ὑμᾶς θεωρῶ	1		Paul begins his speech to the philosophers on the Areopagus.
2410	ACT	17	22	ja1k		κατὰ πάντα…δεισιδαιμονεστέρους	1	very religious in every way	Paul is referring to the Athenians’ public display of honoring the gods through prayers, building altars, and offering sacrifices.
2411	ACT	17	23	gn1j		διερχόμενος γὰρ	1	For passing through	Alternate translation: “Because as I was walked through” or “As I was walking along”
2412	ACT	17	23	cem7		ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ	1	To an Unknown God	This could mean: (1) “to a certain unknown god” or (2) “to a god not known.” This was a specific writing or inscription on that altar.
2413	ACT	17	24	m1jm		τὸν κόσμον	1	the world	In the most general sense, the world refers to the heavens and the earth and everything in them.
2414	ACT	17	24	rqk9		οὗτος…ὑπάρχων Κύριος	1	he who is Lord	Here, he is referring to the unknown god mentioned in Acts 17:23 that Paul is explaining is the Lord God. Alternate translation: “because the one who is Lord”
2415	ACT	17	24	f2mz	figs-merism	οὐρανοῦ καὶ γῆς	1	of heaven and earth	The words heaven and earth are used together to mean all beings and things in heaven and earth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
2416	ACT	17	24	ju4h	figs-synecdoche	χειροποιήτοις	1	built with hands	Here, hands stands for people. Alternate translation: “built by the hands of people” or “that people built” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2417	ACT	17	25	e3dg	figs-activepassive	οὐδὲ ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων θεραπεύεται	1	Neither is he served by hands of men	Here, served has the sense of a doctor treating a patient to make the patient well again. Alternate translation: “Neither do men take care of him with their hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2418	ACT	17	25	yq68	figs-synecdoche	ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων	1	by hands of men	Here, hands stands for the whole person. Alternate translation: “by humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2419	ACT	17	25	sj89	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς διδοὺς	1	himself giving	The word himself is added for emphasis. Alternate translation: “because he himself gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2420	ACT	17	26	r3lt		ἐποίησέν…προστεταγμένους…αὐτῶν	1		Here the word he refers to the one true God, the creator. Both occurrences of the word their refer to every nation of people living on the surface of the earth.
2421	ACT	17	26	p1e4		ἑνὸς	1	one man	This refers to Adam, the first person God created.
2422	ACT	17	26	js4p		ὁρίσας προστεταγμένους καιροὺς καὶ τὰς ὁροθεσίας τῆς κατοικίας αὐτῶν	1	having determined their appointed seasons and the boundaries of their habitation	You can state this as a new sentence. Alternate translation: “And he determined when and where they would live”
2423	ACT	17	27	jae5	figs-metaphor	ζητεῖν τὸν Θεὸν, εἰ ἄρα γε ψηλαφήσειαν αὐτὸν καὶ εὕροιεν	1	to seek God and perhaps they might feel around for him and find him	Here, to seek God represents desiring to know him, and feel around for him and find him represents praying and having a relationship with him. Alternate translation: “so that they should want to know God and perhaps pray to him and become one of his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2424	ACT	17	27	p8hk	figs-litotes	καί γε οὐ μακρὰν ἀπὸ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου ἡμῶν ὑπάρχοντα	1	Yet he is not far from each one of us	Paul uses the negative not far to emphasize that God is close to man. Alternate translation: “Yet he is very near to everyone of us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2425	ACT	17	27	onm4	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1		In using the word us, Paul includes himself, his audience, and every nation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2426	ACT	17	28	tkd3	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the words him and his refer to God (Acts 17:24). When Paul says we here, he includes himself as well as his hearers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2427	ACT	17	28	cbd9		ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ	1	For in him	Alternate translation: “Because of him”
2428	ACT	17	29	k9ws	figs-metaphor	γένος…ὑπάρχοντες τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	are God’s offspring	Because God created everyone, all people are spoken of as if they were God’s literal children. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2429	ACT	17	29	czi9	figs-metonymy	τὸ θεῖον	1	the divine being	Here, divine being refers to God’s nature or attributes. Alternate translation: “the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2430	ACT	17	29	q4q2	figs-activepassive	χαράγματι τέχνης καὶ ἐνθυμήσεως ἀνθρώπου	1	images of the skill and imagination of man	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “which a man then uses his skill to make it into something that he has designed” or “images that people make by using their art and imagination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2431	ACT	17	30	suh6		οὖν	1	Therefore	Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true”
2432	ACT	17	30	iva4		τοὺς…χρόνους τῆς ἀγνοίας ὑπεριδὼν ὁ Θεὸς	1	God, having overlooked the times of ignorance	Alternate translation: “God, having decided not to punish people during the times of ignorance”
2433	ACT	17	30	h8uy		χρόνους τῆς ἀγνοίας	1	times of ignorance	This refers to the time before God fully revealed himself through Jesus Christ and before people truly knew how to obey God.
2434	ACT	17	30	qim5	figs-gendernotations	τοῖς ἀνθρώποις πάντας	1	all men	Here, all men refers to all people whether male or female. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2435	ACT	17	31	htp7		ἐν ᾗ μέλλει κρίνειν τὴν οἰκουμένην ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ, ἐν ἀνδρὶ ᾧ ὥρισεν	1	in which he is about to judge the world in righteousness by the man whom he has appointed	Alternate translation: “when the man he has chosen will judge the world in righteousness”
2436	ACT	17	31	jt3a	figs-metonymy	μέλλει κρίνειν τὴν οἰκουμένην	1	he is about to judge the world	Here, world refers to the people. Alternate translation: “he will judge all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2437	ACT	17	31	l61p		πίστιν παρασχὼν	1	He has provided signs	Alternate translation: “God has demonstrated his choice of this man”
2438	ACT	17	31	ulr4		ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	from the dead	From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
2439	ACT	17	32	tc8t	figs-exclusive	ἀκουσόμεθά	1		Here the word We refers to the men of Athens but not to Paul, so this is exclusive. Though some of them probably did want to hear Paul again, they may only have been being polite. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2440	ACT	17	32	c4sm	writing-endofstory		0		This is the end of the part of the story about Paul in Athens. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
2441	ACT	17	32	nb26		δὲ	1	Now	The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke shifts from Paul’s teachings to the reaction of the people of Athens.
2442	ACT	17	32	jlm5		ἀκούσαντες	1	when they heard of	These are the people who were present at the Areopagus listening to Paul.
2443	ACT	17	32	sn6j		οἱ μὲν ἐχλεύαζον	1	some mocked him	These did not believe it was possible for someone to die and then return to life. Alternate translation: “some ridiculed Paul” or “some laughed at Paul”
2444	ACT	17	34	psh8	translate-names	Διονύσιος ὁ Ἀρεοπαγίτης	1	Dionysius the Areopagite	Dionysius is a man’s name. Areopagite implies that Dionysius was one of the judges at the council of Areopagus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2445	ACT	17	34	hsz3	translate-names	Δάμαρις	1	Damaris	Damaris is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2446	ACT	18	intro	rky6			0		Acts 18 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter The baptism of John Some Jews who lived far away from Jerusalem and Judea had heard of John the Baptist and followed his teachings. They had not yet heard about Jesus. One of these Jews was Apollos. He followed John the Baptist, but he did not know that the Messiah had come. John had baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins, but this baptism was different from Christian baptism. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
2447	ACT	18	1	qa9b			0	Connecting Statement:	This is another part of the story of Paul’s travels as he goes to Corinth.
2448	ACT	18	1	fky7		μετὰ ταῦτα	1	After these things	Alternate translation: “After these events took place in Athens”
2449	ACT	18	1	abcw		χωρισθεὶς	1	having departed	Alternate translation: “when Paul had departed”
2450	ACT	18	1	h2si		τῶν Ἀθηνῶν	1	Athens	Athens was one of the most important cities in Greece. See how you translated this in Acts 17:15.
2451	ACT	18	2	d9zx		καὶ εὑρών	1	And when he found	This could mean: (1) Paul happened to find by chance or (2) Paul intentionally found.
2452	ACT	18	2	hm16	writing-participants	τινα Ἰουδαῖον ὀνόματι Ἀκύλαν	1	a certain Jew named Aquila	Here the phrase a certain indicates Luke is introducing Aquilla as a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2453	ACT	18	2	jat1	writing-background	τινα Ἰουδαῖον ὀνόματι Ἀκύλαν, Ποντικὸν τῷ γένει, προσφάτως ἐληλυθότα ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰταλίας, καὶ Πρίσκιλλαν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ, διὰ τὸ διατεταχέναι Κλαύδιον χωρίζεσθαι πάντας τοὺς Ἰουδαίους ἀπὸ τῆς Ῥώμης	1		Verses 2 and 3 give background information about Aquila and Priscilla. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2454	ACT	18	2	y97p	translate-names	Ποντικὸν τῷ γένει	1	a native of Pontus	Pontus was a province on the southern coast of the Black Sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2455	ACT	18	2	q4va		προσφάτως ἐληλυθότα	1	who had recently come	This probably happened sometime in the past year.
2456	ACT	18	2	n631	translate-names	τῆς Ἰταλίας…τῆς Ῥώμης	1	Italy	Italy is the name of land. Rome is the capital city of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2457	ACT	18	2	n95f		τὸ διατεταχέναι Κλαύδιον	1	Claudius had ordered	Claudius was the current Roman emperor. See how you translated this in Acts 11:28.
2458	ACT	18	3	q259		τὸ ὁμότεχνον εἶναι	1	he was of the same trade	Alternate translation: “he did the same kind of work that they did”
2459	ACT	18	4	h3az		διελέγετο δὲ	1	And he reasoned	This means that rather than just preaching, Paul talked and interacted with the people. Alternate translation: “And Paul debated” or “And Paul discussed”
2460	ACT	18	4	r2gp		ἔπειθέν τε Ἰουδαίους καὶ Ἕλληνας	1	persuading both Jews and Greeks	This could mean: (1) “he caused both Jews and Greeks to believe” or (2) “he kept trying to persuade the Jews and the Greeks.”
2461	ACT	18	5	r56h			0	General Information:	Silas and Timothy rejoin Paul.
2462	ACT	18	6	ncx8	translate-symaction	ἐκτιναξάμενος τὰ ἱμάτια	1	shaking out his garment	This is a symbolic action to indicate that Paul will no longer try to teach the Jews there about Jesus. He is leaving them to God’s judgment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2463	ACT	18	6	z12a	figs-metonymy	τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν	1	Your blood be upon your head	Here, blood stands for the guilt of their actions. Paul tells the Jews they are solely responsible for the judgment they will face for their stubbornness if they refuse to repent. Alternate translation: “You alone bear the responsibility for your punishment for sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2464	ACT	18	6	pacx	figs-synecdoche	τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν	1		Here, head refers to the whole person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2465	ACT	18	7	cd3u		εἰσῆλθεν	1		Here the word he refers to Paul.
2466	ACT	18	7	vs6y	translate-names	Τιτίου Ἰούστου	1	Titius Justus	Titius Justus is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2467	ACT	18	7	v8xg		σεβομένου τὸν Θεόν	1	who worships God	A worshiper of God is a Gentile who gives praise to God and follows him but does not necessarily obey all of the Jewish laws.
2468	ACT	18	8	lj2t	translate-names	Κρίσπος	1	Crispus	Crispus is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2469	ACT	18	8	kkk9		ἀρχισυνάγωγος	1	leader of the synagogue	The leader of the synagogue was a layperson who sponsored and administered the synagogue, but not necessarily the teacher.
2470	ACT	18	8	uaq5	figs-metonymy	ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ	1	all those in his house	Here, house refers to the people who lived together. Alternate translation: “the people who lived with him in his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2471	ACT	18	8	t3np	figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίζοντο	1	were being baptized	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “were receiving baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2472	ACT	18	9	ws7p	figs-parallelism	μὴ φοβοῦ, ἀλλὰ λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς	1	Do not be afraid, but continue speaking and do not be silent	The Lord is giving one command in two different ways to emphasize that Paul should certainly continue preaching. Alternate translation: “You must not be afraid and, instead, continue to speak and not become silent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
2473	ACT	18	9	zg8a	figs-doublet	λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς	1	continue speaking and do not be silent	The Lord gives the same command in two different ways to strongly command Paul to speak. Alternate translation: “you must certainly continue to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2474	ACT	18	9	a529	figs-explicit	μὴ σιωπήσῃς	1	do not be silent	It can be stated explicitly what the Lord wants Paul to speak. Alternate translation: “do not stop speaking about the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2475	ACT	18	10	a8lq		λαός ἐστί μοι πολὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ	1	I have many people in this city	Alternate translation: “there are many people in this city who have put their faith in me” or “many people in this city will put their faith in me”
2476	ACT	18	11	mqx2	writing-endofstory	ἐκάθισεν δὲ ἐνιαυτὸν καὶ μῆνας ἓξ, διδάσκων ἐν αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	And so he stayed there for a year and six months, teaching the word of God among them	This is a concluding statement for this part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
2477	ACT	18	11	a18w	figs-synecdoche	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here, word of God is a synecdoche for the entire Scriptures. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2478	ACT	18	12	f41k	translate-names	τῆς Ἀχαΐας	1		Achaia was the Roman province in which Corinth was located. Corinth was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2479	ACT	18	12	b5bf			0	Connecting Statement:	The unbelieving Jews bring Paul to the judgment seat before Gallio.
2480	ACT	18	12	se8m	translate-names	Γαλλίωνος	1	Gallio	Gallio is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2481	ACT	18	12	j762	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews	Here, the Jews stands for the Jewish leaders that did not believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2482	ACT	18	12	lp79		κατεπέστησαν ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	rose up together against	Alternate translation: “came together against” or “joined together to attack”
2483	ACT	18	12	u36c	figs-metonymy	ἤγαγον αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τὸ βῆμα	1	brought him before the judgment seat	The Jews took Paul by force to bring Paul before the court. Here, judgment seat refers to the place where Gallio sat when he made legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: “took him so that the governor could judge him at the judgment seat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2484	ACT	18	14	d13b		ὁ Γαλλίων	1	Gallio	Gallio was the Roman governor of the Province.
2485	ACT	18	15	y6mt		νόμου τοῦ καθ’ ὑμᾶς	1	your law	Here, law refers to the law of Moses and as well as the Jewish customs of Paul’s time.
2486	ACT	18	15	khr5		κριτὴς ἐγὼ τούτων οὐ βούλομαι εἶναι	1	I do not want to be a judge of these matters	Alternate translation: “I refuse to make a judgment about these matters”
2487	ACT	18	16	d6nh	figs-metonymy	ἀπήλασεν αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ βήματος	1	he sent them away from the judgment seat	Here, judgment seat refers to the place where Gallio sits to make legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: “Gallio made them leave his presence in the court” or “Gallio made them leave the court” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2488	ACT	18	17	yf81		ἐπιλαβόμενοι…πάντες	1		Here the word they probably refers to the Gentiles at the court. They reacted against the Jews who had brought Paul before the judgment seat (Acts 18:12).
2489	ACT	18	17	cyk6	figs-hyperbole	ἐπιλαβόμενοι…πάντες	1	they all, having seized	This may be an exaggeration to emphasize the strong feelings the people had. Alternate translation: “many people seized” or “many of them grabbed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2490	ACT	18	17	mj77		ἐπιλαβόμενοι δὲ πάντες Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον, ἔτυπτον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος	1	But they all, having seized Sosthenes, the ruler of the synagogue, were beating him in front of the judgment seat	This could mean: (1) the Gentiles beat Sosthenes in the court in front of the judgment seat because he was the Jewish leader or (2) it is possible that Sosthenes was a believer in Christ, so the Jews beat him in front of the court.
2491	ACT	18	17	x9w5	translate-names	Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον	1	Sosthenes, the ruler of the synagogue	Sosthenes was the Jewish ruler of the synagogue at Corinth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2492	ACT	18	17	z9fv		ἔτυπτον	1	were beating him	Alternate translation: “repeatedly hit him” or “repeatedly punched him”
2493	ACT	18	18	x25w	translate-names	κειράμενος ἐν Κενχρεαῖς…εἶχεν	1		Here the words He and he refer to Paul. Cenchreae was a seaport that was part of the greater Corinth city area. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2494	ACT	18	18	ura9			0	Connecting Statement:	This continues Paul’s missionary journey as Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila leave Corinth. This seems to indicate that Silas and Timothy remain since it says “he” here and not “we.”
2495	ACT	18	18	et8c	figs-gendernotations	τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς ἀποταξάμενος	1	left the brothers	The word brothers refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “left the fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2496	ACT	18	18	v5kl		ἐξέπλει εἰς τὴν Συρίαν, καὶ σὺν αὐτῷ Πρίσκιλλα καὶ Ἀκύλας	1	and sailed to Syria, and Priscilla and Aquila were with him	Paul got on a ship that sailed for Syria. Priscilla and Aquila went with him.
2497	ACT	18	18	kq6f	translate-symaction	κειράμενος ἐν Κενχρεαῖς τὴν κεφαλήν, εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν	1	He had cut the hair of his head … because he had a vow	This is a symbolic action that indicates the completion of a vow. Alternate translation: “he had someone cut off the hair on his head in Cenchrea because he had completed a vow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2498	ACT	18	19	abcx		κἀκείνους κατέλιπεν	1	he left them	Alternate translation: “Paul left Priscilla and Aquilla”
2499	ACT	18	19	st93		διελέξατο	1	reasoned with	Alternate translation: “discussed with” or “debated with”
2500	ACT	18	20	u44s		ἐρωτώντων	1		Here the word “they” refers to the Jews in Ephesus.
2501	ACT	18	21	iz1u		ἀποταξάμενος	1	having left them	Alternate translation: “when he had departed from them”
2502	ACT	18	22	p364			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul continues his missionary journey.
2503	ACT	18	22	gyy4		κατελθὼν εἰς Καισάρειαν	1	having landed at Caesarea	The word landed is used to show that he arrived by ship. Alternate translation: “when he had arrived at Caesarea”
2504	ACT	18	22	r26z		ἀναβὰς	1	having gone up	He traveled to the city of Jerusalem. The phrase gone up is used here because Jerusalem is higher in elevation than Caesarea.
2505	ACT	18	22	q9j6	figs-metonymy	ἀσπασάμενος τὴν ἐκκλησίαν	1	greeted the church	Here, church refers to the believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “greeted the members of the church of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2506	ACT	18	22	n3rh		κατέβη	1	he went down	The phrase went down is used here because Antioch is lower in elevation than Jerusalem.
2507	ACT	18	23	h65j	figs-metaphor	καὶ ποιήσας χρόνον τινὰ	1	And having spent some time there	This speaks about time as if it were a commodity that a person could spend. Alternate translation: “And after staying there for a while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2508	ACT	18	23	pww5		ἐξῆλθεν	1	he departed	Alternate translation: “Paul went away” or “Paul left”
2509	ACT	18	23	pr6u		Φρυγίαν	1		Phrygia is a province in Asia which is now modern day Turkey. See how you translated this in Acts 2:10.
2510	ACT	18	24	a7p9	writing-background	Ἀπολλῶς	1		Apollos is introduced to the story. Verses 24 and 25 give background information about him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2511	ACT	18	24	xqy7		δέ	1	Now	The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story line.
2512	ACT	18	24	n2b4	writing-participants	Ἰουδαῖος…τις Ἀπολλῶς ὀνόματι	1	a certain Jew named Apollos	The phrase a certain indicates that Luke is introducing Apollos as a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2513	ACT	18	24	di14	translate-names	Ἀλεξανδρεὺς τῷ γένει	1	an Alexandrian by birth	Alexandria was a city in Egypt on the north coast of Africa. Alternate translation: “a man who was born in the city of Alexandria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2514	ACT	18	24	t4zi		ἀνὴρ λόγιος	1	an eloquent man	Alternate translation: “a good speaker”
2515	ACT	18	24	bh25		δυνατὸς ὢν ἐν ταῖς Γραφαῖς	1	He was mighty in the scriptures	He understood the Old Testament writings well. Alternate translation: “he knew the scriptures thoroughly”
2516	ACT	18	25	z7a8	figs-activepassive	οὗτος ἦν κατηχημένος τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Κυρίου	1	He had been instructed in the way of the Lord	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Other believers had taught Apollos how the Lord Jesus wanted people to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2517	ACT	18	25	ift8	figs-synecdoche	καὶ ζέων τῷ πνεύματι	1	and being fervent in spirit	Here, spirit refers to the entire person of Apollos. Alternate translation: “and being very enthusiastic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2518	ACT	18	25	lr1h		τὸ βάπτισμα Ἰωάννου	1	the baptism of John	This is comparing John’s baptism which was with water to Jesus’ baptism which is with the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the baptism that John performed”
2519	ACT	18	26	muc2		Πρίσκιλλα καὶ Ἀκύλας προσελάβοντο αὐτὸν, καὶ ἀκριβέστερον αὐτῷ ἐξέθεντο τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Connecting Statement:	Luke tells what happens in Ephesus with Priscilla and Aquila.
2520	ACT	18	26	ga6v	figs-metaphor	τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the way of God	How God wants people to live is spoken of as if it were a road that a person travels. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2521	ACT	18	26	k1lb		ἀκριβέστερον	1	more accurately	Alternate translation: “more correctly” or “more fully”
2522	ACT	18	27	c2sq		αὐτοῦ…προτρεψάμενοι…αὐτόν…ὃς…συνεβάλετο πολὺ	1		Here the he words he and him refer to Apollos (Acts 18:24).
2523	ACT	18	27	ll36		διελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Ἀχαΐαν	1	to pass over into Achaia	The phrase pass over is used here because Apollos had to cross the Aegean Sea to get to Achaia from Ephesus. Alternate translation: “to go to the region of Achaia”
2524	ACT	18	27	pql7		τὴν Ἀχαΐαν	1	Achaia	Achaia was a Roman Province in the southern section of Greece. See how you translated this in Acts 18:12.
2525	ACT	18	27	v2i6	figs-gendernotations	οἱ ἀδελφοὶ	1	brothers	The word brothers here refers to both men and women believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2526	ACT	18	27	i5ij	figs-explicit	οἱ ἀδελφοὶ	1		You can make explicit that the brothers are believers in Ephesus. Alternate translation: “fellow believers in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2527	ACT	18	27	q5f2		ἔγραψαν τοῖς μαθηταῖς	1	and wrote to the disciples	Alternate translation: “and wrote a letter to the Christians in Achaia”
2528	ACT	18	27	f99p		τοῖς πεπιστευκόσιν διὰ τῆς χάριτος	1	those who had believed by grace	Alternate translation: “those who had believed in salvation by grace” or “those who by God’s grace believed in Jesus”
2529	ACT	18	28	l2zt		εὐτόνως…τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις διακατηλέγχετο δημοσίᾳ	1	he was powerfully refuting the Jews publicly	Alternate translation: “in public debate Apollos powerfully proved that the Jews were wrong”
2530	ACT	19	intro	g38y			0		Acts 19 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter Baptism John baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins. Jesus’ followers baptized people who wanted to follow Jesus. Temple of Diana The temple of Diana was an important place in the city of Ephesus. Many people came to Ephesus to see this temple, and they bought statues of the goddess Diana while they were there. The people who sold statues of Diana were afraid that if people did not believe Diana was a real goddess, they would stop giving the sellers money for statues.
2531	ACT	19	1	lp23		ἐγένετο δὲ	1	And it happened that	This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
2532	ACT	19	1	wu6p			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul travels to Ephesus.
2533	ACT	19	1	rhv1		Παῦλον διελθόντα τὰ ἀνωτερικὰ μέρη, κατελθεῖν εἰς Ἔφεσον	1		The upper parts was an area of Asia which today is part of modern-day Turkey to the north of Ephesus. Paul must have traveled by land around the top of the Aegean sea in order to come to Ephesus (also in Turkey today) which is directly east of Corinth by sea.
2534	ACT	19	1	ati9		διελθόντα	1	passed through	Alternate translation: “traveled through”
2535	ACT	19	2	wqi4		εἰ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον ἐλάβετε	1	Did you receive the Holy Spirit	This means to have the Holy Spirit come upon them.
2536	ACT	19	2	nvn4		οὐδ’ εἰ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον ἔστιν ἠκούσαμεν	1	we did not even heard if there is a Holy Spirit	Alternate translation: “we have never heard about the Holy Spirit”
2537	ACT	19	3	mrm6	figs-activepassive	εἰς τί οὖν ἐβαπτίσθητε	1	Into what then were you baptized?	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “What kind of baptism did you receive?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2538	ACT	19	3	jzp7	figs-ellipsis	εἰς τὸ Ἰωάννου βάπτισμα	1	Into the baptism of John	You can translate this as a complete sentence. Alternate translation: “We received the kind of baptism about which John taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2539	ACT	19	4	r46y	figs-abstractnouns	βάπτισμα μετανοίας	1	a baptism of repentance	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word repentance, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “the baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2540	ACT	19	4	pv7t		τὸν ἐρχόμενον	1	the one who is coming	Here, the one refers to Jesus.
2541	ACT	19	4	q5fh		τὸν ἐρχόμενον μετ’ αὐτὸν	1	the one who is coming after him	This means to come after John the Baptist in time and not following after him physically.
2542	ACT	19	5	k9st		ἐβαπτίσθησαν	1	they were baptized	Here, they refers to the disciples in Ephesus who were talking with Paul (Acts 19:1),
2543	ACT	19	5	ueh1	figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίσθησαν	1	they were baptized	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they received baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2544	ACT	19	5	g2dm	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	in the name of the Lord Jesus	Here, name refers to Jesus’ power and authority. Alternate translation: “as believers in the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2545	ACT	19	6	gk8l		ἐπιθέντος αὐτοῖς τοῦ Παύλου χεῖρας	1	when Paul had laid his hands on them	He probably placed his hands on their shoulders or heads. Alternate translation: “when Paul had placed his hands on their heads as he prayed”
2546	ACT	19	6	j4n8		ἐλάλουν τε γλώσσαις καὶ ἐπροφήτευον	1	and they began to speak in tongues and prophesy	Unlike in Acts 2:3-4, there are no details of who understood their messages.
2547	ACT	19	7	e7kj	writing-background	ἦσαν δὲ οἱ πάντες ἄνδρες ὡσεὶ δώδεκα	1	And they were about 12 men in all	This tells how many men were baptized. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2548	ACT	19	8	qv8z		εἰσελθὼν…εἰς τὴν συναγωγὴν, ἐπαρρησιάζετο ἐπὶ μῆνας τρεῖς	1	having gone into the synagogue, he was speaking boldly for three months	Alternate translation: “Paul regularly attended the synagogue meetings for three months and spoke there boldly”
2549	ACT	19	8	yky2		διαλεγόμενος καὶ πείθων	1	reasoning and persuading them	Alternate translation: “convincing people with convincing arguments and with clear teaching”
2550	ACT	19	8	v8et	figs-metonymy	περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	about the kingdom of God	Here, kingdom stands for God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “about God’s rule as king” or “about how God would show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2551	ACT	19	9	mq1g	figs-metaphor	τινες ἐσκληρύνοντο καὶ ἠπείθουν	1	some were hardened and being disobedient	To stubbornly refuse to believe is spoken of as though the people were becoming hardened and unable to move. Alternate translation: “some Jews were stubborn and did not believe” or “some Jews stubbornly refused to accept and obey the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2552	ACT	19	9	n6ir	figs-metaphor	κακολογοῦντες τὴν ὁδὸν ἐνώπιον τοῦ πλήθους	1	speaking evil of the Way before the crowd	What Christ wants people to believe is spoken of as though it were a road that a person travels. The phrase the Way seems to have been a title for Christianity at the time. Alternate translation: “speaking evil about Christianity to the crowd” or “speaking to the crowd evil things about those who follow Christ and who obey his teaching about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and Acts 9:2)
2553	ACT	19	9	ts8d		κακολογοῦντες	1	speaking evil	Alternate translation: “speaking bad things about”
2554	ACT	19	9	xsm6		ἐν τῇ σχολῇ Τυράννου	1	in the lecture hall of Tyrannus	Alternate translation: “in the large room where Tyrannus had taught people”
2555	ACT	19	9	den4	translate-names	Τυράννου	1	of Tyrannus	Tyrannus is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2556	ACT	19	10	cw5g	figs-hyperbole	πάντας τοὺς κατοικοῦντας τὴν Ἀσίαν ἀκοῦσαι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	all those who lived in Asia heard the word of the Lord	Here, all is a generalization that means very many people throughout Asia heard the gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2557	ACT	19	10	kj12	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	the word of the Lord	Here, word stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2558	ACT	19	11	fa6h	figs-synecdoche	δυνάμεις τε οὐ τὰς τυχούσας, ὁ Θεὸς ἐποίει διὰ τῶν χειρῶν Παύλου	1	And God was doing not ordinary miracles by the hands of Paul	Here, hands stands for Paul’s whole person. Alternate translation: “And God was causing Paul to do unusual miracles” or “And God was doing amazing miracles through Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2559	ACT	19	11	abcy		οὐ τὰς τυχούσας	1	not ordinary	Alternate translation: “unusual”
2560	ACT	19	12	cb6w		αὐτῶν τὰς νόσους…ἐκπορεύεσθαι	1		Here the words their and them refer to those who were sick.
2561	ACT	19	12	m3kl		καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας ἀποφέρεσθαι ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια, καὶ	1	even handkerchiefs and aprons from his body were taken to the sick and	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when they took to sick people even handkerchiefs and aprons that had touched Paul”
2562	ACT	19	12	vc1v		καὶ…ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια	1	even handkerchiefs and aprons from his body	This could mean: (1) these were cloth items that Paul had touched or (2) these were cloth items that Paul had worn or used.
2563	ACT	19	12	aks4		σουδάρια	1	handkerchiefs	The handkerchiefs were small pieces of cloth used to wipe one’s face.
2564	ACT	19	12	xs31		σιμικίνθια	1	aprons	The aprons were clothing worn on the front of the body to protect the clothes of the wearers.
2565	ACT	19	12	kw9z	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας	1	the sick	This refers to sick people. Alternate translation: “sick people” or “those who were sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2566	ACT	19	12	nl3a		ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι ἀπ’ αὐτῶν τὰς νόσους	1	their illnesses departed from them	Alternate translation: “those who were sick became healthy”
2567	ACT	19	13	he2x			0	General Information:	This is the beginning of another event that happened while Paul was in Ephesus. It is about Jewish exorcists.
2568	ACT	19	13	fgq4		ἐξορκιστῶν	1	exorcists	These exorcists were people who sent evil spirits away from people or places.
2569	ACT	19	13	s12u	figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	the name of the Lord Jesus	Here, name refers to Jesus’ power and authority. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2570	ACT	19	13	d59p		τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ὃν Παῦλος κηρύσσει	1	by the Jesus whom Paul proclaims	Jesus was a common name at the time, so these exorcists wanted people to know of whom they spoke.
2571	ACT	19	13	vqt1	figs-metonymy	τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	by the Jesus	This phrase stands for the power and authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “by the authority of Jesus” or “by the power of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2572	ACT	19	14	cb8p	translate-names	Σκευᾶ	1	of Sceva	Sceva is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2573	ACT	19	15	i4a2		τὸν Ἰησοῦν γινώσκω, καὶ τὸν Παῦλον ἐπίσταμαι	1	Jesus I know, and Paul I know	Alternate translation: “I know Jesus and Paul” or “I know Jesus, and I know Paul”
2574	ACT	19	15	nsl1	figs-rquestion	ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνες ἐστέ?	1	but who are you?	The spirit asked this question to emphasize that the exorcists had no authority over evil spirits. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “but I do not know you!” or “but you have no authority over me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2575	ACT	19	16	ty4x		ἐφαλόμενος ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ἐν ᾧ ἦν τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν	1	the man in whom was the evil spirit, after leaping on them	This means that the evil spirit caused the man whom it was controlling to leap on the exorcists.
2576	ACT	19	16	lu7u		αὐτοὺς	1	them	Here, them refers to the exorcists who send evil spirits from people or places. See how you translated this in Acts 19:13.
2577	ACT	19	16	b8cb		γυμνοὺς…ἐκφυγεῖν	1	they fled … naked	The exorcists fled with their clothes ripped off them.
2578	ACT	19	17	j85h	figs-activepassive	ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	the name of the Lord Jesus was magnified	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they magnified the name of the Lord Jesus” or “they considered the name of the Lord Jesus to be great” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2579	ACT	19	17	j2hh	figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομα	1	the name	Here, the name stands for the power and authority of Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2580	ACT	19	19	z9rj		συνενέγκαντες τὰς βίβλους	1	having brought their books together	The word books refers to scrolls on which magical incantations and formulas were written. Alternate translation: “having collected their books”
2581	ACT	19	19	m6nf		ἐνώπιον πάντων	1	before everyone	Alternate translation: “in front of everyone”
2582	ACT	19	19	upz3		τὰς τιμὰς αὐτῶν	1	the value of them	Alternate translation: “the value of the books” or “the value of the scrolls”
2583	ACT	19	19	u9pi	translate-numbers	μυριάδας πέντε	1	50000	Alternate translation: “fifty thousand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
2584	ACT	19	19	bcv2	translate-bmoney	ἀργυρίου	1	pieces of silver	Each of the pieces of silver was the approximate daily wage for a common laborer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
2585	ACT	19	20	tj8t	writing-endofstory		0		This ends the story about the Jewish exorcists. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
2586	ACT	19	20	es71	figs-synecdoche	οὕτως κατὰ κράτος τοῦ Κυρίου ὁ λόγος ηὔξανεν καὶ ἴσχυεν	1	So the word of the Lord was spreading and prevailing according to power	Alternate translation: “So because of these powerful deeds, more and more people heard the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2587	ACT	19	21	k1j1			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul talks about going Jerusalem but does not leave Ephesus yet.
2588	ACT	19	21	de4f		δὲ	1	Now	The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke starts to tell a new part of the story.
2589	ACT	19	21	q18b		ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα…ὁ Παῦλος	1	this was completed, Paul	Alternate translation: “Paul had completed the work that God had for him to do in Ephesus, he”
2590	ACT	19	21	fgq5		ἔθετο…ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι	1	he determined in the Spirit	This could mean: (1) Paul decided with the help of the Holy Spirit or (2) Paul decided within his own spirit, which means he made up his mind.
2591	ACT	19	21	brb7		Ἀχαΐαν	1	Achaia	Achaia was the Roman province in which Corinth was located. It was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. See how you translated this in Acts 18:12.
2592	ACT	19	21	rdz4		δεῖ με καὶ Ῥώμην ἰδεῖν	1	it is necessary for me also to see Rome	Alternate translation: “I must also travel to Rome”
2593	ACT	19	22	cy6f	translate-names	Ἔραστον	1	Erastus	Erastus is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2594	ACT	19	22	k35j	figs-explicit	αὐτὸς ἐπέσχεν χρόνον εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν	1	he himself stayed in Asia for a time	It is made explicit in the next few verses that Paul remains in Ephesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2595	ACT	19	22	uy9x	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς ἐπέσχεν	1	he himself stayed	Here, himself is added for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2596	ACT	19	23	l7gz			0	Connecting Statement:	Luke tells about a riot that broke out while Paul was in Ephesus.
2597	ACT	19	23	nb3p	figs-litotes	ἐγένετο…τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος	1	there was no small disturbance	Luke uses the negative no small to indicate that the riot was very large. See how you translated this in Acts 12:18 Alternate translation: “the people became very upset” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2598	ACT	19	23	rwf2		τῆς ὁδοῦ	1	the Way	This was a term used to refer to Christianity. See how you translated this title in Acts 9:1.
2599	ACT	19	24	y5ae	writing-background	Δημήτριος…τις ὀνόματι ἀργυροκόπος, ποιῶν ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος	1		This verse introduces background information about Demetrius. Ephesus had a large temple dedicated to the goddess Artemis, sometimes translated as “Diana.” She was a false goddess of fertility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2600	ACT	19	24	opb9	translate-names	Δημήτριος	1		Demetrius is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2601	ACT	19	24	cg16	writing-participants	Δημήτριος…τις ὀνόματι ἀργυροκόπος	1	a certain silversmith named Demetrius	The use of the words a certain introduces a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2602	ACT	19	24	nwt7		ἀργυροκόπος	1	a silversmith	A silversmith is a craftsman who works with silver metal to make statues and jewelry.
2603	ACT	19	24	p58m	figs-litotes	παρείχετο…οὐκ ὀλίγην ἐργασίαν	1	brought in not a little business	Luke uses the negative not a little to say that he brought in much business. Alternate translation: “made a lot of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2604	ACT	19	25	kuz6		τοὺς περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐργάτας	1	the workmen of that occupation	An occupation is a profession or job. Alternate translation: “others who did that kind of work”
2605	ACT	19	26	rm6w		θεωρεῖτε καὶ ἀκούετε ὅτι	1	you see and hear that	Alternate translation: “you have come to know and understand that”
2606	ACT	19	26	rx32	figs-metaphor	μετέστησεν ἱκανὸν ὄχλον	1	and turned away a considerable crowd	Paul’s stopping people from worshiping idols is spoken of as though Paul were literally turning the people in a different direction. Alternate translation: “and caused many people to stop worshiping the local gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2607	ACT	19	26	z7e7	figs-synecdoche	λέγων ὅτι οὐκ εἰσὶν θεοὶ, οἱ διὰ χειρῶν γινόμενοι	1	He is saying that the things that are being made with hands are not gods	Here the word hands can refer to the whole person. Alternate translation: “He is saying that the idols that people make are not real gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2608	ACT	19	27	r1w2	figs-activepassive	τοῦτο κινδυνεύει ἡμῖν, τὸ μέρος εἰς ἀπελεγμὸν ἐλθεῖν	1	is this trade in peril for us to come to disrepute	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “might the people no longer want to buy idols that we make” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2609	ACT	19	27	j3bb	figs-activepassive	τὸ τῆς μεγάλης θεᾶς Ἀρτέμιδος ἱερὸν, εἰς οὐθὲν λογισθῆναι	1	the temple of the great goddess Artemis may be considered as nothing	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the people may think there is no benefit in going to the temple to worship the great goddess Artemis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2610	ACT	19	27	bqt4		μέλλειν τε καὶ καθαιρεῖσθαι τῆς μεγαλειότητος αὐτῆς	1	And indeed, her majesty is about to be destroyed	Artemis’s greatness only comes from what people think of her.
2611	ACT	19	27	hz7l	figs-hyperbole	ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται	1	whom all Asia and the world worships	This was an exaggeration to show how popular the goddess Artemis was. Alternate translation: “whom many parts Asia and other parts of the world worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2612	ACT	19	27	aq5c	figs-metonymy	ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται	1		Here the words Asia and the world refer to the people in Asia and the known world. Alternate translation: “whom many people in Asia and in other parts of the world worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2613	ACT	19	28	t4lm		ἔκραζον	1		Here they refers to the craftsmen who made the idols (Acts 19:24-25).
2614	ACT	19	28	uc5c	figs-metaphor	γενόμενοι πλήρεις θυμοῦ	1	having become filled with anger	This speaks of the craftsmen as though they were containers. Here, anger is spoken of as if it were the contents that fill a container. Alternate translation: “they became very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2615	ACT	19	28	lcx8		ἔκραζον	1	they cried out	Alternate translation: “they shouted aloud” or “they shouted loudly”
2616	ACT	19	28	ii1u			0	General Information:	Ephesus was part of the Roman empire and in the province of Asia.
2617	ACT	19	29	t7xs	figs-metonymy	ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως	1	the whole city was filled with confusion	Here, city refers to the people of the city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2618	ACT	19	29	u42d	figs-metaphor	ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως	1		The city is spoken of as if it were a container. And, confusion is spoken of as if it were the contents that filled the container. Alternate translation: “people all over the city became upset and started shouting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2619	ACT	19	29	nt7y		ὥρμησάν τε ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	and they rushed together	This was a mob or near riot situation.
2620	ACT	19	29	ej3q		εἰς τὸ θέατρον	1	into the theater	The Ephesus theater was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. It was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people.
2621	ACT	19	29	hjc8		Γάϊον καὶ Ἀρίσταρχον Μακεδόνας, συνεκδήμους Παύλου	1	Paul’s … travel companions	These were men who had been with Paul.
2622	ACT	19	29	d6r9	translate-names	Γάϊον…Ἀρίσταρχον	1	Gaius … Aristarchus	Gaius and Aristarchus are names of men. Gaius and Aristarchus came from Macedonia but were working with Paul in Ephesus at this time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2623	ACT	19	31	z7ww		τὸ θέατρον	1	the theater	The Ephesus theater was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. It was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people. See how you translated theater in Acts 19:29.
2624	ACT	19	33	jr85	translate-names	Ἀλέξανδρον	1	Alexander	Alexander is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2625	ACT	19	33	j1mi	figs-explicit	κατασείσας τὴν χεῖρα	1	motioned with his hand	You can make explicit that Alexander was showing the crowd that he wanted them to be quiet. Alternate translation: “gestured to the crowd to be quiet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2626	ACT	19	33	tlq7		ἀπολογεῖσθαι	1	to give a defense	It is not clear whom or what Alexander wanted to defend. If your language requires this information, it might be best to use a general phrase like “to explain what was going on.”
2627	ACT	19	34	u1hp	figs-metaphor	φωνὴ ἐγένετο μία ἐκ πάντων	1	there was one voice from all of them	The shouting together of the people at the same time is spoken of as though they were speaking with one voice. Alternate translation: “they were shouting in unison” or “they were shouting together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2628	ACT	19	35	pu96			0	Connecting Statement:	The clerk of Ephesus speaks to quiet the crowd.
2629	ACT	19	35	sy9m		ὁ γραμματεὺς	1	the town clerk	This town clerk was like a “writer” or “secretary” for the town.
2630	ACT	19	35	sd3s	figs-rquestion	τίς γάρ ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος καὶ τοῦ διοπετοῦς?	1	what man indeed is there who does not know that the city of Ephesus is temple keeper of the great Artemis and of that which is fallen down from heaven?	The clerk asked this question to assure the crowd they were right and to comfort them. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “for every man knows that the Ephesians guard the temple of the great Artemis and of her image that fell down from heaven.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2631	ACT	19	35	k8dy	figs-litotes	ὃς οὐ γινώσκει	1	who does not know	The town clerk uses not to emphasize that all of the people knew this. Alternate translation: “everyone knows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2632	ACT	19	35	hiw3		νεωκόρον…τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος	1	temple keeper	The Ephesian people maintained and guarded the temple of Artemis.
2633	ACT	19	35	afd1		τοῦ διοπετοῦς	1	of that which is fallen down from heaven	Within the temple of Artemis was an image of the goddess. It had been fashioned from a meteorite which fell from the sky. People thought that his rock had come directly from Zeus, the ruler of the Greek gods (idols).
2634	ACT	19	36	r8cf		ἀναντιρρήτων οὖν ὄντων τούτων	1	So these things are undeniable	Alternate translation: “So since you know these things are true”
2635	ACT	19	36	xj2n		μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν	1	to do nothing rash	Alternate translation: “do not do anything before you have had time to think about it”
2636	ACT	19	36	s67q		προπετὲς	1	rash	To be rash is to act without careful thought.
2637	ACT	19	37	s8a9		τοὺς ἄνδρας τούτους	1	these men	The words these men refer to Gaius and Aristarchus, Paul’s traveling companions (Acts 19:29).
2638	ACT	19	38	qd4s		οὖν	1	Therefore	The town clerk had said in Acts 19:37 that Gaius and Aristarchus were not robbers or blasphemers. Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true”
2639	ACT	19	38	zkx5	figs-abstractnouns	ἔχουσιν πρός τινα λόγον	1	have a word against anyone	Here having a word against someone means they want to accuse them of something. Alternate translation: “want to accuse someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2640	ACT	19	38	szf7	translate-unknown	ἀνθύπατοί	1	proconsuls	The proconsuls were the Roman governor’s representatives who made legal decisions in court. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2641	ACT	19	38	g8tp		ἐγκαλείτωσαν ἀλλήλοις	1	Let them accuse one another	This does not mean Demetrius and those with him will accuse each other. It means this is a place where people in general can speak their accusation. Alternate translation: “There people can accuse one another”
2642	ACT	19	39	hxh3		εἰ δέ τι περὶ ἑτέρων ἐπιζητεῖτε	1	But if you seek anything about other matters	Alternate translation: “But if you have other matters to discuss”
2643	ACT	19	39	wga5	figs-activepassive	ἐν τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἐπιλυθήσεται	1	it will be settled in the regular assembly	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “let us settle it in the regular assembly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2644	ACT	19	39	et5j		τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	the regular assembly	This regular assembly refers to a public gathering of citizens over which the county clerk presided.
2645	ACT	19	40	sds7	figs-activepassive	κινδυνεύομεν ἐνκαλεῖσθαι στάσεως περὶ τῆς σήμερον	1	we are in danger of being accused of rioting concerning this day	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we are in danger of the Roman authorities accusing us of starting this riot today” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2646	ACT	20	intro	u91c			0		Acts 20 General Notes Structure and formatting In this chapter Luke describes Paul’s last visits to believers in the provinces of Macedonia and Asia before he went to Jerusalem. Special concepts in this chapter Race Paul spoke of living for Jesus as if he were running in a race. By this he meant that he needed to keep working hard even when things were difficult and he wanted to quit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/discipline]]) “Compelled by the Spirit” Paul thought that the Holy Spirit wanted him to go to Jerusalem even if Paul did not want to go there. The same Holy Spirit told other people that when Paul arrived in Jerusalem, people would try to harm him.
2647	ACT	20	1	cwq7			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul leaves Ephesus and continues his travels.
2648	ACT	20	1	y5cq		μετὰ δὲ τὸ παύσασθαι τὸν θόρυβον	1	After the uproar had ended	Alternate translation: “After the riot” or “Following the riot”
2649	ACT	20	1	hr32		ἀσπασάμενος	1	and said farewell	Alternate translation: “and he said goodbye”
2650	ACT	20	2	edb8		παρακαλέσας αὐτοὺς λόγῳ πολλῷ	1	had exhorted them with many words	Alternate translation: “had greatly encouraged the believers by saying many things” or “had said many things to challenge the believers”
2651	ACT	20	3	yxj3	figs-metaphor	ποιήσας τε μῆνας τρεῖς	1	And after he had spent three months there	This speaks about time as if it were something a person could spend. Alternate translation: “And after he had stayed there three months” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2652	ACT	20	3	cit9	figs-activepassive	γενομένης ἐπιβουλῆς αὐτῷ ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	a plot was formed against him by the Jews	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the Jews formed a plot against him” or “the Jews formed a secret plan to harm him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2653	ACT	20	3	ah5w	figs-synecdoche	ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	by the Jews	Here, the Jews refers to only some of the Jews. Alternate translation: “by some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2654	ACT	20	3	m7na		μέλλοντι ἀνάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν Συρίαν	1	as he was about to sail for Syria	Alternate translation: “as he was ready to sail to Syria”
2655	ACT	20	4	c9et		συνείπετο δὲ αὐτῷ	1	And accompanying him	Alternate translation: “And traveling with him”
2656	ACT	20	4	dw6j	translate-names	Σώπατρος…Πύρρου…Σεκοῦνδος,…Τυχικὸς…Τρόφιμος	1	were Sopater of Pyrrhus … Secundus … Tychicus … Trophimus	These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2657	ACT	20	4	w4n1	translate-names	Βεροιαῖος…Θεσσαλονικέων…Δερβαῖος…Ἀσιανοὶ	1	from Berea … from Derbe	These are names of places. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2658	ACT	20	4	w8j6		Σώπατρος Πύρρου…Ἀρίσταρχος…Σεκοῦνδος…Γάϊος…Τιμόθεος…Τυχικὸς…Τρόφιμος	1	Aristarchus … Gaius	These are names of men. See how you translated these names in Acts 19:29.
2659	ACT	20	5	y35x	figs-exclusive	προσελθόντες…ἡμᾶς	1		All instances of us in this verse refer to the writer and Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2660	ACT	20	5	kv8t		οὗτοι…προσελθόντες	1	they had gone before us	Alternate translation: “these men had traveled ahead of us”
2661	ACT	20	5	itz1	translate-names	Τρῳάδι	1	Troas	Troas is the name of a place. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2662	ACT	20	6	vmj6	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς…ἤλθομεν…διετρίψαμεν	1		All instances of we in this verse refer to the writer and Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2663	ACT	20	6	l5dr		τὰς ἡμέρας τῶν Ἀζύμων	1	the days of unleavened bread	This refers to a time of Jewish religious feast time during the Passover season. See how you translated this in Acts 12:3.
2664	ACT	20	7	dnt4	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1		Here the word we refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and Acts 20:4-6)
2665	ACT	20	7	mbr8			0	Connecting Statement:	Luke tells about Paul’s preaching in Troas and about what happened to Eutychus.
2666	ACT	20	7	zff8	figs-synecdoche	κλάσαι ἄρτον	1	to break bread	Bread was part of their meals. This could mean: (1) this refers simply to eating a meal together. Alternate translation: “eat a meal” or (2) this refers to the meal they would eat together in order to remember Christ’s death and resurrection. Alternate translation: “to eat the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2667	ACT	20	7	j888		παρέτεινέν τε τὸν λόγον	1	and so he continued his message	Alternate translation: “and so he continued to speak”
2668	ACT	20	8	ak8z		ὑπερῴῳ	1	upper room	This upper room may have been the third floor of the house.
2669	ACT	20	9	v5q7		ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος	1	on the window	This window was an opening in the wall with a ledge that was wide enough for a person to sit on it.
2670	ACT	20	9	ju64	translate-names	Εὔτυχος	1	Eutychus	Eutychus is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2671	ACT	20	9	tsp4	figs-metaphor	καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ	1	was falling into a deep sleep	This speaks about sleep as if it were a deep hole into which a person could fall. Alternate translation: “was sleeping soundly” or “was becoming more and more tired until finally he was sleeping soundly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2672	ACT	20	9	abcz		κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου	1	having been overcome by sleep	The young man fell asleep, not Paul.
2673	ACT	20	9	jp89	figs-activepassive	καὶ ἤρθη νεκρός	1	and was picked up dead	When they went down to check his condition, they saw he was dead. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “and when they went to pick him up, they found that he was dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2674	ACT	20	9	kh3h		τριστέγου	1	third story	The third story refers to a level two floors above the ground floor. If your culture does not count the ground floor, you may state this as the “second story.”
2675	ACT	20	11	av7m		ἀναβὰς…τε ὁμιλήσας…ἐξῆλθεν	1		Here all occurrences of the word he refer to Paul.
2676	ACT	20	11	lih8			0	Connecting Statement:	This is the end of the part of the story about Paul’s preaching at Troas and about Eutychus.
2677	ACT	20	11	w5w8	figs-synecdoche	κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον	1	had broken bread	Bread was a common food during meals. Here, broken bread probably means they shared a meal with more kinds of food than just bread. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2678	ACT	20	11	t88c		οὕτως ἐξῆλθεν	1	In this way, he left	Alternate translation: “This is what happened as he was going away”
2679	ACT	20	12	jkj5		τὸν παῖδα	1	the boy	Here, the boy refers to Eutychus (Acts 20:9). This could mean: (1) he was a young man over 14 years old. (2) he was a boy between 9 and 14 years old. (3) he was a servant or a slave.
2680	ACT	20	12	abx0	figs-litotes	οὐ μετρίως	1	not moderately	Luke uses the negative not moderately to say that they were greatly comforted. Alternate translation: “greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2681	ACT	20	13	dja7	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς…μέλλοντες	1		Here the word we refers to the writer and those traveling with him, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2682	ACT	20	13	w4ew	figs-rpronouns	ἡμεῖς…προελθόντες	1	we, having gone ahead	The word we here refers to Luke and his traveling companions, and not to Paul. Paul did travel on the ship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2683	ACT	20	13	q4yz	translate-names	τὴν Ἆσσον	1	Assos	Assos is a town located directly below present-day Behram in Turkey on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2684	ACT	20	13	nq2q	figs-rpronouns	ἦν μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν	1	ἦν μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν	Here, himself is used to emphasize that this is what Paul wanted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2685	ACT	20	13	p8y7		πεζεύειν	1	to go on foot	Alternate translation: “to walk”
2686	ACT	20	14	ju8f	translate-names	Μιτυλήνην	1	Mitylene	Mitylene is a town located in present-day Mitilini in Turkey on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2687	ACT	20	15	ll2h	figs-exclusive	κατηντήσαμεν…παρεβάλομεν…ἤλθομεν	1		Here the word we refers to Paul, the writer, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2688	ACT	20	15	ulk6	translate-names	Χίου	1	Chios	Chios is an island off the coast of modern-day Turkey in the Aegean Sea. Alternate translation: “the island of Chios” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2689	ACT	20	15	jyr7		παρεβάλομεν εἰς Σάμον	1	we landed at Samos	Alternate translation: “we arrived at the island of Samos”
2690	ACT	20	15	b6c6	translate-names	Σάμον	1	Samos	Samos is an island south of Chios in the Aegean Sea off the coast of modern day Turkey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2691	ACT	20	15	s7g2	translate-names	Μίλητον	1	Miletus	Miletus was a port city in western Asia Minor near the mouth of the Meander River. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2692	ACT	20	16	p272	translate-names	κεκρίκει γὰρ ὁ Παῦλος παραπλεῦσαι τὴν Ἔφεσον	1	For Paul had decided to sail past Ephesus	Paul sailed south past the port city of Ephesus, further south in order to land at Miletus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2693	ACT	20	16	p61e	figs-metaphor	ὅπως μὴ γένηται αὐτῷ χρονοτριβῆσαι	1	so that he would not spend time	This speaks about time as if it were a commodity that a person could spend or use up. Alternate translation: “so that he would not have to remain for a time” or “so that he would not have a delay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2694	ACT	20	17	nw52		μετεκαλέσατο	1		Here the word he refers to Paul.
2695	ACT	20	17	v9al			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul calls the elders of the church of Ephesus and begins to speak to them.
2696	ACT	20	17	l9aj	translate-names	τῆς Μιλήτου	1	Miletus	Miletus was a port city in western Asia Minor near the mouth of the Meander River. See how you translated this in Acts 20:15. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2697	ACT	20	18	b6li	figs-rpronouns	ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε	1	You yourselves know	Here, yourselves is used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2698	ACT	20	18	vw6n	figs-synecdoche	ἐπέβην εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν	1	I set foot in Asia	Here, foot stands for the entire person. Alternate translation: “I entered Asia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2699	ACT	20	19	wh5m	figs-metonymy	δακρύων	1	tears	Here tears stands for feeling sad and crying. Alternate translation: “sadness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2700	ACT	20	19	e6k7		πειρασμῶν, τῶν συμβάντων μοι	1	trials that happened to me	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word trials, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “while I was tested” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns)
2701	ACT	20	19	y5iw	figs-synecdoche	τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	of the Jews	Here, the Jews does not mean every Jew. This lets us know who plotted. Alternate translation: “of some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2702	ACT	20	20	nu7h		ὡς οὐδὲν ὑπεστειλάμην τῶν συμφερόντων τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι ὑμῖν	1	how I kept back nothing that was useful which I did not declare to you	Alternate translation: “how I declared to you everything that was beneficial to you”
2703	ACT	20	20	kut9		κατ’ οἴκους	1	according to houses	Paul taught people in various private homes. Alternate translation: “in each house” or “in everyone’s home”
2704	ACT	20	21	w7mv	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν εἰς τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν	1	about repentance toward God and faith in our Lord Jesus	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words repentance and faith, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “that they need to repent before God and believe in our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2705	ACT	20	21	x552	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1		The word our refers to Paul and the elders to whom he is speaking. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2706	ACT	20	22	ty3b		ἐγὼ	1		Here the word I refers to Paul.
2707	ACT	20	22	vam4	figs-activepassive	δεδεμένος…τῷ Πνεύματι	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form.They can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “because the Spirit compels me to go there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2708	ACT	20	22	a9j1		τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ συναντήσοντά μοι, μὴ εἰδώς	1	not knowing what will happen to me in it	Alternate translation: “and I do not know what will happen to me there” or “not knowing what will happen to me in Jerusalem”
2709	ACT	20	23	q3ie	figs-metonymy	δεσμὰ καὶ θλίψεις με μένουσιν	1	chains and sufferings await me	Here, chains refers to Paul’s being arrested and put in prison. Alternate translation: “people will put me in prison and cause me to suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2710	ACT	20	24	w8d2	figs-metaphor	ὡς τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	so as to finish my race and the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus	This speaks about Paul’s race and ministry as if they are objects that Jesus gives and Paul receives. Alternate translation: “so that I may complete the work that the Lord Jesus has commanded me to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2711	ACT	20	24	ga6d	figs-doublet	τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν	1		Here, race and ministry mean basically the same thing. Paul repeats this for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2712	ACT	20	24	m5gc	figs-metaphor	τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου	1	to finish my race	Paul speaks about completing the work that Jesus has commanded him to do as if he were running a race. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2713	ACT	20	24	hg3l		διαμαρτύρασθαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	to solemnly testify to the gospel of the grace of God	This is the ministry that Paul received from Jesus. Alternate translation: “to tell people what I have personally learned about the good news of God’s grace”
2714	ACT	20	25	kj9c		καὶ νῦν ἰδοὺ, ἐγὼ οἶδα	1	And now, behold, I know	Alternate translation: “And now, pay careful attention, because I know”
2715	ACT	20	25	z4ng		ἐγὼ οἶδα ὅτι…ὑμεῖς πάντες	1	I know that you all	Alternate translation: “I know that all of you”
2716	ACT	20	25	aur9	figs-metonymy	ἐν οἷς διῆλθον κηρύσσων τὴν βασιλείαν	1	among whom I went about proclaiming the kingdom	Here, kingdom stands for God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “to whom I preached the message about God’s reign as king” or “to whom I preached about how God will show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2717	ACT	20	25	cq45	figs-synecdoche	οὐκέτι ὄψεσθε τὸ πρόσωπόν μου	1	will see my face no more	The word face here represents Paul’s physical body. Alternate translation: “will not see me anymore on this earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2718	ACT	20	26	e546	figs-metonymy	καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων	1	I am innocent from the blood of all	Here, blood stands for a person’s death, which, in this case, is not physical death but spiritual death when God declares a person guilty of sin. Paul had told them God’s truth. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for anyone whom God judges guilty of sin because they did not trust in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2719	ACT	20	26	v5el	figs-gendernotations	πάντων	1	of all	Here all refers to any person, whether male or female. Alternate translation: “of any person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2720	ACT	20	27	qa9y	figs-litotes	οὐ γὰρ ὑπεστειλάμην τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι…ὑμῖν	1	For I did not hold back from declaring to you	Paul uses the negative not hold back to emphasize that he told them everything. Alternate translation: “For I certainly declared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2721	ACT	20	28	u52d	figs-metaphor	τῷ ποιμνίῳ, ἐν ᾧ ὑμᾶς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔθετο ἐπισκόπους, ποιμαίνειν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the flock among which the Holy Spirit has made you overseers to shepherd the church of God	Believers are likened to a flock of sheep here. Church leaders are entrusted by God with the care of the community of believers just as a shepherd would care for his flock of sheep and protect them from wolves. Alternate translation: “the group of believers the Holy spirit has entrusted to you. Be sure to take care of the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2722	ACT	20	28	cx69	figs-metaphor	τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου	1	the church of God, which he purchased with his own blood	The shedding of the blood of Christ here is likened to a payment to God for our sins. Alternate translation: “the people Christ saved from their sins by shedding his blood on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2723	ACT	20	28	hjh6	figs-metonymy	τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου	1	his own blood	Here, blood stands for Christ’s death. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2724	ACT	20	29	ka6u	figs-metaphor	εἰσελεύσονται…λύκοι βαρεῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς, μὴ φειδόμενοι τοῦ ποιμνίου	1	vicious wolves will come in among you, not sparing the flock	This is a picture of people who teach false doctrine and who harm the community of believers as though they were wolves that eat the sheep of the flock. Alternate translation: “many enemies will come among you and try to harm the community of believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2725	ACT	20	30	ftf4	figs-metaphor	τοῦ ἀποσπᾶν τοὺς μαθητὰς ὀπίσω ἑαυτῶν	1	to draw away the disciples after them	A false teacher convincing believers to start believing his false teaching is spoken of as if he were leading sheep away from the flock to follow him. Alternate translation: “in order to convince people who are disciples of Christ to become his disciples instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2726	ACT	20	31	q2nl		γρηγορεῖτε, μνημονεύοντες	1	be alert, remembering	Alternate translation: “be on guard and remember” or “be on guard as you remember”
2727	ACT	20	31	ll64	figs-metaphor	γρηγορεῖτε	1	be alert	Christian leaders being alert about anyone that may harm the community of believers is spoken of as if they were guards in an army watching out for the enemy army. Alternate translation: “be awake” or “watch out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2728	ACT	20	31	pvt6		μνημονεύοντες ὅτι	1	Remembering that	Alternate translation: “continuing to remember that” or “not forgetting that”
2729	ACT	20	31	rt1h	figs-hyperbole	τριετίαν νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν, οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην…νουθετῶν	1	for three years I did not stop admonishing … night and day	Paul did not teach them continuously for three years, but over the space of three years. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2730	ACT	20	31	hs1m		οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην…νουθετῶν	1	I did not stop admonishing	If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative not stop, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “I continued to warn”
2731	ACT	20	31	rvh6	figs-metonymy	μετὰ δακρύων	1	with tears	Here, tears refers to Paul’s crying because of the strong emotion of concern he felt while he was warning the people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2732	ACT	20	32	ylm3	figs-metonymy	παρατίθεμαι ὑμᾶς τῷ Θεῷ, καὶ τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ	1	I am entrusting you to God and to the word of his grace	Here, word stands for a message. Alternate translation: “I ask God to take care of you and that he will help you to keep believing the message I spoke to you about his grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2733	ACT	20	32	vnb2		παρατίθεμαι	1	I am entrusting	To “entrust” something to someone is to give them the responsibility of taking care of someone or something.
2734	ACT	20	32	s7rf	figs-metaphor	τῷ δυναμένῳ οἰκοδομῆσαι	1	which is able to build you up	A person’s faith becoming stronger is spoken of as if the person were a wall and someone were building him higher and stronger. Alternate translation: “which is able to make you become stronger and stronger in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2735	ACT	20	32	zvz8	figs-personification	δοῦναι τὴν κληρονομίαν	1	to give you the inheritance	This speaks about the word of his grace as if it were God himself that would give the inheritance to believers. Alternate translation: “God will give you the inheritance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2736	ACT	20	32	x5jy	figs-metaphor	τὴν κληρονομίαν	1	the inheritance	The blessings that God gives believers is spoken of as if they were money or property that a child inherits from his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2737	ACT	20	33	yw8a		ἀργυρίου…οὐδενὸς ἐπεθύμησα	1	I coveted no one’s silver	Alternate translation: “I did not desire anyone’s silver” or “I did not want for myself anyone’s silver”
2738	ACT	20	33	ipq5		ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ, οὐδενὸς	1	no one’s silver, gold, or clothing	Here, clothing is considered a treasure; the more you had, the richer you were.
2739	ACT	20	34	f5a3	figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὶ γινώσκετε	1	You yourselves know	The word yourselves is used here to add emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2740	ACT	20	34	ja5v	figs-synecdoche	ταῖς χρείαις μου, καὶ τοῖς…ὑπηρέτησαν αἱ χεῖρες αὗται	1	these hands ministered to my needs and to those who	The word hands here represents the entire person. Alternate translation: “I worked to earn money and pay for my own expenses and for those who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2741	ACT	20	35	wn8j		κοπιῶντας δεῖ ἀντιλαμβάνεσθαι τῶν ἀσθενούντων	1	it is necessary to work hard to help those who are weak	Alternate translation: “you should work so as to have money to help people who are in need”
2742	ACT	20	35	p3n8	figs-nominaladj	τῶν ἀσθενούντων	1	those who are weak	You can state the nominal adjective weak as an adjective. Alternate translation: “weak people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2743	ACT	20	35	dpu1		ἀσθενούντων	1	weak	Alternate translation: “sick”
2744	ACT	20	35	ps2i	figs-metonymy	τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	the words of the Lord Jesus	Here, words refers to what Jesus has said. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2745	ACT	20	35	e396		μακάριόν ἐστιν μᾶλλον, διδόναι ἢ λαμβάνειν	1	It is more blessed to give than to receive	This means a person receives the favor of God and experiences more joy when he gives to other people rather than always receiving from other people.
2746	ACT	20	36	q6bs			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul ends his time with the elders of the church of Ephesus by praying with them.
2747	ACT	20	36	u3uc	translate-symaction	θεὶς τὰ γόνατα αὐτοῦ…προσηύξατο	1	having bowed his knees, he prayed	It was a common custom to kneel down while praying. It was a sign of humility before God. Alternate translation: “he knelt down and prayed to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2748	ACT	20	37	pb4r		ἐπιπεσόντες ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τοῦ Παύλου	1	having fallen upon Paul’s neck	Alternate translation: “having embraced Paul” or “putting their arms around him”
2749	ACT	20	37	sze4		κατεφίλουν αὐτόν	1	they were kissing him	To kiss someone on the cheek was an expression of brotherly or friendly love in the Middle East.
2750	ACT	20	38	bs3s	figs-synecdoche	οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν	1	they were never going to see his face again	The word face here represents Paul’s physical body. Alternate translation: “they would not see him anymore on this earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2751	ACT	21	intro	gh1j			0		Acts 21 General Notes Structure and formatting Acts 21:1-19 describes Paul’s journey to Jerusalem. After he arrived in Jerusalem, the believers there told him that the Jews wanted to harm him and what he should do so they would not harm him (verses 20-26). Even though Paul did what the believers told him to do, the Jews tried to kill him. The Romans rescued him and gave him a chance to speak to the Jews. The last verse of the chapter ends with an incomplete sentence. Most translations leave the sentence incomplete, as the ULT does. Special concepts in this chapter “They are all determined to keep the law” The Jews in Jerusalem were following the law of Moses. Even those who were following Jesus still kept the law. Both groups thought that Paul had been telling Jews in Greece not to keep the law. But it was only the Gentiles to whom Paul was saying that. Nazarite vow The vow that Paul and his three friends made was probably a Nazarite vow, because they shaved their heads (Acts 21:23). Gentiles in the temple The Jews accused Paul of bringing a Gentile man into a part of the temple into which God only allowed Jews to go. They thought that God wanted them to punish Paul by killing him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]]) Roman citizenship The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens.
2752	ACT	21	1	i6f8			0	Connecting Statement:	The writer Luke, Paul, and his companions continue their travels.
2753	ACT	21	1	s3h3	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς…ἤλθομεν	1		Here the word we refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2754	ACT	21	1	zz5h		εὐθυδρομήσαντες ἤλθομεν εἰς τὴν Κῶ	1	having run a straight course, we came to Cos	Alternate translation: “we went straight to the city of Cos” or “we went directly to the city of Cos”
2755	ACT	21	1	e5y6	translate-names	Κῶ	1	Cos	Cos is a Greek island off the coast of modern day Turkey in the South Aegean Sea region. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2756	ACT	21	1	p6ss	translate-names	Ῥόδον	1	Rhodes	Rhodes is a Greek island off the coast of modern day Turkey in the South Aegean Sea region south of Cos and northeast of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2757	ACT	21	1	x7kg	translate-names	Πάταρα	1	Patara	Patara is a city on the southwest coast of modern day Turkey south of the Aegean Sea in the Mediterranean Sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2758	ACT	21	2	nz9k	figs-metonymy	καὶ εὑρόντες πλοῖον διαπερῶν εἰς Φοινίκην	1	And when we found a ship crossing over to Phoenicia	Here, a ship crossing over stands for the crew that would sail the ship. Alternate translation: “And when we found a ship with a crew sailing over to Phoenicia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2759	ACT	21	2	vbd3		πλοῖον διαπερῶν	1	a ship crossing over	Here, crossing does not mean it was presently crossing but that it would be crossing to Phoenicia soon. Alternate translation: “a ship that would be going across the water” or “a ship that would be going”
2760	ACT	21	3	er3r	figs-exclusive	ἐπλέομεν	1		Here the word we refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2761	ACT	21	3	vkr2		καταλιπόντες αὐτὴν εὐώνυμον	1	leaving it behind on the left	The left is the “port” side of a boat. Alternate translation: “passed the island on our left”
2762	ACT	21	3	hwx8	figs-metonymy	ἐκεῖσε…τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον	1	the ship was to unload its cargo there	Here, ship stands for the crew that was sailing the ship. Alternate translation: “the crew would unload the cargo from the ship there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2763	ACT	21	4	y35m		οἵτινες τῷ Παύλῳ ἔλεγον διὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	Through the Spirit they kept saying to Paul	Alternate translation: “These believers told Paul what the Holy Spirit had revealed to them, for him”
2764	ACT	21	5	fe1u		πάντων	1		Here the word they refers to the believers from Tyre.
2765	ACT	21	5	a5wj		ὅτε…ἐγένετο ἡμᾶς ἐξαρτίσαι τὰς ἡμέρας	1	when our days to supply happened	Alternate translation: “when we had finished taking supplies onto the ship”
2766	ACT	21	5	q8xl	translate-symaction	θέντες τὰ γόνατα ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν προσευξάμενοι	1	having knelt down on the shore and having prayed	It was a common custom to kneel down while praying. This was a sign of humility before God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2767	ACT	21	6	ja1x		ἀπησπασάμεθα ἀλλήλους	1	we said farewell to each other	Alternate translation: “we said goodbye to one another”
2768	ACT	21	7	hy6e	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς…κατηντήσαμεν…ἐμείναμεν	1		Here the word we refers to Luke, Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2769	ACT	21	7	z4nt	translate-names	Πτολεμαΐδα	1	Ptolemais	Ptolemais was a city south of Tyre, Lebanon. Ptolemais is modern day Acre, Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2770	ACT	21	7	ff1s		τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	the brothers	Alternate translation: “the fellow believers”
2771	ACT	21	8	kt6u		Καισάρειαν	1	Connecting Statement:	This begins Paul’s time in Caesarea.
2772	ACT	21	8	ay52		ἐκ τῶν ἑπτὰ	1	from the seven	Here, the seven refers to the men chosen to distribute food and aid to the widows in Acts 6:5.
2773	ACT	21	8	vi48		εὐαγγελιστοῦ	1	evangelist	An evangelist is a person who tells people the good news about Jesus.
2774	ACT	21	9	rcf4		τούτῳ	1	this man	Alternate translation: “Philip”
2775	ACT	21	9	cv8b	writing-background	δὲ	1	Now	The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells background information about Philip and his daughters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2776	ACT	21	9	r1i1		θυγατέρες τέσσαρες παρθένοι, προφητεύουσαι	1	four virgin daughters who prophesy	Alternate translation: “four virgin daughters who regularly receive and pass along messages from God”
2777	ACT	21	10	fe6s	figs-exclusive	ἐπιμενόντων	1		Here the word we refer to Luke, Paul, and those with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2778	ACT	21	10	n3i8	writing-participants	τις…προφήτης ὀνόματι Ἅγαβος	1	a certain prophet named Agabus	This introduces Agabus as a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2779	ACT	21	10	f9cb	translate-names	Ἅγαβος	1	Agabus	Agabus was a man from Judea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2780	ACT	21	11	n2r0	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1		Here the word us refer to Luke, Paul, and those with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2781	ACT	21	11	i8t2		ἄρας τὴν ζώνην τοῦ Παύλου	1	taken Paul’s belt	Alternate translation: “removed Paul’s belt from Paul’s waist”
2782	ACT	21	11	nq2y	figs-quotesinquotes	τάδε λέγει τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, τὸν ἄνδρα οὗ ἐστιν ἡ ζώνη αὕτη, οὕτως δήσουσιν ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι, καὶ παραδώσουσιν εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν.	1	Thus says the Holy Spirit, ‘So the Jews in Jerusalem will bind the man who owns this belt, and they will hand him over into the hands of the Gentiles	This is a quotation within a quotation. The inner quotation can be stated as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit says that this will be how the Jews in Jerusalem will bind the man who owns this belt, and they will hand him over into the hands of the Gentiles.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2783	ACT	21	11	i8u7	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews	Here, the Jews does not mean all the Jews, but that these were the people who would do that. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” or “some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2784	ACT	21	11	zvw8		παραδώσουσιν	1	they will hand him over	Alternate translation: “they will deliver him”
2785	ACT	21	11	s92d	figs-metonymy	εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν	1	into the hands of the Gentiles	The word hands here represents control. Alternate translation: “into the legal custody of the Gentiles” or “to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2786	ACT	21	11	b59g	figs-synecdoche	ἐθνῶν	1	of the Gentiles	This stands for the authorities among the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “of the Gentile authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2787	ACT	21	12	fvh4	figs-exclusive	ἠκούσαμεν…ἡμεῖς	1		Here the word we refers to Luke and the other believers but does not include the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2788	ACT	21	13	uwt2	figs-rquestion	τί ποιεῖτε, κλαίοντες καὶ συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν?	1	What are you doing, weeping and breaking my heart?	Paul asks this question to show the believers they should stop trying to persuade him. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Stop what you are doing. Your weeping is breaking my heart!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2789	ACT	21	13	bj76	figs-metaphor	συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν	1	breaking my heart	To make someone sad or to discourage someone is spoken of as if it were a heart being broken. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2790	ACT	21	13	k34w	figs-metonymy	συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν	1		Here, heart stands for a person’s emotions. Alternate translation: “discouraging me” or “making me very sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2791	ACT	21	13	p5e5	figs-activepassive	οὐ μόνον δεθῆναι	1	not only to be bound	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “not only for them to tie me up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2792	ACT	21	13	q35x	figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	for the name of the Lord Jesus	Here, name refers to the person of Jesus. Alternate translation: “for the sake of the Lord Jesus” or “because I believe in the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2793	ACT	21	14	hwc5	figs-activepassive	μὴ πειθομένου…αὐτοῦ	1	he would not be persuaded	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Paul would not allow us to persuade him” or “we were unable to persuade Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2794	ACT	21	14	zl98	figs-ellipsis	μὴ πειθομένου	1	would not be persuaded	You may need to make explicit what they could not persuade Paul not to do. Alternate translation: “would not be persuaded not to go up to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2795	ACT	21	14	as1i	figs-activepassive	τοῦ Κυρίου τὸ θέλημα γινέσθω	1	Let the will of the Lord happen	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “May everything happen as the Lord has planned it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2796	ACT	21	15	p5fm	figs-exclusive	ἀνεβαίνομεν	1		Here the word we refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, and not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2797	ACT	21	16	k9kr		παρ’ ᾧ ξενισθῶμεν Μνάσωνί, τινι Κυπρίῳ ἀρχαίῳ μαθητῇ	1	to Mnason, a certain early disciple from Cyprus, with whom we would stay	The disciples from Caesarea knew Mnason and led Paul and Silas to his house where they would spend the night.
2798	ACT	21	16	zd9i	translate-names	Μνάσωνί…Κυπρίῳ	1	Mnason … from Cyprus	Mnason is a man from the island of Cyprus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2799	ACT	21	16	c7r2		τινι…ἀρχαίῳ μαθητῇ	1	an early disciple	This means Mnason was one of the first to believe in Jesus.
2800	ACT	21	17	wz34			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul and his companions arrive in Jerusalem.
2801	ACT	21	17	d3gj	figs-gendernotations	ἀπεδέξαντο ἡμᾶς οἱ ἀδελφοί	1	the brothers welcomed us	Here, the brothers refers to the believers in Jerusalem whether male or female. Alternate translation: “the fellow believers welcomed us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2802	ACT	21	19	bx9e		ἐξηγεῖτο καθ’ ἓν ἕκαστον	1	he reported according to each thing	Alternate translation: “he gave a detailed account of everything”
2803	ACT	21	20	zks9			0	Connecting Statement:	The elders in Jerusalem begin their response to Paul.
2804	ACT	21	20	a1hk		οἱ…ἀκούσαντες…ἐδόξαζον…εἶπόν τε αὐτῷ	1	when they heard it … they glorified … and said to him	Here each instance of the word they refers to James and the elders. The word him refers to Paul.
2805	ACT	21	20	xki4		ἀδελφέ	1	brother	Here, brother means “fellow believer.”
2806	ACT	21	20	c5pu		ὑπάρχουσιν	1	they are	The word they refers to Jewish believers who wanted all believing Jews to keep the Jewish laws and customs.
2807	ACT	21	21	pyg8	figs-explicit	κατηχήθησαν δὲ περὶ σοῦ, ὅτι ἀποστασίαν διδάσκεις ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως τοὺς κατὰ τὰ ἔθνη πάντας Ἰουδαίους, λέγων μὴ περιτέμνειν αὐτοὺς τὰ τέκνα, μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν	1	And they have been told about you, that you teach apostasy from Moses to all the Jews who are among the Gentiles, telling them not to circumcise their children, nor to walk in the customs	Apparently here there are some Jews that are distorting what Paul is teaching. He does not discourage the Jews from obeying the law of Moses. His message is that circumcision and the other customs are not necessary for Jesus to save them. You can make explicit that the leaders of the Jewish believers in Jerusalem knew that Paul was teaching God’s true message. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2808	ACT	21	21	e5s4	figs-activepassive	κατηχήθησαν	1	they have been told	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “people have told the Jewish believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2809	ACT	21	21	sdl3	figs-metonymy	ἀποστασίαν…ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως	1	apostasy from Moses	Here, Moses stands for the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “rebellion against the Law of Moses” or “to stop obeying the laws that Moses gave us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2810	ACT	21	21	knt4	figs-metaphor	μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν	1	not to walk in the customs	To obey the customs is spoken of as if the customs were a path that people could walk along. Alternate translation: “and not to obey the customs” or “and not to practice the customs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2811	ACT	21	21	u56t		τοῖς ἔθεσιν	1	in the customs	Alternate translation: “do the things that Jews normally do”
2812	ACT	21	23	b28b	figs-exclusive	λέγομεν	1		Here the word we refers to James and the elders (Acts 21:18). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2813	ACT	21	23	b22r		ἡμῖν ἄνδρες τέσσαρες, εὐχὴν ἔχοντες ἀφ’ ἑαυτῶν	1	four men with us having a vow from themselves	This was the kind of vow where a person would not drink alcohol or cut his hair until the end of a set period of time. Alternate translation: “four men who have made a promise to God”
2814	ACT	21	24	km4w	figs-explicit	τούτους παραλαβὼν, ἁγνίσθητι σὺν αὐτοῖς	1	Having taken these men, be purified with them	They had to make themselves ritually pure so they could worship in the temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2815	ACT	21	24	c3ap	figs-explicit	δαπάνησον ἐπ’ αὐτοῖς	1	pay the expenses for them	The expenses would go toward buying a male and female lamb, a ram, and grain and drink offerings. Alternate translation: “pay for what they will need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2816	ACT	21	24	abq6	translate-symaction	ξυρήσονται τὴν κεφαλήν	1	they will shave their heads	This was a sign that the person had completed what they promised God they would do. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2817	ACT	21	24	nu9v	figs-activepassive	ὧν κατήχηνται περὶ σοῦ	1	what they have been told about you	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that people are saying about you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2818	ACT	21	24	sv6i	figs-metaphor	στοιχεῖς καὶ αὐτὸς, φυλάσσων τὸν νόμον	1	you yourself walk in and obey the law	This speaks of obeying the law as if the law were a path and people can walk along it. Alternate translation: “live a life that conforms to the law of Moses and other Jewish customs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2819	ACT	21	25	c4kl	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1		Here the word we refers to James and the elders. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2820	ACT	21	25	a35u	figs-explicit	φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς, τό τε εἰδωλόθυτον, καὶ αἷμα, καὶ πνικτὸν	1	to keep themselves from things sacrificed to idols, and from blood, and from what is strangled	All of these are rules about what they can eat. They are forbidden to eat meat of animals sacrificed to idols, meat with blood still in it, and meat from a strangled animal because it would still have blood in the meat. See how you translated similar phrases in Acts 15:20. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2821	ACT	21	25	bpb5	figs-activepassive	φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς, τό τε εἰδωλόθυτον	1	to keep themselves from things sacrificed to idols	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “to stay away from the meat of an animal that someone sacrificed to an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2822	ACT	21	25	wjd2	figs-activepassive	πνικτὸν	1	from what is strangled	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “from animals that a person has strangled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2823	ACT	21	25	nu0i	figs-explicit	πνικτὸν	1		If your readers would misunderstand this phrase, you can state explicitly the assumed information that what was strangled were animals, and that the reason this was wrong is that the blood was not drained from them. Alternate translation: “from animals strangled and killed for food with the blood still in them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2824	ACT	21	26	cr14		παραλαβὼν τοὺς ἄνδρας	1	having taken the men	These are the four men who had made a vow.
2825	ACT	21	26	s8z9		σὺν αὐτοῖς ἁγνισθεὶς	1	having been purified with them	Before entering the temple area the Jews were required to be ceremonially or ritually clean. This cleansing had to do with Jews having contact with Gentiles.
2826	ACT	21	26	xu9r	figs-synecdoche	εἰσῄει εἰς τὸ ἱερόν	1	went into the temple	They did not go into the temple itself where only the high priest was allowed to enter. They entered the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “went into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2827	ACT	21	26	pvy3		τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ ἁγνισμοῦ	1	of the days of purification	This is a separate purification process from the purification process which they were required to fulfill in order to enter the temple area.
2828	ACT	21	26	gc23	figs-activepassive	ἕως οὗ προσηνέχθη…ἡ προσφορά	1	until the offering which was offered	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “until they presented the animals for an offering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2829	ACT	21	27	p4gi			0	Connecting Statement:	This begins the story of Paul’s arrest.
2830	ACT	21	27	j9zm		αἱ ἑπτὰ ἡμέραι	1	the seven days	These are the seven days for purification.
2831	ACT	21	27	k4l1	figs-synecdoche	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	in the temple	Paul was not in the temple itself. He was in the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2832	ACT	21	27	u942	figs-metaphor	συνέχεον πάντα τὸν ὄχλον	1	stirred up the whole crowd	Inciting people to become very angry at Paul is spoken of as if they stirred up the crowd’s emotions. Alternate translation: “caused a large number of people to be very angry at Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2833	ACT	21	27	mks6	figs-idiom	ἐπέβαλον ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας	1	laid their hands on him	Here, laid their hands on means to “seize” or to “grab.” See how you translated laid hands on in Acts 5:18. Alternate translation: “seized Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2834	ACT	21	28	sfg3		τοῦ λαοῦ, καὶ τοῦ νόμου, καὶ τοῦ τόπου τούτου	1	the people, and the law, and this place	Alternate translation: “the people of Israel, and the law of Moses, and the temple”
2835	ACT	21	28	jc9q	figs-explicit	ἔτι τε καὶ Ἕλληνας εἰσήγαγεν εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν	1	And besides, he has both brought Greeks into the temple	Only Jewish males were allowed in certain areas of the courtyard of the Jerusalem temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2836	ACT	21	29	t2z7	writing-background	ἦσαν γὰρ προεωρακότες Τρόφιμον τὸν Ἐφέσιον ἐν τῇ πόλει σὺν αὐτῷ, ὃν ἐνόμιζον ὅτι εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν εἰσήγαγεν ὁ Παῦλος	1	For they had previously seen Trophimus the Ephesian with him in the city, whom they thought that Paul brought into the temple	This is background information. Luke is explaining why the Jews from Asia thought Paul brought a Greek into the temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2837	ACT	21	29	h1uu		Τρόφιμον	1	Trophimus	Trophimus was a Greek man that they accused Paul of having brought into the inner temple area that was only for Jews. See how you translated his name in Acts 20:4.
2838	ACT	21	30	st3f	figs-metonymy	ἐκινήθη τε ἡ πόλις ὅλη	1		The word city represents the people in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “And the people in the city became angry at Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2839	ACT	21	30	upl8	figs-hyperbole	ἐκινήθη τε ἡ πόλις ὅλη	1	And the whole city was stirred up	The word whole here is an exaggeration for emphasis. Alternate translation: “And many people in the city became angry at Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2840	ACT	21	30	x2sx		ἐπιλαβόμενοι τοῦ Παύλου	1	having laid hold of Paul	Alternate translation: “having seized Paul” or “after they grabbed Paul”
2841	ACT	21	30	xd6r	figs-explicit	εὐθέως ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι	1	the doors were immediately shut	They shut the doors so that there would not be rioting in the temple area. Alternate translation: “the temple doors were immediately shut to protect the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2842	ACT	21	30	mmaa	figs-activepassive	εὐθέως ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews immediately shut the temple doors” or “the temple guards immediately shut the doors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2843	ACT	21	31	d6vt	figs-metonymy	ἀνέβη φάσις τῷ χιλιάρχῳ τῆς σπείρης	1	a report came up to the commander of the guard	Here, report refers to the messenger who went to speak the report. Alternate translation: “someone gave news to the commander of the guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2844	ACT	21	31	hu5r		ἀνέβη φάσις τῷ χιλιάρχῳ	1	a report came up to the commander	The phrase came up to is used because the commander was in a fortress connected to the temple that was higher in elevation than the temple courtyard.
2845	ACT	21	31	p85a		τῷ χιλιάρχῳ	1	to the commander	A Roman commander was a military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers.
2846	ACT	21	31	u65r	figs-metonymy	ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	all Jerusalem was stirred up	The word Jerusalem here represents the people of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “a lot of people in Jerusalem were stirred up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2847	ACT	21	31	zgas	figs-hyperbole	ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ	1		The word all is an exaggeration to show a large crowd was upset. Alternate translation: “a lot of people in Jerusalem were in an uproar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2848	ACT	21	32	j81t		κατέδραμεν	1		The word he refers to the chief captain of the guard mentioned in Acts 21:31.
2849	ACT	21	32	dgz5		κατέδραμεν	1	ran down	From the fortress, there are stairs going down into the court.
2850	ACT	21	32	e4rj		τὸν χιλίαρχον	1	the commander	The commander was a Roman military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers.
2851	ACT	21	33	w28u		ἐπελάβετο αὐτοῦ	1	laid hold of him	Alternate translation: “took hold of Paul” or “arrested Paul”
2852	ACT	21	33	zi4l	figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσε δεθῆναι	1	commanded him to be bound	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “commanded his soldiers to bind him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2853	ACT	21	33	xd9w		ἁλύσεσι δυσί	1	with two chains	This means they bound Paul to two Roman soldiers, one on each side of him.
2854	ACT	21	33	y6zw	figs-quotations	ἐπυνθάνετο τίς εἴη καὶ τί ἐστιν πεποιηκώς	1	he asked who he is and what it is that he had done.	You can state this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “He asked, ‘Who is this man? What has he done?’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2855	ACT	21	33	fi22		ἐπυνθάνετο τίς εἴη	1	he asked who he is	The commander is speaking to the crowd, not to Paul.
2856	ACT	21	34	k35e		αὐτοῦ…αὐτὸν	1	he	The first instance of he refers to the commander, and the second he refers to Paul.
2857	ACT	21	34	qcc6	figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσεν ἄγεσθαι αὐτὸν	1	commanded that he be brought	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he ordered his soldiers to bring Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2858	ACT	21	34	w2qj		εἰς τὴν παρεμβολήν	1	into the fortress	This fortress was connected to the outer temple court.
2859	ACT	21	35	h9n7	figs-activepassive	ὅτε δὲ ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀναβαθμούς, συνέβη βαστάζεσθαι αὐτὸν	1	But when he came to the steps, he had to be carried	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But when Paul came to the steps of the fortress, the soldiers had to carry him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2860	ACT	21	36	kax6	figs-euphemism	αἶρε αὐτόν	1	Away with him	The crowd is using somewhat milder and less exact language to ask for Paul’s death. Alternate translation: “Put him to death” or “Kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
2861	ACT	21	37	j9xk	figs-activepassive	μέλλων τε εἰσάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν παρεμβολὴν, ὁ Παῦλος	1	And as Paul was about to be brought into the fortress	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “As the soldiers were ready to bring Paul inside the fortress” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2862	ACT	21	37	qp63		τὴν παρεμβολὴν	1	the fortress	This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in Acts 21:34.
2863	ACT	21	37	inl1		τῷ χιλιάρχῳ	1	to the commander	The commander was a Roman military officer of about 600 soldiers.
2864	ACT	21	37	p5cd	figs-rquestion	Ἑλληνιστὶ γινώσκεις?	1	Do you know Greek?	The commander uses this questions to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “So you speak Greek.” or “I didn’t know you spoke Greek.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2865	ACT	21	38	xx2w	figs-rquestion	οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος, ὁ πρὸ τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν, ἀναστατώσας καὶ ἐξαγαγὼν εἰς τὴν ἔρημον τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους ἄνδρας τῶν σικαρίων?	1	Are you not then the Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the four thousand men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness?	The commander uses this question and the question “Do you speak Greek?” (verse 37) to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. This could mean: (1) as in ULT, the commander believes that even though Paul speaks Greek, Paul is the Egyptian. “Even though you speak Greek, I still think you are the Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the four thousand men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness.” (2) Because Paul speaks Greek, the commander thinks that perhaps Paul is not the Egyptian. “So you speak Greek. Perhaps I was wrong to think you were that Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the four thousand men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness.” It is best to retain the questions if the reader can infer one of the two meanings from them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2866	ACT	21	38	nxs6	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος	1	Are you not then the Egyptian	Shortly before Paul’s visit, an unnamed man from Egypt had launched a revolt against Rome in Jerusalem. Later he escaped into the wilderness and the commander wonders if Paul might be the same man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2867	ACT	21	38	tqh6	translate-numbers	τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους ἄνδρας	1	the 4,000 men	Alternate translation: “the four thousand terrorists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
2868	ACT	21	38	p2ym		τῶν σικαρίων	1	of the ‘Assassins’	This refers to a group of Jewish rebels who killed Romans and anyone who supported Romans.
2869	ACT	21	39	ys84		δέομαι…σου	1	I ask you	Alternate translation: “I beg you” or “I plead with you”
2870	ACT	21	39	a139		ἐπίτρεψόν μοι	1	allow me	Alternate translation: “please allow me” or “please permit me”
2871	ACT	21	40	qp2q	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπιτρέψαντος…αὐτοῦ	1	when he had given him permission	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word permission, you could express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “when the commander permitted him to speak” or “after the commander allowed him to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2872	ACT	21	40	a4y2		ὁ Παῦλος ἑστὼς ἐπὶ τῶν ἀναβαθμῶν	1	Paul, standing on the steps	The word steps here refers to the steps on the stairway to the fortress.
2873	ACT	21	40	rk1y	figs-explicit	κατέσεισε τῇ χειρὶ τῷ λαῷ	1	motioned with his hand to the people	It can be stated explicitly why Paul motioned with his hand. Alternate translation: “motioned with his hand for the people to be quiet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2874	ACT	21	40	xj6i		πολλῆς δὲ σιγῆς γενομένης	1	And when there was a deep silence	Alternate translation: “And when the people were completely silent”
2875	ACT	22	intro	gq5g			0		Acts 22 General Notes Structure and formatting This is the second account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: Acts 9 and Acts 26) Special concepts in this chapter “In the Hebrew language” Most Jews at this time spoke Aramaic and Greek. Most of the people who spoke Hebrew were educated Jewish scholars. This is why the people paid attention when Paul started speaking in Hebrew. “The Way” No one knows for sure who first started calling believers “followers of the Way.” This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God. Roman citizenship The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen.
2876	ACT	22	1	a8ir			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul speaks to the Jewish crowd in Jerusalem.
2877	ACT	22	1	xe46		ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες	1	brothers, and fathers	This is a polite way of addressing men who are Paul’s age as well as the older men in the audience.
2878	ACT	22	1	pe8t		ἀκούσατέ μου τῆς πρὸς ὑμᾶς νυνὶ	1	listen to my defense to you now	Alternate translation: “I will now explain to you what I have done” or “please listen as I tell you my story”
2879	ACT	22	2	kq95	writing-background		0	General Information:	This verse gives background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2880	ACT	22	2	b4sk		τῇ Ἑβραΐδι διαλέκτῳ	1	in the Hebrew language	The Hebrew language was the language of the Jews.
2881	ACT	22	3	g311	figs-activepassive	ἀνατεθραμμένος δὲ ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ, παρὰ τοὺς πόδας Γαμαλιήλ	1	but educated in this city at the feet of Gamaliel	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “but I was a student of rabbi Gamaliel here in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2882	ACT	22	3	d4dx	figs-metonymy	παρὰ τοὺς πόδας Γαμαλιήλ	1	at the feet of Gamaliel	Here, feet stands for the place where a student would sit while learning from a teacher. Alternate translation: “by Gamaliel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2883	ACT	22	3	b1dq		Γαμαλιήλ	1	of Gamaliel	Gamaliel was one of the most prominent teachers of the Jewish law. See how you translated this name in Acts 5:34.
2884	ACT	22	3	iz4g	figs-activepassive	πεπαιδευμένος κατὰ ἀκρίβειαν τοῦ πατρῴου νόμου	1	instructed according to the strict ways of the law of our fathers	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he instructed me how to carefully obey every law of our forefathers” or “the instruction I received followed the exact details of the law of our forefathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2885	ACT	22	3	lqk7		τοῦ πατρῴου νόμου	1	of the law of our fathers	This refers to the law that God gave to the people of Israel through Moses. Alternate translation: “of the law of our ancestors”
2886	ACT	22	3	a8d6		ζηλωτὴς ὑπάρχων τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	being zealous for God	Alternate translation: “I am completely dedicated to obeying God” or “I am passionate about my service to God”
2887	ACT	22	3	dbl4		καθὼς πάντες ὑμεῖς ἐστε σήμερον	1	just as all of you are today	Paul compares himself with the crowd. Alternate translation: “in the same way all of you are today”
2888	ACT	22	4	jy3z	figs-metonymy	ὃς ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν ἐδίωξα	1	I persecuted this Way	Here, this Way represents the people who belonged to the group called “the Way.” Alternate translation: “I persecuted the people who belonged to this Way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2889	ACT	22	4	bk4c		ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν	1	this Way	The term this Way was used to refer to Christianity. See how you translated the Way in Acts 9:2.
2890	ACT	22	4	dr8c	figs-abstractnouns	ἄχρι θανάτου	1	as far as death	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word death, you could express the same idea with the verb “kill” or “die.” Alternate translation: “and I looked for ways to kill them” or “to the point of killing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2891	ACT	22	4	zd2r		δεσμεύων καὶ παραδιδοὺς εἰς φυλακὰς, ἄνδρας τε καὶ γυναῖκας	1	binding and delivering to prison both men and women	Alternate translation: “tying up both men and women and taking them to prison”
2892	ACT	22	5	v2km		μαρτυρεῖ	1	testifies	Alternate translation: “can testify” or “can tell you”
2893	ACT	22	5	i45u		παρ’ ὧν καὶ ἐπιστολὰς δεξάμενος	1	from whom also having received letters	Alternate translation: “who also gave me letters”
2894	ACT	22	5	in72		πρὸς τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς, εἰς Δαμασκὸν	1	for the brothers in Damascus	Here, brothers refers to “fellow Jews.”
2895	ACT	22	5	y82b		ἄξων…τοὺς ἐκεῖσε ὄντας, δεδεμένους εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	to bring back in bonds to Jerusalem those who were there	Alternate translation: “to bind with chains those of the Way and bring them back to Jerusalem”
2896	ACT	22	5	ht9f	figs-activepassive	ἵνα τιμωρηθῶσιν	1	in order that they might be punished	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “in order that they may receive punishment” or “in order that the Jewish authorities could punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2897	ACT	22	6	pe9s			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul describes his encounter with Jesus.
2898	ACT	22	6	w4l7		ἐγένετο δέ μοι	1	It happened to me that	This phrase is used here to mark where the action starts. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
2899	ACT	22	7	d6nd	figs-synecdoche	ἤκουσα φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι	1	heard a voice saying to me	Here, voice stands for the person speaking. Alternate translation: “I heard someone say to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2900	ACT	22	9	h95h	figs-synecdoche	τὴν…φωνὴν οὐκ ἤκουσαν τοῦ λαλοῦντός μοι	1	they did not understand the voice of the one who was speaking to me	Here, voice stands for the person speaking. Alternate translation: “they did not understand what the one who spoke to me was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2901	ACT	22	10	a91a	figs-activepassive	κἀκεῖ σοι λαληθήσεται	1	and there you will be told	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “there someone will tell you” or “there you will find out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2902	ACT	22	11	n1kb		οὐκ ἐνέβλεπον ἀπὸ τῆς δόξης τοῦ φωτὸς ἐκείνου	1	I could not see because of the glory of that light	Alternate translation: “I was left blind because of that light’s brightness”
2903	ACT	22	11	qyf0	figs-activepassive	χειραγωγούμενος ὑπὸ τῶν συνόντων μοι, ἦλθον εἰς Δαμασκόν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “those with me guided me into Damascus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2904	ACT	22	11	n2n1	figs-synecdoche	χειραγωγούμενος ὑπὸ τῶν συνόντων μοι	1	being led by the hands of those who were with me, I came into Damascus	Here, hands stands for those leading Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2905	ACT	22	12	a17q	writing-participants	Ἁνανίας…τις	1		The words a certain Ananias are used to introduce Ananias as a new character in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2906	ACT	22	12	h5bh	translate-names	Ἁνανίας	1	Ananias	Though this is not the same Ananias who died earlier in Acts Acts 5:3, you may translate it the same way though as you did in Acts 5:1. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2907	ACT	22	12	z1g3		ἀνὴρ εὐλαβὴς κατὰ τὸν νόμον	1	a devout man according to the law	Ananias was very serious about following God’s law.
2908	ACT	22	12	e7uw	figs-activepassive	μαρτυρούμενος ὑπὸ πάντων τῶν κατοικούντων Ἰουδαίων	1	being testified to by all the Jews who lived there	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “having a good reputation among all the Jews who lived there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2909	ACT	22	13	un4g		Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφέ	1	Saul, brother	Here, brother is a polite way to address someone. Alternate translation: “Saul, my friend”
2910	ACT	22	13	x3kc	figs-idiom	ἀνάβλεψον	1	look up	This phrase is an idiom that means “receive your sight.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2911	ACT	22	13	se47	figs-idiom	αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ	1	that very hour	This was a customary way of saying something happened immediately. Alternate translation: “at that instant” or “instantly” or “immediately” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2912	ACT	22	13	x4s0	figs-idiom	κἀγὼ…ἀνέβλεψα εἰς αὐτόν	1	And … I looked up to him	This phrase is an idiom that means he received his sight. Alternate translation: “And … I was able to see him” or “And … I saw him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2913	ACT	22	14	v2i7		ὁ…εἶπεν	1		The wordhe refers to Ananias (Acts 22:12).
2914	ACT	22	14	k3ck			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul finishes telling what had happened to him in Damascus. He quotes what Ananias said to him. This is still part of his speech to the crowd in Jerusalem.
2915	ACT	22	14	k417		τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ	1	his will	Alternate translation: “what God is planning and will cause to happen”
2916	ACT	22	14	dg8q	figs-synecdoche	ἀκοῦσαι φωνὴν ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ	1	to hear the voice from his own mouth	Both voice and mouth refer to the one speaking. Alternate translation: “to hear him speak directly to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2917	ACT	22	15	i5q8	figs-gendernotations	πρὸς πάντας ἀνθρώπους	1	to all men	Here, men means all people whether male or female. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2918	ACT	22	16	bhg9		νῦν	1	Now	Here, now does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
2919	ACT	22	16	mmx9	figs-rquestion	τί μέλλεις?	1	why are you waiting?	This question was asked to exhort Paul to be baptized. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “do not wait!” or “do not delay!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2920	ACT	22	16	lt2i	figs-activepassive	βάπτισαι	1	be baptized	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “let me baptize you” or “receive baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2921	ACT	22	16	zr5p	figs-metaphor	ἀπόλουσαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας σου	1	wash away your sins	As washing one’s body removes dirt, calling on the name of Jesus for forgiveness cleanses one’s inner being from sin. Alternate translation: “ask forgiveness for your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2922	ACT	22	16	g5dq		ἐπικαλεσάμενος τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	having called on his name	Here, name refers to the Lord. Alternate translation: “having called on the Lord” or “trusting in the Lord”
2923	ACT	22	17	znq6			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul begins to tell the crowd about his vision of Jesus.
2924	ACT	22	17	its2		ἐγένετο δέ μοι	1	And it happened to me that	This phrase is used here to mark where the action starts. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
2925	ACT	22	17	yr9l		γενέσθαι με ἐν ἐκστάσει	1	I fell into a trance	Alternate translation: “I had a vision” or “God gave me a vision”
2926	ACT	22	18	jy2c		ἰδεῖν αὐτὸν λέγοντά μοι	1	I saw him saying to me	Alternate translation: “I saw Jesus as he said to me”
2927	ACT	22	18	qul6		οὐ παραδέξονταί σου μαρτυρίαν περὶ ἐμοῦ	1	they will not accept your testimony about me	Alternate translation: “those who live in Jerusalem will not believe what you tell them about me”
2928	ACT	22	19	q5cl		αὐτοὶ ἐπίστανται	1		Here the words they themselves refers to the non-believing Jews in Jerusalem.
2929	ACT	22	19	im4n	figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὶ ἐπίστανται	1	they themselves know	The word themselves is used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2930	ACT	22	19	da1e		κατὰ τὰς συναγωγὰς	1	according to the synagogues	Paul went to the synagogues to find Jews who believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: “in each of the synagogues” or “in every synagogue”
2931	ACT	22	20	y7t1	figs-metonymy	ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου	1	the blood of Stephen your witness was spilled	Here, blood stands for Stephen’s life. To spill blood means to kill. Alternate translation: “your witness Stephen was killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2932	ACT	22	20	udrd	figs-activepassive	ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they killed Stephen who testified about you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2933	ACT	22	22	fj9x		αὐτοῦ…αὐτὸν	1		Here both instances of the words him refer to Paul.
2934	ACT	22	22	ta8z		αἶρε ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς τὸν τοιοῦτον	1	Remove such a one from the earth	The phrase from the earth adds emphasis to “Remove such a one.” Alternate translation: “Kill him”
2935	ACT	22	23	ylr7		κραυγαζόντων τε αὐτῶν	1	And as they were shouting	The phrase as they were is used to mark two events that are happening at the same time.
2936	ACT	22	23	b6a7	translate-symaction	ῥιπτούντων τὰ ἱμάτια, καὶ κονιορτὸν βαλλόντων εἰς τὸν ἀέρα	1	throwing off their outer garments, and throwing dust into the air	These actions show that the Jews there are outraged because they feel Paul has spoken against God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2937	ACT	22	24	x7zv		χιλίαρχος	1	commander	The commander was a Roman military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers.
2938	ACT	22	24	h6gp	figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσεν…εἰσάγεσθαι αὐτὸν	1	commanded him to be brought	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “ordered his soldiers to bring Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2939	ACT	22	24	sth6		τὴν παρεμβολήν	1	the fortress	This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in Acts 21:34.
2940	ACT	22	24	pz47	figs-explicit	εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν	1	commanding him to be examined by flogging	The commander wanted to torture Paul by whipping him to ensure that he was telling the truth. Alternate translation: “ordering that Paul be whipped to force him to tell the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2941	ACT	22	24	og3n	figs-activepassive	εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “ordering his soldiers to whip Paul to force him to tell the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2942	ACT	22	25	ar63		προέτειναν	1		Here the word they refers to the soldiers.
2943	ACT	22	25	st4k		τοῖς ἱμᾶσιν	1	for the whip	The whip was made from strips of leather or animal hide.
2944	ACT	22	25	yjw3	figs-rquestion	εἰ ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον, ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν μαστίζειν?	1	Is it lawful for you to whip a man who is a Roman and uncondemned?	Paul uses this question to make the centurion check the validity of having his soldiers whip Paul. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “It is not lawful for you to whip a man who is a Roman and who was not given his legal right to a trial!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2945	ACT	22	26	pca7	figs-rquestion	τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν?	1	What are you about to do?	This question is used to urge the commander to reconsider his plan to whip Paul. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should not do this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2946	ACT	22	27	pe31		αὐτῷ…ὁ	1		Here the words him and he refer to Paul.
2947	ACT	22	27	e69y	figs-go	προσελθὼν…ὁ χιλίαρχος	1	having come, the commander	Here, come can be translated as “gone.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2948	ACT	22	28	dr2w		ἐγὼ πολλοῦ κεφαλαίου τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην	1	I bought this citizenship with a large amount of money	The captain may be making this statement because he knows how hard it is to become a Roman citizen, and he suspects Paul is not telling truth. Alternate translation: “I paid a lot of money to the Roman authorities to become a citizen of Rome”
2949	ACT	22	28	r79c	figs-abstractnouns	ἐγὼ…τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην	1	I bought this citizenship	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word citizenship, you could express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “I became a citizen by paying for it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2950	ACT	22	28	rly1		ἐγὼ δὲ καὶ γεγέννημαι	1	I, however, was indeed born as one	If a father is a Roman citizen, then his children become Roman citizens automatically when they are born. Paul’s father was a Roman. Alternate translation: “But I am a citizen by birth!”
2951	ACT	22	29	ii8p		οἱ μέλλοντες…ἀνετάζειν	1	those who were about to examine	Alternate translation: “the men who planned to examine” or “the men who were preparing to question”
2952	ACT	22	30	g33i		κατηγορεῖται…ἔλυσεν αὐτόν…ἔστησεν	1		Here the first occurrence of the word he refers to Paul, and the second and third occurrences refer to the chief captain. Both occurrences of the word him refer to Paul.
2953	ACT	22	30	kx58		ἔλυσεν αὐτόν	1	he released him	Alternate translation: “the commander ordered his soldiers to untie Paul’s bonds”
2954	ACT	22	30	c5ia		καταγαγὼν τὸν Παῦλον	1	having brought down Paul	From the fortress, there is a stairway going down to the temple courts.
2955	ACT	23	intro	gbw5			0		Acts 23 General Notes Structure and formatting Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 23:5. Special concepts in this chapter Resurrection of the dead The Pharisees believed that after people died, they would become alive again and God would either reward them or punish them. The Sadducees believed that once people died, they stayed dead and would never become alive again. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/raise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]]) “Called a curse” Some Jews promised God that they would not eat or drink until they killed Paul, and they asked God to punish them if they did not do what they had promised to do. Roman citizenship The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen. Important figures of speech in this chapter Whitewash This is a common metaphor in Scripture for appearing to be good or clean or righteous when one is evil or unclean or unrighteous. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2956	ACT	23	1	z2sq			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul stands before the chief priests and the council members (Acts 22:30).
2957	ACT	23	1	jru4		ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Here, brothers means “fellow Jews.”
2958	ACT	23	1	nn2q		ἐγὼ πάσῃ συνειδήσει ἀγαθῇ πεπολίτευμαι τῷ Θεῷ ἄχρι ταύτης τῆς ἡμέρας	1	I have lived as a citizen before God in all good conscience until this day	Alternate translation: “I know that even to this day I have done what God has wanted me to do as a Jewish man”
2959	ACT	23	2	yz4n	translate-names	Ἁνανίας	1	Ananias	Ananias is the name of a man. Though this is the same name, this not the same Ananias as in Acts 5:1 nor the same Ananias as in Acts 9:10. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2960	ACT	23	3	igq4	figs-metaphor	τοῖχε κεκονιαμένε	1	you whitewashed wall	This refers to a wall that was painted white to make it look clean. Paul told Ananias that just as a wall can be painted to look clean, so Ananias appeared to look morally clean, but he was really full of evil intent. Alternate translation: “you wall painted white” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2961	ACT	23	3	un7g	figs-rquestion	σὺ κάθῃ κρίνων με κατὰ τὸν νόμον, καὶ παρανομῶν κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι?	1	do you sit judging me by the law, yet command me to be struck, against the law?	Paul uses a question to point out Ananias’ hypocrisy. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “you sit there to judge me by the law, yet you command me to be struck against the law.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2962	ACT	23	3	m6nb	figs-activepassive	κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι	1	command me to be struck	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. You can use the same word for strike as you did in the phrase “God will strike you.” Alternate translation: “command people to strike me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2963	ACT	23	4	lkh8	figs-rquestion	τὸν ἀρχιερέα τοῦ Θεοῦ λοιδορεῖς?	1	Are you insulting the high priest of God?	The men use this question to scold Paul for what he has said in Acts 23:3. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should not insult God’s high priest!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2964	ACT	23	5	e8lg	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται γὰρ	1	For it is written	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “For Moses wrote in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2965	ACT	23	5	veqe		ἄρχοντα τοῦ λαοῦ σου, οὐκ ἐρεῖς κακῶς	1		Paul quotes from the writings of Moses.
2966	ACT	23	6	pbe1		ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Here, brothers means “fellow Jews.”
2967	ACT	23	6	as3f		υἱὸς Φαρισαίων	1	a son of Pharisees	Here, son means he is the literal son of a Pharisee and also the descendant of Pharisees. Alternate translation: “and my father and forefathers were Pharisees”
2968	ACT	23	6	ys5k	figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ κρίνομαι	1	I am being judged	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “you are judging me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2969	ACT	23	6	iz18	figs-abstractnouns	περὶ ἐλπίδος καὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν	1	concerning the hope and resurrection of the dead	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you can express the idea as “come back to life.” Alternate translation: “because I have confidence that the dead will come back to life again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2970	ACT	23	6	dchr	figs-nominaladj	περὶ ἐλπίδος καὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν	1		If your language does not use the nominal adjective dead, you can be express it as “those who have died.” Alternate translation: “I have confidence that those who have died will come back to life again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2971	ACT	23	7	abs3		ἐσχίσθη τὸ πλῆθος	1	the crowd was divided	Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd strongly disagreed with one another”
2972	ACT	23	8	gl1s	writing-background	Σαδδουκαῖοι μὲν γὰρ λέγουσιν μὴ εἶναι ἀνάστασιν, μήτε ἄγγελον, μήτε πνεῦμα; Φαρισαῖοι δὲ ὁμολογοῦσιν τὰ ἀμφότερα	1	For the Sadducees … but the Pharisees	This is background information about the Sadducees and Pharisees. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2973	ACT	23	9	eaf1		ἐγένετο δὲ κραυγὴ μεγάλη	1	So a large uproar occurred	The word so marks an event that happened because of something else that happened previously. In this case, the previous event is Paul’s stating his belief in the resurrection. Alternate translation: “So they began shouting loudly at one another”
2974	ACT	23	9	ayr8	figs-hypo	εἰ…πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος	1	what if a spirit has spoken to him, or an angel?	The Pharisees are rebuking the Sadducees by affirming that spirits and angels do exist and can speak to people. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “perhaps a spirit or an angel has spoken to him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
2975	ACT	23	10	dr1d	figs-abstractnouns	πολλῆς δὲ γινομένης στάσεως	1	And when a great argument happened	The phrase a great argument can be re-stated as “to argue violently.” Alternate translation: “And when they began to argue violently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2976	ACT	23	10	s65i		χιλίαρχος	1	commander	The commander was a Roman military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers.
2977	ACT	23	10	f568	figs-activepassive	διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν	1	that Paul would be torn to pieces by them	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that they might tear Paul to pieces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2978	ACT	23	10	tqhu	figs-hyperbole	διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν	1		The phrase be torn to pieces might be an exaggeration of how the people might harm Paul. Alternate translation: “that they would cause Paul great physical harm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2979	ACT	23	10	man3		ἁρπάσαι αὐτὸν	1	to seize him by force	Alternate translation: “to use physical force to take him away”
2980	ACT	23	10	ap3c		εἰς τὴν παρεμβολήν	1	into the fortress	This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in Acts 21:34.
2981	ACT	23	11	i9w5		τῇ…ἐπιούσῃ νυκτὶ	1	the following night	This means the night after the day Paul went before the council. Alternate translation: “that night”
2982	ACT	23	11	r4q4	figs-ellipsis	εἰς Ῥώμην μαρτυρῆσαι	1	to testify in Rome	The words “about me” are understood. Alternate translation: “to bear witness about me in Rome” or “to testify about me in Rome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2983	ACT	23	12	fm3y			0	Connecting Statement:	While Paul was in the prison at the fortress, the disbelieving religious Jews vow to kill him.
2984	ACT	23	12	klb4		ποιήσαντες συστροφὴν	1	having formed a conspiracy	They formed this conspiracy for the purpose of killing Paul. Alternate translation: “having organized a group with a shared purpose”
2985	ACT	23	12	g3sj	figs-explicit	ἀνεθεμάτισαν ἑαυτοὺς	1	cursed themselves	It can be made explicit what would cause them to be cursed. Alternate translation: “asked God to curse them if they did not do what they promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2986	ACT	23	13	f1u2	translate-numbers	τεσσεράκοντα οἱ	1	40 who	Alternate translation: “forty men who had become part of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
2987	ACT	23	13	u5s5		οἱ ταύτην τὴν συνωμοσίαν ποιησάμενοι	1	who had formed this conspiracy	Alternate translation: “who had made this plan” or “who planned to kill Paul”
2988	ACT	23	14	zb6w		οἵτινες	1		Here the word They refers to the forty Jews in Acts 23:13.
2989	ACT	23	14	ur73	figs-metaphor	ἀναθέματι ἀνεθεματίσαμεν ἑαυτοὺς, μηδενὸς γεύσασθαι ἕως οὗ ἀποκτείνωμεν τὸν Παῦλον	1	We have cursed ourselves with a curse, to eat nothing until we have killed Paul	To make a vow and to ask God to curse them if they do not fulfill their vow is spoken of as if the curse were an object that they carry on their shoulders. Alternate translation: “We have sworn to eat nothing until we have killed Paul. We asked God to curse us if we do not do what we promised to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2990	ACT	23	15	tuao	figs-you	ὑμεῖς…ὑμᾶς…μέλλοντας	1		All instances of you are plural and refers to the chief priests and elders. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
2991	ACT	23	15	u8xm	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1		Here, we refers to the forty Jews who planned to kill Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2992	ACT	23	15	w418		νῦν οὖν	1	Now, therefore	Alternate translation: “Because what we have just said is true” or “Because we have put ourselves under this curse”
2993	ACT	23	15	q9e6		νῦν	1	Now	Here, Now does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
2994	ACT	23	15	q9mb		καταγάγῃ αὐτὸν εἰς ὑμᾶς	1	he will bring him down to you	Alternate translation: “the commander will bring Paul from the fortress to meet with you”
2995	ACT	23	15	m133		ὡς μέλλοντας διαγινώσκειν ἀκριβέστερον τὰ περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	as if you are going to examine more seriously the things concerning him	Alternate translation: “as though you want to learn more about what Paul has done”
2996	ACT	23	16	w6fe		ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀδελφῆς Παύλου	1	the son of the sister of Paul	Alternate translation: “the son of Paul’s sister” or “Paul’s nephew”
2997	ACT	23	16	pj5h		ἀκούσας…τὴν ἐνέδραν	1	having heard of the ambush	Alternate translation: “hearing that they were ready to ambush Paul” or “finding out that they were waiting to kill Paul”
2998	ACT	23	16	a5hx		τὴν παρεμβολὴν	1	the fortress	This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in Acts 21:34.
2999	ACT	23	17	d7cy		ἔχει…αὐτῷ	1		Here the word he refers to Paul’s nephew. The word him refers to the chief captain.
3000	ACT	23	18	abd0		ὁ μὲν οὖν παραλαβὼν αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν	1	So having taken him, he brought him	Alternate translation: “So taking the young man, the centurion brought him”
3001	ACT	23	18	lzf3		ὁ δέσμιος, Παῦλος, προσκαλεσάμενός με	1	The prisoner, Paul, having summoned me	Alternate translation: “The prisoner named Paul after he asked me to come talk with him”
3002	ACT	23	18	ju2b		τοῦτον τὸν νεανίαν	1	this young man	Since the chief captain calls him a young man, this suggests Paul’s nephew may have been 12 to 15 years old.
3003	ACT	23	20	uv6r	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι συνέθεντο	1	The Jews have agreed	Here, the Jews does not mean all Jews, but all of the group that was there. Alternate translation: “Some of the Jews have agreed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3004	ACT	23	20	wp5d		Παῦλον καταγάγῃς	1	you might bring Paul down	Alternate translation: “you would bring Paul down from the fortress”
3005	ACT	23	20	fev5		ὡς μέλλων τι ἀκριβέστερον πυνθάνεσθαι περὶ αὐτοῦ.	1	as if they were going to inquire something more concerning him	Alternate translation: “pretending they want to learn more about what Paul has done”
3006	ACT	23	21	i2k9		ἐνεδρεύουσιν…αὐτὸν	1	lie in wait for him	Alternate translation: “are ready to ambush Paul” or “are waiting to kill Paul”
3007	ACT	23	21	r695		οἵτινες ἀνεθεμάτισαν ἑαυτοὺς μήτε φαγεῖν μήτε πιεῖν, ἕως οὗ ἀνέλωσιν αὐτόν	1	who have cursed themselves neither to eat nor to drink until they have killed him	Alternate translation: “who have sworn to eat or drink nothing until they have killed Paul. And they asked God to curse them if they do not do what they promised to do”
3008	ACT	23	23	wk7k		προσκαλεσάμενός	1	having summoned	Alternate translation: “having called to himself”
3009	ACT	23	23	mgi9	translate-numbers	δεξιολάβους διακοσίους	1	200 spearmen	Alternate translation: “two hundred soldiers that are armed with spears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
3010	ACT	23	23	kg8s		τρίτης ὥρας τῆς νυκτός	1	third hour of the night	This was about 9:00 PM.
3011	ACT	23	24	av3h		Φήλικα τὸν ἡγεμόνα	1		Felix, who resided at Caesarea, was the Roman governor of the area.
3012	ACT	23	25	vg8x			0	General Information:	The chief captain writes a letter to Governor Felix about the arrest of Paul.
3013	ACT	23	26	vg8y	translate-names	Κλαύδιος Λυσίας…Φήλικι	1		Claudius Lysias is the name of the chief captain. Governor Felix was the Roman governor over the whole region. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3014	ACT	23	26	zf93	figs-123person	Κλαύδιος Λυσίας, τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι, χαίρειν	1	Claudius Lysias to the most excellent Governor Felix, greetings	This is a formal introduction to the letter. The commander begins by referring to himself. You can translate it in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, Claudius Lysias, to the most excellent Governor Felix. Greetings to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
3015	ACT	23	26	yk79	figs-ellipsis	Κλαύδιος Λυσίας, τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι, χαίρειν	1		The words “am writing” are understood. Alternate translation: “I, Claudius Lysias, am writing to you, the most excellent Governor Felix. Greetings to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
3016	ACT	23	26	u2ih		τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι	1	to the most excellent Governor Felix	Alternate translation: “to Governor Felix who deserves greatest honors”
3017	ACT	23	27	zr7l	figs-synecdoche	τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον συνλημφθέντα ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	This man, having been seized the Jews	Here, the Jews means “some of the Jews.” Alternate translation: “This man was seized by some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3018	ACT	23	27	yy0e	figs-activepassive	τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον συνλημφθέντα ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Some of the Jews seized this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3019	ACT	23	27	ha13	figs-activepassive	μέλλοντα ἀναιρεῖσθαι ὑπ’ αὐτῶν	1	about to be killed by them	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they were ready to kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3020	ACT	23	27	v78t		ἐπιστὰς σὺν τῷ στρατεύματι, ἐξειλάμην	1	having come with detachment of soldiers, I rescued	Alternate translation: “I with my soldiers arrived at the place where Paul and these Jews were and I rescued him”
3021	ACT	23	28	lb1a		κατήγαγον	1		Here the word I refers to Claudius Lysias, the chief captain.
3022	ACT	23	28	lb1b		ἐνεκάλουν αὐτῷ	1		The word they refers to the group of Jews who accused Paul.
3023	ACT	23	29	zt4f	figs-activepassive	ὃν εὗρον ἐνκαλούμενον περὶ ζητημάτων τοῦ νόμου αὐτῶν	1	I learned that he was being accused concerning questions of their own law	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I learned that they were accusing him about things in their own law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3024	ACT	23	29	wsh2	figs-abstractnouns	μηδὲν δὲ ἄξιον θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἔχοντα ἔγκλημα	1	but there was no accusation worthy of death or imprisonment	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words accusation, death, and imprisonment, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “but nobody accused him of anything that should cause Roman authorities to kill him or to send him to prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3025	ACT	23	30	lb1c	figs-you	σέ	1		The word you is singular and refers to Governor Felix. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
3026	ACT	23	30	i2ji	figs-activepassive	μηνυθείσης δέ μοι ἐπιβουλῆς εἰς τὸν ἄνδρα ἔσεσθαι	1	And when a plot was to be against the man was revealed to me	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And when I later learned that there was a plot to kill this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3027	ACT	23	30	pmq7			0	Connecting Statement:	The chief captain ends his letter to Governor Felix.
3028	ACT	23	31	ifs1	translate-names	τὴν Ἀντιπατρίδα	1		Antipatris was a city built by Herod in honor of his father, Antipater. It stood at a site located today in central Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3029	ACT	23	31	s9rf			0	Connecting Statement:	This ends Paul’s time under arrest in Jerusalem and begins his time of arrest in Caesarea with Governor Felix.
3030	ACT	23	31	ny4k		οἱ…οὖν στρατιῶται κατὰ τὸ διατεταγμένον αὐτοῖς	1	So the soldiers, according to what had been commanded to them	The word So marks an event that happened because of something else that happened previously. In this case, the previous event is the commander’s ordering the soldiers to escort Paul.
3031	ACT	23	31	ptv4		ἀναλαβόντες τὸν Παῦλον, ἤγαγον διὰ νυκτὸς	1	having taken Paul, brought him by night	Here, brought can be translated as “took.” Alternate translation: “they got Paul and took him at night”
3032	ACT	23	32	abd1		ὑπέστρεψαν	1	having allowed … they returned	Here, they refers to the foot soldiers who left the horsemen and returned to their fortress.
3033	ACT	23	33	abx1		οἵτινες εἰσελθόντες	1	When they had entered	Here, they refers to the horsemen who took Paul all the way to Caesarea.
3034	ACT	23	34	u44w		ἀναγνοὺς…ἐστὶν…ἀπὸ	1		Here the first he refers to Governor Felix, and the second and third occurrences of he refer to Paul.
3035	ACT	23	34	dtx1	figs-quotations	ἐπερωτήσας ἐκ ποίας ἐπαρχείας ἐστὶν	1	had asked what province he was from	You can state this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “he asked Paul, ‘What province are you from?’ When” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
3036	ACT	23	35	dwv2	figs-quotations	ἔφη	1	he said	This sentence, which begins with the words “When he learned” in verse 43, can be stated as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “Paul said, ‘I am from Cilicia.’ Then the governor said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
3037	ACT	23	35	uji1		διακούσομαί σου	1	I will hear you fully	Alternate translation: “I will listen to all you have to say”
3038	ACT	23	35	mga2		κελεύσας…φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτόν	1	having commanded him to be kept	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “having commanded soldiers to keep him” or “and commanded soldiers to restrain him”
3039	ACT	24	intro	j74u			0		Acts 24 General Notes Structure and formatting Paul told the governor that he had not done what the Jews were accusing him of doing and that the governor should not punish him for what he did do. Special concepts in this chapter Respect Both the Jewish leaders (Acts 24:2-4) and Paul (Acts 24:10) began their speeches with words that show respect to the governor. Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter Governmental leaders The words “governor,” “commander,” and “centurion” may be difficult to translate into some languages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3040	ACT	24	1	bc8k			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul is on trial in Caesarea. Tertullus presents Governor Felix with the charges against Paul.
3041	ACT	24	1	e8rp		μετὰ δὲ πέντε ἡμέρας	1	And after five days	Alternate translation: “And five days after the Roman soldiers took Paul to Caesarea”
3042	ACT	24	1	n9gu	translate-names	Ἁνανίας	1	Ananias	Ananias is the name of a man. This is not the same Ananias as in Acts 5:1 nor the same Ananias as in Acts 9:10. See how you translated this in Acts 23:1. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3043	ACT	24	1	f3vx		ῥήτορος	1	an orator	Alternate translation: Tertullus was an expert in Roman law who was there to accuse Paul in court. “a lawyer”
3044	ACT	24	1	xm6c	translate-names	Τερτύλλου τινός	1	Tertullus	Tertullus is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3045	ACT	24	1	q7wj		κατέβη	1	went there	Alternate translation: “went to Caesarea where Paul was”
3046	ACT	24	1	nq9x		τῷ ἡγεμόνι	1	to the governor	Alternate translation: “in the presence of the governor who was judge in the court”
3047	ACT	24	1	zm5e		ἐνεφάνισαν τῷ ἡγεμόνι κατὰ τοῦ Παύλου	1	appeared … against Paul	Alternate translation: “came there to argue before the governor the case that Paul had broken the law”
3048	ACT	24	2	e6zg	figs-exclusive	πολλῆς εἰρήνης τυγχάνοντες	1	We have obtained great peace	Here, we refers to the citizens under Felix. Alternate translation: “we, the people that you govern, have obtained great peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3049	ACT	24	2	qw1r	figs-you	σοῦ…σῆς	1		Here the words you and your refers to Felix, the governor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
3050	ACT	24	2	sv8c		καὶ διορθωμάτων γινομένων τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ διὰ τῆς σῆς προνοίας	1	and good reforms have happened to our nation through your foresight	Alternate translation: “and your planning has greatly improved our nation”
3051	ACT	24	3	r5jl	figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ πάσης εὐχαριστίας	1	with all thankfulness	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word thankfulness, you could express the same idea with an adjective or verb. Alternate translation: “so we are very thankful and we welcome everything that you do” or “so we thank you very much and welcome everything that you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3052	ACT	24	3	q3fj		κράτιστε Φῆλιξ	1	most excellent Felix	Felix was the Roman governor over the whole region. See how you translated a similar phrase in Acts 23:25. Alternate translation: “Governor Felix who deserves greatest honor”
3053	ACT	24	4	tyq8	figs-exclusive	μὴ…ἐνκόπτω	1		The word we refers to Ananias, certain elders, and Tertullus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3054	ACT	24	4	jww2		ἵνα δὲ μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον σε ἐνκόπτω	1	However, in order that we may not bother you any longer	This could mean: (1) “so that I will not take up too much of your time” or (2) “so that I will not tire you”
3055	ACT	24	4	xfm5		ἀκοῦσαί…ἡμῶν συντόμως, τῇ σῇ ἐπιεικείᾳ	1	to briefly listen to us in your kindness	Alternate translation: “kindly listen to my short speech”
3056	ACT	24	5	i1qs		εὑρόντες…τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον λοιμὸν	1	we have found this man to be a troublemaker	Alternate translation: “we have learned that Paul is always causing trouble”
3057	ACT	24	5	k1v1	figs-hyperbole	πᾶσι τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις τοῖς κατὰ τὴν οἰκουμένην	1	among all the Jews who are throughout the world	The word all here is probably an exaggeration used to strengthen their accusation against Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3058	ACT	24	5	zg4a	figs-explicit	πρωτοστάτην…τῆς τῶν Ναζωραίων αἱρέσεως	1	he is a leader of the sect of the Nazarenes	The phrase the sect of the Nazarenes is another name for the Christians. Alternate translation: “he leads the entire group whom people call the followers of the Nazarene” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3059	ACT	24	5	n6zb		αἱρέσεως	1	of sect	A sect is a smaller group of people within a larger group. Tertullus considers the Christians to be a small group within Judaism.
3060	ACT	24	8	ujn8	figs-you	δυνήσῃ αὐτὸς	1		Here the word you is singular and refers to Governor Felix. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
3061	ACT	24	8	e26a		ἐπιγνῶναι ὧν ἡμεῖς κατηγοροῦμεν αὐτοῦ	1	to learn of what we are accusing him	Alternate translation: “to learn that we are bringing very serious charges against him” or “to learn whether or not he is guilty of the things of which we are accusing him”
3062	ACT	24	8	xkr4			0	Connecting Statement:	Tertullus finishes presenting the charges against Paul before Governor Felix.
3063	ACT	24	9	rq5f	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews	Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders who were at Paul’s trial. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3064	ACT	24	10	ict8			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul responds to Governor Felix about the charges brought against him.
3065	ACT	24	10	s92a		νεύσαντος…τοῦ ἡγεμόνος	1	and the governor motioned	Alternate translation: “and the governor gestured”
3066	ACT	24	10	uu7a	figs-metonymy	κριτὴν τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ	1	a judge to this nation	Here, this nation refers to the people of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “a judge for the people of the Jewish nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3067	ACT	24	10	sr5t		εὐθύμως…ἀπολογοῦμαι	1	I … make my defense	Alternate translation: “I gladly explain my situation”
3068	ACT	24	12	my1c		εὗρόν	1		Here the word they refers to the Jews who were accusing Paul.
3069	ACT	24	12	wbf6		ἢ ἐπίστασιν ποιοῦντα ὄχλου	1	nor causing a rebellion of the crowd	Alternate translation: “and I did not provoke the crowd to rebel against Rome”
3070	ACT	24	14	c5xa		ὁμολογῶ…τοῦτό σοι	1	I confess this to you	Alternate translation: “I acknowledge this to you”
3071	ACT	24	14	k79p		ὅτι κατὰ τὴν Ὁδὸν	1	that according to the Way	The phrase the Way was a title used for Christianity during Paul’s time.
3072	ACT	24	14	rqu3		λέγουσιν αἵρεσιν	1	they call a sect	A sect is a smaller group of people within a larger group. Tertullus considers the Christians to be a small group within Judaism. See how you translated sect in Acts 24:5.
3073	ACT	24	14	cg73		οὕτως λατρεύω τῷ πατρῴῳ Θεῷ	1	in that way I serve the God of our fathers	Paul uses the phrase in that way to mean that he, as a believer in Jesus, serves God just as their Jewish ancestors did. He is not leading a sect or teaching something new that is opposed to their ancient religion.
3074	ACT	24	15	nv5a		καὶ αὐτοὶ	1	also these men	Here, these men refers to the Jews who are accusing Paul in court. Alternate translation: “the same as these men”
3075	ACT	24	15	qza8	figs-abstractnouns	ἀνάστασιν μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι, δικαίων τε καὶ ἀδίκων	1	that there is going to be a resurrection of both the righteous and of the unrighteous	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you could express the same idea with the verb “resurrect.” Alternate translation: “that God will resurrect all who have died, both the righteous and the unrighteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3076	ACT	24	15	x1yd	figs-nominaladj	δικαίων τε καὶ ἀδίκων	1	of both the righteous and the unrighteous	These nominal adjectives refer to righteous people and unrighteous people. AT “both of righteous people and unrighteous people” or “both of those who have done what is right and those who have done what is evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
3077	ACT	24	16	sfw4		αὐτὸς ἀσκῶ…διὰ παντός	1	I myself always strive	Alternate translation: “I myself always work hard” or “I always do my best”
3078	ACT	24	16	kcg8	figs-metonymy	ἀπρόσκοπον συνείδησιν ἔχειν πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν	1	to have a blameless conscience before God	Here, conscience refers to a person’s inner morality that chooses between right and wrong. Alternate translation: “to be blameless before God” or “to always do what is right before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3079	ACT	24	16	va3b		πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν	1	before God	Alternate translation: “in the presence of God”
3080	ACT	24	17	p92m		δὲ	1	Now	The word Now marks a shift in Paul’s argument. Here he explains the situation in Jerusalem when some of the Jews arrested him.
3081	ACT	24	17	py9v		δι’ ἐτῶν…πλειόνων	1	after many years	Alternate translation: “after many years away from Jerusalem”
3082	ACT	24	17	ryk6	figs-go	ἐλεημοσύνας ποιήσων εἰς τὸ ἔθνος μου, παρεγενόμην καὶ προσφοράς	1	I came to bring alms to my nation, and offerings	Here, I came can be translated as “I went.” Alternate translation: “I went to help my people by bringing them money as a gift to the poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
3083	ACT	24	18	pk2m		ἡγνισμένον ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	having been cleansed in the temple	Alternate translation: “in the temple after I had finished a ceremony to purify myself”
3084	ACT	24	18	x6iy	figs-explicit	οὐ μετὰ ὄχλου, οὐδὲ μετὰ θορύβου	1	not with a crowd nor with an uproar	You can state this as a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “I had not gathered a crowd nor was I trying to start a riot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3085	ACT	24	20	ag5d		αὐτοὶ	1	these	Here, these refers to the members of the council who were present in Jerusalem at Paul’s trial.
3086	ACT	24	20	hnt9		αὐτοὶ οὗτοι εἰπάτωσαν, τί εὗρον ἀδίκημα	1	let … say what wrong they found	Alternate translation: “let these men prove what I did wrong”
3087	ACT	24	21	ds1s	figs-abstractnouns	περὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν	1	concerning the resurrection of the dead	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you can express the same idea as “God brings back to life.” Alternate translation: “because I believe that God will bring back to life those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3088	ACT	24	21	d2lm	figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ κρίνομαι σήμερον ἐφ’ ὑμῶν	1	I am being judged before you today	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “you are judging me today” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3089	ACT	24	22	w1tn	translate-names	ὁ Φῆλιξ	1		Felix is the Roman governor of the area who resides at Caesarea. See how you translated this name in Acts 23:24. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3090	ACT	24	22	a87f		τῆς Ὁδοῦ	1	the Way	Here, the Way is a title for Christianity. See how you translated this in Acts 9:2.
3091	ACT	24	22	k1f7		Λυσίας	1	Lysias	Lysias is the name of the commander. See how you translated this name in Acts 23:26.
3092	ACT	24	22	z5f9		καταβῇ	1	may come down	Jerusalem was higher than Caesarea so it was normal for them to speak of coming down from Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “may come down from Jerusalem”
3093	ACT	24	22	ldi8		διαγνώσομαι τὰ καθ’ ὑμᾶς	1	I will decide the things concerning you	Alternate translation: “I will make a decision concerning these accusations against you” or “I will judge whether you are guilty”
3094	ACT	24	23	sxy2		ἔχειν…ἄνεσιν	1	to have rest	Alternate translation: “to grant Paul some freedom not otherwise granted to prisoners”
3095	ACT	24	24	wus4		μετὰ δὲ ἡμέρας τινὰς	1	But after some days	Alternate translation: “But after several days”
3096	ACT	24	24	qy9y	translate-names	Δρουσίλλῃ, τῇ ἰδίᾳ γυναικὶ	1	Drusilla his own wife	Drusilla is a woman’s name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3097	ACT	24	24	xmq5	figs-explicit	οὔσῃ Ἰουδαίᾳ	1	who was a Jewess	A Jewess refers to a female Jew. Alternate translation: “who was a Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3098	ACT	24	25	b8v1		ἔμφοβος γενόμενος, ὁ Φῆλιξ	1	Felix, having became frightened	Felix may have been frightened because he felt conviction of his sins.
3099	ACT	24	25	p8yi		τὸ νῦν ἔχον	1	Go away for now	Alternate translation: “Leave me for a while”
3100	ACT	24	26	h4v7		χρήματα δοθήσεται αὐτῷ ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου	1	money will be given to him by Paul	Felix was hoping Paul would offer him a bribe to set him free.
3101	ACT	24	26	n45p		διὸ καὶ πυκνότερον αὐτὸν μεταπεμπόμενος, ὡμίλει αὐτῷ	1	and therefore often summoning him, he was speaking to him	Alternate translation: “and so Felix often sent for Paul and spoke with Paul”
3102	ACT	24	27	ur2y	translate-names	ἔλαβεν διάδοχον ὁ Φῆλιξ Πόρκιον Φῆστον	1	Felix received a successor—Porcius Festus	Porcius Festus was the new roman governor who succeeded Felix. Alternate translation: “Porcius Festus replaced Felix as the governor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3103	ACT	24	27	p59c	figs-synecdoche	θέλων…χάριτα καταθέσθαι τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	wanted to gain favor with the Jews	Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “wanting the Jewish leaders to like him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3104	ACT	24	27	gln6		ὁ Φῆλιξ…κατέλιπε τὸν Παῦλον δεδεμένον	2	Felix left Paul imprisoned	Alternate translation: “Felix kept Paul in prison”
3105	ACT	25	intro	b6uk			0		Acts 25 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter Favor This word is used in two different ways in this chapter. When the Jewish leaders asked Festus for a favor, they were asking him to do something special for them on that day. They wanted him to do for them something that he would not usually do. When Festus “wanted to gain the favor of the Jews,” he wanted them to like him and be willing to obey him in the months and years to come. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/favor]]) Roman citizenship The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. Roman officials could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way they would treat a non-citizen.
3106	ACT	25	1	c84u		Φῆστος	1		Festus becomes the governor of Caesarea. See how you translated this name in Acts 24:27.
3107	ACT	25	1	w8h3		οὖν	1	then	The word then marks the beginning of a new event in the story.
3108	ACT	25	1	i7t9		Φῆστος…ἐπιβὰς τῇ ἐπαρχείᾳ	1	Festus … having arrived in the province	This could mean: (1) Festus arrived in the area to begin his rule or (2) Festus simply arrived in the area.
3109	ACT	25	1	zz4l		ἀνέβη εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀπὸ Καισαρείας	1	went from Caesarea up to Jerusalem	The phrase went up is used here because Jerusalem is higher in elevation than Caesarea.
3110	ACT	25	2	uj5p		παρεκάλουν αὐτὸν	1	they begged him	Here the word him refers to Festus.
3111	ACT	25	3	w8um		χάριν κατ’ αὐτοῦ	1	a favor against him	Here the word him refers to Paul.
3112	ACT	25	3	qz46		ὅπως μεταπέμψηται αὐτὸν εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	that he might summon him to Jerusalem	This means that Festus would order his soldiers to bring Paul to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “that he might order his soldiers to bring Paul to Jerusalem”
3113	ACT	25	3	pg8x		ἀνελεῖν αὐτὸν κατὰ τὴν ὁδόν	1	to kill him along the way	They were going to ambush Paul on the way to Jerusalem.
3114	ACT	25	4	v5f9	figs-quotations	Φῆστος ἀπεκρίθη, τηρεῖσθαι τὸν Παῦλον εἰς Καισάρειαν, ἑαυτὸν δὲ μέλλειν ἐν τάχει ἐκπορεύεσθαι	1	Festus answered that Paul was being held at Caesarea, and that he himself was about to go there in haste.	You can state this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “Festus said, ‘Paul is being held prisoner in Caesarea, and I myself will soon return there.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
3115	ACT	25	5	a54h		οἱ οὖν ἐν ὑμῖν, φησίν, δυνατοὶ συνκαταβάντες	1	He said, “Therefore, the leaders among you, having come down together	Alternate translation: “He said, ‘Therefore, your leaders should go to Caesarea with us and”
3116	ACT	25	5	iz98		εἴ τί ἐστιν ἐν τῷ ἀνδρὶ ἄτοπον	1	If there is something wrong with the man	Alternate translation: “If Paul has done anything wrong”
3117	ACT	25	5	nei6		κατηγορείτωσαν αὐτοῦ	1	you should accuse him	Alternate translation: “you should accuse him of violating laws” or “you should bring charges against him”
3118	ACT	25	6	fi27		διατρίψας…καταβὰς…ἐκέλευσεν…ἀχθῆναι	1		Here all occurrences of the word he and him refer to Festus.
3119	ACT	25	6	s69c		καταβὰς εἰς Καισάρειαν	1	he went down to Caesarea	Jerusalem is higher geographically than Caesarea. It was common to speak of coming down from Jerusalem.
3120	ACT	25	6	qv24	figs-metonymy	καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος	1	having sat in the judgment seat	Here, judgment seat refers to Festus’ ruling as judge over Paul’s trial. Alternate translation: “having sat upon the seat where he acted as judge” or “having sat down as judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3121	ACT	25	6	j7c5	figs-activepassive	τὸν Παῦλον ἀχθῆναι	1	Paul to be brought to him	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “his soldiers bring Paul to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3122	ACT	25	7	v4v8		παραγενομένου δὲ αὐτοῦ	1	And when he had come	Alternate translation: “And when he came and stood before Festus”
3123	ACT	25	7	e7g2	figs-metaphor	πολλὰ καὶ βαρέα αἰτιώματα καταφέροντες	1	bringing many and serious charges	Charging a person with a crime is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could bring to court. Alternate translation: “they spoke against Paul many serious things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3124	ACT	25	8	hc3w	figs-synecdoche	εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν	1	against the temple	Paul says he did not break any rules about who could enter the Jerusalem temple. Alternate translation: “against the entry rules of the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3125	ACT	25	9	b49x	figs-synecdoche	θέλων τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις χάριν καταθέσθαι	1	wanting to do a favor for the Jews	Here, the Jews means the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “wanting to please the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3126	ACT	25	9	qe8h		εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀναβὰς	1	to go up to Jerusalem	Jerusalem was higher geographically than Caesarea. It was common to speak of going up to Jerusalem.
3127	ACT	25	9	wi2d	figs-activepassive	ἐκεῖ περὶ τούτων κριθῆναι ἐπ’ ἐμοῦ	1	and to be judged there before me about these things	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “where I will judge you with regard to these charges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3128	ACT	25	10	u1ef	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος ἑστώς εἰμι, οὗ με δεῖ κρίνεσθαι	1	I stand before the judgment seat of Caesar, where it is necessary for me to be judged	The judgment seat refers to Caesar’s authority to judge Paul. Alternate translation: “I am already being judged by Roman authority, which is the only place where I should be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3129	ACT	25	10	p78y	figs-activepassive	ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος ἑστώς εἰμι, οὗ με δεῖ κρίνεσθαι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Roman authority is already judging me, and they are the only ones who should judge me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3130	ACT	25	11	el9d	figs-hypo	εἰ μὲν οὖν ἀδικῶ καὶ ἄξιον θανάτου πέπραχά τι, οὐ παραιτοῦμαι τὸ ἀποθανεῖν; εἰ δὲ οὐδέν ἐστιν ὧν οὗτοι κατηγοροῦσίν μου, οὐδείς με δύναται αὐτοῖς χαρίσασθαι	1	Therefore, if I have done wrong and have done anything worthy of death, I do not refuse to die. But if there is nothing of which they can accuse me, no one is able to hand me over to them	Paul is stating a hypothetical situation. If he were guilty, he would accept the punishment, but he knows that he is not guilty. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
3131	ACT	25	11	m49r		Καίσαρα ἐπικαλοῦμαι	1	Connecting Statement:	Paul asks to be taken before Caesar for judgment.
3132	ACT	25	11	ta55		ἄξιον θανάτου πέπραχά τι	1	have done anything worthy of death	Alternate translation: “have done some wrong that deserves the death penalty”
3133	ACT	25	11	hxr1		εἰ δὲ οὐδέν ἐστιν ὧν οὗτοι κατηγοροῦσίν μου	1	But if there is nothing of which they can accuse me	Alternate translation: “But if the charges against me are not true”
3134	ACT	25	11	hr23		οὐδείς με δύναται αὐτοῖς χαρίσασθαι	1	no one is able to hand me over to them	This could mean: (1) Festus does not have the legal authority to hand Paul over to these false accusers or (2) Paul was saying that if he has done nothing wrong, the governor should not give into the request of the Jews.
3135	ACT	25	11	b1bf		Καίσαρα ἐπικαλοῦμαι	1	I appeal to Caesar	Alternate translation: “I ask that I go before Caesar so he himself can judge me”
3136	ACT	25	12	t96z		μετὰ τοῦ συμβουλίου	1	with the council	This is not the Sanhedrin that is referred to as council throughout Acts. This is a political council in the Roman government. Alternate translation: “with his own government advisors”
3137	ACT	25	13	izu8	writing-participants	Ἀγρίππας ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ Βερνίκη	1		King Agrippa and Bernice are new people in the story. Though he ruled over only a few territories, King Agrippa is the current reigning king in Palestine. Bernice is Agrippa’s sister.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
3138	ACT	25	13	q0sv	translate-names	Ἀγρίππας ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ Βερνίκη	1		Agrippa is a man and Bernice is a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3139	ACT	25	13	c3gc		δὲ	1	Now	This word marks the beginning of a new event in the story.
3140	ACT	25	13	ukd3		ἀσπασάμενοι τὸν Φῆστον	1	paid their respects to Festus	Alternate translation: “to make a formal visit to greet Festus”
3141	ACT	25	14	ge5h			0	Connecting Statement:	Festus explains Paul’s case to King Agrippa.
3142	ACT	25	14	x8jf	figs-activepassive	ἀνήρ τὶς ἐστιν καταλελειμμένος ὑπὸ Φήλικος δέσμιος	1	There is a certain man who has been left behind by Felix, a prisoner	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “When Felix left office, he left a man in prison here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3143	ACT	25	14	z7yw		Φήλικος	1	Felix	Felix was the Roman governor of the area who resided in Caesarea. See how you translated this name in Acts 23:24.
3144	ACT	25	15	b6hx	figs-metaphor	περὶ οὗ…ἐνεφάνισαν	1	brought charges concerning him	To charge someone in court is spoken of as if it were an object that a person brings to court. Alternate translation: “spoke to me against this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3145	ACT	25	15	hyp5	figs-abstractnouns	αἰτούμενοι κατ’ αὐτοῦ καταδίκην	1	requesting a judgment against him	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word judgment, you could express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “asking me to judge him” or “requesting that I judge him to be guilty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3146	ACT	25	16	e4tk	figs-metaphor	χαρίζεσθαί τινα ἄνθρωπον	1	to hand over any man	Here, hand over represents sending someone to people who will punish or kill him. Alternate translation: “to let someone punish anyone” or “to condemn anyone to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3147	ACT	25	16	xjb4	figs-idiom	πρὶν ἢ ὁ κατηγορούμενος, κατὰ πρόσωπον ἔχοι τοὺς κατηγόρους	1	before the one who is accused may have his accusers face to face	Here, have his accusers face to face is an idiom that means to meet in person with the people who accuse him. Alternate translation: “before the person whom others have accused of a crime had met directly with those who accused him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3148	ACT	25	17	z6g2		οὖν	1	Therefore	Fetus had just said that an accused man should be able to face his accusers and make his defense. Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true”
3149	ACT	25	17	rm5z		συνελθόντων…ἐνθάδε	1	when they had come together here	Alternate translation: “when the Jewish leaders had come to meet with me here”
3150	ACT	25	17	efe2	figs-metonymy	καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος	1	having sat in the judgment seat	Here, judgment seat refers to Festus ruling over Paul’s trial as judge. Alternate translation: “having sat upon the seat to act as judge” or “having sat down as judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3151	ACT	25	17	hm6g	figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσα ἀχθῆναι τὸν ἄνδρα	1	I commanded the man to be brought in	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I ordered the soldiers to bring Paul before me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3152	ACT	25	19	d1qm		τῆς ἰδίας δεισιδαιμονίας	1	their own religion	Here, religion means the belief system people have toward life and the supernatural.
3153	ACT	25	20	y9bv	figs-activepassive	κἀκεῖ κρίνεσθαι περὶ τούτων	1	and there to be judged concerning these things	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “for me to judge him there concerning these charges” or “for a judge to decide if these charges against him are true or not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3154	ACT	25	21	ie7x	figs-activepassive	τοῦ δὲ Παύλου ἐπικαλεσαμένου τηρηθῆναι αὐτὸν εἰς τὴν τοῦ Σεβαστοῦ διάγνωσιν	1	But when Paul appealed for him to be kept for the decision of the emperor	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But when Paul insisted that he stay under Roman guard until the time when the emperor could decide his case” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3155	ACT	25	21	ceq2	figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσα τηρεῖσθαι αὐτὸν	1	I commanded him to be kept	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I ordered the soldiers to keep him in custody” or “I told the soldiers to guard him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3156	ACT	25	22	t322	writing-quotations	αὔριον, φησίν, ἀκούσῃ αὐτοῦ	1		The phrase he says can be moved to the beginning of the sentence. Alternate translation: “Festus says, ‘I will arrange for you to listen to Paul tomorrow.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
3157	ACT	25	23	y1yj		τοῦ Ἀγρίππα καὶ τῆς Βερνίκης	1		Though he ruled over only a few territories, Agrippa was the current reigning king in Palestine. Bernice was his sister. See how you translated these names in Acts 25:13.
3158	ACT	25	23	yw76		μετὰ πολλῆς φαντασίας	1	with much ceremony	Alternate translation: “with a great ceremony to honor them”
3159	ACT	25	23	ldb7		τὸ ἀκροατήριον	1	the hall	This hall was a large room where people gathered for ceremonies, trials, and other events.
3160	ACT	25	23	at4t	figs-activepassive	ἤχθη ὁ Παῦλος	1	Paul was brought in	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the soldiers brought Paul to appear before them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3161	ACT	25	24	n8qj	figs-hyperbole	ἅπαν τὸ πλῆθος τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	all the multitude of the Jews	The word all is an exaggeration used to emphasize that a great number of Jews wanted Paul to die. Alternate translation: “a great number of the Jews” or “many of the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3162	ACT	25	24	yv2q	figs-litotes	μὴ δεῖν αὐτὸν ζῆν μηκέτι	1	he ought not to live any longer	This statement is made in the negative to emphasize the positive equivalent. Alternate translation: “he should die immediately” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
3163	ACT	25	25	f6hy		αὐτοῦ δὲ τούτου ἐπικαλεσαμένου τὸν Σεβαστὸν	1	but he himself having appealed to the emperor	Alternate translation: “but because he said that he wanted the emperor to judge him”
3164	ACT	25	25	g856		τὸν Σεβαστὸν	1	to the emperor	The emperor was the ruler of the Roman empire. He ruled over many countries and provinces.
3165	ACT	25	26	fe2n	figs-you	ὑμῶν…σοῦ	1		Here the first you is plural and probably refers to “King Agrippa, and all who are present with us” in 25:24. The second you is singular and is directed only to Agrippa. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
3166	ACT	25	26	jcq2		προήγαγον αὐτὸν ἐφ’ ὑμῶν, καὶ μάλιστα ἐπὶ σοῦ, Βασιλεῦ Ἀγρίππα	1	I have him before you, and especially before you, King Agrippa	Alternate translation: “I have brought Paul to all of you, but especially to you, King Agrippa.”
3167	ACT	25	26	rhy2		ὅπως…σχῶ τι γράψω	1	so that … I might have something to write	Alternate translation: “so that … I will have something else to write” or “so that … I will know what I should write”
3168	ACT	25	27	txs6	figs-doublenegatives	ἄλογον…μοι δοκεῖ πέμποντα δέσμιον, μὴ καὶ…σημᾶναι	1	it seems unreasonable for me to send a prisoner and to not state	If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative unreasonable … not, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “it seems reasonable to me that if I send a prisoner then I should also state” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
3169	ACT	25	27	xm65		τὰς κατ’ αὐτοῦ αἰτίας	1	the charges against him	This could mean: (1) the accusations that the Jewish leaders have brought against him or (2) the charges under Roman law that apply to Paul’s case.
3170	ACT	26	intro	e2q6			0		Acts 26 General Notes Structure and formatting This is the third account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: Acts 9 and Acts 22) Paul told the King Agrippa why he had done what he had done and that the governor should not punish him for that. Special concepts in this chapter Light and darkness The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
3171	ACT	26	1	b34d			0	Connecting Statement:	Festus has brought Paul before King Agrippa. In verse 2, Paul gives his defense to King Agrippa.
3172	ACT	26	1	gz9f		Ἀγρίππας	1	Agrippa	Agrippa was the current reigning king in Palestine, though he ruled over only a few territories. See how you translated this name in Acts 25:13.
3173	ACT	26	1	wme6		ἐκτείνας τὴν χεῖρα	1	having stretched out his hand	Alternate translation: “holding out his hand” or “gesturing with his hand”
3174	ACT	26	1	vni8	figs-abstractnouns	ἀπελογεῖτο	1	made his defense	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word defense, you could express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “began to defend himself against those who were accusing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3175	ACT	26	2	ha47		ἥγημαι ἐμαυτὸν μακάριον	1	I consider myself blessed	Paul said he was blessed because he considered his appearance before Agrippa to be an opportunity to speak about the gospel.
3176	ACT	26	2	xhz1		ἀπολογεῖσθαι	1	to make my defense	Alternate translation: “to defend myself” or “to explain why I am innocent of these charges”
3177	ACT	26	2	mdq2	figs-activepassive	περὶ πάντων ὧν ἐνκαλοῦμαι ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων	1	Concerning all the things of which I am accused by the Jews	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “About the crimes that the Jews are saying that I committed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3178	ACT	26	2	cbr3	figs-synecdoche	Ἰουδαίων	1	the Jews	Here, the Jews does not mean all the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3179	ACT	26	3	kns2	figs-explicit	ζητημάτων	1	their controversies	You can make explicit what kinds of controversies Paul is speaking about. Alternate translation: “questions about religious matters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3180	ACT	26	4	t8bg	figs-hyperbole	πάντες οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	all the Jews	This is a generalization. This could mean: (1) this refers to Jews in general who knew about Paul. Alternate translation: “the Jews” or (2) this refers to Pharisees who knew Paul. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3181	ACT	26	4	x96h		ἐν τῷ ἔθνει μου	1	among my nation	This could mean: (1) among his own people, not necessarily in the geographical land of Israel or (2) in the land of Israel.
3182	ACT	26	5	y9a1		τὴν ἀκριβεστάτην αἵρεσιν τῆς ἡμετέρας θρησκείας	1	the strictest sect of our religion	Alternate translation: “a group within Judaism who live by very strict rules”
3183	ACT	26	6	s9kr		νῦν	1	Now	The word Now marks a shift from Paul discussing his past to talking about himself in the present.
3184	ACT	26	6	i9y5	figs-activepassive	ἕστηκα κρινόμενος	1	I stand here being judged	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I am here, where they are putting me on trial” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3185	ACT	26	6	r42g	figs-metaphor	ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τῆς εἰς τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν ἐπαγγελίας, γενομένης ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	because of my hope of the promise that was made to our fathers by God	This speaks about a promise as if it were something a person could look for and see. Alternate translation: “because I am waiting expectantly for God to do what he promised our forefathers he would do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3186	ACT	26	7	hnf1	figs-metonymy	εἰς ἣν τὸ δωδεκάφυλον ἡμῶν…ἐλπίζει καταντῆσαι	1	to which our 12 tribes hope to attain	The phrase our 12 tribes stands for the people in those tribes. Alternate translation: “which is also what our fellow Jews in the 12 tribes are waiting for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3187	ACT	26	7	apf2	figs-metaphor	εἰς ἣν…ἐλπίζει καταντῆσαι	1	to which … hope to attain	This speaks about a promise as if it were a destination that can be reached. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3188	ACT	26	7	kzg4	figs-merism	νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν λατρεῦον	1	serving night and day	The extremes night and day mean they “worshiped God continually.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
3189	ACT	26	7	c4lm	figs-synecdoche	ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων	1	by the Jews	Here, the Jews does not mean all the Jews. Alternate translation: “by the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3190	ACT	26	8	de83	figs-rquestion	τί ἄπιστον κρίνεται παρ’ ὑμῖν, εἰ ὁ Θεὸς νεκροὺς ἐγείρει?	1	Why is it judged unbelievable among you that God raises the dead?	Paul uses a question to challenge the Jews present. They believe God can raise the dead but do not think God brought Jesus back to life. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “None of you think it is unbelievable that God raises the dead.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3191	ACT	26	8	ukk6		νεκροὺς ἐγείρει	1	raises the dead	Here to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “makes dead people come alive again”
3192	ACT	26	9	hm33		μὲν οὖν	1	Then	Paul uses the word Then to mark another shift in his defense. He is now beginning to describe how he formerly persecuted Jesus’ people.
3193	ACT	26	9	r4df	figs-metonymy	πρὸς τὸ ὄνομα Ἰησοῦ…ἐναντία	1	opposed to the name of Jesus	The word name here stands for the teaching about the person. Alternate translation: “to stop people from teaching about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3194	ACT	26	10	nys7	figs-activepassive	ἀναιρουμένων…αὐτῶν, κατήνεγκα ψῆφον	1	when they were being put to death, I cast my vote against them	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state the phrase were being put to death in active form. Alternate translation: “I voted in agreement with the other Jewish leaders to condemn the believers to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3195	ACT	26	11	rri6		πολλάκις τιμωρῶν αὐτοὺς	1	often punishing them	This could mean: (1) Paul punished some believers many times or (2) Paul punished many different believers.
3196	ACT	26	12	us8d		ἐν οἷς	1	While doing this	Paul uses this phrase to mark another shift in his defense. He is now telling about when he saw Jesus and became his disciple.
3197	ACT	26	12	h3ic		ἐν οἷς	1	While	The word While is used to mark two events that are happening at the same time. In this case, Paul went to Damascus during the time when he persecuted Christians.
3198	ACT	26	12	ajp6		μετ’ ἐξουσίας καὶ ἐπιτροπῆς	1	with authority and a commission	Paul had written letters from the Jewish leaders, granting him authority to persecute the Jewish believers.
3199	ACT	26	14	sip5	figs-metonymy	ἤκουσα φωνὴν, λέγουσαν πρός με	1	I heard a voice speaking to me	Here, voice stands for the person speaking. Alternate translation: “I heard someone speaking to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3200	ACT	26	14	du3t		Σαοὺλ, Σαούλ, τί με διώκεις?	1	Saul, Saul, why do you persecute me?	This is a rhetorical question. The speaker is alerting Saul to what Saul is doing to him, and implying that Saul should not do that. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Saul, Saul, you are persecuting me.” or “Saul, Saul, stop persecuting me.” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
3201	ACT	26	14	zsi2	figs-metaphor	σκληρόν σοι πρὸς κέντρα λακτίζειν	1	It is hard for you to kick against a goad	For Paul to resist Jesus and to persecute believers is spoken of as if he were an ox kicking at the sharp stick that a person uses to prod (or goad) the animal. It means that Paul is only harming himself. Alternate translation: “You will only harm yourself like an ox kicking a goad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3202	ACT	26	18	fk1k	figs-metaphor	ἀνοῖξαι ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν	1	to open their eyes	Helping people to understand the truth is spoken of as if a person were literally helping someone to open their eyes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3203	ACT	26	18	gw8f	figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ σκότους εἰς φῶς	1	to turn from darkness to light	Helping someone to stop doing what is evil and to start trusting and obeying God is spoken of as if the person is literally leading someone out of a dark place into a place of light. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3204	ACT	26	18	q3h8	figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ…τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ Σατανᾶ ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν	1	to turn from … from the power of Satan to God	Helping someone to stop obeying Satan and to start obeying God is spoken of as if a person were literally turning a person and taking them from the place where Satan rules and leading him to the place where God rules. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3205	ACT	26	18	m65i	figs-abstractnouns	τοῦ λαβεῖν αὐτοὺς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν καὶ	1	for them to receive forgiveness of sins and	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word forgiveness, you could express the same idea with the verb “forgive.” Alternate translation: “so that God may forgive their sins and give them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3206	ACT	26	18	m9ve	figs-metaphor	κλῆρον	1	an inheritance	The blessings that Jesus gives to those who believe in him are spoken of as if they were an inheritance that children receive from their father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3207	ACT	26	18	c5ij	figs-metaphor	τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ	1	those who have been sanctified by faith that is in me	Jesus choosing some people to belong to him is spoken of as if he set them apart from other people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3208	ACT	26	18	bgc5		πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ	1	by faith that is in me	Here Paul finishes quoting the Lord. Alternate translation: “because they believe in me”
3209	ACT	26	19	ljx2		ὅθεν	1	Therefore	Paul had just explained what the Lord had commanded him in his vision. Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true”
3210	ACT	26	19	zv2u	figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἐγενόμην ἀπειθὴς τῇ οὐρανίῳ ὀπτασίᾳ	1	I did not disobedient to the heavenly vision	If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative not disobedient, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “I obeyed the heavenly vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
3211	ACT	26	19	sn4h	figs-metonymy	τῇ οὐρανίῳ ὀπτασίᾳ	1	to the heavenly vision	This refers to what the person in the vision told Paul. Alternate translation: “to what the person from heaven told me in the vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3212	ACT	26	20	fei4	figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν	1	to turn to God	To start trusting God is spoken of as if a person turns to start walking toward God. Alternate translation: “to trust in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3213	ACT	26	20	h1v2	figs-abstractnouns	ἄξια τῆς μετανοίας ἔργα πράσσοντας	1	doing deeds worthy of repentance	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word repentance, you could express the same idea with the verb “repented.” Alternate translation: “and start doing good deeds to show they truly have repented” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3214	ACT	26	21	tl6t	figs-synecdoche	Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews	Here, the Jews does not mean all of the Jews. Alternate translation: “some Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3215	ACT	26	22	t8f4		μικρῷ τε καὶ μεγάλῳ	1	to both small and great	Here, small and great are used together to mean “all people.” Alternate translation: “to all people, whether common or great” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism)
3216	ACT	26	22	f6py		οὐδὲν ἐκτὸς…ὧν	1	nothing other than what	You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “the same thing that”
3217	ACT	26	22	i9ki		ὧν τε οἱ προφῆται	1	what both the prophets	Paul is referring to the collective writings of the Old Testament prophets.
3218	ACT	26	23	pe9h	figs-explicit	εἰ παθητὸς ὁ Χριστός	1	that the Christ is to suffer	You can make explicit that Christ must also die. Alternate translation: “that the Christ must suffer and die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3219	ACT	26	23	p9t8		ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν	1	from the resurrection	Alternate translation: “to be brought back to life”
3220	ACT	26	23	sc5f		νεκρῶν	1	of the dead	The phrase the dead refers to the spirits of people who have died. To rise from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
3221	ACT	26	23	z2ms	figs-metaphor	φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν	1	is going to proclaim light	To tell people about how God saves people is spoken of as if a person were speaking about the light. Alternate translation: “he would proclaim the message about how God saves people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3222	ACT	26	24	dvn2		μαίνῃ	1	you are insane	Alternate translation: “you are speaking nonsense” or “you are crazy”
3223	ACT	26	24	tk27		τὰ πολλά σε γράμματα εἰς μανίαν περιτρέπει	1	your great learning is turning you to insanity	Alternate translation: “you have learned so much that it is now making you crazy”
3224	ACT	26	25	dur9	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μαίνομαι…ἀλλὰ	1	I am not insane … but	If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative not insane, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “I am sane … and” or “I am able to think well … and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
3225	ACT	26	25	a6pb		κράτιστε Φῆστε	1	most excellent Festus	Alternate translation: “Festus, who deserves highest honors”
3226	ACT	26	26	ed7y	figs-123person	ὁ βασιλεύς, πρὸς ὃν…αὐτὸν	1	the king … to him … from him	Paul is still speaking to King Agrippa, but he is referring to him in the third person. Alternate translation: “you … to you … from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
3227	ACT	26	26	cs7b		παρρησιαζόμενος λαλῶ	1	I am speaking boldly	Paul was not afraid to speak to the king about Christ. Alternate translation: “I speak with confidence”
3228	ACT	26	26	svn9	figs-activepassive	πείθομαι	1	I am persuaded that	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I am sure that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3229	ACT	26	26	xqr1	figs-litotes	λανθάνειν…αὐτὸν τι τούτων οὐ…οὐθέν; οὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο	1		Paul uses two negative phrases to emphasize that the events of Jesus’ life were well-known. Alternate translation: “he is well-aware of these things, because they were done openly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
3230	ACT	26	26	tta8	figs-activepassive	λανθάνειν…αὐτὸν τι τούτων οὐ	1	that none of this are hidden from him	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he is aware of this” or “you are aware of this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3231	ACT	26	26	v1uu	figs-activepassive	οὐ…ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο	2	this was not done in a corner	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “this has not happened in a corner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3232	ACT	26	26	i5wg	figs-metaphor	ἐν γωνίᾳ	1	in a corner	This means doing something in secret as if a person went and did something in a corner of a room where no one could see him. Alternate translation: “in a dark place” or “in secret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3233	ACT	26	27	a4a2	figs-rquestion	πιστεύεις, Βασιλεῦ Ἀγρίππα, τοῖς προφήταις?	1	Do you believe the prophets, King Agrippa?	Paul asks this question to remind Agrippa that Agrippa already believes what the prophets said about Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “You already believe what the Jewish prophets said, King Agrippa.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3234	ACT	26	28	y8qq	figs-rquestion	ἐν ὀλίγῳ με πείθεις Χριστιανὸν ποιῆσαι	1	In a short time, are you persuading me to become a Christian?	Agrippa asks this question to show Paul that he cannot convince Agrippa so easily without more proof. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Surely you do not think you can convince me so easily to believe in Jesus!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3235	ACT	26	29	k7kq	figs-metonymy	παρεκτὸς τῶν δεσμῶν τούτων	1	but without these chains	Here, these chains stands for being a prisoner. Alternate translation: “but, of course, I do no want you to be a prisoner like I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3236	ACT	26	30	k7jh		ἥ…Βερνίκη	1		Bernice was the sister of King Agrippa (Acts 25:13).
3237	ACT	26	30	u8vl		ἀνέστη τε ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ ὁ ἡγεμὼν	1	And then the king got up, and the governor	Alternate translation: “And then King Agrippa stood up, and Governor Festus”
3238	ACT	26	31	blz8	figs-abstractnouns	οὐδὲν θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἄξιον τι πράσσει ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος	1	This man is not doing anything worthy of death or of chains	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word death, you can express the same idea with the verb “die.” Alternate translation: “This man does not deserve to die or chains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3239	ACT	26	31	dwyb	figs-metonymy	οὐδὲν θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἄξιον τι πράσσει ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος	1		Here, chains stands for being in prison. Alternate translation: “This man does not deserve to die or to be in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3240	ACT	26	32	n293	figs-activepassive	ἀπολελύσθαι ἐδύνατο ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος	1	This man was able to have been released	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “This man could have gone free” or “I could have freed this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3241	ACT	27	intro	r82x			0		Acts 27 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter Sailing People who lived near the sea traveled by boat powered by the wind. During some months of the year, the wind would blow in the wrong direction or so hard that sailing was impossible. Trust Paul trusted God to bring him safely to land. He told the sailers and soldiers to trust that God would also keep them alive. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]]) Paul breaks bread Luke uses almost the same words here to describe Paul taking bread, thanking God, breaking it, and eating it that he used to describe the last supper Jesus ate with his disciples. However, your translation should not make your reader think that Paul was leading a religious celebration here.
3242	ACT	27	1	dyf5			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul, as a prisoner, begins his journey to Rome.
3243	ACT	27	1	b2yz	figs-activepassive	ὡς…ἐκρίθη	1	when it was decided	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when the king and the governor decided” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3244	ACT	27	1	yv84		εἰς τὴν Ἰταλίαν	1	to Italy	Italy was the name of the province Rome was in. See how you translated Italy in Acts 18:2.
3245	ACT	27	1	s6ny		παρεδίδουν τόν τε Παῦλον καί τινας ἑτέρους δεσμώτας, ἑκατοντάρχῃ ὀνόματι Ἰουλίῳ, σπείρης Σεβαστῆς	1	they handed over both Paul and some other prisoners to a centurion named Julius of the Augustan regiment	Alternate translation: “they put a centurion named Julius, of the Augustan regiment, in charge of Paul and some other prisoners”
3246	ACT	27	1	k52u		παρεδίδουν τόν τε Παῦλον καί τινας ἑτέρους δεσμώτας	1	they handed over both Paul and some other prisoners	This could mean: (1) they refers to the governor and the king or (2) they refers to other Roman officials.
3247	ACT	27	1	un2s	translate-names	ἑκατοντάρχῃ ὀνόματι Ἰουλίῳ	1	to a centurion named Julius	Julius is a man’s name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3248	ACT	27	1	d22f	translate-names	σπείρης Σεβαστῆς	1	of the Augustan regiment	The Augustan regiment was the name of the battalion or army from which the centurion came. Some versions translate this as “the Imperial regiment.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3249	ACT	27	2	efe4	translate-names	Ἀδραμυντηνῷ	1		Adramyttium was a city possibly located on the west coast of modern-day Turkey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3250	ACT	27	2	dnr9	figs-metonymy	ἐπιβάντες…πλοίῳ…μέλλοντι πλεῖν	1	having boarded a ship … being about to sail	Here, a ship … being about to sail stands for the crew that will sail the ship. Alternate translation: “having boarded a ship … with a crew that was about to sail” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3251	ACT	27	2	tol6	figs-exclusive	ἀνήχθημεν…ἡμῖν	1		The words we and us include the author of Acts, Paul, and the others traveling with Paul, but not the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3252	ACT	27	2	fqy2		πλοίῳ Ἀδραμυντηνῷ	1	a ship from Adramyttium	This could mean: (1) a ship that had come from Adramyttium or (2) a ship that was registered or licensed in Adramyttium.
3253	ACT	27	2	f8pf		μέλλοντι πλεῖν	1	being about to sail	Alternate translation: “going to sail soon” or “departing soon”
3254	ACT	27	2	m3ps		ἀνήχθημεν	1	we set sail	Alternate translation: “we began our journey on the sea”
3255	ACT	27	2	h3uy		Ἀριστάρχου	1	Aristarchus	Aristarchus came from Macedonia but had been working with Paul in Ephesus. See how you translated his name in Acts 19:29.
3256	ACT	27	3	r71e	figs-exclusive	κατήχθημεν	1		Here the word we refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3257	ACT	27	3	u6lt		φιλανθρώπως…ὁ Ἰούλιος τῷ Παύλῳ χρησάμενος	1	Julius having treated Paul kindly	See how you translated Julius in Acts 27:1. Alternate translation: “Julius having treated Paul with a friendly concern”
3258	ACT	27	3	rp73	figs-abstractnouns	πρὸς τοὺς φίλους πορευθέντι, ἐπιμελείας τυχεῖν	1	to go to his friends to receive their care	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word care, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “to go to his friends so they could care for him” or “to go to his friends so they could help him with whatever he needed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3259	ACT	27	4	d4hg		ἀναχθέντες, ὑπεπλεύσαμεν	1	having put to sea, we sailed under	Alternate translation: “we started sailing and went under”
3260	ACT	27	4	mjt8		ὑπεπλεύσαμεν τὴν Κύπρον	1	we sailed under Cyprus	Here, under Cyprus means they sailed along the side of that island that blocks the strong wind, so the ship was not forced off its course.
3261	ACT	27	5	g1t7		Παμφυλίαν	1	Pamphylia	Pamphylia was a province in Asia Minor. See how you translated this in Acts 2:10.
3262	ACT	27	5	y6m6	figs-explicit	κατήλθαμεν εἰς Μύρρα τῆς Λυκίας	1	we came to Myra of Lycia	You can make explicit that they got off the ship in Myra. Alternate translation: “we came to Myra, a city of Lycia, where we got off the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3263	ACT	27	5	ni2x	translate-names	εἰς Μύρρα	1	to Myra	Myra is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3264	ACT	27	5	uaf4	translate-names	τῆς Λυκίας	1	of Lycia	Lycia was a Roman province, located on the southwestern coast of modern-day Turkey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3265	ACT	27	6	j4cf	figs-explicit	εὑρὼν…πλοῖον Ἀλεξανδρῖνον, πλέον εἰς τὴν Ἰταλίαν	1	having found a ship from Alexandria sailing to Italy	It is implied that a crew would sail the ship to Italy. Alternate translation: “having found a ship that a crew had sailed from Alexandria and was about to sail to Italy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3266	ACT	27	6	fdq2	translate-names	Ἀλεξανδρῖνον	1	from Alexandria	Alexandria is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3267	ACT	27	7	zzw1	figs-explicit	δὲ…βραδυπλοοῦντες καὶ μόλις, γενόμενοι	1	And sailing slowly … and having arrived with difficulty	You can make explicit that the reason they were sailing slowly and with difficulty was because the wind was blowing against them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3268	ACT	27	7	pye5	translate-names	κατὰ τὴν Κνίδον	1	near Cnidus	Cnidus was an ancient settlement located in what today is modern-day Turkey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3269	ACT	27	7	hhf1		μὴ προσεῶντος ἡμᾶς τοῦ ἀνέμου	1	the wind no longer allowing us to go that way	Alternate translation: “with a strong wind blowing against us so we could no longer go that way”
3270	ACT	27	7	b746		ὑπεπλεύσαμεν τὴν Κρήτην	1	we sailed along Crete	Alternate translation: “we sailed along the side of Crete where there was less wind”
3271	ACT	27	7	mq4n	translate-names	κατὰ Σαλμώνην	1	opposite Salmone	Salmone is a coastal city in Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3272	ACT	27	8	p4ri	figs-explicit	μόλις…παραλεγόμενοι αὐτὴν	1	sailing along it with difficulty	You can make explicit that even though the winds were not as strong as before, they were still strong enough to make sailing difficult. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3273	ACT	27	8	a64y	translate-names	Καλοὺς Λιμένας	1	Fair Havens	Fair Havens was a port near Lasea, located on the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3274	ACT	27	8	n7re	translate-names	πόλις ἦν Λασαία	1	the city of Lasea	Lasea was a coastal city in Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3275	ACT	27	9	ea4l		ἱκανοῦ…χρόνου διαγενομένου	1	much time having passed	Because of the direction the wind was blowing, the journey from Caesarea to Fair Havens had taken more time than planned.
3276	ACT	27	9	u6x5		ὄντος ἤδη ἐπισφαλοῦς τοῦ πλοὸς, διὰ τὸ καὶ τὴν νηστείαν ἤδη παρεληλυθέναι	1	the voyage already being dangerous because even the fast had already passed	This fast took place on the Day of Atonement, which was usually either in the last part of September or the first part of October according to Western calendars. After this time, there was a higher risk of seasonal storms.
3277	ACT	27	10	p29v		θεωρῶ ὅτι μετὰ ὕβρεως καὶ πολλῆς ζημίας…μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι τὸν πλοῦν	1	I see that the voyage is about to be with injury and much loss	Alternate translation: “if we travel now, we will suffer much injury and loss”
3278	ACT	27	10	nx9c		ζημίας, οὐ μόνον τοῦ φορτίου καὶ τοῦ πλοίου, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῶν ψυχῶν ἡμῶν	1	loss, not only of the cargo and the ship, but also of our lives	Here, loss means destruction when referring to things and death when referring to people.
3279	ACT	27	10	q9xt		οὐ μόνον τοῦ φορτίου καὶ τοῦ πλοίου	1	not only of the cargo and the ship	The word cargo refers to something that a person transports from one place to another by boat. Alternate translation: “not only the ship and the goods on the ship”
3280	ACT	27	11	b1kz	figs-activepassive	ὑπὸ Παύλου λεγομένοις	1	spoken by Paul	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that Paul said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3281	ACT	27	12	l2n4	figs-activepassive	ἀνευθέτου…τοῦ λιμένος ὑπάρχοντος πρὸς παραχειμασίαν	1	the harbor being unsuitable for wintering	You can make explicit why it was not easy to stay in the harbor. Alternate translation: “because the harbor did not sufficiently protect docked ships during winter storms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3282	ACT	27	12	jmi3		λιμένος	1	harbor	A harbor is a place on the coast that is protected from wind and waves so that ships can safely stay there.
3283	ACT	27	12	k2ti	translate-names	Φοίνικα	1	Phoenix	Phoenix is a city port on the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3284	ACT	27	12	z1lf	figs-metaphor	παραχειμάσαι	1	to spend the winter there	This speaks about the season of winter as if it were a commodity that someone can spend. Alternate translation: “to stay there for the cold season” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3285	ACT	27	12	x6vl		βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον	1	looking toward the southwest and toward the northwest	This means the opening of the harbor was toward those directions. Alternate translation: “it opened to the northwest and southwest”
3286	ACT	27	12	gyd2		κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον	1	toward the southwest and toward the northwest	These directions are based on the rising and setting sun. The southwest is a little to the left of the setting sun, and northwest is a little to the right of the setting sun.
3287	ACT	27	13	xx67		ἄραντες	1	after they had weighed anchor	Here, weighed anchor means to pull the anchor out of the water. An anchor is a heavy object attached to a rope that is secured to the boat. The anchor is tossed into the water and sinks to the bottom of the sea keeping the ship from drifting about.
3288	ACT	27	14	m2xe		μετ’ οὐ πολὺ	1	not long after	Alternate translation: “after a little while”
3289	ACT	27	14	fs4z		ἄνεμος τυφωνικὸς	1	a violent wind	Alternate translation: “a very strong, dangerous wind”
3290	ACT	27	14	g1ek	translate-transliterate	ὁ καλούμενος Εὐρακύλων	1	called the northeaster	The word for northeaster in the original language is Euroclydon. You can transliterate this word for your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
3291	ACT	27	14	tz2k		ἔβαλεν κατ’ αὐτῆς	1	rushed down from it	Alternate translation: “came in from the island of Crete, and it blew strongly against our ship”
3292	ACT	27	15	fxp1		συναρπασθέντος δὲ τοῦ πλοίου, καὶ μὴ δυναμένου ἀντοφθαλμεῖν τῷ ἀνέμῳ	1	And having been seized and the ship not being able to face into the wind	Alternate translation: “And when the wind blew so strongly against the front of the ship that we could not sail against it”
3293	ACT	27	15	w1hl	figs-activepassive	ἐπιδόντες ἐφερόμεθα	1	having given way, we were driven along	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we stopped trying to sail forward, and we let the wind push us whichever way it blew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3294	ACT	27	16	c4cg		νησίον…τι ὑποδραμόντες	1	sailing under the lee of a certain island	Alternate translation: “sailing where the wind was not so strong, on the side of the island”
3295	ACT	27	16	aq56	translate-names	νησίον…τι…καλούμενον Καῦδα	1	of a certain island called Cauda	This island of Cauda was located on the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3296	ACT	27	16	h9z2		τῆς σκάφης	1	of the lifeboat	A lifeboat is a smaller boat that is sometimes pulled behind the ship, and sometimes it was brought onto the ship and tied down. The smaller boat was used for various reasons, including escaping from a sinking ship.
3297	ACT	27	17	v9ag		ἣν ἄραντες	1	Having hoisted it up	Alternate translation: “When they had lifted up the lifeboat” or “After they had pulled the lifeboat aboard the ship”
3298	ACT	27	17	tx1f		βοηθείαις ἐχρῶντο, ὑποζωννύντες τὸ πλοῖον	1	they used ropes, binding the ship	They tied ropes around the bottom of the ship so that the ship would not come apart during the storm.
3299	ACT	27	17	dvv4	translate-names	τὴν Σύρτιν	1	Syrtis	Syrtis is located on the coast of Libya, northern Africa. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3300	ACT	27	17	l8kl		χαλάσαντες τὸ σκεῦος	1	having lowered the sea anchor	A sea anchor was a sail or other object that would drag along in the water behind the ship in order to slow down the ship from going where the wind was blowing them.
3301	ACT	27	17	g7rw	figs-activepassive	ἐφέροντο	1	they were driven along	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they had to go in whatever direction the wind blew them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3302	ACT	27	18	fx4m	figs-activepassive	σφοδρῶς…χειμαζομένων ἡμῶν	1	with us being exceedingly battered by the storm	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “since the wind blew us roughly back and forth so that all of us were badly battered and bruised by the storm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3303	ACT	27	18	nd5h		ἐκβολὴν ἐποιοῦντο	1	they began the jettisoning of the cargo	Here, they is the sailors. This is done to lighten the weight of the ship in an effort to prevent the ship from sinking.
3304	ACT	27	18	ny6k		ἐκβολὴν	1	the jettisoning of the cargo	The word cargo refers to something that a person transports from one place to another by boat. See how you translated this in Acts 27:10. Alternate translation: “goods on the ship”
3305	ACT	27	19	vm2k		αὐτόχειρες τὴν σκευὴν τοῦ πλοίου ἔριψαν	1	they threw overboard the equipment of the ship with their own hands	Here, equipment refers to the sailors’ equipment needed to sail the ship: tackle, hoists, beams of wood, block and tackle, ropes, lines, sails, and the like. This indicates how desperate the situation was.
3306	ACT	27	20	if7a		μήτε δὲ ἡλίου μήτε ἄστρων ἐπιφαινόντων ἐπὶ πλείονας ἡμέρας	1	But neither sun nor stars appearing for many days	They could not see the sun and stars because of the dark storm clouds. Sailors needed to see the sun and stars in order to know where they were and what direction they were headed.
3307	ACT	27	20	p2wd		χειμῶνός…οὐκ ὀλίγου ἐπικειμένου	1	no small storm assaulting us	Alternate translation: “as the terrible storm blew us roughly back and forth”
3308	ACT	27	20	mnj5	figs-activepassive	λοιπὸν περιῃρεῖτο ἐλπὶς πᾶσα, τοῦ σῴζεσθαι ἡμᾶς	1	all remaining hope for us to be saved was taken away	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “everyone stopped believing we would survive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3309	ACT	27	21	d1le	figs-explicit	πολλῆς τε ἀσιτίας ὑπαρχούσης	1	And after being a long time without food	It is implied that neither the sailors, nor Luke, Paul, and those with them had eaten anything. Alternate translation: “And when we had gone a long time without food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3310	ACT	27	21	zns2		ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν	1	in the midst of them	Alternate translation: “in the middle of the people on the ship”
3311	ACT	27	21	bc1x		κερδῆσαί τε τὴν ὕβριν ταύτην, καὶ τὴν ζημίαν	1	and to suffer this injury and loss	Alternate translation: “and as a result to suffer this harm and loss”
3312	ACT	27	22	d95r	figs-explicit	ἀποβολὴ…ψυχῆς οὐδεμία ἔσται ἐξ ὑμῶν	1	there will be no loss of life among you	Paul is speaking to the sailors. It is implied that Paul also means that he and those with him will not die either. Alternate translation: “none of us will die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3313	ACT	27	22	djh4		πλὴν τοῦ πλοίου	1	but only of the ship	Here “loss” is implied. Alternate translation: “but the only thing that will be lost is the ship”
3314	ACT	27	24	z1j8	figs-metonymy	Καίσαρί σε δεῖ παραστῆναι	1	You must stand before Caesar	The phrase stand before Caesar refers to Paul’s going to court and letting Caesar judge him. Alternate translation: “You must stand before Caesar so he can judge you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3315	ACT	27	24	s3wv		κεχάρισταί σοι…πάντας τοὺς πλέοντας μετὰ σοῦ	1	has graciously granted to you all those who are sailing with you	Alternate translation: “has graciously decided to allow all those who are sailing with you to live”
3316	ACT	27	25	r9t8	figs-activepassive	καθ’ ὃν τρόπον λελάληταί μοι	1	according to the way it was told to me	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “just as the angel told me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3317	ACT	27	26	vmp6		εἰς νῆσον…τινα, δεῖ ἡμᾶς ἐκπεσεῖν	1	we must run aground upon some island	Alternate translation: “the ship is going to be wrecked on some island”
3318	ACT	27	27	rrm5	translate-ordinal	ὡς δὲ τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτη νὺξ ἐγένετο	1	And when the fourteenth night came	The ordinal number fourteenth can be translated as “fourteen” or “14.” Alternate translation: “After 14 days since the storm started, that night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
3319	ACT	27	27	la7u	figs-activepassive	διαφερομένων ἡμῶν	1	as we were being driven this way and that	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as the wind blew us back and forth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3320	ACT	27	27	afs6	translate-names	τῷ Ἀδρίᾳ	1	the Adriatic Sea	The Adriatic Sea is the sea between Italy and Greece. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3321	ACT	27	28	ruj1		βολίσαντες	1	taking soundings	They measured the depth of water by dropping a line with a weight tied to the end of it into the water. Alternate translation: “measuring the depth of the sea water”
3322	ACT	27	28	tq53	translate-numbers	εὗρον ὀργυιὰς εἴκοσι…εὗρον ὀργυιὰς δεκαπέντε	1	they found 20 fathoms	A “fathom” is a unit of measurement for measuring the depth of water. One fathom is about two meters. Alternate translation: “they found the water was 40 meters deep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
3323	ACT	27	29	b1qc		ἀγκύρας	1	anchors	An anchor is a heavy object attached to a rope that is secured to the boat. The anchor is tossed into the water and sinks to the bottom of the sea, keeping the ship from drifting about. See how you translated this in Acts 27:13.
3324	ACT	27	29	q4am		ἐκ πρύμνης	1	from the stern	Alternate translation: “from the back of the ship”
3325	ACT	27	30	b4wv		τὴν σκάφην	1	the lifeboat	A lifeboat is a smaller boat that is sometimes pulled behind the ship and sometime it was brought onto the ship and tied down. The smaller boat was used for various reasons, including escaping from a sinking ship. See how you translated this in Acts 27:16.
3326	ACT	27	30	rr89		ἐκ πρῴρης	1	from the bow	Alternate translation: “from the front of the ship”
3327	ACT	27	31	ez5c	figs-doublenegatives	ἐὰν μὴ οὗτοι μείνωσιν ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, ὑμεῖς σωθῆναι οὐ δύνασθε	1	Unless these men stay in the ship, you are not able to be saved	If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative unless … not able, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “These men must stay in the ship in order for you to survive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
3328	ACT	27	31	br71	figs-you	ὑμεῖς	1		Here the word you is plural and refers to the centurion and the Roman soldiers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
3329	ACT	27	31	sz8y	figs-activepassive	ὑμεῖς σωθῆναι οὐ δύνασθε	1		If your language does not use the passive form be saved in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you will not survive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3330	ACT	27	33	q3y8		ἄχρι δὲ οὗ ἡμέρα ἤμελλεν γίνεσθαι	1	And up until it was about to become daytime	Alternate translation: “And until almost sunrise”
3331	ACT	27	33	j5yg	translate-ordinal	τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτην σήμερον ἡμέραν	1	Today is the fourteenth day	The ordinal number fourteenth can be stated as “fourteen.” Alternate translation: “For 14 days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
3332	ACT	27	34	j3qx	figs-idiom	οὐδενὸς…ὑμῶν θρὶξ ἀπὸ τῆς κεφαλῆς ἀπολεῖται	1	a hair from the head of none of you will perish	This was a customary way of saying no harm would come upon them. Alternate translation: “none of you will be injured in any way in this disaster” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3333	ACT	27	35	yh7y		κλάσας	1	having broken bread	Alternate translation: “after he had torn the bread into pieces” or “tearing off a piece from the loaf of bread”
3334	ACT	27	36	zt9q	figs-activepassive	εὔθυμοι δὲ γενόμενοι πάντες, καὶ	1	And they were all encouraged and	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And this encouraged all of them and they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3335	ACT	27	37	ynq3	writing-background	ἤμεθα δὲ αἱ πᾶσαι ψυχαὶ ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, διακόσιαι ἑβδομήκοντα ἕξ	1	And in all, we were 276 souls in the ship	This is background information about the number of people on the ship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
3336	ACT	27	39	vdk2		κόλπον	1	a bay	A bay is a large area of water partly surrounded by land, but open to a larger body of water.
3337	ACT	27	39	r1bx		τὴν γῆν οὐκ ἐπεγίνωσκον	1	they did not recognize the land	Alternate translation: “they saw land but could not recognize it as any place they knew”
3338	ACT	27	40	k66v		τὰς ἀγκύρας περιελόντες, εἴων	1	having cut loose the anchors, they left them	Alternate translation: “they cut the ropes and left the anchors behind”
3339	ACT	27	40	ntr9		τῶν πηδαλίων	1	of the rudders	These rudders were large oars or pieces of wood at the back of the ship used for steering the ship.
3340	ACT	27	40	cn2w		τὸν ἀρτέμωνα	1	the foresail	A “sail” was a large piece of cloth that catches the wind to move the ship. A foresail is the said at the front of a ship that had more than one sail. Alternate translation: “the sail at the front of the ship”
3341	ACT	27	40	pa1k		κατεῖχον εἰς τὸν αἰγιαλόν	1	they headed to the beach	Alternate translation: “they steered the ship toward the beach”
3342	ACT	27	41	y22n		περιπεσόντες…εἰς τόπον διθάλασσον	1	having come to a place between two seas	Sometimes where two seas meet, the current of one can flow across the current of the other. This may cause the sand under the water to pile up making the water more shallow, and dangerous for ships.
3343	ACT	27	41	cpu5		πρῷρα	1	bow of the ship	Alternate translation: “front of the ship”
3344	ACT	27	41	v35z		ἡ…πρύμνα	2	the stern	Alternate translation: “the back of the ship”
3345	ACT	27	42	qul7		τῶν…στρατιωτῶν, βουλὴ ἐγένετο	1	the plan of the soldiers was	Alternate translation: “the soldiers were planning”
3346	ACT	27	43	s2sz		ἐκώλυσεν αὐτοὺς τοῦ βουλήματος	1	stopped their plan	Alternate translation: “kept them from doing what they planned to do”
3347	ACT	27	43	br8u		ἀπορίψαντας	1	having jumped overboard	Alternate translation: “having jumped off the ship into the water”
3348	ACT	27	44	hw7p		οὓς…ἐπὶ σανίσιν	1	some on planks	Alternate translation: “some on wooden boards”
3349	ACT	28	intro	w8yn			0		Acts 28 General Notes Structure and formatting No one knows for sure why Luke ends his history without telling what happened to Paul after he had been in Rome for two years. Special concepts in this chapter “Letters” and “brothers” The Jewish leaders were surprised that Paul wanted to speak with them, because they had received no letters from the high priest in Jerusalem telling them that Paul was coming. When the Jewish leaders spoke of “brothers,” they were referring to fellow Jews, not to Christians. Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter “He was a god” The native people believed that Paul was a god, but they did not believe that he was the one true God. We do not know why Paul did not tell the native people that he was not a god.
3350	ACT	28	1	p1bd	figs-exclusive	τότε ἐπέγνωμεν	1		Here the word we refers to Paul, the writer, and those who traveled with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3351	ACT	28	1	twx8			0	Connecting Statement:	After the shipwreck, people on the island of Malta helped Paul and everyone on the ship. They stay there for 3 months.
3352	ACT	28	1	j1yf	figs-activepassive	καὶ διασωθέντες	1	And having been brought safely through	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And when we had arrived safely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3353	ACT	28	1	f8y4	translate-names	Μελίτη ἡ νῆσος καλεῖται	1	the island was called Malta	Malta is an island located south of the modern-day island of Sicily. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3354	ACT	28	2	e7w6		οἵ…βάρβαροι	1	the native people	Alternate translation: “the local people”
3355	ACT	28	2	v8yh	figs-metaphor	παρεῖχαν οὐ τὴν τυχοῦσαν φιλανθρωπίαν ἡμῖν	1	offered to us not ordinary kindness	Being kind to someone is spoken of as if it were an object that someone offers. Alternate translation: “were especially kind to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3356	ACT	28	2	r7jy	figs-litotes	οὐ τὴν τυχοῦσαν φιλανθρωπίαν	1	not just ordinary kindness	This phrase is uses a negative to emphasize the opposite of what is said. Alternate translation: “a great deal of kindness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
3357	ACT	28	2	z9cp		ἅψαντες…πυρὰν	1	having lit a fire	Alternate translation: “when they put together twigs and branches and burned them”
3358	ACT	28	2	itw2		προσελάβοντο πάντας ἡμᾶς	1	they welcomed us all	This could mean: (1) “welcomed all of the people from the ship” or (2) “welcomed Paul and all his companions.”
3359	ACT	28	3	g4ad		ἔχιδνα ἀπὸ τῆς θέρμης ἐξελθοῦσα	1	a viper, having come out from the heat	Alternate translation: “a poisonous snake, driven from the bundle of sticks by the heat of the fire”
3360	ACT	28	3	xmx4		καθῆψε τῆς χειρὸς αὐτοῦ	1	fastened on to his hand	Alternate translation: “bit Paul’s hand and did not let go”
3361	ACT	28	4	ye7h		πάντως φονεύς ἐστιν ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος	1	This man certainly is a murderer	Alternate translation: “For sure, this man is a murderer” or “This man is truly a murderer”
3362	ACT	28	4	ma1b	figs-explicit	ἡ δίκη	1	justice	The word justice refers to the name of a god that they worshiped. Alternate translation: “the god called Justice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3363	ACT	28	5	q5i3		ἀποτινάξας τὸ θηρίον εἰς τὸ πῦρ	1	shaking off the snake into the fire	Alternate translation: “after shaking his hand so that the snake fell from his hand into the fire”
3364	ACT	28	5	asr8		ἔπαθεν οὐδὲν κακόν	1	suffered no harm	Alternate translation: “was not hurt at all”
3365	ACT	28	6	m11i		πίμπρασθαι	1	to become inflamed	This could mean: (1) his body would swell because of the snake venom or (2) he would become very hot with fever.
3366	ACT	28	6	i6i6	figs-doublenegatives	μηδὲν ἄτοπον εἰς αὐτὸν γινόμενον	1	nothing unusual happening to him	If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative nothing unusual, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “everything about him was as it should be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
3367	ACT	28	6	u81u	figs-metaphor	μεταβαλόμενοι	1	having changed their minds	To think differently about a situation is spoken of as if a person is changing his mind. Alternate translation: “thinking again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3368	ACT	28	6	cfe9	figs-quotations	ἔλεγον αὐτὸν εἶναι θεόν	1	they said that he was a god	You can state this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “they said, ‘This man must be a god.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
3369	ACT	28	6	d1rj		ἔλεγον αὐτὸν εἶναι θεόν	1	they said that he was a god	Perhaps there was a belief that someone who lived after a poisonous snake bite was divine or a god.
3370	ACT	28	7	f4sa	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς…ἐξένισεν	1		Here both instance of the word us refer to Paul, Luke, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3371	ACT	28	7	r95r		ἐν δὲ τοῖς περὶ τὸν τόπον ἐκεῖνον	1	Now in the area near that same place	Now is used to introduce a new person or event in the account.
3372	ACT	28	7	wx6t		τῷ πρώτῳ τῆς νήσου	1	of the most important man of the island	This could mean: (1) the main leader of the people or (2) someone who was the most important person on the island, perhaps because of his wealth.
3373	ACT	28	7	wh2d	translate-names	ὀνόματι Ποπλίῳ	1	named Publius	Publius is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3374	ACT	28	8	g12t	writing-background	ἐγένετο δὲ, τὸν πατέρα τοῦ Ποπλίου πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον κατακεῖσθαι	1	And it happened that the father of Publius was lying sick, having been afflicted with fever and dysentery	This is background information about Publius’ father that is important to understanding the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
3375	ACT	28	8	m154	figs-activepassive	πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον	1	having been afflicted with fever and dysentery	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “was suffering from fever and dysentery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3376	ACT	28	8	fr46		δυσεντερίῳ	1	dysentery	“Dysentery” is an infectious intestinal disease.
3377	ACT	28	8	pwk5		ἐπιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῷ	1	having placed his hands on him	Alternate translation: “having touched him with his hands”
3378	ACT	28	9	yk6u	figs-activepassive	ἐθεραπεύοντο	1	were being healed	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he healed them too” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3379	ACT	28	10	ydg4		πολλαῖς τιμαῖς ἐτίμησαν ἡμᾶς	1	honored us with many honors	Probably they honored Paul and those with him by giving them gifts.
3380	ACT	28	11	qi6e		παρακεχειμακότι ἐν τῇ νήσῳ	1	that had wintered at the island	Alternate translation: “that the crew left at the island for the cold season”
3381	ACT	28	11	cm2t		ἐν πλοίῳ…Ἀλεξανδρίνῳ	1	in an Alexandrian ship	This could mean: this refers to (1) a ship that came from Alexandria, or (2) a ship that was registered or licensed in Alexandria.
3382	ACT	28	11	jc5t	figs-explicit	Διοσκούροις	1		The Heavenly Twins refers to Castor and Pollux, the twin sons of Zeus, a Greek god. They were thought to be protectors of ships. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3383	ACT	28	12	w5c6	translate-names	Συρακούσας	1	Syracuse	Syracuse is a city on the southeast coast of the modern-day island of Sicily, just southwest of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3384	ACT	28	13	z2u4	translate-names	Ῥήγιον	1	Rhegium	Rhegium was a port city located at the southwestern tip of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3385	ACT	28	13	p633		ἐπιγενομένου νότου	1	a south wind having sprung up	Alternate translation: “when the wind began to blow from the south”
3386	ACT	28	13	tz4h	translate-names	Ποτιόλους	1	Puteoli	Puteoli is located in modern-day Naples on the west coast of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3387	ACT	28	14	m1is		οὗ εὑρόντες ἀδελφοὺς	1	Having found brothers there	Alternate translation: “When we met fellow believers there”
3388	ACT	28	14	n3tw	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοὺς	1	brothers	These brothers were followers of Jesus, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
3389	ACT	28	14	a2c5	figs-activepassive	παρεκλήθημεν	1	we were begged	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they begged us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3390	ACT	28	14	bc3j		καὶ οὕτως εἰς τὴν Ῥώμην ἤλθαμεν	1	and in this way, we came to Rome	Once Paul reached Puteoli, the rest of the journey to Rome was on land. Alternate translation: “and after we stayed seven days with them, we went to Rome” or “and so our trip ended as we arrived in Rome”
3391	ACT	28	15	k754		ἀκούσαντες, τὰ περὶ ἡμῶν	1	having heard the things about us	Alternate translation: “after they heard why we were there”
3392	ACT	28	15	m9tz	figs-metaphor	εὐχαριστήσας τῷ Θεῷ, ἔλαβε θάρσος	1	having thanked God, took courage	Here, courage is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could take. Alternate translation: “thanked God and was encouraged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3393	ACT	28	15	se8v	translate-names	Ἀππίου Φόρου…Τριῶν Ταβερνῶν	1		Forum of Appius and Three Taverns were a popular market and inn on the main highway called the Appian Way, about 50 kilometers south of the city of Rome. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3394	ACT	28	16	hf2t			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul arrives in Rome as a prisoner but with the freedom to stay in his own place. He calls the local Jews together to explain what has happened to him.
3395	ACT	28	16	fib2	figs-exclusive	εἰσήλθομεν	1		Here the word we refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3396	ACT	28	16	te8v	figs-activepassive	ἐπετράπη τῷ Παύλῳ μένειν καθ’ ἑαυτὸν	1	Paul was allowed to stay by himself	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the Roman authorities gave Paul permission to stay by himself instead of in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3397	ACT	28	17	vf7r		ἐγένετο δὲ	1	And it happened that	This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
3398	ACT	28	17	d77z		τῶν Ἰουδαίων πρώτους	1	the most important of the Jews	These were the Jewish civil or religious leaders present in Rome.
3399	ACT	28	17	e1dd		ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Here brothers means “fellow Jews.”
3400	ACT	28	17	g55i		ἐναντίον…τῷ λαῷ	1	opposed to the people	Alternate translation: “against our people” or “against the Jews”
3401	ACT	28	17	hgk4	figs-activepassive	ἐγώ…δέσμιος ἐξ Ἱεροσολύμων παρεδόθην εἰς τὰς χεῖρας τῶν Ῥωμαίων	1	I was delivered as a prisoner from Jerusalem into the hands of the Romans	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews arrested me in Jerusalem and placed me in the custody of the Roman authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3402	ACT	28	17	x3r2	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὰς χεῖρας τῶν Ῥωμαίων	1	into the hands of the Romans	Here, hands stands for power or control. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3403	ACT	28	18	fed7		τὸ μηδεμίαν αἰτίαν θανάτου ὑπάρχειν ἐν ἐμοί	1	there is no reason in me for a death penalty	Alternate translation: “I had done nothing to cause them to execute me”
3404	ACT	28	19	lr96	figs-synecdoche	τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	the Jews	Here, the Jews does not mean all of the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3405	ACT	28	19	zk8f		ἀντιλεγόντων	1	objecting	Alternate translation: “complaining about what the Roman authorities wanted to do”
3406	ACT	28	19	n6vf	figs-activepassive	ἠναγκάσθην ἐπικαλέσασθαι Καίσαρα	1	I was forced to appeal to Caesar	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I had to ask for Caesar to judge me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3407	ACT	28	19	e7gr	figs-metonymy	οὐχ ὡς τοῦ ἔθνους μου ἔχων τι κατηγορεῖν	1	not as if I have anything to accuse my nation	Here, my nation stands for the people. Alternate translation: “but it was not because I wanted to accuse the people of my nation before Caesar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3408	ACT	28	20	b1fd		τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ	1	the hope of Israel	This could mean: (1) the people of Israel confidently expect the Messiah to come or (2) the people of Israel confidently expect God to bring those who have died back to life.
3409	ACT	28	20	pgr8	figs-metonymy	τὴν ἅλυσιν ταύτην περίκειμαι	1	I am bound with this chain	Here, bound with this chain stands for being a prisoner. Alternate translation: “I am a prisoner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3410	ACT	28	20	n3s7	figs-metonymy	τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ	1	of Israel	Here, Israel stands for the people. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” or “the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3411	ACT	28	21	x5d5	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1		Here, We refers to the Jewish leaders in Rome. (See: Acts 28:17 and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3412	ACT	28	21	y4bx		οὔτε παραγενόμενός τις τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	nor have any of the brothers come	Here, brothers stands for fellow Jews. Alternate translation: “and none of our fellow Jews have come”
3413	ACT	28	22	kw1d		τῆς αἱρέσεως ταύτης	1	this sect	A sect is a smaller group within a larger group. Here it refers to those who believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “this group to which you belong”
3414	ACT	28	22	gy8t	figs-activepassive	γνωστὸν ἡμῖν ἐστιν	1	it is known to us	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3415	ACT	28	22	j12v	figs-activepassive	πανταχοῦ ἀντιλέγεται	1	it is spoken against everywhere	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “many Jews all over the Roman Empire are saying bad things about it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3416	ACT	28	23	u7pc		ταξάμενοι…οἷς…αὐτοὺς	1		Here all occurrences of the words they and them refer to the Jewish leaders in Rome.
3417	ACT	28	23	q4iv		ταξάμενοι…αὐτῷ ἡμέραν	1	when they had appointed a day for him	Alternate translation: “when they had chosen a time for him to speak to them”
3418	ACT	28	23	dg5f	figs-metonymy	διαμαρτυρόμενος τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	testifying about the kingdom of God	Here, kingdom of God stands for God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “telling them about God’s rule as king” or “telling them how God would show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3419	ACT	28	23	peu1	figs-metonymy	τῶν προφητῶν	1	from the prophets	Here, the prophets refers to what they wrote. Alternate translation: “from what the prophets wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3420	ACT	28	24	pmd6	figs-activepassive	καὶ οἱ μὲν ἐπείθοντο τοῖς λεγομένοις	1	And some were convinced about the things which he was saying	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And Paul was able to convince some of them by what he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3421	ACT	28	25	n7pm	figs-metonymy	εἰπόντος τοῦ Παύλου ῥῆμα ἓν	1	after Paul had spoken one word	Here, word stands for a message or statement. Alternate translation: “after Paul had said one more thing” or “after Paul had made this statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3422	ACT	28	25	b11n	figs-quotesinquotes	καλῶς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐλάλησεν διὰ Ἠσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν	1	The Holy Spirit spoke well through Isaiah the prophet to your fathers.	This sentence contains quotations within quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3423	ACT	28	26	t5dq		πορεύθητι πρὸς τὸν λαὸν τοῦτον, καὶ εἰπόν, ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε	1		In this verse, Paul begins to quote the prophet Isaiah.
3424	ACT	28	26	qj7q	figs-quotesinquotes	λέγων, πορεύθητι πρὸς τὸν λαὸν τοῦτον, καὶ εἰπόν, ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε	1	saying, ‘Go to this people and say, “By hearing you will hear, but you will certainly not understand; and by seeing you will see, but you will certainly not perceive	This is the end of the sentence that begins with the words “The Holy Spirit spoke” in verse 25 and that contains quotations within quotations. You can translate one of the inner quotations as an indirect quotation, or you can translate two of the inner quotations as indirect quotations. “The Holy Spirit spoke well through Isaiah the prophet to your forefathers when the Spirit told Isaiah to go tell them that they will hear but will not understand and they will see but they will not perceive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3425	ACT	28	26	pax8		ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε…βλέποντες βλέψετε	1	By hearing you will hear … by seeing you will see	The words hear and see are repeated for emphasis. Alternate translation: “When you listen you will hear … when you look you will see”
3426	ACT	28	26	s1ti	figs-parallelism	καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε…καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε	1	but you will certainly not understand … but you will certainly not perceive	Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing. They emphasize that the Jewish people will not understand God’s plan. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
3427	ACT	28	27	fz42			0	General Information:	Translate Paul’s quotation of Isaiah as a direct quotation or indirect quotation according to how you translated it in Acts 28:25-26.
3428	ACT	28	27	ts5a	figs-metaphor	ἐπαχύνθη γὰρ ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου	1	For the heart of this people has become dull	People who stubbornly refuse to understand what God is saying or doing are spoken of as if their heart is dull. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3429	ACT	28	27	ngve	figs-metonymy	ἡ καρδία	1		Here, heart is a metonym for the mind. Alternate translation: “the thinking” or “the thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3430	ACT	28	27	f5m4	figs-metaphor	τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν	1	with their ears they hardly heard, and they shut their eyes	People who stubbornly refuse to understand what God is saying or doing are spoken of as if they are unable to hear and are shutting their eyes so that they will not see. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3431	ACT	28	27	lr99	figs-metonymy	τῇ καρδίᾳ συνῶσιν	1	might understand with their heart	Here, heart stands for the mind. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3432	ACT	28	27	q8c2	figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέψωσιν	1	might turn again	To start obeying God is spoken of as though the person were physically turning toward God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3433	ACT	28	27	vb9f		ἰάσομαι αὐτούς	1	I will heal them	This does not mean God will only heal them physically. He will also heal them spiritually by forgiving their sins.
3434	ACT	28	28	b2za	figs-metaphor	τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπεστάλη τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	this salvation of God has been sent to the Gentiles	God’s message about how he saves people is spoken of as if it were an object that is sent. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3435	ACT	28	28	e8hb	figs-activepassive	τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπεστάλη τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God is sending his messengers to the Gentiles to tell them about how he will save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3436	ACT	28	28	d18n		αὐτοὶ καὶ ἀκούσονται	1	they also will listen	This response of the Gentiles is in contrast to the way the Jews of that time refused to listen to God. Alternate translation: “some of them also will listen”
3437	ACT	28	30	c56e	writing-endofstory		0	Connecting Statement:	In verses 30-31, Luke ends the story of Paul in the book of Acts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
3438	ACT	28	31	wv1l	figs-metonymy	κηρύσσων τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	proclaiming the kingdom of God	Here, kingdom of God refers to God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “preaching about God’s rule as king” or “preaching about how God will show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3439	ACT	10	1	nfy5			0	Connecting Statement:	This is the beginning of the part of the story about Cornelius.
3440	ACT	10	6	lt9n		βυρσεῖ	1	a tanner	A tanner is a person who makes leather from animal skins.